JP2022056445A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine highly interesting for a player and having novel game properties.SOLUTION: In a variable display of a special drawing pattern related to a case in which a result of one special drawing pattern lottery of a first special drawing pattern is a failure in a specific game state (high base state), normal drawing pattern lotteries can be executed at most for a maximum reserve number of second special drawing patterns. By executing a specific game state, in which reservations related to the special drawing pattern lottery of the second special drawing pattern in which a probability of execution of a big winning game or a small winning game is set higher for the maximum reserve number can be generated, highly interesting game properties are achieved. When a reservation related to the special drawing pattern lottery of the second special drawing pattern exists at an end of the specific game state or a special game state, a special game is executed with the special drawing pattern lottery of the second special drawing pattern. A notification for a player to aim for a big winning port is continuously carried out from the specific game state or the special game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that are expected to acquire a large number of gaming balls by performing one or a plurality of jackpot games based on one or more holdings that occur in a specific period (for example). , Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202561

A conventional pachinko gaming machine such as Patent Document 1 has a gaming machine specification that can be expected to acquire a large number of gaming balls, but the transition of the gaming state (game flow) is monotonous, and the pachinko game is less interesting. It was an opportunity.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine having a novel game property that is highly interesting to the player.

A game board in which a left game area where a game ball can flow down and a right game area where a game ball can flow down are formed.
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710) provided in the left game area,
A second start winning opening (for example, a second start winning device P908) provided in the right game area,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
A large winning opening (for example, large winning opening P909) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball, and
It is equipped with a main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game.
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, an easy entry state) that is advantageous to the player, and a specific game state control means.
It is equipped with a right-handed suggestion means that suggests that the game ball should be launched into the right game area by turning on a predetermined lamp.
Right-handed suggestion means
It is configured to turn on a predetermined lamp during a special game or in a specific game state.
A pachinko machine configured to be able to turn on a predetermined lamp when a hold exists in the second hold control means even in a situation where neither the special game is being executed nor the specific game state is set. Gaming machine.

It should be noted that any combination of the components according to the above invention, and the components and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media containing computer programs, data structures, and the like. However, the configurations according to the embodiments and modifications described in the embodiments for carrying out the invention are also effective as aspects of the present invention.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly interesting to the player and has a novel game property.

It is a front view of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the front direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view in the rear direction in the state where the frame member of the pachinko gaming machine is opened. It is a perspective view which shows the game board attached to the presupposed pachinko machine. It is a functional block diagram of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the transition of the gaming state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the power-on process. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the main control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning or failing lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the winning symbol lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in the low base state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern lottery table in the high base state of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the special variation pattern lottery table which is referred to for a limited period of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the power-on processing of the production control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure which shows the interrupt processing of the production control board of a pachinko gaming machine which is a premise. It is a figure showing the game effect of the symbol variation display (during the stop display of the decorative symbol) during the normal game (low probability / low base medium) of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production of the situation where the reach production with high expectation that becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is the figure which showed the game production of the state which the big hit game is executed in the presupposed pachinko game machine. It is a figure which showed the game effect during operation of the electric chew support function which is in the specific gaming state (high probability or low probability / high base) of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (hold charge production) of the specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (breakthrough zone battle production) of the specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (breakthrough zone battle victory production) of the specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (V prize promotion production) at the time of a small hit game in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (big hit type notification production) during the special game start demonstration in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example in the special game (the first big hit) in the case of shifting to a specific specific game (pseudo big hit) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example in the specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example in the special game (the second big hit) after the execution of the specific specific game (pseudo big hit) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (the first half of the battle mode) in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect example (hold charge effect (battle mode)) of the effect which is displayed with the remaining hold up to 4 times from the final change in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (battle mode final battle production) of the production which is displayed in the remaining hold up to 4 times from the final fluctuation in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement relation of the winning apparatus and the like in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine of 2nd Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbols in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production example of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment in a long-time chance state. It is a figure which shows the production example of the ordinary electric accessory opening effect in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production during the chance time of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd-2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production during the chance time of the pachinko gaming machine of 2-2 Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production during the super chance time of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2nd-2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of Nos. 2-3 Example. It is a figure which shows the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbols in the pachinko gaming machine of Nos. 2-3 Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure explaining the outline about self-powered rank-up bonus and continuous battle of the pachinko gaming machine of 3rd Example. It is a board block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine of the 4th embodiment. It is a game transition diagram of the pachinko gaming machine of the 4th embodiment. It is a time chart of the stock mode in the pachinko gaming machine of the 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the stock mode in the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Embodiment. This is an example of a table showing a change pattern of a normal symbol holding image and a display pattern of a normal symbol change fanning effect in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of a table showing the selection ratio of the normal symbol in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment and the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory for each easy-to-enter state. This is an example of a table showing the selection ratio of the winning symbols and the gaming state after the big hit in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a table showing the selection ratio of the small hit symbol in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment and the game state after the big hit. It is a time chart which shows the end timing of the easy-to-enter state in the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Embodiment. This is an example of a table showing a variation pattern of a special symbol controlled by the main control CPU and an effect pattern controlled by the sub-control CPU in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment in an easy-to-enter state. It is a transition diagram of the stock mode and the extra stock mode of the pachinko gaming machine of the 4th embodiment. This is an example of the stock completion screen of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a display screen for a battle effect during the stock mode of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a display screen for music production during the stock mode of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. This is an example of the display screen during the demonstration of the end of the big hit of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the time saving state of the 1st game state in the pachinko gaming machine of 4th Example, and the display state of the separate notification. It is a production time chart when a small hit game is won in the specific reach of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. It is a production time chart when a small hit game is won in the non-specific reach of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. This is an example of an effect display when a small hit game is won in the non-specific reach of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. It is an example of the effect display in the afterglow effect period when the small hit game is won in the specific reach of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front view of the game board (initial position of a production object) of the pachinko gaming machine of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front view of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine of 6th Embodiment (when the production object operates). It is a figure of another example which shows the front view of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine of 6th Embodiment (when the production accessory is operating). It is a figure which shows an example of the lamp step-up effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the reach effect and the ramp step-up effect (low expectation degree) of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the time chart which shows the change of the light emission mode of the lamp step-up effect (low expectation degree) of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the reach effect and the ramp step-up effect (high expectation degree) of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lamp step-up effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example (volume adjustment) of the light emission effect control using the lamp of the effect effect of the pachinko gaming machine of the modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the center decoration unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the directing operation of the superior object of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the directing operation of the side object of the pachinko gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the directing operation of the lower part of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the directing operation (second pattern) of the superior object of the pachinko gaming machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the operation of the production operation means of the pachinko gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process of the initialization / return operation process of the production movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process of the initial position return operation process of the effect movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process of the initial operation confirmation processing of the production movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state and the effect state of the pachinko gaming machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the kind of the special game of the pachinko gaming machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of the kind of the variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine of 7th Example. It is a production time chart diagram at the time of A reach (missing, small hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a production time chart diagram at the time of A reach (big hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a production time chart diagram at the time of B reach (big hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example at the timing (A) in the production time chart at the time of B reach (big hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example at the timing in the production time chart (B) at the time of B reach (big hit) of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment. This is an example of the production screen of the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the priority of the production display of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “prerequisite technology”) which is the premise of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a representative example of the pachinko gaming machine related to the prerequisite technology, the pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, and the gaming board provided in the pachinko gaming machine is shown in FIG. 4. First, refer to these figures. The machine configuration of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 will be referred to as front-back direction, left-right direction, and up-down direction, respectively.

[Machine configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine P is configured in an outer rectangular shape, and is configured in a square shape on the front surface of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the gaming facility in a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1. The front frames P2 are attached to each other so that they can be opened and closed sideways and can be attached and detached by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20) arranged on the front left edge portions of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a rectangular shape, and is assembled and held on the front surface side of the front frame P2 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10 and lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and the game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 is visible to the player through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. Has been done. Further, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are rotated in either the left-right direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko gaming machine P, depending on the rotation direction. , The outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 are unlocked, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. Then, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

At the lower part of the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball plates P340 (upper ball plate P341 and lower ball plate P342) for storing game balls are provided. Further, the glass frame P3 is provided with a production lamp P350 that emits light according to the development status of the game and a speaker P370 capable of outputting sounds such as sound effects according to the development status of the game. An effect operation unit P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3, and the effect operation unit P380 possessed by this pachinko gaming machine, which is shown as a prerequisite technology, is a push input type button P381 and a tilt operation. The lever P382 of the type is provided, and the button P381 enables the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided in the glass frame, and the operating means itself. Allows operation input when the lever is displaced upward (input permission state) (multiple operations are possible with the effect operation means of 1).

At the lower right of the front frame P2, a handle P204 for operating the launching of the game ball and adjusting the firing intensity is provided. A launching device unit P240 is further provided in the lower part of the front frame P2, and although not shown, a ball feeding mechanism P241 that sends out game balls stored in the upper ball dish P341 one by one, is sent out from this ball feeding mechanism. A launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (a hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) that launches a game ball toward the game area P501, a launching control board P243 that synchronously controls the operation of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launching device P242, etc. It is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured based on a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine P including the gaming board P5 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the gaming board unit P5. FIG. 4 illustrates a state in which the effecting object P560 (also referred to as “movable effecting device”, “effecting movable body”, “effecting movable object”, etc.) provided in the game board unit is operating. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right part, and a circle arranged from the vicinity of the center of the lower part of the game board to the inner side of the outer rail P502 from the lower left to the upper left part. It is provided with an arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 arranged between the end of the outer rail P502 in the upper right portion and the lower part of the board surface and formed in a curved shape that opens to the left, and the outer rail P502. A substantially circular game area P501 is formed inside the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 has a left side area P501L (left-handed area), which is a left side area of the center accessory P540, and a right side area of the center accessory, with reference to the center accessory P540 arranged substantially in the center. It has a right side region P501R (right-handed region). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and wind turbines P511 (not shown), a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball-entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a normal-figure operating port P741 (general-figure operating gate device) and a large winning opening P751 (attacker) are arranged. It should be noted that the number of large winning openings may be one, or may be configured to have a plurality of large winning openings. Further, in the present specification, due to the configuration of the ball entry device, the game ball is ejected after entering the ball entry device, and the game ball further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball entry device (gate type). On the other hand, the fact that the game ball is detected by the internal detection switch is called "entry" or "winning (especially the one where the prize ball is generated)", and it flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type entrance. In particular, there is a case where the description is made separately from "passing". Further, the ball entry device may be referred to as a ball entry slot, and the winning device may be referred to as a winning slot.

Further, in the lower right of the game area P501, there is a main control display device P50 whose lighting is controlled by a main control board described later, such as a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52, and a normal symbol display device P53. Are arranged intensively. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is visibly provided through the opening of the center accessory P540. At the upper part of the center accessory P540 or the like, an effect accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs an effect operation according to the development status of the game is provided. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 through which a game ball that has flowed down without entering the winning opening of various ball entry devices can pass is provided. The game ball that has entered the winning opening of various winning devices or the game ball that has flowed into the out opening P790 flows down to the rear surface side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed by penetrating the game board P5 back and forth. Then, it is collected in the collection flow path (gamed ball passage) at the lower part of the front frame P2 and passes through the out ball sensor P792 (launched ball number sensor) provided at the lower part of the front frame for detecting the total number of fired game balls. After that, it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

The first start winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. The first start winning device P710 is provided with a first starting winning opening P711 in which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is an opportunity to acquire a random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711. The lottery for the first special symbol is executed immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has elapsed.

The second start winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. The second start winning device P720 is in a state where it is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721 where a game ball can enter and the second starting winning opening P721 when a normal symbol lottery to be described later is won. An ordinary electric accessory P770, which is a movable body to be switched, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is a trigger for a random number used in the lottery related to the second special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721. The lottery for the second special symbol is executed immediately after the ball enters or after the holding period has elapsed. The second start winning device P721 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening P721 or is easily entered by the action of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening P721. It changes to a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. That is, the second start winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening unless it is displaced to the open state, and the predetermined opportunity described later (the opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering the game ball increases. It should be noted that the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is known to have various aspects, and the structure may not change the ease of entering the ball by opening the movable body P771, so that it is in an "open state" and a "closed state". "Is described as" easy entry state (easy entry mode) "and" difficult entry state (difficult entry mode) ", respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left side general winning device P730L arranged in the left-handed area P501L and a right-side general winning device P730R arranged in the right-handed area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P in the present premise technology, the left general winning device P730L is configured with three general winning openings P731La to P731Lc as one unit, while the right general winning device P730R is a large winning device P750 described later. It is configured as part. The entry of a game ball into the general winning opening P731 is an opportunity for the prize ball to be paid out, as with other winning devices. The number and position of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko gaming machine, which are assumed to be, are merely examples, and may be configured so as to be arranged only in the right-handed region P501R.

The normal-figure operating gate device P740 (normal-figure operating port) is provided as a starting ball entry port corresponding to a normal symbol game. The normal drawing operating gate device P740 is provided with an operating gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to flow further downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball to the actuating gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second start winning device P720 is opened, that is, whether or not the normal electric accessory P770 is operated. .. As a modification, it is possible to configure the general winning opening P731 to have a function that triggers a normal symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the function of executing the normal symbol lottery, a prize ball It is also possible to provide a function to generate 1 as a winning device (normal figure operation winning opening).

The large prize device P750 is configured to have a large prize opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is a big hit or a small hit. It may be called an "attacker (device)" or the like. The large winning device P750 is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the large winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, in the state where the special electric accessory is activated P755), and the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening P751. Alternatively, it changes to a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball (for example, a state in which the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the big hit game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by an opening / closing operation of the big winning opening P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is operated, the movable body P756 constituting the large winning opening P751 becomes a closed mode in which it is difficult to enter the ball due to a series of operation patterns (also referred to as "open pattern"). Has.

Further, depending on the specifications (specs) of the gaming machine, the large winning device P750 has a specific area P760 (called "V zone" or "V area") through which the gaming ball can pass, and depending on the function, the "probability fluctuation function is activated". Areas ”,“ continuation areas ”, etc.) may be provided. The functions related to this "specific area" are (a) to activate the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big hit game triggered by the passage to the specific area during the big hit game, and (b) to pass through the specific area during the small hit game. Activating the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and granting the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) Specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not the region has been passed. An opening / closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided in the "specific region", and the flow path can be distributed by the action of the opening / closing member P761. It may be configured to pass through a specific area P760 or a non-specific area other than the specific area P760. Further, during the big hit game or the small hit game, the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 may have a valid period and an invalid period.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the big prize device P750 is provided in the right side region P501R (right-handed region) in the gaming region P501. Therefore, in the big hit game or the small hit game, when launching the game ball toward the game area P501, it is easy to enter the big winning opening P751 by hitting the right side area P501R, so-called right-handed hit. It has become.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, will be described. On the back side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-rear communication window for attaching the game board unit P5 is attached to the center. A storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the game facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member are paid to the back set unit P4. A back passage member P403 for flowing the game ball paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 and the prize ball payout unit P410 to the upper ball plate P341 or the lower ball plate P342 is provided. Further, on the game ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball dish P340, a ball pulling mechanism (ball pulling operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path for removing the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever). P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there is a main control board P40 that comprehensively controls the game progress of the pachinko gaming machine P, and a production control board that controls the overall production according to the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. P41, an image control board P42 that controls image display according to game development, and the like are attached. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present premise technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 constitute an effect display unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there is a payout control board P43 that controls the payout of game balls, and a power supply that receives power from the game facility side and supplies power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. A board P44 (not shown) or the like is attached. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure, and are in a predetermined position on the back surface of the game board P5 or the back surface of the back set unit P4 in an assembled state. It is arranged in each. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable) so that the pachinko gaming machine P can proceed with the game and execute the production. ..

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows a functional block of a pachinko gaming machine as a premise.

The pachinko gaming machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates a power source to be used in the game machine based on an AC power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. ), The payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls and the launch of game balls, and the effect control board P41 (sub-control CPU) for controlling effective operations and processing. It is composed of a form in which the functions are shared. The arrows shown in the figure indicate the upper transmission / reception relationship by a solid line arrow and the electrical connection relationship by a broken line arrow for each function.

By operating the power switch P47 provided on the board, the power supply board P44 can be used for the main control board P40, the effect control board P41, the payout control board P43, and various gaming devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, the electric power required for operation is generated and supplied. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the setting of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an open / close cover to prevent unauthorized operation. It is protected in a state of being.

The main control board P40 includes a first starting winning opening P711 (special drawing 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P722), and a large winning opening P751 (special drawing 2 starting opening switch P752). Detection switch related to various game progress such as normal drawing operation port P741 (normal figure operation port switch P742), general winning opening P731 (left side general winning opening, right side general winning opening), out opening P790, which are other detection switches. It is connected to switches and sensors used for management and fraud monitoring of various games such as a setting key switch P49, a vibration detection sensor P72, and a magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives information related to the generation of various game states from these switches, determines the control content related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids and the like, and is large in the case of a big hit or a small hit. The special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751 and the ordinary electric accessory P770 driven to make it easy to enter the ball when the ordinary symbol lottery is won. Information related to the driving mode is output to the gaming device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board to notify the main control board P40 of the occurrence of various gaming states based on sensor detection as information, and special electric power is used. The accessory driving means P70, the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71, and other launching permission signals for the launching device P242 are received from terminals called output ports to control each device and device.

Further, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 for displaying variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator lamp P54 for notifying the type (number of rounds) of a big hit or a small hit, and a gaming state. Main control display device P50 that displays various displays such as the status indicator light P55 that notifies And so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other accounting methods such as data that excludes winnings such as the starting winning opening P711, etc., but if necessary in the present invention, a separate explanation will be given and it is assumed. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to a device outside the gaming machine by means of an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, or the like, and various control signals are transmitted and received to and from each of them. Further, the main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the game machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of the prize balls by the payout device P410 and the handle P204 by the player based on the prize ball payout transmitted from the main control board P40 and the signal indicating the control state of the main control board. In response to the operation of, the launching device unit P240 controls the launching of the game ball. As an example, the payout device P410 has a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launching device (launching device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball plate P340 (upper ball plate P341) one by one to a position where they can be launched by the ball feed unit P241, and then turns the hammer into a game ball. It is configured to fire a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48 mainly used for initializing the gaming machine and canceling an error generated during the game, and is used for connecting the payout control board P43 and the main control board P40. The operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness or connector used.

The effect control board P41 includes an effect display device P80, a drive source and a position detection sensor (for example, a drive motor, an initial position detection sensor, and an effect position detection sensor) of the effect movable accessory P560, and a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker). 141), effect operation unit P380 (for example, effect button P381 which is effect operation means P81, effect lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), effect lamp P82 ("decorative lamp", "board lamp (P550)", "frame lamp (P350)". It is also electrically connected to each other and sends and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Further, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine that is premised on this, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the effect control board P41, but the speaker P83 is provided by separately providing a voice control board equipped with an IC for voice control and the like. It may be configured to control.

Data transmission / reception between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed by transmitting / receiving data in one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , You cannot request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information generated by the main control board P40 unless the information is transmitted. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the present invention, data is transmitted / received in both directions between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41, the data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progress]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko gaming machine P as the prerequisite technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly classified into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which it is easier to acquire a game ball as compared with the normal game state. The "normal gaming state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to shift to the "special gaming state", and even in the normal gaming state, there are gaming states in which the degree of advantage for the player regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the special gaming state is different. A plurality of normal game states are provided, and among a plurality of normal game states, it is more advantageous for the player than a state in which the player can easily acquire the right to shift to the special game state (normal game state (low probability / low base state)). State) is expressed as "specific game state". The "special game state" corresponds to the so-called "big hit game" and "small hit game", and the special electric accessory driving means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, and the big winning opening P751 is opened to acquire the game ball. Means a state in which is easy.

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, a game method and a game progress in a normal game state will be described. The normal gaming state described here is a description of the "normal gaming state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific gaming state, and is generally in a situation where the player starts the game. The game state will be described, and the game method in the specific game state, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms “low (high) probability” and “low (high) base” will be described later.

As a method of playing in a normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player first operates the handle P204 to launch a gaming ball toward the gaming area P501 provided on the gaming board P5. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player fires the operation amount of the handle P204 toward the left side region P501L (left-handed region) of the gaming area. Operate as if to play a game.

When the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L of the game area by the player, the launched game ball flows down the game area P501, and the game nail P510 (also referred to as “obstacle nail” or “nail”) (not shown) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, to the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device, which is arranged at a position substantially below the center in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel". Either enter the ball (winning) or enter the out opening P790 as a gamed game ball without entering any winning opening. When a ball is entered into the first starting winning opening P711 or the general winning opening P731, the main control board P40 causes the payout control board P43 to make the prize balls of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening (control command). ) Is output, and the player acquires a new game ball by paying out the prize ball.

Here, a special figure 1 start port switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711, and as a game state (game result) that can occur when a player launches a game ball into the left side area P501L in the game area. , When the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, the main control board P40 pays out the game balls of a predetermined number of prize balls and draws a lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. Get the random value to do. The random number value is acquired by acquiring the random number value generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit based on the detection of the game ball (hard latch), or by the control device of the main control board P40 by processing on the software. Techniques such as executing the process of acquiring the random number value from the previous random number generation circuit when confirming the detection information of the game ball, or acquiring the random number value updated by software (soft latch) Yes, it may be used properly according to the random number value to be acquired, or it may be used in combination. In addition, when the ball is entered into the general prize opening, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

The lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery". The "win / fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the acquired random value is a "big hit" or a "missing" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result includes a "small hit". ). The "winning symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning / failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50. Yes, it is possible to determine one symbol from a plurality of stop display symbols for one lottery result (big hit, small hit), and "big hit" or "small hit" according to the stop display symbol determined here. It is possible to make different execution modes of the special game in. The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining at what timing the stop display symbol indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52), and the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as "variable display time" or "variable pattern") in which the variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is made. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win / fail lottery", "winning symbol lottery", and "variable pattern lottery", respectively, and "win / fail lottery random numbers", "symbol random numbers", and "variable patterns". It is called a "random number". The lottery related to the control of the second special symbol performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 start port switch P722 is also the same “special symbol lottery”. Further, a description of the "special symbol lottery" will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the game method in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a game ball in the left area P501L of the game area. Then, a game ball is inserted into the first start winning opening P711, a lottery related to the first special symbol (special symbol lottery) is executed, and a special symbol indicating "big hit" ("small hit") is shown on the special symbol display device. By displaying the stop display symbol of, the game aiming at the acquisition of the right to execute the special game is performed.

It should be noted that, in the process of receiving the special symbol lottery, the player is described above in that the special symbol is variablely displayed according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery. If there is a new start winning slot (1st starting winning slot P711, 2nd starting winning slot P721) during this special symbol variation display period, a predetermined number of special symbol lottery will be executed. It has a hold function (hold control means) that temporarily stores random numbers (hit / fail random numbers, symbol random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers) corresponding to rights. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is possible to hold up to four special symbol lottery as a hold function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the prize of the first start winning opening P711. The hold function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, in addition to the hold of the first special symbol, the hold function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is also held up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random value used for the special symbol lottery.

As described above, in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), the player fires a gaming ball into the left region P501L of the gaming region to execute a special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the special symbol display device displays that the lottery result of the special gaming state such as "big hit" or "small hit" has been won and the right to shift to the special gaming state has been acquired. , The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine P shifts to the special gaming state.

[Special game status]
Subsequently, the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state will be described. There are "big hit (game)" and "small hit (game)" in the special gaming state, and the special electric accessory P755 operates in both cases, that is, the special electric accessory driving means P70 is operated from the main control board P40. A drive signal is output to the player, and the large winning opening P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The difference is that the "big hit" continuously operates the special electric accessory P755 multiple times. While it is based on the operation of the actuating device, the major difference is that the "small hit" is terminated by the operation of one special electric accessory. As another difference, in the operation of the special electric accessory (big hit) based on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to make the operation mode of the special electric accessory P755 more advantageous to the player. Specifically, the total opening time of the large winning opening P751 in the operating state (big hit) of the accessory continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening of the large winning opening P751 in the small hit. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, a jackpot will be used as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the prerequisite technology, is called "special game start demo" (in the case of a big hit, "big hit start demo", "role continuous operation start demo", etc., in chronological order. In the case of a hit, there is a production period called "small hit start demo") to notify the player that various special games have been acquired, and one time called "round (game)" (also called "unit game"). The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the "special game end demo" (referred to as "big hit end demo" in the case of a big hit, "combination operation end demo", etc., and "small hit end demo" in the case of a small hit. ), Which mainly consists of a game result (such as the number of acquired game balls) during a special game and a period for notifying the type of the normal game state (including a specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the method of the game during each of the above-mentioned special games will be described. First, during the "special game start demo" period, in the pachinko game machine P of the prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is arranged in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and is in the normal game state (low probability / low). Even if the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L similar to the base state), the large winning opening P751 can hardly be expected to enter, so before the round game in which the large winning opening P751 becomes easy to enter in the special game starts. In addition, the display device P80, the speaker (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and the effect lamp produce a right-handed notification effect that urges the player to launch the game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. It is executed using P82. The player adjusts the operation amount of the handle P204 to increase the firing intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the firing position so that the game ball flows down to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. (Perform right-handed).

During the "round (game)" period, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite technology, the large winning opening P751 is in an easy-to-enter state due to a drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric accessory driving means P70. A production that congratulates the player on having a big hit (small hit) according to the execution period of the special game due to difficulty in entering the ball, or a normal game state that shifts after the special game is completed is more advantageous for the player. Perform effects such as effects that suggest whether the game will be in a gaming state. The player launches the game ball into the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the large winning opening P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern of the big winning opening (operation mode of the special electric accessory) determined based on the type of big hit (small hit) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, it ends when a predetermined "specified number" (sometimes expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enters. Then, according to the type of special game state (type of big hit, small hit) being executed, when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite technology, has the number of game balls acquired during the period of this special game state and multiple times continuously performed during the specific game period described later. A normal game that informs the total number of acquired game balls acquired in the special game state (acquired without shifting to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)) or shifts after the special game state. Notification of the type of state and notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-mentioned right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the handle in preparation for the game according to the type of the normal game state of the transition destination from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are premised, when a big hit game as a special gaming state is executed, with some exceptions, a special gaming state for a player called a "specific gaming state" as a normal gaming state. It is a game that allows you to enjoy the so-called "renso", in which the right to shift to is easily acquired, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated.

[Specific game state]
Subsequently, the "specific game state" will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the specific gaming states are roughly divided into three specific gaming states. Then, there are a "probability state" and a "base state" as elements that separate these types, and a specific gaming state is configured by combining them.

(Probability state)
The "probability state" is a probability fluctuation function based on the operating state of the "probability fluctuation function" (also referred to as "probability change"), which is a function of changing the probability that the lottery result becomes a "big hit" in the winning / failing lottery in the special symbol lottery. When the winning / failing lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "big hit" with a higher probability than when is activated and not activated, it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability fluctuation state"). There is also), and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit for one special symbol lottery is high.

(Base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the "ratio (expected value) of the game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired", and is generally an ordinary electric accessory. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also referred to as "electric chew support (electric support) state"). .. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended firing position of the gaming ball is switched, so that "a prize ball is obtained when a predetermined number of gaming balls are launched." If the "ratio of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" is special while suppressing the consumption of game balls by increasing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (easily paid out) in the period until the special game state is acquired. It is a gaming state that is advantageous for the player in that it is possible to aim at acquiring the gaming state.

The "electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state), but mainly includes a combination of three functions (at least one). ). The three functions that make up the "electric chew support function" are "ordinary symbol probability change", "ordinary symbol time reduction", and "opening extension (of ordinary electric accessory)". "Ordinary symbol probability change" refers to a state in which there is a high probability that an ordinary electric accessory will be activated in the "ordinary symbol lottery". The "ordinary symbol time reduction" refers to a state in which the time from executing the ordinary symbol lottery to displaying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is shortened in the ordinary symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric accessory" means that the game ball can easily enter the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory P770 for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery. It refers to changing to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time for making an ordinary electric accessory in an easy-to-enter state.

In the "ordinary symbol lottery", the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas in the ordinary symbol lottery, the target is a lottery related to the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the lottery. The execution trigger is different in that the game ball enters the normal drawing operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the hit / fail, the symbol, and the fluctuation pattern are determined by lottery and that the holding function is provided. "Public map" (or "Public map" (or "Public map variable pattern lottery"" such as "Public symbol lottery", "Public symbol lottery", "Public symbol lottery", etc. It is expressed by adding "ordinary pattern") to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been described as elements for distinguishing the types of "specific game state", but "time saving state" ("variable time shortening state"" is another element that constitutes the specific game state. , The "variable time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the fluctuation display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery per unit time is increased, which is more for the player. It is in an advantageous state in that many special symbol lottery can be received per unit time. The "time saving state" (variable time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and it is rare that a specific gaming state is configured by itself.

[Specific game state 1: Low probability / High base state]
Returning to the explanation relating to the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in FIGS. 6 (1), (8), and (12). The game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse the predetermined number of games (* (8). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 shifts to the specific game state 1 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (2), (7), and (11) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (2), (7), and (11) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 1. (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (2) only). The "number of games" refers to, for example, the "number of times the special symbol lottery is executed".

After shifting to the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state), both the above-mentioned "electric chew support function" and "variation time shortening function" are activated in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the gaming board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal electric gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. The mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive a normal symbol lottery and a special symbol lottery by performing a "right-handed" shot of a gaming ball into the right-hand region P501R (right-handed region) of the gaming area. Further, the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is controlled to the above-mentioned "time saving state" in the specific gaming state 1 (low probability / high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is reached, the player launches a game ball into the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the general drawing The first procedure is to enter (pass) the ball into the actuated gate device P740, and by entering (passing) the ball into the actuated gate device P740, the main control board P40 receives a normal symbol lottery. Since the normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is won with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal figure probability change function, the game ball is sent to the normal figure operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 occurs once. When the ordinary electric accessory P770 is activated, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is premised on, has the second start winning opening P721, which triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol, in an easy-to-enter state, and the player continues to play the second. As a procedure, a game ball is launched toward the second starting winning opening P721. When a game ball enters the second start winning opening P721, detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the right to execute the special game (big hit, small hit). The lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In the case of acquisition of a small hit game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, acquisition of a small hit game (or acquisition of multiple small hit games, a specific type) It may be designed to end by (acquisition of a small hit game). When the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the process shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 2: High probability / High base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in (3), (7), and (9) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 2 shifts to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (4), (8), and (10) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (4), (8), and (10) include (a) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 2. (c). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed.

After shifting to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). The difference is that it is a "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of the game in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big hit earlier than the high probability of winning the big hit in the special symbol lottery. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 2 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends depending on the number of games, the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), and the specific game state Move to 3 (high probability / low base state).

[Specific game state 3: High probability / low base state]
Subsequently, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is performed by the game state transition shown in FIGS. 6 (5), (10), and (11). The game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. 6 are (a) to acquire a big hit game in each state, and (b) to elapse the predetermined number of games (* (10). ) Only) and so on. Although not shown, there may be a case where the specific game state 3 shifts to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the condition for ending the special gaming state is satisfied, the transition is as shown in (6), (9), and (12) of FIG. The game state transition conditions of (6), (9), and (12) include (c) acquiring a type of jackpot game that shifts to each game state in the specific game state 3. (d). It is mentioned that the predetermined number of games has passed (* (6) only).

When shifting to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated and the "high probability (state)" is set, and the specific game state 1 and the specific game Unlike the state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "variation time shortening function" are not operating. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the gaming board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the normal electric gate device P740 and the second start winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory are placed in the right side area P501 (right-handed area) of the game area. Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that the player makes a "right-handed" shot of a game ball into the right-hand area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). However, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player will proceed with the game by "left-handed" in which the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since it is in a high probability state, there is a probability that it will be a big hit in the special symbol lottery. Except for the fact that the jackpot game can be acquired at an early stage because it is high, the game method and game progress are the same as in the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

The specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, the type of jackpot executed if the jackpot is executed) that causes the transition to the state. It ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or a new big hit game is acquired (note that there is a case where the state is restored again after the big hit game). In general, the specific game state 3 does not end in the case of acquiring a small hit game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) ends depending on the number of games, the process shifts to the normal game state (low probability / low base state).

Note that the specific gaming state 3 (high probability / low base state) is different from the board layout configuration of FIG. 6 described as the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, and the normal electric accessory P770 is located in the right side region P501R (right-handed region). Arrangement of winning devices on the game board, such as arranging a third start winning opening of a type that does not have, and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lottery can be received in a short time. In addition, depending on the control of the time saving state, "right-handed" may be the recommended gaming state.

As described above, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the game progresses according to a plurality of gaming states, but it is not always necessary to provide all the above-mentioned gaming states. Therefore, among the game machine specifications composed of a combination of a plurality of gaming states, the game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted by the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P are illustrated below.

Regarding typical gaming machine specifications ("specs"), as an example of the types of gaming machine specifications related to the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery, "(until next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)" , "V probability change (also called" ball probability "," attack round system ")", "latent probability change" can be adopted. The difference in the specifications of the gaming machine due to the difference in the probability fluctuation function may be expressed as "this gaming machine is a" XX machine (example: ST machine) "". Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, by passing through a specific area P760 inside the large winning opening P751 during a small hit game, the accessory continuous operation device is subsequently activated (that is, the game shifts to the large hit game). There is also a gaming machine specification called "small hit V".

[Probability change (until next time)]
First, I will explain "probability change (until next time)". "Probability change until next time" is generally defined as "specific game state 2 (specific game state 2), which is the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states among a plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko gaming machine P. The game machine specifications for the "pachinko game machine" that will continue until the right of the next big hit game is acquired (high probability / high base state) are shown. In other words, the "probability change until next time" gaming machine is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and it does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. Has been done.

Depending on the type of jackpot, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is controlled. Also, in the "pachinko gaming machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to the next big hit game", the probability fluctuation function continues until the next big hit. Although it is sometimes called "probability change until the next time", the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. In this way, since it is a probabilistic change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating, it is expressed separately as "latent probability change".

[ST (Probability change)]
Next, "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" will be described. "ST" is an abbreviation for "Special Time", and generally, "specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a predetermined number of special symbol lottery (predetermined number of times). The game machine specifications for "Pachinko game machines that will continue until the right of the jackpot game is acquired" are shown.

Depending on the type of jackpot, there may be a case where the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) is controlled. In addition, as in the case of the above-mentioned "probability change until the next time", the game state is set to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) until a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is performed or the right of the big hit game is acquired. It is also possible to configure the case to be controlled so as to have a state called "latent probability change (latent ST)".

In addition, even in the case of "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)", the period in which the gaming state is controlled by ST is set to "until the lottery of the special symbol lottery is performed 10,000 times". If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "probability change until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until next time" and "ST (probability change by number of times)" distinguish "probability change state" as a gaming machine specification in that the end of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is different. Is. On the other hand, regarding whether or not the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is activated in a specific game state, that is, the start of execution of the probability fluctuation function, as in the "V probability change (" ball probability "" attack round system ")" explained below. Gaming machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a gaming machine specification called "V probability variation" will be described. The "V probability change" is referred to as a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the big winning opening P751 during a big hit game before the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. When the passage of a gaming ball (“V winning”) is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability fluctuation function is activated after the jackpot game. The gaming machine specifications of the pachinko gaming machine that controls the transition to the specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) are shown. The "specific region" used for the "V probability variation" may be particularly referred to as a "probability fluctuation function operating region".

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated depends on the gaming result during the jackpot game (depending on whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific region P760). There is a "V-probability change (V-loop)" depending on whether the activated probability fluctuation function ends with the same control as the "probability change until the next time" explained earlier or with the same control as the "ST". ] And "V-ST" are different from the expressions indicating the game machine specifications.

In the pachinko gaming machine P that adopts "V probability variation" as the game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the big hit game, the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the big hit game, and the normal game state or the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability / high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability fluctuation function operates after the big hit game is switched between the case where the V prize is won and the case where the V prize is not won, and at the same time, the operation mode of the electric chew support function can be changed. As an example, in the "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if a V prize is won, the probability fluctuation function and the electric chew support function will continue until the next big hit, and if the V prize is not won, the probability fluctuation function will be activated. The electric chew support function is also limited to 100 special symbol lottery.

[Small hit V]
Next, a gaming machine specification (spec) called "small hit V" will be described as a gaming machine specification that can provide a gaming state advantageous to the player regarding the acquisition of a big hit without having a probability fluctuation function.

The "small hit V" is a "specific area" provided inside the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game (during the operation of the special electric accessory) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. When passing through "P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the accessory continuous actuating device is activated following the small hit game, that is, the game machine specification for starting the big hit game. be. In other words, by passing the specific area P760 during the small hit, it is a gaming machine specification that can acquire the big hit game without obtaining the result of the big hit as a result of the special symbol lottery.

"Small hit V" is a special electric accessory that is not operating as a result of the special symbol lottery. It is a specification that operates the accessory continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (while the large winning opening P751 is open), and while it may be expressed as "Type 1 small hit V", the conventional pachinko game Since it has a game playability close to that of the so-called "type 2 pachinko" gaming machine, it may be expressed as "type 1 and type 2 mixer".

Generally, a pachinko gaming machine that adopts "small hit V" as a gaming machine specification does not have a probability change function (probability fluctuation function), and the degree of advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of an electric chew support function. That is, it becomes a change trigger of a special symbol (for example, winning a small hit at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small hit at the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, which makes it easy to win when the electric chew support function is activated. By configuring it with a starting winning opening, it is easy to win a small hit under the situation where the electric chew support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big hit with a V winning during a small hit game. By doing so, instead of increasing the random value range that becomes a big hit as in the probability variation function, it is a game playability that increases the possibility of acquiring a big hit by a small hit.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical, and some other characteristic game machine specifications are known. Therefore, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
The "limiter" is a case where a specific game state in which the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is activated is repeatedly performed with the execution of the big hit game in between (so-called "ream villa" state), and is determined in advance. When the number of repetitions (number of consecutive villas) is reached, even if the jackpot game that the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function is supposed to operate is executed, the probability fluctuation function or the electric chew support function It is a function to limit the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability change limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time saving limiter (electric sapoli limiter)". Call. A gaming machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Fall" is a gaming machine that executes a "fall lottery" that determines whether or not to terminate the probability fluctuation function each time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. Show the specifications. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating together with the probability fluctuation function, if the fall lottery is won, the operation of the electric chew support function ends at the end of the probability fluctuation function, or only the probability fluctuation function ends. The operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

It should be noted that a plurality of the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications can be combined. For example, when "ST" and "falling" are combined, the specific gaming state 2 (high probability / high base state) is set to ( If either 1) the fall lottery is won, (2) the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, or (3) the right to the jackpot game is acquired, the specific game state 2 (high) is satisfied. Probability / high base state) will end (shift to another gaming state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 that controls the progress of the game in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise to be described in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine that adopts "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" as the above-mentioned gaming machine specifications (specs) will be described. .. In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "PsOO" indicating the processing step in the figure will be described as "stepOO" in the text.

[Power-on processing of main control board (main loop processing of main control board)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, first executes the power-on processing (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. Here, the details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

When the power-on processing is started on the main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately set the setting necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power cutoff information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006) are subsequently executed, and the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is received in response to these processes. ) Is performed.

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value" for changing the degree of advantage of the special symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P (particularly, the operation probability of the accessory continuous operation device, that is, the jackpot probability). The flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting change processing" that can change "", and the flag of whether or not it is in the state of performing "setting confirmation processing" for confirming the "setting value" It is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to establish (whether or not to turn on) in the game stop state setting process performed later. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the detection status of the frame opening switch P131 (the switch that detects that the front frame is open to the outer frame) and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player. , Data including data indicating the detection status of whether the setting key switch P49 is rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko gaming machine P normally turned off the power, and the control data related to the game state when the power was cut off was normally performed. It is a process of confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is played in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. It is a process to set (turn on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the processing results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power off information confirmation / checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change state", "setting confirmation state", and "unrecoverable". It is a process to set a flag to shift to one of the "error state" and the game progress disallowed state. The details of the "game stop state setting process" are shown in FIG. 8, and the description will be given based on the description in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, it is first determined whether or not the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko gaming machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1". Therefore, the processing of the following step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the input port confirmation process (step 1004) generated 1 Calculates the operation information of the setting key switch from the byte data so that it becomes off data. Although not shown, in any case of YES or NO in step 1102, the bit in the 1-byte data whose frame is open is also calculated to be off data.

In the following step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that can be determined as "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, the situation where it is judged that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame release switch P131 is on (the frame is open when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is on. It requires three states: (it is being rotated) and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. As described above, the information of the frame opening switch P131 is set to off in the 1-byte data, and it is determined in this step whether or not both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, when the two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (note that the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1", and either one is used. One data may be "0"). Then, when it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, that is, when it is determined to be YES in step 1104, the data indicating "setting is being changed" is stored as the game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated (. Step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1108. If the set value information stored in the ram (RAM = Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (when the operation is to return from the unrecoverable error state), it is set as the initial setting value. The data corresponding to the set value "1" is set in the area for storing the set value (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred. The game stop error is an error when ram clearing and setting (changing) processing of the set value are required when the game cannot be progressed, such as a checksum abnormality (ram abnormality) or a setting value abnormality. Refers to. The determination in step 1108 determines whether or not the game should be set as the game stop state based on the processing result of the power off information confirmation / checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored at the time of the previous power off processing. .. If it is determined that an error state should be set (if YES is determined in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (step 1110, step 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112.

In the following step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 is operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the relevant step,
(A) When the operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, among the judgments that "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is on (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) When the setting key switch P49 is on, is satisfied, and (3) The ram clear switch P48 is on, is not satisfied.
(B) When the ram clear operation for clearing the data is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, is not satisfied, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. When satisfied
(C) When the power is turned on without any operation such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation", etc.
It is one of the situations. The 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) in these states is (a) the bit data indicating on / off of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (on data)", and (b) the ram clear switch. The bit data indicating on / off of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (on data)", and (c) the 1-byte data is all off data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated in step 1112, and if there is a ram clear operation (when it is determined to be YES in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine goes into a game-enabled state after ram clearing. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except in the situation where the ram clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is, and at this time, when the operation to shift the game stop state flag to the "setting confirmation state" is performed (in step 1112). (When determining NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop status flag is stored as data indicating "setting is being confirmed" (when it is determined to be NO). Step 1118). Further, when there is neither a ram clear operation nor a transition operation to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating that there is no game stop as a game stop state flag. It is set as information without game stop.

If a value indicating some kind of stop state is stored for the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), it is the main game allowable state in the power-on process (step 1000). In the interrupt processing (step 2000), which is the main body of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (step 1028 to step 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the game progress described as "basic game progress". However, these controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process of FIG. 7, the subsequent process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether or not the ram clear operation has been performed (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. This process is executed regardless of whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. If it is determined in step 1010 that there is a ram clear operation, a predetermined storage area is initialized from the ram storage area of the main control board P40.

In the subsequent processes from step 1014 to step 1020, a process of setting an effect control command (effect command) for causing the effect control board P41 to recognize the state of the gaming machine is performed from the main control board P40 when the power is turned on. More specifically, in step 1014, a process of clearing the effect control command that had not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off) is performed from the storage area. Then, when the information regarding the current gaming state of the main control board P40 restored after the power is turned on in step 1016 is generated as an effect control command and it is determined in step 1018 that the gaming state is not stopped, the generated restoration is performed in step 1020. The effect control command indicating the game state is set in the area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of turning on the power is completed, the necessary data (drive signal) for returning the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 to the state before the power failure occurred. ) Is output from the output port to the special electric accessory driving means P70 and the ordinary electric accessory driving means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is subjected to the processing of setting the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the interval for executing the interrupt processing (FIG. 9, step 2000) described later is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process is completed, the player shifts to a cycle process called a main loop in which the player can play, and the execution of the cycle process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in FIG. 7, in the processing of the main loop of the main control board, first, the processing for prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing is performed in step 1026, and until the processing of the main loop is completed (interruption is permitted in step 1036). Up to) Limit the execution of interrupt processing.

When interrupts are disabled, in the following step 1028, to monitor the occurrence of a runaway CPU of the main control board P40 called a watchdog timer (a situation in which processing loops and the process does not proceed). Clear (initialize) the area that stores the timekeeping information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether the power supply is cut off (for example, whether the power supply cutoff signal sent from the power supply board P44 when the voltage drops is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If the power is cut off, the current gaming state is stored, the power cut information and the check sum information are stored, and the processing of the main control board P40 as the CPU is stopped (step 1032). ) Is executed. If the power is not cut off, the process shifts to the next process.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random number values are updated in the interrupt process described later, and this is a process for preventing the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to the random number being updated only in the interrupt process. If there is a process that is executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating the random number value according to the process. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final process in the main loop, and performs a process for permitting interrupts. Immediately after that, it returns to the interrupt disable of step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, but when the process of step 1036 for enabling interrupts is performed, the interrupt execution cycle (4 ms has elapsed since the previous interrupt process occurred). If the CPU of the main control board P40 has an input indicating the above state), the interrupt processing described later will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Subsequently, the interrupt processing (also referred to as “timer interrupt processing”) performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program provided so as to be changeable according to the gaming machine specifications (specs) is generally constant. It is configured to read and control in the order of. The processing related to those submodules will be briefly described below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
At the beginning of the interrupt process, a watchdog timer clear process is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 described above. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation process)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, information that enables identification as to whether or not there is input information as information necessary for determination in the subsequent process is obtained. It is a process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes input signals related to artificial operations such as an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether or not there is a touch) of the handle P204. , Special figure 1 Input signal indicating the game result by detecting the game ball such as the start port switch P712 and the big prize opening switch P752, the magnetic sensor P73, the door opening sensor P131, the vibration detection sensor P72, etc. are provided for fraud monitoring. There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all reads is called the input data (“level data”) in this interrupt. ), Stored in the ram of the main control board P40. For the part of the data read three times that is not the same data in all readings, the data confirmed in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) will be adopted as level data, that is, the interrupt this time. If the data cannot be read normally in, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) in the interrupt this time is confirmed, a comparison operation with the input data in the previous interrupt is performed to generate "rising data" (data that identifies the bit whose input data has changed from off to on). The data that identifies the switch that was switched to the on input by the interrupt this time is stored.

(Random number update process)
Random number update processing is performed by software among various random numbers such as win / fail random numbers, symbol random numbers, variable pattern random numbers related to special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery normal symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers. This is a process for updating a so-called soft random number, which is a random number value to be updated (step 2006). In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those that update the random numbers in the update cycle on the circuit in the random number generation circuit and those that are updated in the soft cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers at the time of random number acquisition.

In the random number update process, as described above, the soft random number is updated, but as an update method,
(A) A random number that is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1) and setting the lower limit (or upper limit) when the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded.
(B) An arbitrary prime number is subtracted (or added) to a random number, and when the random number range is exceeded, the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) is added (or subtracted).
(C) Repeat incrementing (or decrementing) from the random number set as the initial value, and when the update of one cycle is completed, set the separately updated "initial value random number" as a new initial value and perform the same update. Things that repeat (also called initial value update type random numbers),
Various update methods such as can be exemplified. It should be noted that the update method is not limited to the one illustrated in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as the randomness of random numbers can be maintained.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set in the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is determined whether or not the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated for the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is on-data, and it is not on-data, that is, the pachinko gaming machine. If the setting key is not turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated during the game stop flag is on-data, the current interrupt is used to determine whether to terminate "setting changing" and "setting checking". After referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated by the input port confirmation process described above), clearing the game stop flag when the setting key switch P49 is turned off, and making the game playable. An effect control command for returning (or starting) an effect is set on the effect control board according to whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Further, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), when the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", the role of the "setting change switch" in this interrupt timing is played during the period until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "setting is being changed", when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated in this interrupt, the "setting value" is set to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine P having setting value data such that the setting is switched from 1 to 6 in order, each time there is rising data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. The process of increasing the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, is changed to 1 as the next value) is performed.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, by providing processing in the setting change state and setting confirmation state during interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored in the interrupt processing cycle. , A program for periodic monitoring during power-on processing (see FIG. 7), which enables the output of display data to the display device by LED output processing, which will be described later, and for which interrupt processing has not been set separately. Can be omitted. In addition, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmations, control display devices, and update setting values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, whether or not the game is stopped by reading out the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed by the CPU of the main control board when the pachinko gaming machine is turned on. It is a process to confirm whether or not. (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, the game stop flag data is not 0 and any bit is "1". If it is, it is determined that the game is stopped (a state in which the game needs to be stopped), and it is considered that the game is stopped, and a part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. (Up to the accessory control process (step 2028)) ”) is omitted.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting is being changed", "setting is being confirmed", and "unrecoverable error" is displayed. A state such as "occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for managing the time related to the progress of the game (step 2014).

As an example of the timer data update process, management of the variable display time set when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the operating time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (opening time of the big winning opening P751). ), Timer data update processing triggered by the progress of the game, timekeeping processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in the main control display device P50 such as the special symbol display devices P51 and P52. Examples thereof include a process for measuring the switching time for switching, a process for measuring the period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the like.

The timer data updated by the timer update process is divided into the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40 for each type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer", and is continuous. Each is stored in the storage area.

In the timer update process, processing such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" is performed on the storage area that stores the individual types of timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. The timer update process performs a process of decrementing (-1) the timer data stored in the storage area. If the stored timer data is already "0", it is processed so that it becomes "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it is set to "0", or it is set to "0". If it is "0", do not decrement, etc.).

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so if the data is a 1-byte timer, only the management target that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed only within 1 second (when there is little), it is also possible to configure it with only 2-byte timer data and not to have 1-byte timer update processing. Is. Further, when it is necessary to manage the time value that cannot be managed even by the 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than the "3-byte timer".

(Validity period setting process)
The validity period setting process is a period for controlling the winning opening (mainly the winning opening related to the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770) that can be changed to the easy entry mode or the difficult entry mode. It is a process of setting a valid period in the valid extension period and setting an invalid period for other periods (when the winning opening is in a difficult-to-enter mode and other than the valid extension period). (Step 2016)

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine, the winning of the big winning opening P751 as the big winning device and the winning of the second starting winning opening P721 which is the second starting winning device P720 equipped with the ordinary electric accessory P770 are set as the valid period. It becomes a process to do.

In addition, during the valid extension period, in order to treat the game ball that entered at the timing immediately before the large winning opening P751 or the ordinary electric accessory P770 shifts to the difficult-to-enter mode as an effective winning, the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory). Since it is treated as an effective period even after the control period for executing the open control for the electric accessory such as P755) and the ordinary electric accessory P770 has elapsed, a certain period of time appropriately set according to the structure of the electric accessory is set. It is a control period.

Further, depending on the game machine specifications, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set, and in such a case, in this process. The validity period of a specific area is also set.

(Prize winning monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of the game ball for various winning openings (large winning opening P751, starting opening P711, P721, general winning opening P731) in the pachinko gaming machine, and the prize is awarded. It is a process of generating information that triggers a process of generating a special symbol lottery right (occurrence of hold) for a ball or a ball entering the starting opening. (Step 2018)

The processing contents are as follows: (a) Detection of the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004) (b) The winning opening having a valid period. In that case, it is judged whether or not the prize is won during the valid period, and when a valid prize is generated for each winning opening, (c) The production control command indicating the winning information for each winning opening transmitted to the effect control board P41. Settings, (d) Update the counter value (called "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among the actions based on the detection of various winning openings Updates the counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in).

In the winning monitoring process, not only the winning of various winning openings, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting the out balls, the operation opening switch P742 that triggers the ordinary symbol lottery, and the gaming machine. Depending on the specifications, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and the operation of the game machine (for example, the operation of the game machine other than the generation of a prize ball or the trigger of a special symbol lottery). In this process, the presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting information to the effect that the operation port switch P742 and the specific area P760 have passed to the effect control board P41 is performed.

(Operating port monitoring process)
The operation port monitoring process is a process related to the occurrence of hold related to the normal symbol lottery when the rising data of the normal figure operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). conduct. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal symbol operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of holds does not reach the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new hold. Since it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of holds to increase the number of holds information by one, random numbers for the normal figure hit / miss random number, the normal figure symbol random number, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern random number are used. Obtained from the generation circuit, or the current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as a hold.

(Ordinary symbol control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs a process related to the normal symbol lottery, the variable display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on which is the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called the normal symbol status or the normal electric accessory, and perform control according to the state. The status of the normal symbol is "0: Standing by normal symbol", "1: Normal symbol is changing", "2: Normal symbol is stopped and displayed", "3: Normal electric accessory is operating", "4: Normal". There is a "Demonstration of the end of the electric accessory", and processing is performed according to each state.

<< Normal symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The normal symbol change start monitoring control process is a submodule process called by the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: waiting for the normal symbol".

In the normal symbol change start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of pending numbers related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, and the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of holdings related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the right to change the normal symbol has been generated, and it is judged that the condition for starting the change of the normal symbol is satisfied, and the change of the normal symbol is changed. Execute the process related to the start.

When it is determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the hold number information is decremented by -1 from the area for storing the hold number information related to the normal symbol lottery, and then the normal symbol hit / miss random number, the normal symbol symbol random number, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number are respectively. Call and perform a normal figure winning / failing lottery, a normal figure pattern lottery, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and store the storage area of the pending number information. The process of shifting is performed so that the processes are processed in the memorized order, and the normal symbol status is updated to "1: Normal symbol is changing". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operating status of the above-mentioned "base state" (probability fluctuation function of normal symbol, fluctuation time shortening function of normal symbol), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , Ordinary symbols tend to have a short variation display time.

《Processing during normal symbol change》
The normal symbol changing process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "1: normal symbol changing".

In the normal symbol change processing, a timer that manages the change display of the normal symbol until the change display time of the normal symbol according to the change pattern of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol change start monitoring control process elapses (normal). This is a process of causing the normal symbol display device P53 to execute the fluctuation display of the normal symbol until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process.

More specifically, when the normal symbol variation display timer is not 0, the normal map display switching counter whose maximum value is "5" is updated every time this process is executed, and the normal symbol display switching counter is set to "5". At the timing of "5", a process of storing information about the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LED constituting the normal symbol display device P53. The normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value "0" at the timing when the maximum value "5" is reached. That is, in the variation display of the normal symbol, the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4 ms × 5 = 20 ms). The switching interval can be set as appropriate. For example, if the maximum value of the normal figure display switching counter is 25, the display pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). Be done.

When the variation display time of the normal symbol ends, that is, when the normal symbol variation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal symbol stop display symbol determined by the normal symbol lottery is the main control display device. Data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the stop display is displayed on the normal symbol display device P53 in P50. Then, the symbol fixing time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: Normal symbol stop display".

<< Processing during normal symbol stop display >>
The normal symbol stop display processing is a submodule process called by the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: Normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer for which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol change processing is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0". Then, the process of setting for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "hit", it depends on the winning symbol and the operating state of the base state (extension function of the normal electric accessory). , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the winning counter related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and set the normal symbol status to "3: Ordinary electric accessory in operation". Update to.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0" and the result of this normal symbol lottery is "missing", the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol". I do.

《Processing during normal electric accessory operation》
The normal electric accessory operating process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: Normal electric accessory is operating".

In the process during operation of the normal electric accessory, the opening operation (change to the easy entry mode) and the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory are performed based on the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P770 set in the processing during the normal symbol stop display. While controlling (change to a difficult-to-enter mode), the establishment of the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is monitored. The operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 ends when (a) the specified number of ordinary electric accessory prizes set as the end condition of the ordinary electric accessory occurs, and (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends. This is the case (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessory has expired).

When the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory is satisfied, the extension period of a fixed time determined in advance corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is measured in the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the ordinary electric accessory. Set the time. Then, the time value related to the operation end demonstration of the ordinary electric accessory is set in the ordinary electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the ordinary symbol status is set to "4: During the ordinary electric accessory end demonstration".

<< Demonstration processing to end normal electric accessory operation >>
The normal electric accessory operation end demo process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: Ordinary electric accessory end demo".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demo process, the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer waits until it becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0". When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: waiting for normal symbol" is performed.

(Starting port monitoring process)
In the start port monitoring process, when the start-up data of the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), the special symbol lottery is performed. Performs the processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 start port switch P712 and the special figure 2 start port switch P722 are detected, the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery is confirmed, and the number of holds does not reach the upper limit. Can store a random number as a new hold, so after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area storing the hold number and increasing the hold number information by one, the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern The random number is acquired from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding soft random number is acquired and stored as a hold.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there are two types of special symbols, the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, the data of the holding number and the starting opening switch of the corresponding special symbols are called for each of the starting openings provided on the gaming board P5, the holding numbers are added to each starting opening, and random numbers are acquired. Is processed.

Further, when the starting port to be processed is composed of the starting port (electric chew) related to the ordinary electric accessory, the starting port winning prize related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is valid in the above-mentioned validity period setting process. After determining whether or not it was performed within the period, if it is within the valid period, the above-mentioned processing is performed.

When storing the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, the acquired random number information is used in advance using the advance notice judgment value table, and the fluctuation content when the fluctuation based on the various reserved random numbers is executed is performed in advance. Information that can be inferred is generated and notified to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (referred to as "preliminary determination command", "preliminary determination information", and "look-ahead determination command"). The pre-judgment command is generated for each of the hit / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, it is used for the lottery related to the execution of the "look-ahead effect" described later on the effect control board P41. Will be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes status information for managing a special symbol called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the special electric accessory called, any of the special symbol change start management (special symbol change start monitoring control process), special symbol change process, and special symbol stop symbol display process. Execute the processing.

The special symbol status includes "0: waiting for special symbol change", "1: special symbol change", "2: out-of-order symbol stop display", "3: big hit symbol stop display", "4: small hit". It has a state of "design stop display", and the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big winning opening is closed", and "3". : Big hit end demonstration "," 4: Small hit special electric operation "," 5: Small hit closed "," 6: Small hit end demonstration ". Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it may not have a small hit, and in that case, it does not have the status data related to the small hit. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

When there are a plurality of special symbols, the special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority). In a predetermined order, the process of preferentially controlling the second special symbol is performed, and in a situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the change of the second special symbol comes first. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control" and is premised on the game machine specifications that are processed to be started (the second special symbol changes preferentially), is implemented. In the description of the embodiment, the processing related to this type will be described as an example.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the information of the special electric accessory status is first referred to. In the case of data indicating that the special electric bonus status is during a big hit game or a small hit game (when the special electric bonus status is other than "0: waiting for a hit"), the first special symbol is changing. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: Waiting for special symbol change", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the control of the second special symbol is executed, the process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by the process of decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area for storing the timer, and if the decremented result is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the timer update is completed, the submodule process described later is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2. Although the timer subtraction process is also performed during the interrupt process, the timer updated by the timer subtraction process does not include the timer data updated by the special symbol control process, and the special symbol control process does not include the timer data. It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<< Special symbol change start monitoring control processing >>
The special symbol change start monitoring control process is a submodule process that shifts when the special symbol status is “0: waiting for special symbol change”.

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold of the special symbol being processed as a target, and if there is no hold, the process is completed, and if there is a hold, the following process is executed. Subsequent processing is a special symbol lottery performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as the set value is read out and inspected, and it is determined whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the lottery table is appropriately selected with reference to the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state, etc., the winning / losing lottery, the symbol lottery, and the variable pattern lottery are executed, and the lottery result is obtained. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: Special symbol is changing". Further, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variation effect executed according to the variation display of the special symbol. It is used as information for the determination process (lottery process) of. The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol change》
The special symbol changing process is a submodule process that shifts when the special symbol status is “1: special symbol changing”.

In the special symbol change processing, the timer that manages the change display time of the special symbol is monitored until the change time of the special symbol determined by the change pattern lottery elapses, and every interrupt is performed until the remaining change time becomes "0". The special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (when controlling the special symbol 1)) is used to display the fluctuation display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts by the updated special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24"). Performs the lighting display pattern switching process of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variation display time of the special symbol becomes "0", it indicates that the variation display of the special symbol has been executed once for the external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P. Information setting for outputting an external signal, processing for setting a fixed time for displaying a special symbol stop display, and stop display indicating a stop display symbol determined as a result of a win / fail lottery or a symbol lottery. The lighting pattern data for displaying the symbol on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) is set. Then, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: out of place symbol stop display", "3: big hit symbol stop display", and "4: small hit symbol stop display" according to the result of the winning / failing lottery.

<< Processing during display of special symbol off symbol stop display >>
The process of displaying the special symbol out of place symbol stop is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is "2: Out of place symbol stop display in progress".

In the special symbol off symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes the processing target. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the number of remaining games in the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery is updated. At the same time as updating, it is confirmed that the end condition is satisfied, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state is performed.

<< Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display >>
The special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is “3: jackpot symbol stop display in progress”.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, it is confirmed whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixed time set in the special symbol changing processing is "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes the processing target. The special symbol status of the special symbol is updated to "0: Waiting for special symbol change", and the status of the special electric accessory is updated to "2: The big winning opening is closed". Further, in order to terminate the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time shortening function) related to the special symbol lottery, a process of clearing each remaining number of times information storage area and operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol, the information of various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot symbol information, and the special electric accessory P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set the content data.

In the special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing the effect of the jackpot game (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is further executed. Further, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator light P56 (a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the game area), which is one of the components of the main control display device P50, is recommended. Lighting pattern data for lighting the LED) that is sometimes lit is also set.

<< Processing during special symbol small hit symbol stop display >>
The special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is a process of shifting to the case where the special symbol status is “4: Small hit symbol stop display in progress”.

Similar to the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, the special symbol small hit symbol stop display processing is performed when the symbol fixing time ends, data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 is set, and the right-handed indicator lamp P56 is turned on. Perform the relevant setting process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this prerequisite technology, when the small hit game is executed (stop display of the small hit symbol), unlike when the big hit symbol is stopped, the game state (high probability state or high probability state) related to the special symbol lottery It does not have a process to end (high base state), and the game state is determined based on the judgment result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, as in the process of the process of processing the special symbol off symbol stop display. Control. In addition, the status of the special electric accessory will be updated to "5: Small hit closed" according to these processes. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, as a modification, the specifications are designed to have a process of forcibly ending the gaming state (high probability state or high base state) when the small hit game is executed, as in the case of stopping the big hit symbol. It is also possible.

When any of the above sub-module processes is selectively performed, the process of the first special symbol is performed following the process of the second special symbol. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the status of the special symbol of the first special symbol. The explanation is omitted because almost the same processing is only repeated in (judgment by referring to).

《Ordered entry control, parallel control》
Further, in the above-mentioned explanation of the special symbol control process, the description is based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but there are cases where a gaming machine specification different from that of the pachinko gaming machine, which is the premise of the present invention, is adopted. It is also possible to proceed with the special symbol control process by different processes. The typical ones will be briefly described below.

The "ball entry order digestion control" is a gaming machine specification in which the reserved information corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order of generation. While the fluctuation of one symbol is not performed, the fluctuation display of the other is not performed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved ball corresponding to the first special symbol and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special symbol are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol priority digestion control" and "sequential digestion", and at the same time, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner. It is a type of gaming machine that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lottery per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 operates with the stop display of the special symbol of 1 (when the big hit and the small hit are executed), the other symbol is forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped or the variable display is displayed. Specifications that temporarily suspend the subtraction of the remaining time are adopted as appropriate. As an example, when one special symbol becomes a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss, and when one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
In the special electric bonus control process, the submodule process related to the operation of the special electric bonus P755 is executed according to the data content (value) of the special electric bonus status (sometimes referred to as the special electric game status), and the special electric bonus is executed. It is a process of managing the operation of an object (step 2028). In other words, when executing a big hit game or a small hit game, it is a process of controlling each state in the big hit game and the small hit game state, and controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751.

As mentioned above, the status of the special electric accessory includes "0: waiting for a hit", "1: the special electric accessory is operating", "2: the big prize opening is closed", and "3: the big hit end demonstration". , "4: Small hit special electric operation is in progress", "5: Small hit is closed", and "6: Small hit end demonstration is in progress".

Of these special electric accessory statuses, if the status is "0: waiting for a hit", the player's game has not yet acquired the right to execute the big hit game or the small hit game. , The special electric accessory control process ends without any process.

When the status of the special electric accessory is other than "0: waiting for hit", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.

<< Processing during operation of special electric accessory >>
The processing during operation of the special electric accessory is a process executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "1: the special electric accessory is operating" or "4: the small hit special electric is operating". This process is a process in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the large winning opening P751 can be controlled to open).

In the process during operation of the special electric accessory, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) a specified number of winnings (also called "count") according to the activated special electric accessory, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as is completed or the opening time is satisfied. If these conditions are not satisfied, the special electric accessory control process in the current interrupt process is terminated without performing the subsequent process. The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the special electric accessory P755 includes a pattern for opening and closing the large winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round. While the timer used to determine (a) during the game is set to "0" multiple times, after confirming whether or not there is the next operation data during one round game, the condition (c) " When it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in this unit game, it is determined that the above (a) is satisfied.

On the other hand, when either (a) or (b) of the above conditions for ending the round game is satisfied, the closing time of the large winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory as a subsequent process. , Increment the status of the special electric accessory to "2: The big prize opening is closed". Then, command data for notifying the end of the round game is set as an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while closing the big prize opening》
The processing during closing of the large winning opening is a processing executed when the status of the special electric accessory is "2: closing of the large winning opening" or "5: closing of the small hit". This process is a process in which the special game is controlled in the "between rounds" between the so-called round games, and before the start of the first round at the start of the big hit game or the small hit game. When the game is controlled by the "big hit start demo (period)" or "small hit start demo (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the hit end demo described later is executed. This is the process related to the state where the control is performed during the waiting period until the result is reached.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening, first, it is determined whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening set in the processing during operation of the special electric accessory has elapsed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time. If has not passed, the special electric accessory control process in the interrupt this time is terminated.

If the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, was the operation (round game) of the special electric accessory P755 that was completed first the final round game in this hit game (big hit game, small hit game)? Judging whether or not, different processes are executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of the winning start demo). To determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 operated during this hit game is the maximum number of operations data of the special electric accessory P755 in this hit game. It is judged based on whether or not it exceeds, and the cumulative data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the hit start demonstration.

If it is determined that the final round game is over in the process of closing the big winning opening, the execution pattern of the winning end demo according to the type of hit (the type of special symbol that started the big hit or small hit). Read and set (mainly hit end demo time data). Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to "3: Big hit end demo in progress" or "6: Small hit end demo in progress", and an effect command for executing the end demo effect is set on the effect control board P41. Demonstration. Further, in order to set the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the valid extension period is stored in the timer that manages the valid extension period of the large winning opening P751 and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined at the end of the game other than the final round game (or at the time of the winning start demo) in the process of closing the large winning opening, the next round game is the number of rounds as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify whether or not there is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and the recommended firing position during the hit game (in the assumed pachinko machine, the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game board) Send information (right-handed command) to instruct.

Then, the status of the special electric accessory is decremented and updated to "1: Special electric accessory is operating" or "4: Small hit special electric is operating", and the number of winning balls to the large winning opening P751 during the round game Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the time value related to the first opening (or closing immediately after the start of the round game) of the large winning opening P751 during the round game is set, and the operation pattern data of the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set. Then, the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to a player in response to a prize of a game ball for a prize opening arranged on the game board P5. The processing content is configured to execute the following three submodule processes. (Step 2030)

《Payout data reception monitoring process》
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence / absence of a control command related to the execution of the prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (memorizing) the transmitted command. .. The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). The register 1 is called a status register and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information is normally transmitted. Has been done. The other register is called a data register, and stores information on control contents related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is not abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. Store in the area.

<< Disbursement command request processing >>
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning opening that stores the winning count data of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed, and the presence or absence of unpaid winning is confirmed. The confirmation process is confirmed in a predetermined order for each winning opening, and when it is determined that the data of the winning counter is not "0" for one winning opening, the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning opening is determined. , Performs a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of the game ball to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for the plurality of winning openings is not "0", the payout control command transmitted to the payout control board P43 with one interrupt is limited to one.

<< Payout command control processing >>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received the information regarding the number of payouts, and whether the command is normally received in this process or it is determined that a communication error has occurred due to some abnormality. It will be. Until the command reception status is confirmed in the payout command control process (whether reception is completed normally or an error is determined), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is the payout command request process. And is temporarily suspended by the flag data that is set to be on / off in the payout command control process.

(Anomaly detection processing)
The abnormality detection process is a process for confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality from the information of the sensor provided for fraud detection in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, an abnormality occurs based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). It is a process to judge whether or not the situation is present. In addition to various sensors, harnesses for electrical connection have been removed, and short circuits on wiring are also included as detection targets.

Then, when abnormal data exists for any of the judgment information, a command for notifying the error information is set as an effect control command for the effect control board P41 after storing the error data by turning on the corresponding error flag. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which the sensor or switch is continuously detected is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is the process of establishing the flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection judgment process, when the level data of the detection data information of the target sensor or switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not the start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the switch to be monitored is no longer on-data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, when the winning opening detection switch provided in the winning opening continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that a ball jam has occurred, and the error state is controlled to produce an effect. As a control command, a process of setting command information for causing an error notification to the effect control board P41, and a generation and output request of signal data for notifying an external device (hall computer or the like) of an error are performed.

The switch to be detected in this process includes a touch sensor switch provided on the handle P204 and a switch for fraud detection, in order to determine whether it is due to human operation or electrical noise. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game status display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information regarding the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, the output of the display content to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by the LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating an error state, and a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) indicating the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery. P61, special figure 2 hold indicator light P62), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 that displays the number of holds related to the normal symbol lottery, etc. Lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and used as data output by LED output processing. Store.

In the game status display process, when a blinking display is required for the LED indicator lamp whose lighting is controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern switching process is performed by comparing the counter value and the threshold value. Will be done. For example, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery can be held up to four, but the special symbol holding indicator light is configured with two LED indicators (special figure 1 holding indicator light P61). , 2 LEDs are provided for each of the hold indicator lights P62), so if there are 3 or more holds, at least one LED will display a blinking display instead of a continuous lighting display. It is a specification to do.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process for setting to transmit a signal related to the game operation to the electric accessory, which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, the payout control board P43, and the like. (Step 2038)

More specifically, when the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory or the special electric accessory is set during the normal symbol control process or the special electric accessory control process, the process during the output port output process causes the normal electric motor. Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory driving means P71 and the special electric accessory driving means P72 (solenoid in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine).

Further, a control signal (launch permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the launch of the game ball based on the handle operation of the player is generated and output to the payout control board P43 by the output port output process. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the communication status with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence status of an error requiring the game stop.

(Production control command transmission process)
The effect control command transmission process is a process of outputting an effect control command to the effect control board P41, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the effect control command is sent to the effect control board P41 only in the effect control command transmission process. It is a specification to be transmitted (step 2040). It should be noted that the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer that circularly refers to a storage destination is used as an area for storing untransmitted effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next processing called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (set) the effect control command and reading (sending) the effect control command. The specifications are such that the writing and reading of the effect control command are executed using the information for calculating the address of the storage area for writing the command and the address of the storage area for reading the command.

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the configuration of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

The explanation will be given by returning to the explanation of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing. In the effect control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned write pointer and read pointer information match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no effect control command to be transmitted, and the process ends. On the other hand, if the data of the write pointer and the data of the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and each is temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next processing.

As the effect control command, the MODE data and the EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are sequentially transmitted to the effect control board P41. First, the MODE data is set in the effect command output port, which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform a reading operation is output. The main control board P40 subsequently outputs EVENT data, but after performing a process with a waiting time of 26 μs in order to secure a sufficient period until the effect control board P41 receives the MODE data, the MODE data. As in the case of transmission, the EVENT data is set to the output port and the strobe signal is output. When the effect control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates an effect control command reception interrupt and receives the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
In the external information output processing, information on the game status and security information such as error occurrence are output as signals from the external information output terminal 77 to the external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. This is the process to be performed (step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set in the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, a pulse signal that is on potential for a certain period is transmitted. Some of them continue to output the on-potential until the condition that the signal output ends is satisfied.

In the external information output processing, first, a signal related to the game state is generated. In order to make it possible to identify the type of specific gaming state as a signal related to the gaming state, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the operating state of the probability fluctuation function (probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (base state) are set. With reference to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big hit or small hit), if the game is controlled to each game state, the external output data is transmitted so that the corresponding data is transmitted. Update. Not limited to the ones exemplified here, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, an output signal is generated based on the information indicating the presence or absence of the fluctuation time shortening function and the information indicating that the case is a specific type of jackpot. There may be cases.

Further, as the output signal output by the external information output processing, not only the signal related to the game state but also the information based on the occurrence of the predetermined game result is output. For example, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed symbol signal") transmitted each time a special symbol variation display is executed and a stop display is displayed, or a start port switch (special figure 1 start port switch P712, special figure 2 start port switch). Every time a game ball is detected for various winning openings such as 722) and the large winning opening switch P752, or the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the winning balls for various winning openings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Every time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal transmitted to an external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and one signal is transmitted as a pulse signal having an on-potential of 128 ms. However, when a plurality of game results are continuously generated, one signal is transmitted. After the output of the pulse signal is finished, the off-potential output for a certain period is inserted, and then the pulse signal is output again.

Further, in the external signal output processing, the data in the storage area in which the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the above-mentioned abnormality detection processing (step 2032) is stored and the comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. If it is determined that it is necessary to output a security signal by calculating and comparing with, the output data set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal of the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the progress status and the game state of the game. (Step 2044)

The LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol hold indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), and the second. Special symbol hold indicator light P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol hold indicator light P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator light P54, status indicator light P55, right-handed indicator light (total) It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

The status indicator P55 collectively represents a plurality of indicator lamps related to the game status, and in detail, a special figure probabilistic indicator lamp indicating whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated, and an operation of the normal symbol probabilistic function. It refers to an indicator light such as a normal figure probability change indicator lamp that indicates the presence / absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated) and an error indicator lamp that indicates an error status.

In the LED output processing, the lighting data of the display unit in the main control display device is set in the output port by one byte for each interrupt processing, and the main control display device P50 is lit, and is updated every interrupt processing. Based on the value of the digit counter, select the LED of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interrupt, select the lighting pattern data according to the game situation, set it as display data, and control the lighting of each LED. It has become like.

That is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the main control display device P50 is set to the main control display device P50 by a dynamic lighting method that outputs lighting data in order using at least four interrupt processes for 32 LEDs. I'm in control.

Further, in the LED output processing, in addition to the LED display that the player should visually recognize as the main control display device P50, the lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, or the unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, if a flag indicating some game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. During the setting change, setting confirmation, and unrecoverable error, all the LEDs constituting the main control display device are turned off. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, the light emission display may be performed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be displayed during the period when the setting is being changed. It may be configured to turn on all the LEDs constituting the above.

(Outside control processing)
The out-of-area control process is related to the test signal output process (process for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine) for outputting the signal used for the test of the pachinko gaming machine and the display of the performance display device. It is configured by a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" indicates that the process is executed by the program of the storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area specified in the rules of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the test signal output process, processing is performed in which information related to the game result and the game state for output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko gaming machine P to an external test device is set in the output port. In the performance display processing, the game status is confirmed, the number of out balls, the ratio (base) between the number of out balls and the number of prize balls is calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. It is a process to output.

[Special design lottery]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of a "win / fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "variable pattern lottery".

(Win / Fail lottery)
The "win / fail lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not the result of operating the special electric accessory P755 is based on the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed. More simply, as a lottery result of the special symbol. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" is a lottery to decide. Depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine P, there are some that do not have a "small hit" as a lottery result of the winning / failing lottery. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have a "small hit" as a lottery result of a winning / failing lottery for one special symbol, a "small hit" is given as a lottery result of the other winning / failing lottery. It may be configured so as not to have a "hit".

The win / fail lottery uses a random number called a "win / fail random number" among the random numbers acquired and stored when the game ball enters the start opening (first start winning opening P711, second start winning opening P721, etc.). And a lottery. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, the range of random numbers (random number range) that can be taken by the winning / failing random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a win / fail lottery is performed, the result of the win / fail lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with the lottery table used for the win / fail lottery according to the game state and the set value (referred to as the "win / fail lottery table"). Perform processing.

FIG. 10 illustrates some lottery tables used for winning / failing lottery. FIG. 10A shows a winning / failing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a low probability state, and FIG. 10B shows a winning / failing lottery table with a set value of “1” and a high probability state. FIGS. 10 (C) and 10 (D) show the winning / failing lottery tables in the low-probability state and the high-probability state when the set value is “6”, respectively.

For example, in a situation where the winning / failing lottery is executed using the winning / failing lottery table of FIG. 10A, the winning / failing random number in the special symbol lottery this time is a random number corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), and is random. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the winning / failing lottery will be described.

First, it is determined whether or not the result of the first winning / failing lottery belongs to the big hit random value range (“0” to “327”). Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the jackpot to be determined is performed from the random number value "1500" of the hit / miss random number this time. At this time, since the subtraction result is "1172" and does not become a negative value, it is determined that the hit / fail random number this time does not belong to the random number value range of the jackpot.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous jackpot determination is compared with the outlier random number value range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area of the subsequent winning / failing lottery result of the winning / failing lottery table. .. More specifically, the random number value range "65043" that is out of the judgment target is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit / fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, the information corresponding to the "missing" result is stored as the winning / failing lottery result.

If a special symbol lottery is performed for the winning / failing random number "1500" this time in a high probability state, the winning / failing lottery table shown in FIG. 10 (B) will be drawn, and the random number value of the first big hit. It is determined whether or not it belongs to the range ("0" to "1639"). At this time, since the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the winning / failing random number and the random number value range is a negative value, the winning / failing lottery result is determined to be a “big hit”.

The presupposed pachinko gaming machine P employs a method of determining the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data acquired as the random number value with the random number value range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning symbol lottery and the variable pattern lottery, which will be described later. The lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the value matches the big hit random value with the acquired random value may be adopted, and the lottery method differs depending on the lottery content. May be adopted.

(Winning design lottery)
In the "winning symbol lottery", in response to the winning / failing lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above, the control contents related to the subsequent operation of the special electric accessory P755 and the lottery table of the variable pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14). ) Is a process of determining the stop display symbol of the special symbol as a lottery result required for switching.

FIG. 11 shows a jackpot symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (A)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is “big hit”, and when the winning / failing lottery result is “small hit”. , The small hit symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery (see FIG. 11 (B)), and the losing symbol lottery table used in the winning symbol lottery when the winning / failing lottery result is "missing" (Fig. 11 (Fig. 11 (B)). C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used for the winning symbol lottery is configured with the random number value range as "1000" ("0" to "999"), and when expressed by 2-byte data, the upper 1 byte is "". The data is represented by "0" to "3" and the lower 1 byte is represented by "0" to "255".

Explaining the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning / failing lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (upper byte is "1", lower byte is "144"). In the case of a winning symbol lottery for a symbol, the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. 11 (A) is used, and the "5R (5 rounds) probability variation 2" corresponding to the lower bytes "128" to "191" is used. Is obtained as a lottery result, and in the variable display of the special symbol, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device). The stop display is displayed on P52).

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, there are cases where "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device and cases where "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol. The contents of the round game (opening pattern, opening time, etc. of the big winning opening P751) may be different based on the stop display symbol, and the control contents in the specific game state to be transferred after the big hit game may be controlled to be different. It is possible. The allocation of controls in these jackpot games and specific game states is appropriately determined in order to realize playability according to the specifications (specs) of each pachinko gaming machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, it is described that the symbols summarized for each type of jackpot are displayed by the lottery shown in FIG. 11 (A). For example, in the previous example, the lottery result " After determining the type of jackpot called "5R probability variation 2", the type of jackpot is determined so that the stop display symbol that will execute the jackpot of the corresponding type is determined by performing another lottery from multiple patterns. , The stop display symbol may be determined and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two stages.

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the big hit symbol is determined by the winning symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. , The types of hit symbols that can be determined are configured to be different. More specifically, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, there is an increasing possibility that "10R probability variation 5" or "10R probability variation 8" will be determined in the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big hit with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easier to win a big hit that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B exemplifies a small hit symbol lottery table. The small hit symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "small hit", and the lottery method is the time of the above-mentioned big hit symbol lottery table. Is similar to.

In the small hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11B, most of them win the "small hit 1" symbol, and when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing lottery is "small hit". "Small hit 2" can be determined in a part of. The small hit symbol may be of one type, or may be configured so that three or more types of symbols can be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small hit symbols like the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game. In order to separate the small hit game that makes it easy to win a V in a specific area and the small hit game that makes it difficult to win a V in a pachinko gaming machine P that uses a small hit V as a game machine specification (spec), for example. The purpose is to differentiate the small hit symbols, or to make different small hit symbols in order to separate the types of specific games to be transferred after the execution of the big hit game after the V prize is executed.

FIG. 11C illustrates an out-of-design lottery table. The missed symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol lottery is "missing", and the lottery method is the jackpot symbol lottery described above for the first special symbol. It is the same as the time of the table, and the method is different for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11C shows only the missing symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, it is the first special symbol as the missing symbol lottery table. Only in this case, the lottery process is performed, and either "Wrong 1" or "Wrong 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "Wrong Answer 2" symbol is a missed symbol that is won with a probability of about 6.4% when the first special symbol is missed, and if "Wrong Answer 2" is won, it is likely to reach in the variable pattern lottery. It is configured to facilitate the determination of a variation pattern (variation time) with reference to a special lottery table (not shown). Therefore, the "Wrong Answer 2" may be referred to as a "reach-missing symbol" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, does not have a lottery table for the second special symbol, and even if it is any symbol random number, the missing symbol of 1 is determined. The comparison process itself of the table is omitted, and it is configured to store the missing symbol of 1. It should be noted that the lottery table that always wins one symbol may be used so as to win the out-of-order symbol.

(Variable pattern lottery)
The "variable pattern lottery" is a process of determining the variable display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed by lottery. In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol is used as the production time required to notify the effect of whether or not the effect display device P80 is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, what kind of big hit is. The fluctuation display time of is determined by using the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In FIG. 12, a gaming ball is launched into the left side region P501L of the gaming board mainly in a normal gaming state (low probability / low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P. Represents the "low-based medium-variable pattern lottery table" in the recommended state.

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of performing the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the ID is won. A typical example of the mode of effect of fluctuation is shown. The "variable time" is a variable display time value of the special symbol in the result of the target variable pattern lottery (variable pattern ID), and represents the time from the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display.

In FIG. 12, "Take 1 fluctuation" to "Take 4 fluctuation" indicate the number of holdings in the situation where the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is "missing", and the target special symbol (here). Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of the “holding N fluctuation”. That is, the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol in the low base state is configured to make the variation pattern table to be used different depending on the number of reservations. If a game ball enters the starting winning opening in a state where there is no hold, it is temporarily stored as a hold for processing, so a fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Holding 1 fluctuation". To.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variable pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of holdings, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of holdings. Although not shown, if "Wrong Answer 2 (Wrong Answer 2)" is determined as a result of the symbol lottery, even if it is the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, the variation of 1 does not depend on the number of holdings. It is configured to perform a variation pattern lottery using a pattern table (variation pattern table for Wrong Answer 2).

“10R probability variation”, “5R probability variation”, “10R normal”, and “5R normal” in FIG. 12 indicate a variation pattern table used for a variation pattern lottery at the time of a big hit in a low base state, and the result of the winning / failing lottery. Is a "big hit", indicating that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting a variable pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the main player of the game in the low base state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form that does not depend on the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol is also expressed. , There may be a plurality of patterns depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the fluctuation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. 12. As a specific example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the random number of the fluctuation pattern is "30000" and the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation is 3 (the number of reserved balls is 2 after the start of the fluctuation). The situation in which the result of the winning / failing lottery and the winning symbol lottery are "missing 1" will be described.

First, since the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "holding 3 fluctuation" is used. The lottery process is the same as the lottery process in the winning / failing lottery described above, and the variable pattern random number and the random number value range corresponding to the variable pattern ID of each lottery result are compared (subtracted) to determine whether or not the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number value range at the timing of the normal fluctuation B of ID "2" becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery, which is special. After the variation display for 7 seconds is performed as the variation display of the symbol, the misaligned symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state is symmetrical to that of the fluctuation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is configured to have a table and a table for each jackpot symbol at the time of jackpot. In addition, although it is configured in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and is determined in the low base state and the high base state. It is possible to configure the variation patterns to have very few overlaps or no overlaps at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the shortest fluctuation time of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is obtained as the lottery result of the "ho 3 fluctuation" and "ho 4 fluctuation" of the second special symbol at the time of off. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID "12") can be determined.

Further, as a feature point of the fluctuation pattern in the high base state, the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so that the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern ID “4” for 10 seconds is always determined. The reason why the first special symbol is composed of the fluctuation of 10 seconds is that the player profit is large when the jackpot is hit in the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot symbols that shift to the probability fluctuation state as a specific game state), and by prioritizing and implementing a large number of variation displays corresponding to the second special symbol, a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. The purpose is to be able to acquire. Further, even when there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage of the big hit game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol is based on the fact that the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal gaming state (low base state) until the end of the specific gaming state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, avoiding variable display, and the second in the high base state. It is also an object to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the hold of the first special symbol in a low base state with respect to the amount of game balls used to generate the hold of the special symbol.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table in a limited period and represents a special variation pattern table referenced in a specific period. FIG. 14 comprehensively describes a special fluctuation pattern table for three periods as an example of a special fluctuation pattern table provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

More specifically, in FIG. 14, the period from the first fluctuation to the fourth fluctuation after the big hit (the so-called "holding ream" (reserved inner ream), in which the four holdings existing at the time of the big hit become a big hit, is called. It is easy to select the reach fluctuation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the nth to mth fluctuations after the big hit and the "reserved inner consecutive villa table" (for IDs "51" and "71") referred to in the period). It is referred to in the high frequency reach table (for IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the final fluctuation display in the high base state, and the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that the "result fluctuation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") to be used is provided in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P.

Such a special variation pattern table referred to in a limited period is referred to as a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to in a predetermined period after the big hit game (operation of special electric accessory, in other words, operation of continuous accessory operation device). are doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to make the presence or absence of reference different depending on the type of jackpot (big hit symbol), and the reference period can be set in a specific period after the operation of the special electric accessory based on the small hit game. It can also be configured to be different. What kind of special fluctuation pattern table is referred to under what circumstances can be appropriately set for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the examples, and the details should be explained separately if necessary. And.

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that controls the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, will be described. The operation control of the effect control board P41 has few restrictions on the type test of the gaming machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, and is therefore described in the following description. It is not limited only to the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board-main loop processing]
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the power-on process (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41. Here, the details of the power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started on the effect control board P41 of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the initial setting process related to the operation of the CPU, which is an arithmetic unit provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process appropriately performs the settings necessary for the subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details are omitted. However, regarding the effect that was executed in the state where the power was cut off last time, the main control board P40 Since there is a time lag between the completion of the power-on process (FIG. 7) and the power-on process of the effect control board (FIG. 15), if the effect is restored to the effect before the power failure after the power is restored, the operation of the main control board P40 will occur. Since there is a risk of misalignment, in the initial processing when the effect control board P41 is restored from power failure, the effect information and the like are often initialized so that the effect that was executed before the power failure is not executed (“effect”. Control board reset ", called" sub reset ").

(Main loop of production control board)
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the process shifts to the main loop process after the initial setting process. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the time of the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image on the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is to draw 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to about 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is configured to be performed once in a cycle of 16 ms, which is about half of the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop process of the effect control board P41, first, the watchdog timer for detecting the runaway of the CPU is cleared (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, the input port monitoring process is executed (step 4008). The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later. However, the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is a 16 ms cycle monitoring. Therefore, the monitoring of the input of the switch or the like, which is a necessary monitoring target on the system, is limited, and the monitoring of the input of the sensors or the like necessary for the effect control of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modification, the sensors to be monitored in the production may be confirmed by the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

Similar to the input port confirmation process on the main control board, the content to be executed in the input port monitoring process is the process of generating and storing level data from the input data of various sensors and storing the rising (falling) data. Will be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs the effect device control process (step 4010) to execute control related to the effect operation other than the effect display device P80 (image display). Examples of the effect device controlled in this process include a lamp P82 (“board lamp (P550)” and “frame lamp (P350)”), a speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), and an effect movable accessory P560. For these effect devices, an effect operation command corresponding to the effect content determined to be executed by a process such as an effect control process (step 4012) described later is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

Since the output of the effect operation command to the various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) needs to be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , A signal transmitted from the image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 to the effect control board P41 at regular intervals and a signal for forcibly synchronizing are received (the above-mentioned input port monitoring process). (Received in) as an opportunity to synchronize with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and output an effect operation command to various effect devices.

As for the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 in the effect device, the effect set in this process is set because the drive means of the effect movable accessory P560 needs to be controlled in a shorter cycle. Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, the sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41 described later.

Next, the effect control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop process of the effect control board P41 will be described. In the effect control process, the flag established based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process described later and the information of the received effect control command itself (lottery result ID of special symbol lottery, etc.) ), Input port monitoring process (step 4008), interrupt process (FIG. 16), and other processes. Is.

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the submodule process for the corresponding effect decision. As an example of the effect content determined here, the process of determining the variation effect corresponding to one change of the special symbol based on the commands (win / fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery. (Processing to determine the content of the notice and reach, the decorative pattern to be stopped, etc.), and the look-ahead effect for the newly generated hold based on the hold number information and pre-judgment information sent when the hold occurs (" The pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute the "pre-judgment effect") and the effect content during the special game are determined based on the information sent as the effect control command when the special game (big hit or small hit) is executed. There is a special game production content determination process to be performed.

Further, the effect control process is not only the process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also the error display content determination process (error transmitted from the main control board) when an error is detected on the effect control board P41. (Including the process of determining the error display content based on information), adjusting the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the input operation of the effect button P381, the cross key P383, etc., which is the effect operation means P81 by the player, and the lamp P82. It also executes the determination of the effect contents such as the adjustment of the amount of light for changing the emission brightness of the and the customization of the effect contents and the effect determination tendency.

It should be noted that, as for the process of determining various effect contents performed in the sub-module process called in the effect control process, specifications specific to each gaming machine are often used, so the explanation is omitted and the subject of the invention is made. When the processing having a feature is executed in the pachinko gaming machine P, the details will be described in the description of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis process (step 4014) will be described as the final process of the main loop process.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the information corresponding to the effect control command to be used for determining the effect content in the above-mentioned effect control process. And set the flag. In this processing, it is necessary to determine the processing content according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the MODE data and EVENT data which are the effect control commands, and the effect control command is responded to. Processing is executed.

As for the effect control command, one command (MODE data and EVENT data) may be transmitted for each interrupt process (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40. Until the main loop processing cycle (16 ms) of the board P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as much as possible (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. The interrupt processing on the effect control board P41 is different from the interrupt processing on the main control board, and has a plurality of interrupt processing started at different execution triggers (see FIGS. 16A and 16B). Priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and when an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher interrupt process is executed even while the interrupt process is being executed. Is controlled by. In this description, the effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16 (A)) and the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) will be described as representatives.

(Effect control timer interrupt processing)
The effect control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16A) is an interrupt process executed in a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

The port input / output process (step 5002) is performed by inputting a sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 or another sensor (input sensor of the effect operation means P81) from the input port of the effect control board P41. From the output port to the process of generating and storing level data and rising data from the output port, and driving the effect movable accessory P560 drive means (such as solenoids and stepping motors) according to the operation pattern set in the effect device control process. The process of outputting a signal is executed. When data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update process for each timer is completed, a comparison operation with the comparison value is performed to determine whether or not a switching condition for the effect operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the effect content in the effect control process (step 4012). Performs the process of storing the flag in the storage area.

In the sensor monitoring process (step 5006), the sensor detection information related to the switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the effect operation switching condition of the effect movable accessory P560 is satisfied, is obtained from the sensor detection data generated by the port input / output process. It is determined whether or not the occurrence of the above is generated, a process of switching the table of the operation pattern is performed, and a process of setting a condition flag for determining the effect content is performed in the effect control process (step 4012).

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for determining whether or not the effect switching condition is satisfied based on the input of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input / output process (step 5002) and the rise data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous off to the current on) are used for the effect. It is determined whether or not the operation means P81 is operated and the operation mode is determined.

For example, when the rising data is generated as the input information for the effect operation means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. .. If the input is judged only by the rising data, it may be erroneously detected due to electrical noise and the effect operation may be switched. Therefore, after the rising data is generated, the level data (on-data) is input multiple times. It may be determined that the player operation (may be expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") for the effect operation means P81 triggered by the continuous operation.

Further, when the on-input level data is detected 500 times in succession, that is, when it is determined that the effect operating means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined to be a "long press (long press)" operation. It is configured to be treated as a special operation. In addition, the fall data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous on to the off this time) may be electrically detected as noise when determining whether or not to perform the "long press (long press)" operation and whether to continue. In this case as well, as in the case of the above-mentioned false detection prevention measures, after the fall data is detected, the input of the "long press (long press)" operation is input based on the detection of multiple level data (off data) inputs. It may be used to determine the end.

Then, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means once at regular intervals (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the process of assuming that there was a "single push (single pull)" input operation on P81, and in this way, with a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation as an opportunity, It is called an "automatic continuous hit" operation that the repeated processing is executed assuming that the "single push" operation has been performed. The "automatic continuous striking" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but can be performed by simultaneously operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 or by operating an on / off operation such as a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button. It is also possible to adopt a method in which it is considered that the "automatic continuous hitting" operation is executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

The input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as an effective operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

The multitasking process (step 5010) is the effect control generated this time according to the value of the task counter (updated between the values "0" and "15") that is updated every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed. This is a process performed by different processing contents to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate in a cycle of 16 ms, and the process at each counter value is configured to be executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop process. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on the signal transmitted from the image control board P42 (input information is generated by port input / output processing), and an image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operating status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) includes an image control command (“inter-sub command”) so that the CPU of the image control board P42 executes an image display according to the effect content determined by the effect control process P41. This is a process of transmitting (sometimes called) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the staging control board P41 may be made of the same board, they are described as the image control board P42 in the present specification for convenience.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the effect control board P41 comprises an image control command consisting of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying a pattern of display content, and the image control board P42 has an image control command. It is configured to send.

The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a prerequisite, is configured to transmit image control commands by the effect control timer interrupt process, but the transmission / reception of commands between the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 is separately performed. It is also possible to provide interrupt processing to perform transmission and reception.

(Direction control command reception interrupt)
The effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16 (B)) outputs a strobe signal in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and outputs the strobe signal to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process generated when P41 receives a signal.

When the effect control board P41 starts the effect control command reception interrupt, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step). 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data is completed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the effect control command (combination of MODE data and EVENT data) of 1 is completed (step 5506). The effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40 is composed of "1" and "0" for specific bits in the 1-byte data.

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, a process of storing the contents of the effect control command received this time is normally performed in the lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if it is indicated that a specific bit part of the lower 1 byte of the storage area of the current temporary buffer data is MODE data before the update, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1 byte storage area. After the data is stored, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of the completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not the specific bit in the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is the data indicating the EVENT data, and it is determined that the data is the EVENT data. In that case, the process proceeds to the next process assuming that the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506YES), and when it is determined that the data is MODE data (step 5506NO), the EVENT data is transmitted from the main control board P40. Until the strobe signal based on the above is received, the effect control command reception interrupt is exited, other processing is performed, and the process waits.

When it is determined in step 5506 that the reception of the effect control command is completed, it is determined whether or not the transmitted effect control command is normal (step 5508). This process is determined based on, for example, whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in the storage area for storing the received effect control command so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process. In case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic production of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base), and FIG. 18 shows a reach effect with a high expectation of being a big hit. It is a figure showing the situation. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during the operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). It is a figure that was made.

(Example of effect display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a symbol variation display (during a stop display of a decorative symbol) during a normal game (low probability / low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in a manner that can be clearly confirmed by the player. These three symbols are called "decorative symbols (P801)" (also called "designation"), and are dramatic displays displayed in response to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation of the special symbols. It is displayed in a variable manner according to the display. Although it is represented only by numbers in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decorative image such as a character image. Further, when it is configured to display each number with a decorative image, the decorative image and the display mode of each number may be different depending on the game state. With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the current gaming state.

The decorative symbol P801 is subjected to variable display as one effect for one variation display of the special symbol (one special symbol lottery), except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative symbol P801 is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (transparently displayed or hidden in some cases) at high speed, and the image of the animation or effect is displayed. A production called "notice" will be used to raise expectations for the acquisition of rights to big hit games.

The decorative symbol P801 shown in FIG. 17 is scrolled in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left symbol (P801a), the right symbol (P801c), and the middle symbol (P801b) are displayed in this order. The stop display symbol determined by the effect control board P41 is stopped and displayed for each symbol row. Generally, when three decorative symbols P801 are stopped and displayed in the same manner (doublet), it is provided to inform the effect that it is a big hit. Further, a state in which one symbol is displayed in a variable manner while another symbol is displayed, for example, the left symbol before the middle symbol P801b, which is the last symbol to stop (also referred to as “final stop symbol”), stops. The state in which the right symbol is displayed with the same symbol (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state" or "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the variable display mode is not limited to the vertical direction, and the front-back direction (horizontal direction and depth) are used. The scroll display operation may be performed in the (diagonal) direction, or the rotation operation may be performed on the spot without scrolling and the switching display may be performed in order.

Further, the decorative symbol P801 has a case where the stop display is performed a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbol once. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display indicating the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same time as the stop display symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The stop display at a timing other than the above is called "temporary stop (display)". In addition, the stop display at the same time as the stop display of the special symbol may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display (main stop) of the decorative symbol P801, and the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped to the extent that it is not recognized as fixed. It is configured to move, move in a direction such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "sway fluctuation" in addition to the temporary stop.

After the decorative symbol P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display may be repeated again. Generally, the re-variation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot symbol are temporarily stopped is called "pseudo-variation (pseudo-ream)" effect. , The re-variation that may change the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped is called "promotion (variation)" effect. When the promotion effect is executed, it may be configured not to be changed to a jackpot symbol that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot symbol, or may be configured not to be changed to a missed jack symbol.

In addition, when the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative symbol that is not displayed during the normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804) ”(special symbol). The special design has a meaning for each symbol, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot is executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-variation effect is performed, or a specific reach effect (a reach mode). The notice effect displayed in the case) suggests that the execution is performed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) that is temporarily stopped at the end, or one of the left symbol P801a, the middle symbol P801b, and the right symbol P801c are all substituted. A special symbol may be temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol.

<< Simple drawing (mini drawing) >>
In the upper right of the screen, three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative symbol P801 are displayed. This symbol is also called "simple design (P802)"("simplifieddesign") or "mini design", and like the above-mentioned "decorative design", it shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design. It is displayed as a display object.

The simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design" in that the special design showing the result of the special lottery is a special design even when the decorative design P801 is not stopped and displayed. In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, the stop display is always performed once for each special symbol lottery.

Further, the variable display of the simplified design P802 may be configured to form the same reach mode when the above-mentioned decorative symbol P801 has the reach mode, and the result of the special symbol lottery is notified. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, even if a simple variable display method is adopted, such as a constant display switching is performed until the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

<< Hold display area >>
A hold display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the hold display area P810, the hold object P811 corresponding to the hold (random value) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the right of the special symbol lottery acquired by the player. In the example of FIG. 17, three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the special symbol lottery is executed (that is, the earlier hold) is displayed at a position closer to the substantially center direction at the bottom of the screen, and the hold display area P810 is displayed. The display position of the reserved object located on the far right side of is called "Ho 1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, "Ho 2 (display area)", "Ho 3 (display area)", and "Ho 4 (ho 4) Display area) ".

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the hold display area P810, an object having substantially the same mode as the hold object P811 of the hold display area P810 is displayed at a higher position than the hold object P811. This display area continuously displays the hold display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the start of the current special symbol change display from the hold display area, and is referred to as "the change object display area (P812)". .. Further, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is referred to as "the variable object (P813)", but may be referred to as "the pending display" or the like, and is differentiated from the reserved object P811 in the reserved display area P810. Therefore, the acronym "corresponding" is added.

The display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the reserved object P811, and the reserved display accompanying the start of the variable movement is moved and displayed in the variable object display area P812. At that time, the shape may be changed or disappeared (hidden). Further, the variable object P813 may be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same manner as the hold display in the hold change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing in the middle of the change display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially center position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of holdings of the first special symbol and the number of holdings of the second special symbol, and are called "simple holding display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. ..

(Look-ahead production)
《Pending change look-ahead》
Further, in FIG. 17, the hold object P811 in the hold 3 display area in the hold display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the hold object P811 in the display areas of the hold 2 and the hold 1. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, is configured so that the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 3 is more likely to be a big hit than the display mode of the hold object P811 of the hold 2. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold object P811 and displaying it for a specific hold is called "hold change (look-ahead)".

It should be noted that the object is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 17, but has a plurality of types of change modes, each of which is configured so that the possibility of a big hit (expectation degree) can be different, and the reserved object P811 is stepwise. The display mode of the above may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "hold change (look-ahead)", when the random value stored as hold is determined as the execution target of the effect, the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the execution target of the effect is started. A production that suggests that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit on hold, which was the target of the production prior to the execution of the production, is called a "look-ahead effect" (sometimes referred to as a "pre-judgment effect"). I'm out.

Then, when the "look-ahead effect" is executed, the hold determined as the hold for which the effect is executed may be referred to as "look-ahead target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", or the like. , The change display of the special symbol based on the look-ahead target hold is referred to as "look-ahead target change", "trigger change", "criminal change" and the like.

Here, as a "look-ahead effect", some typical ones that can be adopted in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be illustrated.

《Chance look ahead》
In "chance pre-reading", in the variation display of the decorative symbol P801 until the fluctuation of the pre-reading target variation is started, the stop display symbol of the decorative symbol P801 according to a predetermined rule is stopped display (or provisional stop display). It is a production to be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative symbol P801 predetermined as a chance eye, (a) when the color of the numerical part of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by combining only the same symbols, (b). When the stop symbols of decorative symbols such as "1", "2", "3", "5", "4", and "3" are displayed in a regular stop display mode such as in order (forward order, reverse order). (C) When a special number such as "7" or a symbol different from the number such as "destination" is stopped and displayed as a stop display symbol of the middle symbol.

《Pre-reading of movable characters》
"Pre-reading the effect movable accessory" reads ahead the effect movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). It is a production that makes a lively operation from the start of the fluctuation according to the effect operation pattern, straddling the variation until the variation display of the target variation is started or the look-ahead target variation.

《Zone transition look-ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" shifts to a special effect mode (called "zone") in the change display of the special symbol before the look-ahead target change starts, and is special until the change display that becomes the look-ahead target change. It is a look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a different effect mode. For example, "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading-> big hit" or "display normal background-> display background when pre-reading-> stop off symbol and return to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach production)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect with a high expectation of becoming a big hit is being performed. As described above, the "reach effect" is a situation in which decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than one decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more symbol is displayed. It refers to the production in a state where it is notified that a big hit will occur if the vehicle stops in the same mode.

In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is a premise, in many cases, the specifications are such that the three decorative symbols P801 have the same stop display mode via the reach effect to notify the jackpot.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c of the decorative symbol are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the symbols of the changing medium symbol row. It shows a situation where the "4" symbol vibrates violently and if it switches to "5", it becomes a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the display of the left symbol and the right symbol “5” of the decorative symbol is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of the stop display of FIG. 17, and the middle symbol in the variable display is displayed. The decorative symbol P801b in the column is displayed larger than the decorative symbol P801 at the time of stop display and is highlighted. The small decorative symbol corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c at this time may be referred to as a "evacuation symbol (P803)", a "reach symbol", or the like. In the reach effect, in addition to the illustrated example, it is notified whether or not the animation of the notice effect (reach effect) displayed along with the variable display of the decorative pattern will be a big hit depending on the end. In some cases, the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c that have already been temporarily stopped are displayed (or hidden) in a smaller size than the retracted symbol P803 so that the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to is enhanced. ing.

Further, a gaming machine or the like in which the number of decorative symbols P801 displayed is not three is known, and there is also a multi-line reach or the like that forms a reach mode of a plurality of rows at the same time, but a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the reach effect, there is a reach effect called "full rotation reach" in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variablely displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for reach production, "a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same mode, and a state in which it is notified that a big hit will occur if one more symbol stops in the same mode". Although the situation is different, full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

Further, in FIG. 18, the “effect setting display area (P850)” is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, the volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The effect setting display area P850 includes a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the gaming machine P, a light amount adjusting function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decorative lamp P82 of the gaming machine P, and an effect mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and the change status of the effect mode change function for changing the type of the notice effect to be generated and the frequency of occurrence of the advance notice effect.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, and is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation related to the various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function) described above. It is displayed, and for example, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 18 by operating the cross key P383 in the left-right direction. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the right button of the cross key P383 is further operated by the player, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value starts from "3". It has come to change to "4".

Further, in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, when adjusting the amount of light, the change operation is configured to be performed by operating the cross key P383 in the vertical direction, and the effect mode change function is configured according to the operation of the effect button. An example is given in which the production modes are switched in a predetermined order. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of the effect during the game, and can be appropriately adopted in addition to the illustrated setting change method.

Further, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and a period during which the player's effect setting operation is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is invalidated.

(Example of production display during big hit game)
Subsequently, based on FIG. 19, a display mode of the effect in a state where the big hit game is being executed on the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P will be described.

<< Production display showing the type of jackpot >>
At the lower left of the screen and the upper right of the screen of FIG. 19, the decorative symbol P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. The lower left of the screen displays the decorative symbol P801 (also referred to as "big hit design (P805)") of 1 in a display mode smaller than the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, as in the case of executing the reach effect described above, and the upper right of the screen. Continues to display the simplified drawing P802 displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is completed.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the type of jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative symbol P801 that triggered the occurrence of the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). It suggests the degree of expectation of the game and the game state (normal game state) after the big hit. Therefore, by displaying the decorative symbols (big hit design P805, simple symbol P802) that triggered the execution of the jackpot in this way, the type of jackpot and the number of game balls expected to be acquired can be determined even during the jackpot game. It is possible to suggest.

Further, as a display indicating the type of the jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed under the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"). The character "MAX" is written in the center of P821. The icon P821 in the figure is a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that the maximum round jackpot game possessed by the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "big hit icon" or a "ream villa (display) icon", and each time a specific game state and a big hit game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively side by side, so-called "ream villa". It is an effect display that informs the player how many times and what kind of jackpot has been won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, "○○ bonus!" (Notifying the maximum round jackpot) and "○○ bonus!" By displaying "△△ chance" (suggesting a big hit that is not the maximum round), an effect of notifying the player of the type of big hit is executed.

In addition, even if it is suggested that the jackpot is a big hit such as "△△ chance" where the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the jackpot is set as "extra bonus! + ○ round" during the jackpot round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "big hit promotion effect" such as notifying that it is a big hit in the maximum round.

In addition, the "big hit promotion effect" is also used when it is suggested that a big hit game that shifts to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified type of big hit is being executed. There are times. For example, from the production of a big hit game (called "non-probable variable big hit" or "normal big hit") that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the big hit game, the big hit game ("" There is a production display such that the production display is switched to the production of "probability change jackpot" and "specific jackpot").

<< Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game >>
Next, when the jackpot game is executed, the effect display showing the progress of the jackpot game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing a big hit effect display, a “round display (P820)” executed by a character string display of “ROUND_〇” at the upper left of the screen, and a character string display of “TOTAL_〇〇pt” at the lower right of the screen. Examples include the "acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in, and the "count display (P825)" displayed by 10 circular image objects in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed in addition to these displays during the big hit game.

《Round display》
The "round display (P820)" is a display indicating the number of rounds of the round game (unit game) being executed during the big hit game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which a round game of the sixth round is being executed.

The "round display (p820)" does not necessarily have to be synchronized with the number of execution rounds during the actual jackpot game. For example, in the above-mentioned "small hit V" specifications, the small hit game may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the big hit game executed after winning the V may be treated as the second round. Further, in another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with the transition to the easy entry state for a short time, the value of the "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening is not updated. Only when the opening pattern of is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball for a long time, it may be treated as a substantially executed round "substantial round".

《Display the number of acquired balls》
The "number of acquired balls display (P822)" sandwiches the specific game with the "display of the number of acquired balls (P823 * not shown)" that displays the number of game balls accumulated in one big hit game being executed. There is a type such as "cumulative acquired ball number display (824)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired in a plurality of big hits. FIG. 19 shows an example in which the “cumulative number of acquired balls display (P824)”, which is a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, is displayed. The "big hit winning ball number display (P823)" and the "cumulative winning ball number display (P824)" may be displayed simultaneously in parallel.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the number of balls entered into the big prize opening P751 during the big hit game is displayed for the "number of acquired balls display (P822)". However, as the cumulative target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payouts based on the winning balls to the general winning opening P731 and the second starting winning opening P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 are cumulatively added. You may.

Further, as another modification, the display period of the "acquired ball number display (P822)" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the execution of the specific game, or the "acquired ball number display (P822)". The addition period of the cumulative prize ball payout number may be configured to be extended not only during the big hit game but also during the specific game or the small hit game.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, in addition to the "number of acquired balls displayed (P822)", the accumulated number of prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in special situations such as when the number of payouts is reached, it is possible to execute the "separated number of acquired balls display" effect in addition to the "acquired ball number display" to notify the player (for example, "GET 10000! ! ”).

《Count display》
The "count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the large winning opening P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. It is a display indicating whether or not the ball has entered the large winning opening P751. The former is displayed as a shaded circular object in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object as a two-column object display at a substantially center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the game of the sixth round, 5 balls have already been entered into the big winning opening (displayed as a white circular object), and 5 more balls can be entered (with a shaded circular object). Display) is indicated by the count display P825. The display of the count display P825 is reset to the initial mode each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the big hit game, the number of game balls exceeds the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 in succession to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning opening P751 depending on the flow condition of the game balls. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning of the number of game balls exceeding such a closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over prize" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, or a special light emission of the effect lamp P82 or a special sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83. It may be notified by such means. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned acquired ball number display P822, the number of prize balls paid out based on the prize that is the “over prize” may be added or excluded from the addition.

<< Other production display during big hit game >>
Next, another effect display in which the effect display is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the above-mentioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decorative design (big hit design P805) at the lower left of the screen is "selected music display (P854)" indicating the title of the music being played during the current big hit game. .. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played by operating the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 during the first and second rounds during the big hit game. Has specifications. Regarding the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image "Can be changed with the (up) (down) key" is displayed in the vicinity of the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the selection of the effect during such a big hit game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round effect and select the effect (effect mode) during the specific game after the big hit game (collectively). (Called "Production Customized Display (P853)"), detailed explanations of them are omitted.

Finally, the "right-handed" and right-handed arrow symbols displayed at the bottom of the simplified drawing P802 at the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "separate notification (P830)" (also called "recommended launch position notification"). Is. In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, since it is recommended to launch a game ball into the right area P501R of the game area during the big hit game, "right-handed notification (P832)" ("right-handed"). (Display of the character string and the right arrow symbol) is being executed.

The "separate notification" may be displayed not only during the big hit game but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state is switched (occurrence / end of a big hit or generation / end of a specific game state), a larger size display than the separate notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 so that the player can easily recognize it. Is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen or the like to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next gaming state.

In addition, in the "separation notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first distribution notification image" ("right-handed large display (P831)", " Left-handed large display (P833) "), and the recommended firing position in the game state during the big hit game or the specific game state is displayed for almost the entire period during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "notification image" ("right-handed small display (P832)", "left-handed small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "striking notification (P830)", when a situation in which a game ball is launched at a position other than the recommended launch position is detected, for example, the left area of the game area during a big hit. "Left-handed warning notice" ("Right-handed warning (P835)" that alerts the player that the game ball should be fired in the right area P501R of the game area when the game ball is fired in P501L. ) To display a message such as "Please hit right". In a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, the "right-handed warning notification" ("left-handed warning notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during a specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability / high base). Although a wide variety of production displays are shown in the figure, the explanations for those explained in the above explanation are omitted, and the production displays that have not been explained so far and the differences from the above explanations. An explanation will be given regarding the effect display having.

First, as the effect display that has not been explained so far, the "effect mode display (P840)" and the "remaining game count display (P841)" will be described as the effect display during the specific game state.

《Production mode display》
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display showing the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display indicating that the advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is drawn by the state information called the effect mode. .. When the effect mode display is different, the types of advance notice effects that are visually recognized by the player are generally made so that the impression given to the appearance is significantly different, although there are some common advance notice effects. .. In FIG. 20, the display "RUSH_MODE" is made, and the display indicating that the gaming state in the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P is "ST (probability of cutting the number of times)" (high probability / high base state) is displayed. ing.

In addition to notifying the effect mode in the specific game state, the "effect mode display (P840)" may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or one game. When the state has a plurality of effect modes, the display may be temporarily performed each time the condition for switching the effect mode is satisfied, or may be continuously performed until the effect mode ends.

《Display the number of remaining games》
The "remaining game count display (P841)" is the number of variable display of the special symbol until the end of the specific game state (the number of special symbol lottery) and the variable display of the special symbol until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display of "remaining_56" is executed at the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (number of times cut probability change)" is performed until 56 more special symbol lottery is executed. Notify the person.

Next, in the effect display example of the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, a display different from the effect display example in the other game states described above will be described.

<< Decorative design (specific game state) >>
In the center of the screen of FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed. In the effect display example of the decorative symbol P801 in the specific game state of FIG. 20, the display of the decorative symbol P801 is displayed smaller than that of the decorative symbol P801 of the effect display example in the normal gaming state of FIG. 20.

In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining number of games display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed at the lower part of the screen. P854 and P824 for displaying the number of acquired balls are performed. In the specific gaming state, such an additional display that is not displayed in the normal gaming state (low probability / low base state) is performed. Therefore, if the decorative symbol P801 is displayed in the same size as the normal gaming state, the stop display is displayed. At this time, the display of some symbols may overlap with a part of each display, and there is a possibility that the visibility of the stop display symbol may decrease. The display of the decorative design P801 is made small and simplified so that Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative symbol P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like attached to a number indicating the symbol.

<< Hold display area (specific game state) >>
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen of FIG. 20, as the display of the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 of the specific game state, from the front side of the screen toward the depth direction, from "ho 1" to "ho 1". A display area for the reserved object of "Holding 4" is provided. The display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the effect mode state of "RUSH_MODE".

When the variation display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new variation starts in the state, the display of the reserved object P811 located at the bottom of FIG. 20 disappears, and the display of the reserved object P811 lined up in the back moves to the front. The display is controlled so that the display becomes large.

In addition, although not shown, the "result display effect", which is an important effect to be displayed during a specific game, will be described.

<< Result display production >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the "result display effect", the game is mainly performed when the final change of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold generated during the specific game state disappears. It is a production performed at the timing when a person recognizes that the "renso" state has ended, and information on how many big hit games have been won in the so-called "renso" state and how many game balls in total. It is a production that notifies the player whether or not the player has won (corresponding to the display of the number of acquired balls).

[This Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technology. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technique are designated by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the "small hit V" described in the description of the typical gaming machine specifications ("specs") of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine, and is small. By passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 after the execution of the big hit game (or during the small hit game) according to the "base state" in the normal game state when the hit (or big hit) game is started. Differentiate the content of the "specific game state" (especially the length of the period for maintaining the "base state" to the "high base state") in the normal game state (after the execution of the jackpot game based on the activated accessory continuous operation device). This is a pachinko gaming machine that offers new game features.

In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the normal gaming state is immediately after the "specific gaming state" (low probability / high base state) ends, and is controlled to the "(low probability /) low base state". If you acquire the right to a small hit (or a big hit) in the special symbol hold (holding the second special symbol) that is the main body of the game in the specific game state that is digested while you are playing, after the special game state (big hit game) By configuring the period for maintaining the specific gaming state (low probability / high base state) as the gaming state so that the next small hit (or big hit) can be obtained substantially, the small hits for two times (substantially two small hits) It adopts the characteristic playability of being able to obtain the right of (big hit).

The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment having the above-mentioned characteristics will be described in detail below.

(Board composition)
First, the configuration of the board surface configuration (configuration of the game area) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment can be implemented with almost the same board configuration as the presupposed pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has a configuration in which a specific area P760 is provided inside the large winning opening (attacker) P751 in order to adopt the playability (specs) described later. In addition, as long as it is a change that does not change the playability disclosed below (or a change that is limited to a minor change), a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate.

(spec)
Next, the playability (specs) of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described. In this explanation, only the specifications related to "Setting 1" will be described for the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball ejection performance, but various numerical values related to other setting values will be set as appropriate. Is.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the winning / fail lottery probability is set to 1/269 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the small hit probability 1 / 9.1 (only the second special symbol). The number of prize balls is 4 for the 1st start winning opening (1st starting opening) P711, 3 for the 2nd starting winning opening (2nd starting opening) P721, and 3 for the left general winning opening P731L. The right general winning opening P731R is set to 2 balls, and the large winning opening (attacker) P751 is set to 15 balls.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is used. Priority is given to variable display. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small hit" as a result of the special symbol lottery, but the first special symbol may be configured to have a "small hit". It is possible. If the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment are not lost, the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied or the first special symbol priority digestion control may be applied as a modification, not limited to the second special symbol priority digestion control. Needless to say, it is possible to apply a ball entry order digestion control that preferentially digests the ball that has entered first.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment adopts the playability (spec) called "small hit V" explained as a prerequisite technology, and is special except when it becomes a "big hit" in the special symbol lottery. A "small hit" is obtained in the symbol lottery, and the game ball passes through the specific area P760 inside the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game to be executed thereafter. It is a specification to be executed. In this embodiment, in the case of developing from a small hit game to a big hit game, a series of special game states from the start of the small hit game to the end of the big hit game are referred to as "small hit V" or "small hit development big hit". And so on.

The types of big hits (including small hit V) in the special gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment are 3 round big hit (1st special symbol big hit) and 10 round big hit (2nd special symbol big hit or small hit V). ) Is provided. Further, regarding the specific game which is an advantageous normal game state, the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment does not have a probability fluctuation function, and has an electric chew support function (electric support) function after various big hits (including small hit V). A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating.

Further, in the detailed control example described later, the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is predetermined in the period of the specific game and / or the period in which a maximum of four variable display of the remaining hold after the end of the specific game is displayed. The special variation pattern table (limited frequency pattern table) is referred to at the same timing, and the variation pattern for securing the variation display time of the special symbol as needed is selected. As for the timing of referring to, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the execution of the special game are counted and stored separately, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. When the stored information of the number of fluctuations stored corresponding to each at the start of fluctuation is a specific value, the special fluctuation pattern table for the first special symbol or the special fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol can be referred to. There is.

(Game flow)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 21, the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described. The game flow shown in FIG. 21 is a flow assuming a case where a game (normal game) as designed by the player is executed. The game flow when a game (abnormal game, irregular game) ignoring the design intention of the player is executed may not apply to the situation shown in FIG. 21, but the abnormal game The explanation of is omitted.

First, in the "normal game (low probability / low base state)" of FIG. 21, the player fires the game ball toward the left side region P501L where the game ball can enter the first start winning opening P711. Play the game with the so-called "left-handed"). When the game ball wins the first start winning opening, a special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed, and if the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, "big hit (special figure 1)" is given. It is executed (FIG. 21 (A)). The state surrounded by the double line in the figure represents a special game state (big hit game, small hit game).

When the "big hit (special figure 1)" is completed, the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (high base state) (FIG. 21 (B)). The specific game state after "Big hit (Special Figure 1)" is "Breakthrough zone_Low probability / High base (Special Figure 2: 1 time) + Maximum 4 remaining hold" (details will be described later), and the second The high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until the special symbol (special figure 2) is changed once and stopped and displayed.

After shifting to the "breakthrough zone", the player plays a game by so-called "right-handed" in which a game ball is launched aiming at the second starting winning opening P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game area P501. Since the "breakthrough zone" is in a high base state, the movable body P771 of the ordinary electric accessory P770 provided in the second start winning opening P721 is likely to be in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, and the game ball is launched into the right area P501R. A game ball enters (passes) into the normal drawing opening P741, a normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal electric accessory P770 operates, and the second special symbol is entered by entering the second starting winning opening P721. A special symbol lottery based on (Special Figure 2) will be held.

In the "breakthrough zone", the high base state continues until the variation display of the second special symbol is completed. Therefore, once in the high base state and the maximum number of holdings of the second special symbol (in this embodiment). Only 4) can receive the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol having the "small hit" which is the lottery result that triggers the small hit V. Here, in the "breakthrough zone", a big hit or a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (up to 5 times) of the second special symbol, and the player "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" (FIG. 21 (C). )) Is set to be about 45%. If the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol does not win (big hit, small hit) in the "breakthrough zone", the game shifts to "normal game (low probability / low base)" (Fig. 21 (Fig. 21). D)).

When "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is completed, "battle mode_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 6 times) + remaining hold maximum 4" or "pseudo big hit_low probability / high base" (Special figure 2: 95 times) + up to 4 remaining holdings ”(Fig. 21 (E), (H)).

Here, the point of whether to shift to the "battle mode" or the "pseudo jackpot" as the specific gaming state to shift after the "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)" is the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is not a special symbol (stop display symbol) that triggered the execution of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". It is decided whether to shift to "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" depending on the game state when the hit fluctuation of the special symbol that triggered the execution of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is started. are doing.

Specifically, the variable display starts when it is controlled to "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot", and when it is in a high base state where the electric chew support function is operating. In the case of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" triggered by the change of the special symbol that is the hit, "battle mode" after the end of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" (Fig. 21 (E)), and the fluctuation starts in the low base state where the electric chew support function is not activated. After the end of the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" triggered by the above, it is controlled to shift to the "pseudo big hit" (FIG. 21 (H)).

"Battle mode_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 6 times) + remaining hold maximum 4" (details will be described later) is stopped after the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes 6 times. This is a specific game in which the high base state (the operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player fires a game ball in the right area P501R in the same way as in the "breakthrough zone", and until the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner up to 10 times (6 times in the high base state + up to 4 times of the remaining hold). It is a specific game aiming to acquire "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" during the period (Fig. 21 (F)). If the second special symbol does not become a small hit V or a big hit in a maximum of 10 fluctuation displays, it shifts to "normal game (low probability / low base)" (FIG. 21 (G)).

"Pseudo jackpot_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 95 times) + remaining hold maximum 4" (details will be described later) is stopped after the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes 95 times. This is a specific game in which the high base state (the operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player fires a game ball in the right area P501R in the same way as in the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode", and the second special symbol is up to 99 times (95 times in the high base state + up to 4 times for the remaining hold). It is a specific game aiming to acquire "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" before the variable display is performed (Fig. 21 (I)). In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the probability of becoming a "small hit" is set to 1 / 9.1 in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, so that the probability of becoming a small hit is 10 times or more of this small hit probability. By the time the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, which is the number of times, is performed, it can be said that the small hit V or the big hit is substantially confirmed, but it is a "pseudo big hit". If the special symbol lottery result does not become "small hit" or "big hit" even if the second special symbol changes 94 times during the game, the mode shifts to the "battle mode" production mode ( FIG. 21 (J). Then, the variation of the 95th rotation of the "pseudo jackpot" is the same as the variation of the 6th rotation in the "battle mode", and the variation display of the 95th rotation and the variation display of up to 4 times of the hold related to the second special symbol are displayed. If the result is not a "big hit" or a "small hit", the game shifts to "normal game (low probability / low base)" (FIG. 21 (G)). As a modification, the transition timing of the production mode to the "battle mode" may be set to an earlier timing, for example, the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed 89 times during the "pseudo jackpot". That is, it is also possible to set the timing to leave the same number of times as 6 times, which is the number of continuations of the high base state in the "battle mode".

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is used as the end condition for each of the periods controlled by the specific games "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot". In addition to the end condition based on the number of times, it may be configured to end when the first special symbol is changed five times. The 95 times, which is the end condition of the specific game based on the number of changes of the second special symbol of the "pseudo jackpot", is the first special, the number of changes of the special symbol is 100 times, which is the maximum duration of the electric chew support function under the current rules. It is set so as not to exceed the specific game end condition of either the variable display of the symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol without satisfying, for example, the end condition of the specific game based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol. If is set to 3 times or the like, the period of the "pseudo jackpot" can be set to the time when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changed 97 times and stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment having the above game flow has a high probability of winning in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot". Obtain a small hit V (or big hit) based on "hit" and get a large amount of balls by looping "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" and "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)". It is a game for the purpose of. In particular, "small hit" or "small hit" or "small hit" in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the digestion of up to 4 remaining pending games that occurred in the specific game of "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode", that is, after the high base state is over. By acquiring "big hit", the game shifts to "pseudo big hit", which is a specific game in which the next small hit V (or big hit) is practically definite, and one small hit V (or big hit) is played. Since it is possible to acquire more, as a player's experience, depending on the acquisition timing of the small hit V (big hit) during the execution of the "battle mode", the small hit V (big hit) can be played once or the small hit can be obtained. It is possible to provide a game property in which the number of balls to be played for two V (big hits) is different.

In the game flow (FIG. 21) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment described above, the second is set as the main end condition of the high base state in the "breakthrough zone", the "battle mode", and the "pseudo jackpot". The number of variable display of special symbols is set to 1, 6, and 94, respectively, but due to the balance between the entertainment and playability (specs) of the production side, the high base state of "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode" is achieved. Probability that the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, which is the end condition, is set to 4 times, which is the same as the number of holdings, or loops between "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". It is possible to adjust the number of times to 10 times in order to increase the number of times. The number of rounds of special games performed at will be adjusted accordingly).

In such a modification, if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is less than the maximum number of holds related to the second special symbol, it is possible to win in the lower base state. If the effect can be emphasized and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is the same as the maximum number of holds related to the second special symbol, for example, "small hit V / big hit (small hit V / big hit) You will be able to make it look like you have two chances to become "Special Figure 2)". Further, if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is larger than the maximum number of holds related to the second special symbol, "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" in the high base state. It is possible to provide an entertaining production and gameplay that will entertain the game with the expectation that it will be possible to acquire the game many times.

(Breakthrough zone)
Subsequently, the game control and the production contents in the "breakthrough zone" will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

In the "breakthrough zone", the variation display of the second special symbol once in the high base state and the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the maximum of four reserved second special symbols generated during the high base state are performed. This is a production mode corresponding to the period.

In the "normal game (low probability / low base)" (see Fig. 21), a "big hit" is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and when the "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed, the "big hit" is executed. The "breakthrough zone" is started after "(Special Figure 1)".

When the first variation display of the second special symbol is performed after the "breakthrough zone" is started, the effect display of the "hold charge effect" shown in FIG. 22 is started. The variation display of the first second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is about 60 seconds long with reference to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for the breakthrough zone 1 variation) in the variation pattern lottery of the main control board P40. It is configured so that a time fluctuation pattern is selected, and a "hold charge effect" is executed from the start of the fluctuation to a period of about 30 seconds.

The "hold charge effect" is an effect that causes the player to hold the second special symbol during the effect display period of the "hold charge effect" and prompts the player to display the hold object P811 in the hold display area 810. be. The "hold charge effect" is an effect displayed on the character and around the character displayed on the screen each time the hold object P811 is displayed (or every time a game ball enters the second start winning opening P721). Effect) The effect is configured to change so as to improve the expectation for hitting, and the player can be urged to increase the hold of the second special symbol by right-handed.

When the "hold charge effect" is completed in the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", the second special symbol is continuously displayed in the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone". Based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first fluctuation display and the pre-judgment information related to the holding of the second special symbol generated during the execution of the "hold charge effect", the "small hit V / big hit (special) in the" breakthrough zone " An effect of notifying the result regarding whether or not "FIG. 2)" can be obtained (in this embodiment, "breakthrough zone battle effect", see FIG. 23) is performed.

The "breakthrough zone battle effect" is an effect that collectively notifies the lottery results (including prior judgment information) for up to 5 fluctuations in the "breakthrough zone", and is in a high base state (especially during the execution of the "hold charge effect"). With regard to the hold of the second special symbol that has occurred, no directing notification regarding the result of the winning / failing lottery is performed other than the variable display of the simplified drawing P802. Further, regarding the remaining hold of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" (the hold of the second special symbol that is digested after the transition to the low base state), the special variation pattern table (special figure 2 remaining hold digestion) is performed on the main control board P40. It is configured so that a short variation pattern of about 1 second is selected with reference to the variation pattern table for low base or the variation pattern table in FIG. 2 at low base. In addition, as in the "breakthrough zone battle production", all the winning / failing lottery results including the lottery result of this fluctuation display and the pre-judgment information of one or more holds where the fluctuation will start from the next time onward will be notified. The dramatic variation display performed by the variation display of 1 may be referred to as "summary variation".

If the hit fluctuation that triggers the small hit V (big hit) is executed during the five fluctuations of the "breakthrough zone", in the "breakthrough zone battle production", the "breakthrough zone battle" as shown in FIG. 24 "Victory effect" is displayed. The "breakthrough zone battle victory effect" is displayed if there is a "hit" in the remaining hold even if the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is "missing". In the example of FIG. 24, since the number of holds of the second special symbol in the simple hold display P814 is 1, the hold that started the change when the hold of the second special symbol is the remaining two is a hit change. It shows that there was. In the "breakthrough zone battle victory production", if the result of the special symbol lottery is "small hit", the game ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 in the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game. ), Since it becomes a big hit (small hit V) for the first time, the display of the simple drawing P802 is not composed of doublets, and by displaying the "V" symbol that is not displayed as a normal decorative symbol, the small hit V can be displayed. Notify the player that the license has been obtained. Further, although not shown, if the hit fluctuation is not executed during the five fluctuations of the "breakthrough zone", the "breakthrough zone battle defeat effect" is executed.

When the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is completed, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state, but the gaming state changes from the high base state to the low base state. The transition timing is the timing when the variation display time of the second special symbol has elapsed, and the variation display timing of the second special symbol for the first hold that has occurred as the remaining hold is delayed, so that the high base state is changed to the low base. After switching to the state, a waiting time for a certain period of time (a fixed time for the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment) is set, and the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" ends. Even if the normal electric accessory P770 of the second start winning opening P721 is activated just before, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770 is terminated during the standby period (“pseudo jackpot” and “battle” described later). The same applies to the final fluctuation of the high base state in "mode".) Therefore, even if the remaining hold is started and the second special symbol can be held further, there is a possibility that the ordinary electric accessory P770 of the second start winning opening P721 will operate (normal game). Almost none as well as low probability / low base). Since the waiting time is set to a long time of about 6 seconds, "breakthrough zone battle production", "breakthrough zone battle victory production", and "breakthrough zone battle defeat production" are continuously executed even during the waiting time. Has been done.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, the second special that occurred after the "hold charge effect" was completed when there was no winning lottery result and prior judgment information during the execution of the "hold charge effect". When a hit hold occurs for a hold related to a symbol, it is difficult to replace the production content from the "breakthrough zone battle defeat production", so an alternative production different from the "breakthrough zone battle victory production" is performed. The player is notified of the acquisition of the right of small hit V (big hit).

In the "breakthrough zone", the effect display on the effect display device P80 related to the variation display of the first special symbol, which is not the main body of the game, is only the variation display of the simplified drawing P802, and the appearance of the effect is "breakthrough". The effect display that is recognized as highly relevant to the "zone" (such as the display of the notice effect related to the "breakthrough zone") is not performed. If it becomes a "big hit (Special Figure 1)" at the timing controlled by "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot", it is not "breakthrough zone" but "battle mode". It is also possible to control the transition to.

(Small hit V production and pseudo big hit)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29, a small hit V (big hit) effect and an example of the effect related to the “pseudo big hit” effect will be described. The example of the effect shown in FIGS. 25 to 29 is an effect following FIG. 24, when the small hit V is won with the remaining hold of the "breakthrough zone", and the game shifts to the "pseudo big hit" as a specific game. , An example of the effect when the small hit V (big hit) is acquired again during the "pseudo big hit" is shown.

FIG. 25 urges the player to enter (pass) the game ball into the specific area P760 in the large winning opening P751 in order to operate the accessory continuous device during the small hit game of the small hit V. A display example of "V prize promotion effect" is shown.

In the "V prize promotion effect", an image imitating the game board P5 is displayed in the substantially central area of the screen, and an arrow image drawing an arc and an emphasized "V" are displayed on the image display imitating the game area P501. While adding animation etc. to the character image of "", it is superimposed and displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, in addition to the right-handed notification P832, the V-winning promotion notification P837 is displayed, and the "V-winning promotion effect" is right-handed to the player from the entire displayed image and the large winning opening P751 (specific). It is an effect that encourages entry into the area P760).

Further, if the game ball enters (passes) into the specific area P760 in the large winning opening P751 during the execution of the "V winning promotion effect", that is, the "V winning effect" occurs, the "V winning effect" is performed. Is executed. As an example, the "V winning effect" is an effect in which the character display of "V" (V prize completed display P837) displayed at the lower right of the screen in FIG. 26 is displayed together with a predetermined sound effect and a light emitting effect of the effect lamp P82. Can be mentioned.

The "V prize promotion effect" can be displayed from the period called the "small hit start demo" of the small hit game to the execution of the round (special game) of the small hit game. Further, in the round (special game) of the small hit game of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the process of opening the large winning opening P751 for a short time (about 0.120 seconds) and closing it for about 1 second is repeated 13 times. Therefore, if there is no abnormality such as ball clogging with respect to the large winning opening P751 during the opening for about 1.560 seconds, the opening mode is such that 10 game balls are almost certain to enter.

FIG. 26 is displayed during the execution of the winning combination operation start demo (big hit start demo), which is the timing when the small hit game in the small hit V ends and the game shifts to the big hit game state due to the operation of the accessory continuous operating device. This is a display mode of "big hit type notification effect" for notifying the amount of balls to be ejected.

In the "big hit type notification effect" of FIG. 26, two icon displays (the big hit type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" and the big hit type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS") are displayed as the big hit type icon P860. ing. The jackpot type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" is a small hit in the "breakthrough zone" by the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol, that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that started to fluctuate in the high base state. It is an icon selected when it becomes V, and is an icon suggesting that the mode shifts to "battle mode" after one small hit V.

On the other hand, the big hit type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS" is an icon selected by the small hit V when any of the four remaining holds in the "breakthrough zone" is a hit. As shown in 21, it is an icon suggesting that the game state (specific game) of the pseudo big hit is changed after the small hit V. In addition, during the "pseudo jackpot", the small hit V (or jackpot) acquired during the "pseudo jackpot" from the production of the small hit V (or jackpot) that triggered the transition to the "pseudo jackpot". Since a series of production contents are executed up to the effect to be executed, as a player, as a player, two small hits V (or big hits) are ejected as one small hit V (or big hits). ) Will be produced as if it was acquired.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, in a part of the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode" (described later), one fluctuation of the second special symbol that started to fluctuate in the high base state and the remaining four are reserved. Since the summarization fluctuation is performed for the minute, the "big hit type notification effect" is performed for the acquired small hit V, and the player is given a small hit (big hit) in either the fluctuation that is the target of the summarization fluctuation or the remaining hold. ) Is executed as an effect of notifying the player of whether or not it has become. By checking the number of fluctuations displayed on the simplified drawing P802 and the simple hold display P814 during the execution of the summary fluctuation, it becomes obvious which one is selected in the "big hit type notification effect", but pachinko. If you are not a player who is familiar with the specifications of the gaming machine, you will be able to know the amount of balls you have earned for the first time in the "Big hit type notification production".

FIG. 27 shows the small hit V (big hit) ahead of "TWIN_BONUS", which is a production related to the small hit V (big hit), which was executed as a hit with the remaining hold of the "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo big hit". It is a figure which shows the production example in). In the example of this figure, as shown by the round display P820 displayed on the right side of the screen, the two "small hits V / big hits (special figure 2)" executed across the "pseudo big hits" are preceded. It indicates that the fifth round of the small hit V to be executed (counting the small hit game as the first round) is being executed.

In the round display P820 shown in FIG. 27, the number of rounds of the small hit V (big hit) executed in advance in the “small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)” in the right column for two times, and the executed rounds. The number is suggested, and the left column shows the number of rounds scheduled to be executed in the small hit V (big hit) acquired in the specific game "pseudo big hit". In FIG. 27, the left column of the round display P820 may not be a small hit V (big hit) during the "pseudo big hit", so the number of rounds of the small hit V (big hit) being executed is shown. Compared to the round display P820 in the right column to be displayed, the display is configured so as not to be clear, such as a semi-transparent display.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display during the “pseudo jackpot” which is a specific game. Although the special game is not in the special game state (during the big hit game or the small hit game) during the "pseudo big hit" of the specific game, the effect is displayed as if the special game is continuing.

In the production display example during the "pseudo jackpot" in FIG. 28, an animation in which a group of cat-shaped spherical objects move from the back side to the front side of the screen is displayed, and "TWIN_BONUS_V is waiting ..." at the top of the screen. Is displayed. In addition, the round display P820 also continuously displays the number of rounds of the small hit V (big hit) executed in advance within the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" for two times, and the left column of the round display P820. Is shown to be waiting for a subsequent small hit V (big hit) while remaining in a semi-transparent state. The production display during the "pseudo jackpot" is not limited to the one that always executes the same animation as shown in the example, and the player can select the content of the animation or the content of the BGM (musical piece) at any time. You may.

In addition, during the "pseudo jackpot", a small hit V (big hit) must be obtained by generating a ball into the second starting winning opening P721 and receiving a special symbol lottery for the second special symbol. It is necessary to have the player shoot the game ball toward the right area P501R of the game area P501 even during the execution of the production of the "pseudo jackpot" that looks like between the rounds of the big hit. Therefore, as shown in the lower part of the production example of FIG. 28, in addition to the normal right-handed notification P832, the character says "continue right-handed", and an effect display appealing that a game ball needs to be launched. It has become.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 28 is used to motivate the player to continue right-handed while the “pseudo-big hit” in which the effect display looks like between rounds is being executed. The effect object P870 is displayed. In this example, as the setting suggestion effect object P870, an object similar to the cat-shaped sphere object in the animation of the "pseudo jackpot" effect is displayed to move from the right to the left of the screen so as to be easily distinguished from other objects. Is given as an example. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the display of the setting suggestion effect object P870 is a specification in which a display lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each set value for each ball entered into the second start winning opening P721, or a second special symbol. As a variation effect for each variation, there is a specification in which a display lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each set value.

The "pseudo jackpot" is a gaming state in which the high base state continues 95 times, but the main control board P40 refers to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for pseudo jackpot) until the variation display of 94 times. By doing so, the fluctuation pattern related to the second special symbol is configured so that a short-time fluctuation of about 0.5 seconds to 1 second can be easily selected. Since the small hit probability is 1 / 9.1, which is a very high probability, it is almost always the case that a small hit (big hit) is obtained during 94 fluctuations in which short-term fluctuations are repeated. If the small hit (big hit) cannot be drawn until the fluctuation display of, the effect display during the "pseudo big hit" shown in FIG. It shifts to the effect display state that is almost the same as the summary fluctuation of the minute. At this time, the display of "TWIN_BONUS" at the top of the screen and the big hit effect such as the round display P820 are also terminated.

In this way, as the reason for shifting to the effect display state (effect mode) of the "battle mode" in the variation display at the 95th rotation, it is easy to select the variation display of the second special symbol up to the 94th variation for a short time. Due to the tendency, it is necessary to set the 95th rotation as a long-time fluctuation display so that the player can have a margin to generate a hold related to the second special symbol, while the 95th rotation is being displayed for a long time. As a production of, by effectively utilizing the production prepared in other production modes and performing the production for the final fluctuation of the high base state and the remaining hold of up to 4 pieces, it is as direct as possible to the player. The purpose is to give a taste.

FIG. 29 shows a small hit V (big hit) during the “pseudo big hit” (within 94 rotations), which is a specific game, and a small hit when the second “small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)” is executed. It is a production image that can be displayed during the winning game and the demonstration period of starting the combination operation. Because the specifications are such that the small hit V (big hit) in the "pseudo big hit" and the small hit V (big hit) other than the summary fluctuation of the battle mode described later will shift to the "battle mode" after the small hit V (big hit). , The above-mentioned "big hit type notification effect" is not executed, and an alternative effect display such as a blessing image by a character is displayed. Further, when the second "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is started, the round display P820 switches from a transparent state to a clear state. It should be noted that the timing at which the “V” indicating the small hit game on the round display P820 and the “◯” display indicating the big hit game become clear may be staggered. Specifically, when the small hit game is started, the display of "V" becomes clear, and when the game ball enters (passes) into the specific area P760 in the large winning opening P751, "○" indicating the big hit game. An example of clarifying the display of "" is given.

Further, as a modification, as a lottery result of the second special symbol, a small hit V (big hit) having a different number of rounds and a small hit V (big hit) having a different type of specific gaming state after the end are provided. In that case, even for the small hit V (big hit) that was hit in the high base state, the number of rounds (ball output amount) of this small hit V (big hit) and the type of specific game after the end are notified. It may be configured to execute "big hit type notification effect".

As a modification of the effect example in the "pseudo jackpot", in the effect example shown in FIG. 28, the remaining number of games of the specific game in the "pseudo jackpot" display P841 is not displayed, but the rest of the specific game. The remaining number of games display P841 may be configured to be displayed as "remaining _10 times" at the timing when the number of games of the game is 10 or less, and the second "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" may be displayed. Regarding the round display P820, when the number of remaining games of "pseudo jackpot" is small (when it becomes 10 times or less), or when the production mode is switched to "battle mode", the display mode becomes more unclear. Alternatively, it may be configured to be hidden.

As another modification of the effect example during the "pseudo jackpot", when it is determined from the prior determination information that the hit variation related to the second special symbol is held during the "pseudo jackpot", the effect is produced. The control board P41 is configured to immediately notify that a hold related to the second special symbol that is a hit has occurred by using the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82, the speaker P83, the effect accessory P560, and the like. , Even if a hold related to the second special symbol that is a hit occurs after notifying that a hold related to the second special symbol that is a hit has occurred, the same notification is continuously performed, or a more conspicuous production mode. It may be configured so that it can be notified that a plurality of winning rights have been acquired.

(Battle mode)
Subsequently, an example of the effect display of the "battle mode", which is a specific game, will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the first half of the battle mode, and FIGS. 31 and 32 are examples of a summary variation effect relating to the final variation (sixth variation) in the high base state of the “battle mode” and the maximum of four remaining hold. It is a figure which shows.

《First half of battle mode》
FIG. 30 is an example of an effect display relating to the first half of the battle mode (1st to 5th variation of the second special symbol of the “battle mode”). The production of the "battle mode" is a production of notifying the player of the acquisition of a small hit V (big hit) depending on whether or not the ally character can defeat the enemy character.

Specifically, when the offense and defense of the ally character and the enemy character are unfolded in a dramatic manner for each fluctuation and the enemy gauge P883 becomes "0" (all disappeared), it becomes a small hit V (big hit). Is notified. In addition, a ally gauge is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and by increasing or decreasing using the result of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol that is changing or the preliminary judgment information regarding the hold of the second special symbol that is on hold, a small hit Notify the player that the expectation of becoming a V (big hit) is increasing (or the expectation is low).

On the right side of the screen of the effect example shown in FIG. 30, the chance-up icon display P880 is displayed. The chance-up icon display P880 is determined by using the result of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol that is changing and the pre-judgment information regarding the hold of the second special symbol that is being held. Icon display suggesting that the chance-up effect is displayed so that the ally character becomes dominant during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol or the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol from the next time onward. It has become.

Of the chance-up icon display P880, the item chance-up icon P881 is displayed in the upper row, and the character chance-up icon P882 is displayed in the lower row. The item chance up icon is an icon that suggests that the attack of the ally character becomes more advantageous (the enemy gauge P883 is likely to decrease), such as "attack power UP icon", "special move icon", and "weapon icon". The character chance-up icon P882 is an icon that suggests that a chance-up effect that raises the expectation of a big hit is generated by performing an effect related to an increase / decrease of the ally gauge P884 according to the appearing character.

The item chance-up icon P881 and the character chance-up icon P882, which are the chance-up icon display P880, have a plurality of icons, and are configured so that the expected degree of the small hit V (big hit) can be different depending on the displayed type. However, if the higher icon is newly acquired in the place where the icon of 1 is displayed, the item chance up icon P881 or the character chance up icon P882 is updated and displayed to the acquired icon. It may be configured to do so.

Further, the item chance-up icon P881 and the character chance-up icon P882 may indicate the occurrence of different chance-up effects, and when a specific combination is displayed, the two icons act at the same time to expect a big hit. It may be configured to generate 1 large chance-up effect that greatly improves the degree.

《Battle mode second half: Summary fluctuation》
Next, an example of the "Battle Mode Final Fluctuation Production" that is executed for the high base state final fluctuation (sixth fluctuation) of the "Battle Mode" and the maximum of four remaining reservations will be described.

The "Battle Mode Final Fluctuation Production" is a production in which the winning / failing lottery results (including prior judgment information) for 5 fluctuations are collectively notified as in the production of the "Breakthrough Zone", and the production composition is the same as the production of the "Breakthrough Zone". , "Hold charge production (battle mode)" and "Battle mode final battle production". For the 6th variation display of the 2nd special symbol of the specific game "Battle mode" in which the "Battle mode final variation effect" is executed, refer to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation). A fluctuation pattern of about 1 minute is selected, and about 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation is composed of "hold charge effect (battle mode)", and after the end of "hold charge effect (battle mode)", " Move to "Battle Mode Final Battle Production". As for the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the remaining four reserved symbols, a fluctuation pattern of about 1 second is selected as in the "breakthrough zone".

In the "hold charge effect (battle mode)" shown in FIG. 31, an effect display is performed to urge the player to aim at the second start winning opening P721 and generate a hold related to the second special symbol (for example, the lower center of the screen). "Right-handed to accumulate power (hold) !!" is displayed closer to you). In addition, the ally gauge P884 moves from the lower left to the center of the screen, and by displaying the character string and the arrow of "CHARGE", the ally gauge P884 is accumulated (it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high). ) To urge the player to hit right.

When the player causes the hold of the second special symbol according to the instruction of the "hold charge effect (battle mode)", the hold object P811 of the hold display area P810 displayed at the lower right of the screen has a "P" (Power). The hold object P811 written as (initial) is displayed, or the hold object P811 in the chance mode suggesting the acquisition (stock) of the item chance up icon P881 (or the character chance up icon P882) is displayed. These accumulated hold objects display the effect on the ally gauge P884 and the chance up icon display P880 at a predetermined timing (for example, 25 seconds after the start of fluctuation), increase or decrease the ally gauge P884, and increase the chance. Acquire (stock) the icon display P880.

As a further application example of the effect using the hold display area P810 of the "hold charge effect (battle mode)", the second start winning opening P721 is further reached under the situation where four hold of the second special symbol is accumulated. When the ball enters the ball, the hold object P811 once displayed can be changed from the display mode (for example, "P" hold" to the "P" hold wearing the flame effect, or the character chance up icon. It may be configured to perform an effect display (hold chance up effect) such as changing to a hold that suggests acquisition).

As another application example, the hold display area P811 is moved and displayed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method, and the hold object P811 jumps out of the hold display area P811 while four second special symbols are held. Depending on the mode of the above, the ally gauge P884 and the chance-up icon display P880 may be displayed so as to increase the expectation of a big hit.

When the "hold charge effect (battle mode)" is completed, the process shifts to the "battle mode final battle effect" shown in FIG. 32. "Battle mode final battle effect" is an effect display in which an ally character performs a special move, and among the five variations of the final ally gauge P884 display mode and summary change of "hold charge effect (battle mode)". Depending on whether or not there is a hit, the ally character attacks the enemy character according to the expected degree of the small hit V (big hit).

At this time, depending on the type of the special move performed by the ally character, the player is urged to operate the effect button P381 to reduce the enemy gauge P883, and the effect content is changed according to the operation state of the effect button P381. It can be configured to be selected from several effect patterns, such as a button effect that can be used, or a result is displayed without a button effect. As for the types of button effects, there are "single-shot" effects that display the result by operating the effect button P381 only once, "continuous hit effect" that displays the results by pressing the effect button P381 multiple times, and the effect lever P382. It has a kind such as "lever operation effect" to operate. In the "battle mode final fluctuation effect" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the effect pattern in which the button effect is not executed is configured to have a higher expectation, for example, in the "hold charge effect". An example is given in which the button effect is not executed when the hit is deterministically notified by the ally gauge P884 emitting light in rainbow colors.

As described above, if the small hit V (big hit) is not reached by the 94th rotation in the "pseudo big hit", the battle mode is set at the 95th rotation, but the 95th of the "pseudo big hit" The control of the rotation and the remaining hold (selection of the fluctuation pattern and the content of the effect) is the same as the summary fluctuation in the latter half of the battle mode. That is, in the 95th rotation of the "pseudo jackpot", the "hold charge effect (battle mode)" and the "battle mode final battle effect" are performed with a fluctuation of about 1 minute.

<< Example of using ally gauge P884 >>
The ally gauge P884 in the "battle mode" represents the energy of the ally character, and adopts an aspect suggesting that the larger the number, the higher the expectation of the small hit V (big hit). As a modification, the blank area and colored area of the ally gauge P884 displayed at the start of the change are inverted during the hold charge production of the summary change in the latter half of the battle mode, and the display of the ally gauge P884 is expected to be a big hit at the start of the summary change. It is possible to adopt a production method in which the lower the degree, the higher the expectation of hitting in the summary fluctuation (the final maximum 5 fluctuations in the battle mode).

By doing this, in the first half of the battle mode, the more ally gauge P884, the higher the expectation of a big hit, and at the timing when the second half of the battle mode starts (before the reverse display), the less the ally gauge P884, the more chances. It is possible to make a novel production display.

Further, by configuring in this way, for example, the character chance up icon P882 can be configured to display a character that reduces the ally gauge P884 of the ally character, and the character chance can be displayed in each of the first half and the second half of the battle mode. It is possible to create more interest in the dramatic interference (increase / decrease of the ally gauge P884) with the ally gauge P884 by the characters appearing in the up icon P882. For example, in the "hold charge effect (battle mode)", the character chance up icon P882 suggesting a decrease in the ally gauge P884 is introduced, and after the effect of reducing the ally gauge P884 is performed, the ally gauge P884 is inverted. An example is given.

Here, some modifications that can be adopted for the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the modified examples described below may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment by combining a plurality of modified examples.

(Modification 1)
After executing "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)", the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is controlled to either "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" by "small hit V / big hit". (Special Figure 2) ”was adopted as a method of determining depending on the gaming state (base state) at the timing when the hit fluctuation is started.

In order to adopt the method in this embodiment, information such as a flag related to the special game to be executed when the result of the special symbol lottery performed at the start of the fluctuation is "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". In addition to setting, information related to the game state set as a specific game after the special game (“small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)”) (the number of times to control to the high base state and various setting values) It is necessary to store the offset value for calling) together, which makes it feasible.

Here, as a modification 1 regarding whether to be controlled to "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" after executing "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". A specification may be adopted in which it is determined whether the control is controlled by "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot" after the execution of ")" after the stop display of the special symbol. As a specification to judge after the stop display of the special symbol, for example, the type of the specific game of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" at the time of V winning during the small hit game, which is the timing when the transition to the big hit is definite. There are specifications that determine.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, as described in this embodiment, the final high-base state of the "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo-big hit" executed as specific games. When the fluctuation is executed, the control for transitioning the gaming state (base state) when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped is adopted.

Therefore, as a modification 1, "specification to determine after the stop display of the special symbol (specification to determine the type of the specific game of" small hit V / big hit (special figure 2) "at the time of V winning during the small hit game)" By adopting it, it is the final fluctuation of the high base state such as the 1st fluctuation of the "breakthrough zone" and the 6th fluctuation of the "battle mode". When the type of the specific game after the execution of "V / jackpot (Special Figure 2)" is determined, the determination is made under the condition that the base is controlled to a low base state, so that the "pseudo jackpot" is always advantageous for the player. It becomes possible to control so that the transition to "" is obtained as a judgment result.

That is, as a player, when a hit is made when a high-expected effect display is performed in which a maximum of 5 fluctuations are collectively executed as a summary fluctuation, the player always shifts to an advantageous specific game called "pseudo-big hit". Is guaranteed, and the "breakthrough zone battle production" and "battle mode final battle production" as productions that respond to fluctuations will attract the attention of the players and be provided as productions with a high degree of interest. Can be done.

(Modification 2)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment has adopted a control method of changing the gaming state (base state) to the low base state according to the stop display of the special symbol in the final fluctuation of the high base state, but the gaming state ( The timing for changing the base state) from the high base state to the low base state may be set to different timings.

Specifically, as a modification 2, as a timing for changing the gaming state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state in the final change of the high base state, "the change of the final change of the high base state is being displayed. 2 When the hold related to the special symbol reaches the upper limit value ”may be adopted.

When the explanation is given by applying to the state in this embodiment, "when the hold related to the second special symbol reaches the upper limit value while the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation in the high base state is being displayed" means "breakthrough zone". During the first variation display, which is the variation display of the second special symbol of "Battle Mode", or during the sixth variation display, which is the variation display of the second special symbol of "Battle Mode", the hold related to the second special symbol is held. When the upper limit of 4 is reached, the game state (base state) is set as the timing to change from the high base state to the low base state.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, it is important to maximize the remaining hold when shifting from the high base state to the low base state in a specific game. Adopted a method to change the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state when the hold related to the second special symbol reaches the upper limit value while the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed. However, the playability (the degree of advantage of the player) is not affected.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the gaming state is shifted to the low base state when the stop display of the special symbol, which is the final fluctuation of the high base state, is displayed, and the symbol fixing time of the stop display of the special symbol is set to a long time. This prevented the situation where the normal electric accessory P770 was operating during the first fluctuation after the transition to the low base state, but according to the specifications of the modified example 2, a special symbol was used. Since it is possible to make the normal electric accessory P770 difficult to operate first during the variable display without waiting for the stop display of the special symbol, the symbol fixing time at the time of the stop display of the special symbol can be shortened. become.

When such a modification 2 is adopted, as in the modification 1, in the final fluctuation of the high base state, the gaming state is shifted from the high base state to the low base state prior to the stop display of the special symbol. Therefore, even the small hit V (big hit) in the final fluctuation of the high base state can be controlled to the advantageous "pseudo big hit" gaming state, and the effect corresponding to the summary fluctuation in this embodiment is ". "Breakthrough zone battle production" and "Battle mode final battle production" are recognized by the player as a production in which a "pseudo jackpot" is confirmed if the production is hit, and the player's attention is further increased, and the production is highly interesting. Can be provided as.

In addition, when the modification 2 is adopted and the symbol fixing time is shortened, the hold related to the second special symbol is intentionally placed just before the end of the change of the final fluctuation in the high base state, so that after the transition to the low base state. There is a concern that the normal electric accessory P770 will be activated at the start of the first fluctuation, but the timing of the end of the fluctuation by making it possible to select multiple fluctuation patterns (variation display time) of the special symbol in the final fluctuation in the high base state. There is a method to avoid intentional capture by making it difficult to aim at, or by setting the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory P770 to one or two balls (preferably one ball) to enter the second start winning opening P721. Can be considered.

Further, in the case of adopting the second modification, the player operates the ordinary electric accessory P770 during the period in which the final fluctuation in the high base state is executed, and enters the second starting winning opening P721. As a result, if the number of holdings related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol cannot be accumulated up to the maximum number (4 in this embodiment), the lottery result of the special symbol lottery with the final fluctuation in the high base state will be obtained. When it is a "small hit" or a "big hit", it is processed by the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment as a hit in a high base state, and there is a possibility that the player suffers an unintended disadvantage.

Therefore, in the case of adopting the modification 2, the display urging the player to generate a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the period when the final change in the high base state is executed (for example, FIG. 22). The display of the current number of holds and the display of a message to the effect of "Please save the hold" as displayed in the lower right of the "hold charge" effect shown in It is made to continue until it is notified that the upper limit has been reached, and even at a predetermined timing when the remaining time of the fluctuation display time of the special symbol in the final fluctuation in the high base state is short, the special symbol of the second special symbol is still used. If the hold related to the lottery has not reached the upper limit, a display prompting the generation of the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol may be performed in a more emphasized manner.

In addition, in the final fluctuation of the high base state, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol has not reached the upper limit, if it hits in the "breakthrough zone battle production" or "battle mode final battle production". Since there is a risk of discrepancies with the player's perception that it will be a "pseudo jackpot", the start conditions for "breakthrough zone battle production" and "battle mode final battle production" are set to the predetermined timing in the final fluctuation of the high base state ( For example, the hold related to the second special symbol lottery will be set to the upper limit by 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and if the conditions are not met, "breakthrough zone battle production" and "battle mode final battle production" will be performed. Is not performed, and other effects (such as reach effects during low base and reach effects performed in situations other than the final changes in battle mode) are held for the final change in the high base state and the remaining second special symbol lottery. It may be configured to notify the result of the special symbol lottery regarding.

If the start conditions for the "breakthrough zone battle effect" and "battle mode final battle effect" are set as described above, the effect control related to the final fluctuation in the high base state becomes complicated and it is judged that it is not effective. Will notify the player that the "pseudo jackpot" will not be executed by executing the notification effect that shifts to the "battle mode" instead of the "pseudo jackpot" in the end demo production of the small hit V (big hit). It may be configured, and in this case, in addition to the display contents of the normal end demo production, at the same time, "Pseudo" by maximizing the hold during the "breakthrough zone battle production (battle mode final battle production)". It may be configured to display a game explanation such as "It will be a big hit".

Further, in the case of adopting the modification 2, the execution mode of the effect is configured so that the player wants to maximize the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the final change in the high base state. Is preferable.

More specifically, during the period when the final fluctuation in the high base state is executed, (1) the timing when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes the maximum value, (2) (1) and thereafter. At the timing, when there are more game balls entering the second start winning opening P721, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final fluctuation of the high base state and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final fluctuation of the high base state in the lottery or switching according to the number of winning balls, etc. Small hit V (big hit) expectation is higher than "breakthrough zone battle production" and "battle mode final battle production" based on the preliminary judgment information of the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that is the remaining hold / or The "breakthrough zone battle effect_SUPER" and "battle mode final battle effect_invincible" effects in which the small hit V (big hit) is confirmed may be configured to be executable.

In addition, as an example of the effect of increasing the motivation of the player to generate a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the period when the final change in the high base state is executed, the effect accompanied by the above-mentioned special image display is used. Not limited to the example of switching, when the above-mentioned conditions (1) and (2) are achieved, the effecting object P560 is moved, a special notification sound is generated from the speaker P83, and the decorative symbol P801 constituting the reach is displayed. It is also possible to perform effects that increase the chances, such as performing effects such as performing decorative symbol promotion effects that switch to higher expectations, and further, these and "breakthrough zone battle effects_SUPER". , "Battle mode final battle effect_invincible" effect can be combined and executed.

In this way, when the modification 2 is adopted, a special effect is executed by maximizing the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the period when the final fluctuation of the high base state is executed. According to the above configuration, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final fluctuation of the high base state becomes a small hit (big hit) without the player maximizing the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It can be expected to suppress the occurrence of the disadvantageous event of not being able to acquire the right of "pseudo jackpot".

(Modification 3)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment is a small hit symbol that triggers a 10-round big hit (small hit V) as a small hit game (small hit V) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit. Was selected, and as shown in FIG. 21, it was configured to be controlled so as to always shift to a specific game of either "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot". The number of rounds of the hit V may be configured to have a small hit symbol that executes a small hit V (big hit) of a number of rounds other than 10 rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds, etc.), or a gaming state (base state). ), It may be configured to have a small hit symbol that does not activate the electric chew support function after the small hit V (big hit), that is, does not shift to the high base state.

When the configuration having the small hit symbol (referred to as "small hit symbol without time reduction" or "small hit symbol without support") that does not activate the electric chew support function after the small hit V (big hit) exemplified as the modification 3 is adopted, When the small hit symbol without time reduction is stopped and displayed and the small hit V is executed, it becomes difficult to generate a hold related to the new second special symbol after the small hit V (big hit), and the continuous villa state is continued. Will be difficult. In addition, when the small hit symbol without time reduction is configured to be won with a certain probability (for example, about 10% at the time of winning the small hit), the small hit itself is not excessively deteriorated in the performance of the consecutive villa. It is preferable to increase the winning probability of the game and to balance the ease of the consecutive villas.

On the other hand, by mixing such a time-saving small hit symbol, for example, there are two or more holds that trigger the small hit V in the hold related to the second special symbol and the second special symbol that are currently changing. If the first small hit V is a small hit symbol without time reduction and the symbol that triggers the subsequent small hit V is not a small hit symbol without time reduction, the gaming state that shifts after the subsequent small hit V is small without time reduction. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, which does not have a hit symbol, the game mode is "battle mode", whereas in the modified example 3, it is a "pseudo big hit". There is also the advantage that it can be attached.

In addition, when adopting the time-saving small hit symbol, if the player wins the time-saving small hit during the consecutive villa, if there is a remaining hold, the player is very interested in whether or not he / she will win with the remaining hold. Can be considered. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol when the remaining hold, which is the hold generated in the high base state, is digested is "Special Figure 2 Remaining Hold Fluctuation Pattern Table for Digestion" (or "Fluctuation Pattern Table for Remaining Hold"). It was configured so that a short-time fluctuation pattern was selected by the low-base time special figure 2 fluctuation pattern table ”), but after executing the small hit V based on such a time-saving small hit symbol, the special fluctuation pattern By using the table, the fluctuation time of about 10 seconds to 1 minute is selected for each fluctuation, and the effect display regarding whether or not the small hit V (or big hit) is won for each fluctuation without making a summary fluctuation. It is preferable to configure it so as to perform.

(Modification example 4)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, in the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode", a summary change is executed from the final change of the high base state to the change of up to 4 remaining pending states, and the high base state and the low We adopted a production specification that notifies which of the base states the small hit V (big hit) was obtained by the "big hit type notification effect", but in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the fluctuation is caused in the high base state. Since the specifications are such that the control of the specific gaming state after the small hit V (big hit) is different between the case of starting and the case of starting the fluctuation in the low base state, the small hit V (big hit) is the high base. It can also be considered preferable that the player can recognize whether the acquisition is in the state or the low base state as the effect content during the variable display of the second special symbol.

Therefore, as a modification 4, for the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode", the variation display of the second special symbol in the high base state in which the type of the specific game after the small hit V (big hit) is different and the second in the low base state. 2 By adopting a method in which the effect display of different effect modes (state in which at least a part of each other has different effect display contents) is executed by the variable display of the special symbol, either the high base state or the low base state is executed. It can be configured so that it becomes clear to the player whether or not a small hit V (big hit) has been obtained.

<< Production example when transformation example 4 is adopted in the "breakthrough zone">>
The "breakthrough zone" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment displays "hold charge effect" and "breakthrough zone battle effect" as effects for one change in the high base state and up to four remaining hold. However, when a method of separating the production of the high base state and the production of the low base state is adopted as in the modified example 4, the following production example can be examined.

That is, the interest in whether or not to acquire "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" after "big hit (special figure 1)" and shift to the consecutive villa state ("battle mode" or "pseudo big hit"). In the "breakthrough zone" where the number of items is increasing, the content of the effect that separates the effect of the high base state and the effect of the low base state is the "hold charge & logo step-up effect" that is carried out with one fluctuation of the high base state, and the remaining 4 hold. The "remaining hold battle production" can be illustrated.

"Hold charge & logo step-up effect" is a "small hit V / big hit (special figure) that triggers the transition to" battle mode "while encouraging the player to accumulate 4 holds in the" breakthrough zone ". It is a production that informs whether or not "2)" has been acquired. For example, "Put a game ball into the 2nd start winning opening and complete the" Battle Mode "logo! After the instruction "Battle mode" is displayed, the character string "Battle mode" is displayed, and "Battle mode" is displayed according to the entry into the second start winning opening P721 (occurrence of hold related to the second special symbol and over winning). The display mode of the character string is gradually changed, for example, the display is switched to lighting or red display character by character, and all are lit to notify the hit (when all are lit, the display is rainbow-colored). , The color of the character string in the "battle mode" changes to blue, green, red, and gold, and finally the effect button P381 is operated to emit rainbow-colored light to notify the hit. The effect display is executed.

It can be exemplified that the “remaining hold battle effect” has the same effect mode as the “breakthrough zone battle effect” of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. At this time, it may be configured to execute an effect in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other in the collective fluctuation with respect to the maximum of four remaining hold. Further, it may be configured to execute an effect in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other for each remaining hold 1 change (the same effect mode as in the "first half of the battle mode"). In addition, when the maximum four fluctuations of the remaining hold are collectively regarded as the fluctuation, it is necessary to configure the fluctuation pattern related to the first special symbol of the remaining hold to be a special fluctuation pattern.

In addition, when the fluctuation display of the high base state is off and there is a hit in the pre-judgment information of the hold that is the remaining hold during the execution of "hold charge & logo step-up effect", the mode of the logo step-up is set. , After setting the rainbow-colored mode (first confirmed notification) to notify the hit, add the characters "BURST!" To the character string of "battle mode" and make the character string of "battle mode_BURST!" In rainbow colors. The mode to be displayed (second definite notification) may be displayable. When "Battle mode_BURST!" Is displayed, the process proceeds to "Remaining hold battle production" and the state waits for a hit change. In addition, after the first confirmation notification, the player may stop firing the game ball toward the second start winning opening P721, and there is a possibility that the step cannot be advanced. The second definite notification may be executed without going through the definite notification, or the effect button P381 is operated at the end of the effect regardless of whether or not the rainbow color (first definite notification) is reached. May be configured to generate and promote to the second definite notification.

<< Production example when transformation example 4 is adopted in "Battle mode">>
Next, in the "battle mode" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, a specific game that shifts after a special game (big hit, small hit V) depending on the timing of acquiring "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". As an effect to notify whether is "battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot", the effect mode in the high base state and the effect mode in the low base state are separated, and at least a part of the effect is displayed differently. A method (modification example 4) for making it easier for the player to understand the type of the specific game after the special game will be described.

In the "battle mode" of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the "first half of the battle mode" is produced in the first to fifth fluctuations in the high base state, and the final fluctuation in the high base state is the sixth fluctuation, which is low. It is composed of "hold charge production (battle mode)" and "battle mode final battle production" that are performed with a summary change of up to 4 times of remaining hold that is displayed in a variable state in the base state. In the "battle mode" of the case, the "first half of the battle mode" is produced from the 1st fluctuation to the 6th fluctuation (final fluctuation) in the high base state, and the fluctuation display of up to 4 pending movements that are displayed in the low base state is displayed. Summary It is possible to execute the variable "battle mode final battle production".

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, a special variation pattern is selected by the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation) for the variation display of the special symbol which is the final variation in the high base state. However, in the modified example 4, since the specification is such that a maximum of 4 remaining holdes are targeted and the fluctuation is executed collectively, it is related to the hold of the second special symbol that is first digested in the low base state. When the variation display is performed, the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for final variation in battle mode) is configured to select a special variation pattern.

When executing the "battle mode" in which the modification 4 is adopted, the game state is a low base state because the timing of executing the summary change is after the start of the change of the remaining hold related to the second special symbol. It is already in a state where the hold cannot be accumulated. Therefore, in the case of the "battle mode" in which the modification 4 is adopted, the "hold charge effect (battle mode)" is not included as the effect of the change. However, if the hold related to the second special symbol is not generated by the end of the sixth fluctuation in the high base state, the probability that the player can obtain "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is significantly reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to urge the player to generate a hold related to the second special symbol in the sixth variation in the high base state.

Therefore, in the "battle mode" that adopts the modification 4, in the final fluctuation (sixth fluctuation) in the high base state, the "battle mode first half" production, which is the same production mode production from the first fluctuation to the fifth fluctuation, is performed. On the other hand, in order to give the player a grace period to cause a hold related to the second special symbol, a special variation pattern table (“variation pattern table for final variation in the first half of the battle mode”) is used from 30 seconds. It is configured to display the fluctuation of the special symbol for about 40 seconds, and in the final fluctuation (6th fluctuation) in the high base state, it suggests the number of holdings related to the current 2nd special symbol, and the 2nd start winning opening P721. The "second special symbol hold increase promotion effect" that encourages the player to enter the ball is executed.

The "second special symbol hold increase promotion effect" is a "battle mode first half" effect in a situation where the effect display device P80 displays the "battle mode first half" effect in the same manner as up to the fifth variation in the high base state. An arrow image having a display area section corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol divided into four, for example, in the lower right direction of the screen of the effect display device P80 (near the second start winning opening P721). Is displayed, and each time a hold related to the second special symbol occurs, a method of changing the display area section divided into four to indicate "with hold" can be considered. Further, in addition to the arrow image, a character or a message "Aim at the second start winning opening!" May be displayed to encourage the player to enter the second starting winning opening P721. , When there are four reservations related to the second special symbol, characters such as "OK" and "ready" may be displayed to notify that the purpose has been achieved.

Further, in the "second special symbol hold increase promotion effect", prior determination information is used for the four-divided display area section of the arrow image indicating the existence of hold, as in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. Then, an effect (see FIG. 31) such as displaying an image for acquiring an icon displayed on the chance-up icon display P880 as a hold image may be executed.

(Modification 5)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is composed of only 10 rounds, but the special symbol that triggered the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". It is also possible to configure "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" having a different number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds and 7 rounds) depending on the stop display mode.

At this time, the number of rounds is estimated depending on the effect display during the variable display of the special symbol that triggers "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", the start demonstration effect of the small hit game, or the stop display mode of the special symbol. It is possible to confirm the hit as a look-ahead effect, or configure a look-ahead effect with an extremely high expectation of hit to be feasible for the subsequent hold during the execution of the hit fluctuation, or to confirm multiple hits (multiple hits are confirmed). Alternatively, if a look-ahead effect with a high hit expectation is configured to be executable at the same time for multiple holds, it is determined that the preceding "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)" is a hit with a small number of rounds. In some cases, V is not intentionally won, and the subsequent "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)" is intentionally executed in a low base state, so that the hits with a small number of rounds are discarded and the subsequent hits are made. It is presumed that a strategy (illegal game) in which the subsequent game state is substantially confirmed can be executed.

As a countermeasure against these strategies (illegal games), if you have already obtained information that will be a hit as pre-judgment information or information on the special symbol lottery result related to this fluctuation display, the newly generated second special symbol is suspended. There is a ball entering (passing) into the specific area P760 in the small hit game regardless of the stop display mode of the special symbol, and the pre-reading effect is not executed based on the pre-judgment information for. The lottery may be configured to be performed at the same timing.

(Modification 6)
The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment wins with either hold in the final change of the high base state of the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode" in which the summary change is executed, and the change display for the maximum of 4 remaining holds ( When it becomes a small hit), the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the high base state is hit in the "big hit type notification effect" executed in the special game start demo of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". It was configured to notify whether it was a (small hit) or the variation display of the special symbol in the low base state was a hit (small hit), but the content of the effect display during the summary change is a specific effect content (for example). By displaying the effect of the ally character repeating a specific special move to defeat the enemy character, etc., or by performing the promotion effect of the decorative pattern, the remaining hold is up to 4 variable display (small hit). It may be configured to notify that it has become.

If it is notified that a hit (small hit) has occurred within the fluctuation display within the maximum of 4 remaining hold before executing the "big hit type notification effect", the "big hit type notification" is notified. The jackpot type icon P860 of "effect" may be displayed as "TWIN_BONUS", or an alternative effect display may be executed for the period during which the "big hit type notification effect" is executed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine P of the modified examples 1 to 6 configured as described above, "small hit V" is adopted as the specifications (specs) of the gaming machine, and the base is high. We adopted a method of changing the type of specific game that shifts to after that (after the big hit game) depending on whether the small hit V (big hit) was obtained in the state or the low base state, but similar game characteristics, That is, "a big hit depends on whether the timing of the big hit in the special symbol lottery of the random value (random value of the second special symbol) acquired with the start port related to the ordinary electric accessory is the high base state or the low base state. As long as the specifications of the gaming machine can provide "a game property that makes the type of the specific game later different", it is possible to carry out similar control and effect with respect to the control and effect contents as described in this embodiment and each modification. Needless to say.

As an example of the specifications of a gaming machine that can provide similar game characteristics, there is a gaming machine in a low probability band in which the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (when the probability fluctuation function is not activated) is configured to be about 1/100. A V-ST machine (ST 10 times) with a jackpot probability of 1/18 at high probability (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and the number of continuations of the high base state of "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot" The game machine specifications of 1, 6, and 100 times can be exemplified.

In the case of such specifications, a special period in which the special figure 1 is drawn in a high probability state may occur even after the end of the "breakthrough zone", but the period is a special production period (for example, low probability / It can also be set as a period of stay in the production mode that does not occur in the low base state). Since the 11th fluctuation of the pseudo jackpot is followed by a low probability / high base state, the probability that the jackpot cannot be obtained during the "pseudo jackpot" is higher than that of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, and the probability is high. Since it is not a stochastic state, it is not appropriate to shift to the "battle mode" just before the end of the "pseudo jackpot", so it is preferable to configure the screen so that the end effect is generated while the "pseudo jackpot" screen remains.

[Second Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the above-mentioned prerequisite technology and the basic configuration of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology and the present embodiment will be mainly described, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the prerequisite technology or the elements described in the present embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the “small hit V” as in the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is 100%, and "a hold related to the second special symbol occurs. "And" the game ball enters with the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721 open to win the normal symbol lottery ", that is, the big hit game (including the small hit V). It indirectly means the acquisition of the right to execute.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment generates a special period in which it is easy to enter the second starting winning opening P721 related to the acquisition of the right of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Based on the hold related to the second special symbol generated in the special period, the big hit game (small hit V) is executed for the number of holds corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has the potential to continuously execute a plurality of large hit games (small hit V) and acquire a large number of game balls at one time. It is possible to provide the game characteristics to the player (* because the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control).

The following are three implementations that make up the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, which is more interesting by changing the possibility of holding the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol for a special period. An example will be described, but before that, a basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment will be described.

(Board composition)
FIG. 33 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of a board surface configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be adopted in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment.

An opening is formed in the substantially center of the game area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment so that the effect display device P80 can be visually recognized, and a frame member of a center decoration unit (not shown) is formed in the opening. Attached, it constitutes the inner partition of the gaming area P501.

Below the effect display device P80, a first start winning opening P711A into which a game ball flowing down the game area (left side area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80 enters is provided, and further below the effect display device P80 is not shown. An out port P790 is provided. Further, a general winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower region of the left side region P501L of the effect display device P80. That is, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711A or the general winning opening P731, and it can be expected that a winning will occur. There is.

On the other hand, in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80, as shown in FIG. 33, the operating port P741, the second starting winning opening P721 related to the ordinary electric accessory P770, and the first starting winning opening 711B, a large winning opening P751 is arranged, and a game ball launched toward the game area on the right side of the effect display device P80 can win a prize.

Here, the first starting winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B are starting winning openings for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and the second starting winning opening P721 is the first. 2 It is a starting prize opening to acquire the right to the special symbol lottery of special symbols. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, regardless of whether the game ball is launched toward either the left side region P501L or the right side region P501R of the game area P501, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B is configured to be able to acquire the right of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol.

(spec)
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the “small hit V” as in the present embodiment, and the major difference from the present embodiment regarding the playability (game property) is the second. The probability of becoming a "small hit" or "big hit" in the special symbol lottery of the special symbol is 100%, and the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right of the big hit game (small hit V). It's different.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment also performs a specific game (high base state) by operating the electric chew support function (electric support) function after various big hits (including small hit V) as in the present embodiment. Although it is executed, as a condition for ending the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, "variation based on a specified number of special symbol lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol". It is said that "the display has ended" or "the big hit game (small hit V) is executed". For example, when the specified number of times is set to one, one variation display of the first special symbol is displayed. It is configured so that the high base state can be terminated even if it is done.

Although not described in detail, other design values (big hit probability, number of prize balls of various winning openings, etc.) are not limited to those described in this embodiment, and are appropriately set according to the game characteristics. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, it is preferable to adopt the second special symbol priority digestion control, and the reason thereof will be described later.

(Progress procedure of the game)
Subsequently, the procedure for playing the game on the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment and the progress of the game will be described. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the end condition of the specific game (high base state) will be described with the "specified number of times" as one time.

First, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the game area (left side area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80. The game ball fired in the left side region P501L enters the first starting winning opening P711A, the right of the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is generated, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the player increases the operation amount of the handle P204 and directs the game ball toward the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80. Fire a game ball. The game ball launched into the right area P501R during the big hit game wins a prize in the big winning opening P751 and the first starting winning opening P711B. At this time, if a game ball is launched toward the big winning opening P751 during the big hit game, at least one ball is configured to win the first starting winning opening P711B, and the first one during the big hit game. It is configured to give rise to the right to draw special symbols for special symbols. Since the jackpot game is controlled to a low base state (non-electric chew support state), there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second start winning opening P721 related to the ordinary electric accessory P770.

When the jackpot game ends and the specific game (high base state) starts, if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it relates to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol that occurred during the jackpot game. The variable display starts. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, since the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted, if a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot is hit. After the end, the variable display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is started.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, in the specific game (high base state) after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation that becomes a big hit in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, or the small hit in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. When a fluctuation that becomes a big hit is started, a short-time fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as 1 second is selected by a fluctuation pattern lottery, and a big hit game (small hit V) is executed immediately after the end of the big hit.

On the other hand, in the specific game (high base state), when the fluctuation display (missing fluctuation) in which the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is "missing" is started, a long-time fluctuation pattern (for example, 100 seconds) ( The fluctuation time) is determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery, and the high base state will continue for a period of about 100 seconds until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed and ends.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment aims at the operating port P741 during the period during which the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the specific game is executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “specific period”). By playing a game of firing, the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721 is opened by a normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is specified in the second starting winning opening P721 for 100 seconds. Accumulating the right of a big hit game (small hit V) during a period is the main game property (game property) for acquiring a large number of game balls in a specific game.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of becoming a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is set to, for example, 1/20, and the normal symbol lottery (missing) is normally performed once. The time of one cycle of the fluctuation display period of the symbol or the fluctuation display period of the normal symbol related to one ordinary symbol lottery (win) and the operation period of the ordinary electric accessory is set to about 5 seconds, and it is about 100 seconds in a specific period. It is possible to execute 20 ordinary symbol lottery. As a condition for ending the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 770, "elapse of the opening time of the specified time" or "winning of one game ball" is defined, and the "hit" of one ordinary symbol lottery is the first. 2 It is possible to enter one game ball into the starting winning opening P721, that is, one "hit" in the normal symbol lottery corresponds to one acquisition of the right to the big hit game (small hit V). ..

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, a new special symbol lottery is not executed in a specific period of the specific game, and a big hit (small hit V) depends on whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won in the specific period. ) Is generated or not, so that the effect display device P80 displays a pattern for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery as a decorative symbol P801, and gives the player the right of a big hit (small hit V). Notifies the occurrence of a state that can be acquired (an open state of the ordinary electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721).

If a hold related to the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols occurs in a specific period (the period during which the deviation change of the first special symbol in the specific game is executed), after the end of the specific period, The special symbol lottery of the second special symbol and the big hit game (small hit V) are repeatedly executed as many times as the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

When the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred in the specific period is all gone and the final big hit game (small hit V) is completed, the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the specific game (high base state) is completed again. The fluctuation display related to is started and the specific period occurs again. If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the specific period, the specific game ends and the game returns to the normal game.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment progressing as described above, by setting the second special symbol priority digestion control, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol generated in a specific period is continuously digested. However, by continuously executing the big hit game (small hit V), the acquisition period of the game balls can be condensed in a short period of time, and it becomes easier to get the feeling that a large number of game balls have been acquired. Have.

If the first special symbol priority digestion control or the ball entry order digestion control is used, the first start winning opening P711B during the period when the game ball is launched into the right area P501R in the specific game or the big hit game (small hit V). The period until the next big hit game (small hit V) occurs after a specific period occurs again under the situation that the ball is entered into the ball and the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is suspended. It will take a long time, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to feel that a large number of game balls have been acquired as a player. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment does not deny the change to the first special symbol priority digestion control or the ball entry order digestion control, and if these controls are installed, the second special A specific period can be generated when there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the symbol, the period during which the game can be played in the specific period increases, and it becomes easier to obtain the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. There is also a merit.

As described above, the pachinko game of the second embodiment, which is a pachinko gaming machine that is expected to acquire a large number of game balls by playing one or more big hit games based on one or more holds that occur in a specific period. Although the machine P has been described below, the pachinko gaming machine P, which is further applied to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment to enhance the interest, will be described based on three examples.

In the normal electric bonus control, after the operation end condition of the normal electric bonus 770 is satisfied, the effective extension period for detecting the residual sphere inside the electric bonus is set, but the second implementation is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the example, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right of the big hit game (small hit V), and one big hit game (small) for the hit of the normal symbol lottery in a specific period. Since the design intention is to grant the right of hit V), if the operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 770 is satisfied, the valid extension period may not be set (especially "1 ball". It is preferable to control in this way when the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 770 is completed by the establishment of the "winning of the game ball", and the effective extension period may be set in the "elapsed specified opening time").

[2-1 Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36 as a first application example (2-1 embodiment). FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-1 embodiment, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbols of the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect of the long-time chance state of 2-1 Example, and FIG. 37 is a figure which shows the example of the ordinary electric accessory opening effect of 2-1 Example.

The feature of the second embodiment is the length of the specific period (variation time of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol) that occurs after the big hit (small hit) with respect to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment. The point is that it differs depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big hit (small hit) immediately before the occurrence of a specific period.

With this configuration, it is possible to create a state in which the probability of being able to generate a hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol during a specific period is different, and the expectation for the consecutive villas (again). , Expectations that a specific period will be given after a big hit) and multiple expectations for the number of holds (rights related to the occurrence of big hits / small hits) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol The state can be provided to the player for a specific period, the game of the specific game is changed, and the pachinko machine with high interest can be provided.

Hereinafter, the details of the second embodiment will be described. The board configuration of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be described as the same as that of the second embodiment, but can be appropriately changed as long as the gaming described below can be configured.

(Game flow)
First, with reference to FIG. 34, the game flow (transition of the gaming state) will be described with respect to the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment.

The normal game (low probability / low base state) is a game state in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is the main game, and the player plays a game in the game area (left area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80. The ball is fired, the game ball is put into the first start winning opening P711A, and the big hit is won by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol.

In a normal game, when a big hit is won (Fig. 34 (A)), a "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed, and depending on the type of special symbol that is to execute the big hit, a "short chance state" is executed after the big hit game. , "Long-term chance state" (FIGS. 34 (B), (E)).

FIG. 35 shows the result of the symbol lottery (at the time of big hit) in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, either "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" or "special figure 1_big hit symbol B" is obtained by the symbol lottery. Is now selected. Although only two types of symbols are shown in FIG. 35, they are roughly classified according to the type of the big hit to be executed and the type of the specific game after the big hit, and are actually the first special symbol display device. There may be two or more types of symbols that are stopped and displayed on P51.

The "special figure 1_big hit symbol B" shown in FIG. 35 is a big hit symbol in which a "short-time chance state" is executed as a specific game after the big hit game, and the "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" is a big hit game. It is a big hit symbol in which a "long-time chance state" is executed later as a specific game.

<< Short chance state >>
When the game shifts to the "short-time chance state" after the "big hit (special figure 1)", the first special symbol based on the entry into the first start winning opening P711B arranged in the right area P501R when the big hit game is executed. When the first special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold related to the special symbol lottery of, or the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol remaining before the big hit game, and the first special symbol lottery is missed. As a specific period, a one-minute chance state (low probability / high base state) occurs.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, when the player launches a gaming ball into the right region P501R in the chance state (low probability / high base state) and the gaming ball passes through the operating port P741, a normal symbol is displayed. A lottery will be held. At this time, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is shown as a stop display symbol of the ordinary symbol after the variable display of the ordinary symbol for 1 minute is performed by the ordinary symbol display device P53, and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is "winning". If it is, the normal electric accessory 770 is opened, and the ball can be entered into the second start winning opening P721. Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening P721, after a lapse of a specific period, a big hit or a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". (Fig. 34 (D)). When the result of the normal symbol lottery in the chance state is "missing", or when the normal symbol lottery is "winning" but the ball does not enter the second start winning opening P721, it is "normal". It shifts to "game (low probability / low base state)" (Fig. 34 (C)).

In the "short-time chance state", one normal symbol lottery is performed during the 1-minute chance state (low probability / high base state), which is a specific period, and "small" depending on whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. Distribution is performed to "hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" or "normal game (low probability / low base state)". The winning probability of the normal symbol lottery of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment is set to 1 / 3.3, and in the "short-time chance state", "small hit V / big hit (special figure). The probability of being able to shift to "2)" is 30% (see "Continuation rate" in Fig. 35 "Special figure 1_Big hit symbol B").
After the execution of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", the state shifts to the "long-time chance state" (FIG. 34 (G)).

《Long time chance state》
The "long-time chance state" shifts to after "big hit (special figure 1)" (FIG. 34 (E)) or after "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" (FIG. 34 (G)). It is a specific game, and it is a specific period in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol after the start of the specific game is missed and the missed variation of the first special symbol is executed.

The duration of a specific period of the "long-time chance state" depends on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big hit game (small hit V) that was executed immediately before the transition to the "long-time chance state". A specific period (displacement fluctuation of the first special symbol) is executed with a duration of 1 minute, 6 minutes, or 9 minutes. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the case of "Special Figure 1_Big Hit Symbol A" and "Special Figure 2_Big Hit / Small Hit Symbol A", the duration of the specific period is 5 minutes, and "Special Figure 2_" In the case of "big hit / small hit symbol B", the duration of the specific period is set to 6 minutes, and in the case of "special figure 2_big hit / small hit symbol C", the duration of the specific period is set to 9 minutes.

In the "long-time chance state" as well as in the "short-time chance state", a normal symbol lottery is performed by entering the game ball into the operating port P741 arranged in the right side area P501R, and one normal symbol lottery is performed. Around this time, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for 1 minute is performed by the normal symbol display device P53. That is, if the duration of the specific period is 5 minutes in the "long-time chance state", 5 ordinary symbol lottery can be received, and if the duration of the specific period is 9 minutes, 9 ordinary symbols can be received. You can take a lottery.

In the "long-time chance state", if a "hit" is obtained by a normal symbol lottery and a game ball can be entered into the second start winning opening P721 based on the opening of the normal electric accessory 770. After the lapse of a specific period, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is exhausted, and the big hit or the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". (Fig. 34 (F)). In addition, even after the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs, as long as the specific period continues, it is possible to receive the ordinary symbol lottery, and it is related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to accumulate (stock) the right to execute a big hit or a small hit for the maximum number of holds.

In the "long-time chance state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol was explained as 1 minute, but when the normal symbol is a hit, the normal electric accessory 770 is activated (opened) after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (for example, 55 seconds), which is slightly shorter than the deviation fluctuation, may be designed so that one cycle including the operation period of the normal electric accessory 770 is completed in about 1 minute.

When a hold related to the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols occurs in the "long-time chance state", the second special symbol is displayed in "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)". The "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" of the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved pieces accumulated (stocked) as a hold is executed. When "small hit V / big hit (Special Figure 2)" is repeated multiple times, the low probability / high base state similar to the long-time chance state is internally shifted to each time, but the second The variable display time of the big hit (small hit) based on the special symbol lottery of the special symbol is set to 1 second, and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" resumes immediately after the big hit game (small hit V) ends. Will be done.

Therefore, for "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", a big hit effect called "STOCK-BONUS" is executed, and the big hit effect is continuously executed until there is no hold regarding the special symbol drawing of the second special symbol. Even in a situation where there is an internal "long-time chance state", the effect for a specific period is not executed, and the effect of notifying that a big hit (small hit V) is continuously generated is performed. Run.

In the "long-time chance state", if all of the 5 to 9 normal symbol lottery executions result in "missing", or even though the normal electric accessory 770 is opened, the second start prize is won. If the ball does not enter the mouth P721, the game returns to the "normal game (low probability / low base state)".

Although not shown in FIG. 34, when the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit" in the "short-time chance state" or the "long-term chance state", the fluctuation time is 1 second. Is set to, and "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed without a specific period. In the "long-time chance state" and "short-time chance state", if the special symbol that becomes a big hit or a small hit is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, strictly speaking. Has a specific period of 1 second, and during this period, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol may be performed based on the entry into the operating port P741 or the hold related to the normal symbol lottery.

However, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit", it must be in a high base state (electric chew support state) at the timing when the stop display is made. For example, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 770 is not opened in such a manner that the gaming ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening P721, and there is almost no possibility of entering the second starting winning opening P721. It is configured as. Therefore, even if the normal symbol lottery becomes a "hit" due to the big hit fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the "long-time chance state" or "short-time chance state", one minute later. Is after the stop display of the special symbol and the big hit game is being executed, so it has shifted to the low base state, so "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" and "long time chance". It is configured so that a new hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not occur during the hit fluctuation period of the special symbol in the "state" or the "short-time chance state".

In addition, in the "long-time chance state", if a big hit is obtained by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the game shifts to "big hit (special figure 1)", and this big hit is "special figure 1_big hit symbol". If it is based on "B", it will shift to a disadvantageous "short-time chance state", and there is a risk that the player may feel that he or she has suffered a disadvantage. In order to prevent such disadvantages, if the "Special Figure 1_Big Hit Symbol B" is won in the "Long-term chance state" or "Short-time chance state", the game after the "Big hit (Special Figure 1)". The state may be controlled to be a "long-time chance state" (specific period 5 minutes).

(Example of directing a long-time chance state)
FIG. 36 shows an example of production in the “long-time chance state” of the gaming state (the gaming state in which the jackpot game is most likely to be acquired) that is most advantageous to the player in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment. .. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, "4 consecutive battle productions" are performed in the "long-time chance state" (when the specific period is "5 minutes" and the normal symbol lottery is the "long-time chance state". When executed 5 times in a row after the start of).

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment has N times during a specific period (N minutes) during the out-of-order fluctuation of the first special symbol of the specific game in the low probability / high base state. The normal symbol lottery can be received, and in the "long-time chance state" when the specific period is 5 minutes, one normal symbol production is performed for each normal symbol lottery, and the second -1 In the pachinko gaming machine P of the embodiment, four "battle productions" and one "final chance" production (a production common to the short-time chance state) are executed.

The screen example of FIG. 36 shows a state in which the third "battle effect" of the "four consecutive battle effects" is being executed. More specifically, the production mode title of "continuous battle" indicating that it is a "4 continuous battle" production is displayed on the production mode display P840 on the upper left side of the screen, and the remaining game count display P841 is currently the third time. "Battle production" is being executed, and it is indirectly suggested to the player that the remaining two "battle production" (including the third time) and "final chance" remain.

At the lower right of the screen, two reserved objects P811 are displayed in the reserved display area P811, indicating that two reserved objects related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol have been acquired.

An image of the characters facing each other is displayed in the center of the "Battle Production" screen, and depending on whether the player-side character placed on the right side can defeat the enemy character on the left side, a normal pattern is displayed. Notify whether the result of the lottery is "hit" or "missing".

A simple design P802 is displayed in the upper right of the screen, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, the result of a normal symbol lottery is displayed on the simple design P802 as a decorative design. The simple drawing P802 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery, and if it is stopped and displayed in doublets when it is a "hit", it may be illusion that a big hit has been won at that time. For example, "3V3" may be configured to notify that the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit" in a mode in which the "V" symbol is stopped and displayed in the center. In addition, during the "4 consecutive battles" production, the result of the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol is not notified by the decorative symbol because the first special symbol is out of alignment, but it is a simple for the special symbol lottery. The drawing P802 may be separately easily displayed.

A right-handed notification P832 is displayed as a separate notification P830 below the simplified design P802 of a normal symbol. In the "long-time chance state" and "short-time chance state", it is necessary to enter the operation port P741 and receive a normal symbol lottery for a limited time during the fluctuation display period of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol. , In order to prevent the specific period from elapsed without receiving the normal symbol lottery as many times as the design intended, control related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol or the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 770 during the special symbol variation display period. When the control for You may make a notification to urge you to do so.

In the "battle effect", when the player-side character wins, the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect" is performed as shown in FIG. 37. In the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect", an image imitating the second start winning opening P721 and a character string of "aiming" are displayed, and a game ball is fired toward the second starting winning opening P721. Is performed. Since the ordinary electric accessory 770 has the end condition of "entry of one game ball to the second start winning opening P721" or "elapse of the operation period of a predetermined time", the pachinko game of the second embodiment is performed. In the machine, in the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect", an indicator display (display of the recommended launch period) that roughly corresponds to the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory is displayed below the image imitating the second start winning opening P721, and the game is played. The person is shown the period during which the ball can be entered into the second start winning opening P721.

In addition, in consideration of the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the second start winning opening P721, the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect" is during the hit fluctuation of the normal symbol, the symbol fixing time of the normal symbol, etc. , Ordinarily, it may be configured to be performed before the operation of the electric accessory 770.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment configured as described above, it is possible to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in which the big hit (small hit V) is definite in the specific game. The length of the duration of the specific period can be made different depending on the type of the special symbol that is to execute the big hit (small hit V) that was executed immediately before the start of the specific game. Like pachinko gaming machines, we provide gaming machines that give intervals that allow us to acquire a large number of gaming balls in a short period of time. It has the effect of being able to provide different specific games and providing pachinko gaming machines that enhance the interest of the games in the specific games.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned 2-1 embodiment, the big hit fluctuation or the small hit fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 1 second in the "short-time chance state" and the "long-time chance state". Therefore, it was configured so as not to generate a specific period, but (a) after the big hit game (small hit V) executed with some special symbol symbol types, even if it is a big hit fluctuation, the specific period ( For example, it is configured to have a jackpot symbol in which the jackpot fluctuation time is set so that 5 minutes) can be generated, or (a) a special symbol lottery in the "short-term chance state" and the "long-term chance state" is a jackpot or Fluctuation pattern when it is a small hit By configuring it so that the fluctuation time is 5 minutes with a probability of several percent in the lottery, it is a big hit in the "short chance state" or the "long chance state". It may be configured to separately provide a "special chance state" in which a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained during the fluctuation (or small hit fluctuation).

In such a "special chance state", if there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol at the start, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is held as a "recharge chance". It may be possible to restart the "4 consecutive battle production" while notifying that there is, or if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol at the start, the final of the "4 consecutive battle production". If there is no hold of the 2nd special symbol at the time of battle, the occurrence of a big hit (small hit V) is notified as a revival effect, and if the 2nd special symbol can be held during the "special chance state", the final It may be configured to perform an effect display such that a big hit game (small hit V) executed in "STOCK-BONUS" is added after the battle.

In addition, when the "special chance state" is triggered by (a) a big hit game (small hit V) executed in some special symbol types, as another modification, the target special symbol In a big hit game (small hit V) triggered by a symbol type, or a part of a large hit (small hit) that is not a target (gase), a special battle effect is generated as an effect of "STOCK-BONUS", and the game is played in a special battle. It may be configured to notify the occurrence of the "special chance state" when the success mode in which the player side character wins is displayed.

(Modification 2 of the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment)
The pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1st embodiment is designed on the assumption that N times of ordinary symbol lottery (1 minute / time) will be executed when a specific period continues for N minutes. After shifting to the game, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and then there is a time until the ball enters the operating port P741 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, or the fluctuation display of the normal symbol during a specific period. Considering the possibility that the player will not be able to receive N times of the normal symbol lottery due to the continuation of the period in which Or, by setting the symbol fixed time after the fluctuation display of N seconds of the first special symbol to X seconds, a guaranteed time "X seconds" is provided so that the player does not lose the right of the normal symbol lottery. It may be configured.

When the guaranteed time is set in this way, the guaranteed time is set as the time until the big hit (small hit) game is started or the time until the normal game is returned after the notification of the result of the normal symbol lottery N times. It is necessary to wait for the remaining time of "X seconds", but during these periods, "STOCK-BONUS execution waiting" is displayed when shifting to a big hit (small hit), and when returning to a normal game, it is displayed. , You may be configured to perform a "result effect" that informs you of the total number of balls you have earned through the consecutive villas.

Further, in order for the player to receive the N times ordinary symbol lottery, the player may be configured to call attention as the remaining time of the guaranteed time "X seconds" decreases. As an effect of calling attention, the right-handed notification P832 may be changed to an emphasized mode, and a warning "If you do not hit right, you will lose the right to battle !!" may be displayed or voice notification may be performed. The guaranteed time "X seconds" is the period from the start of the first special symbol's out-of-order fluctuation (after the start of the specific period) until the normal symbol lottery is performed, and the control of the normal symbol or the ordinary electric accessory after that is stopped. If "X seconds" have passed after the time is measured, "1 minute" (corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol lottery and the time of one cycle related to the operation of the normal electric accessory) is newly set as the guaranteed time, and the same applies. It is configured to repeat the control of.

[2-2 Example]
Next, a second application example (2-2 Example) relating to the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a game flow of the second embodiment, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an production example during the chance time of the second embodiment, and FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a second-2. It is a figure which shows the other effect example during the chance time of an Example, and FIG. 41 is a figure which shows the effect example during the super chance time of 2-2 Example.

The characteristic point of the second example is a period in which the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment can obtain a hold related to the first specific period (the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol), which is simplified. In addition, during the execution of the "chance time" which is also called the "first specific period"), the hold for the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a predetermined condition (the second special symbol in the 2-2 embodiment). When the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of 2 or more is satisfied, it is easy to obtain the hold related to the second specific period (the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol) that will occur next time. By controlling the state, which is simply referred to as the "second specific period") to be given the right to be in a more advantageous state than the first specific period, the player can play the game during the specific period. Depending on the result (the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol), it is possible to pay attention to whether or not it is possible to shift to a further advantageous state, and to enhance the fun of the game.

Hereinafter, the details of the second and second embodiments will be described. The board configuration of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be described as being the same as that of the second embodiment and the second embodiment, but if the gaming described below can be configured, it will be described. It can be changed as appropriate.

(Game flow)
First, with reference to FIG. 38, the game flow (transition of the gaming state) will be described with respect to the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment also adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control as in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment.

In the normal game (low probability / low base), the game ball is launched into the left side area P501L in the game area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, and the game ball is inserted into the first start winning opening 711A. This is a gaming state in which a special symbol lottery for the first special symbol is executed and a "big hit (special diagram 1)" is obtained (FIG. 38 (A)).

When the "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed, the "chance time" is started (FIG. 38 (B)). The "chance time" is a gaming state with a low probability / high base state (one electric support), and like the pachinko gaming machines of the second embodiment and the second embodiment, the first special symbol is out of alignment. During the period (80 seconds), a specific period during which the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained occurs.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2nd-2nd embodiment, the "chance time" is composed of the deviation variation of 80 seconds of the first special symbol. During this time, by inserting the game ball into the operating port P741 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501, a normal symbol lottery (hit probability 1 / 9.99, variation time per time 10 seconds) is received. Is possible, and by performing eight ordinary symbol lottery during the "chance time", the right to execute "STOCK-BONUS", which is a small hit V / big hit game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol described later. It is a game state aiming at the acquisition of. That is, in this specific period of 80 seconds, as described above, the normal symbol lottery with a winning probability of 1 / 9.99 and a variation time of 10 seconds per time can be received eight times.

In the "chance time", the game ball enters the P721 in the easy-to-enter state by winning the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery with a probability of 1 / 9.99, which is related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. The probability (continuation rate) of acquiring at least one hold and acquiring the execution right of "chance time" or "super chance time" described later is 56.9. % (In other words, the expected value obtained once in 8 times (80 seconds / fluctuation time 10 seconds) per 1 / 9.99 probability), probability of acquiring the execution right of "super chance time" Is 19% (in other words, the expected value that can be obtained twice or more in 8 times (80 seconds / fluctuation time 10 seconds) with a probability of 1 / 9.99). If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "chance time", the game returns to the normal game (FIG. 38 (I)).

After the lapse of a specific period in the "chance time", if there is one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, "STOCK-BONUS" (small hit V / big hit game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol) ) (FIG. 38 (D)), and after the end of "STOCK-BONUS", the process shifts to "chance time" (FIG. 38 (E)).

Further, in the "chance time", the right to execute the "super chance time" can be obtained by acquiring two or more holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. The "super chance time" is the period during which the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol, which started to fluctuate when the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is two, is executed for 170 seconds. A specific period, which is a variable display period of the special symbol of, occurs. That is, in the specific period of 170 seconds, as described above, the normal symbol lottery with a winning probability of 1 / 9.99 and a variation time of 10 seconds per time can be received 17 times.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second-2 embodiment, the special symbol of the second special symbol is also in the specific period of the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation period of the second special symbol, which is the execution period of the "super chance time". It will be possible to obtain a hold related to the lottery. Since the "super chance time" (170 seconds) is set to a longer period than the specific period in the "chance time" (80 seconds), the number of feasible normal symbol lottery is large, and the second special symbol is more. It can be said that the possibility of obtaining a hold related to the special symbol lottery is increasing.

In the "super chance time", the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed is about 17 times, and it is possible to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol with a probability of about 83.3%. It is possible to acquire the right to execute "Super Chance Time". If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "super chance time", the process shifts to "STOCK-BONUS" after the end of the "super chance time" (Fig. 38 (G)). 2 If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol can be obtained, the process shifts to "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" (FIG. 38 (F)). After the execution of "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS", it returns to the "super chance time" (FIG. 38 (H)).

The "STOCK-BONUS" executed after the "super chance time" is repeated until the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes 0 (the fluctuation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1). Since it is seconds, a specific period of 80 seconds does not occur even if it is in the same state as "chance time" internally), "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" executed after "super chance time" is the second special symbol. It is repeatedly executed until there are two holds related to the special symbol lottery (since the fluctuation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1 second, even if it is internally in the same state as the "super chance time" 170 No specific period of seconds occurs).

In addition, if two holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired during the "chance time", the 80-second missed fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, which is the "chance time", ends. Later, the "super chance time" will be started. That is, the variation display period of the second special symbol is the variation display time of the special symbol depending on the number of holdings regardless of whether or not the base state which is the gaming state, in other words, the variation time shortening function (time reduction state) of the special symbol is activated. In the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the variable display period of 170 seconds is selected when the number of holdings is 2, and the variable time of 1 second is selected when the number of holdings is other. It has become like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second example, even if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "super chance time" which is the most advantageous state for the player. After "STOCK-BONUS" is executed once, "chance time" will be started, so it has a two-stage configuration from the most advantageous state to the transition to the normal game, which is the most advantageous state. Even when the "super chance time" is over, the game flow is such that the player can be made to think that "there is still a chance" and the decline in the motivation to play can be suppressed.

(Example of production of pachinko gaming machine P in 2-2 Example)
Subsequently, examples of the production of the “chance time” and the “super chance time” in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.

<< Example of production of chance time for pachinko gaming machine P in 2-2 Example >>
FIG. 39 shows an example of the effect display in the chance time after the “big hit (special figure 1)”. At the top of the screen, the effect mode display P840 (character string of "chance time") and the remaining number of games display P841 (character string of "54 seconds left") are displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, since the specific period is the variation display period of the special symbol, the "remaining variation time" (or the variation of the special symbol) of the special symbol is set as the remaining game count display P841. The remaining time from the end of the display to the end of the electric chew support status) is displayed.

The hold display area P810 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and in the embodiment of FIG. 39, there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the hold object P811 (see FIG. 36) is not displayed. Also in the simple hold display P814 in the center of the left side of the screen, "0" is displayed as the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

At the bottom left of the screen, the cumulative number of acquisitions displayed P824 (display of "Total_00600pt") and the jackpot icon display P821 (display of the icon "V" and "x1" indicating the number) are displayed, and are displayed in FIG. 39. It shows the number of balls won and the big hit game (small hit V) in the game of.

Then, in the center of the screen, a situation is shown in which the "7" symbol with a character is displayed as a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 in the right column and the middle column (temporary stop), and the left symbol is varied. It is shown that it is being displayed. Here, the decorative symbol P801 is for notifying the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery, and the ordinary symbol is displayed by displaying three 7 symbols in a doublet or by displaying other special decorative symbols. It is configured to notify the "hit" as a result of the lottery.

In the example of FIG. 39, the decorative symbol P801 (decorative symbol in the left column) of 1 is not stopped, and "Aim for" 7 (image) "is displayed together with an image imitating the effect button P381", and the player By operating the effect button P381, whether three "7" symbols of the decorative symbol P801 are aligned (hit), or whether the decorative symbol P801 other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol (missing). A button effect for notifying is being executed. Even when a predetermined time has elapsed after the effect button is displayed (when the player does not press the effect button for a predetermined time), the image to be finally displayed, such as 7 sets or the tempai is off, is displayed.

Not limited to the effect example shown in FIG. 39, as an effect of notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery during the "chance time", for example, an effect using a character without a variable display of the decorative symbol P801 (for example). You may notify that the normal symbol lottery is a win by executing the battle effect) and displaying the success mode (battle victory).

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another production example of the “chance time” of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment. More specifically, in the "chance time", one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired (in FIG. 40, one hold object P811 is displayed in the hold display area P810 at the lower right of the screen. This is an example of an effect display that is displayed at least in a situation where "STOCK-BONUS" is executed and the entry into the "chance time" is confirmed again, that is, in a situation where the consecutive villas are confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 40, the effect mode display P840 is switched to the “promotion chance”, and a message of the command mode “destroy the seal !!” is displayed below the character string of the “promotion chance”. A character with a heavy weapon is displayed in the center of the screen, and a mode in which the character is notified that the result of the normal symbol lottery will be a hit by succeeding in "destroying the seal" required as an effect. It is suggested that That is, in the situation of "chance time", before and after the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired, the tendency of the effect and the effect mode for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery are switched. There is.

As a reason for switching the production mode in the middle of the "chance time", in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs during the execution of the "chance time". If not, the player is paying attention to whether or not the advantageous state continues (whether or not he / she can acquire the right to enter the "chance time" again), and the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is suspended. After that, there is a different concern for those players, as there will be a focus on whether or not there will be a hold on the special symbol lottery for the second second special symbol, which is the right to execute the "super chance time". On the other hand, by displaying the optimum production, the effect of enhancing the interest can be expected.

In the example of FIG. 40, an effect example using a character with a heavy weapon is shown, but an effect by another character may be performed, or a different effect is performed each time a normal symbol lottery is executed. The result of the lottery may be shown. Further, even after the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired, it is possible to execute the same effect display as before the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 39 occurs. It may be configured to be.

Although not shown, in the case where the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is further acquired and the right of two or more big hit games (small hit V) is acquired under the situation shown in FIG. 40. , Further different production tendencies, may be configured to change to a state in which the production is determined in the production mode.

<< Example of production of super chance time of pachinko gaming machine P in 2-2 Example >>
FIG. 41 shows an example of producing a super chance time executed in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment.

In the example of FIG. 41, as the effect of the “super chance time”, an example in which the effect display substantially equivalent to the “chance time” shown in FIG. 39 is shown is shown. As a different point, in order to congratulate the situation in which the control is in the most advantageous state, the display area of the variable display of the decorative symbol P801 for notifying the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery has been changed to the background. The difference is that the animation is displayed as a production image. In the example of FIG. 41, it is assumed that the background animation displays an image that is not related to the result of the normal symbol lottery, but the variation display of the decorative symbol P801 informs the degree of expectation that the hit result is notified. Therefore, there is a case where a preview image (mini character action, addition of effect effect to variable display of decorative pattern P801, etc.) displayed overlaid on the background animation image is displayed.

If there are 4 holds related to the special symbol lottery for the 2nd special symbol during the execution of "Super Chance Time", the right to enter the 2nd start winning opening P721 is a new big hit game (small hit V). The variable display of the decorative symbol P801 for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery may be hidden or changed to be displayed in a smaller display area. By reducing the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern P801 in this way, the visibility of the animation display of the background may be further enhanced.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2nd-2nd embodiment, about 10 animations are displayed in order as the background animation during the "super chance time" according to the number of times (or the number of consecutive times) the super chance time is executed. It is configured to be. Then, in the situation where the "super chance time" is executed a specific number of times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained, in "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS". Even if it is configured to execute a special effect (for example, an effect display related to the animation displayed in the immediately preceding "super chance time") as the effect of the big hit game (small hit V) to be executed. good.

In addition, in the "super chance time" which is the specific number of times, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained, it will be "chance time" after "STOCK-BONUS". When the execution right of "Super Chance Time" is acquired again, the animation of the same background as the previous specific number of times is displayed (separated effect) again, and the divided effect is executed in "Super Chance Time". At the time of execution, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained, the background animation in the "super chance time" may not proceed.

Further, not limited to the effect display mode as shown in FIG. 41, in the "super chance time", a notice effect for notifying the result of the ordinary symbol lottery as in the "chance time" as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40. It may be possible to execute an effect mode that draws attention to the above, or one of a plurality of effect modes such as the same effect mode as the "chance time" or the above-mentioned effect mode mainly based on the background animation of the player. It may be configured to be arbitrarily selectable.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine of the second-2 embodiment)
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine P according to the second embodiment will be described. First, as a first modification, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment has two specific periods having different degrees of advantage as specific periods, but there are modifications that further increase such as three or four. Conceivable.

More specifically, as a modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, when determining the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the variation is limited to the variation when the number of reservations is two. However, even when there are 3 or 4 holds related to the special symbol lottery for the 2nd special symbol, a specific period (the period during which the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the 2nd special symbol can be obtained) can be generated. It is conceivable to control the time (variation pattern) of the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol to be determined.

At this time, the specific period may be longer as the number of holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol increases (for example, 40 seconds when the number of holdings is 2 and 3 holdings). When 50 seconds, when the number of holds is 4, 60 seconds is determined), on the contrary, even if it is configured so that the specific period is shorter when there are many holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Good (for example, 100 seconds when the number of holds is 2, 20 seconds when the number of holds is 3, and 10 seconds when the number of holds is 4).

(Modification 2 of the pachinko gaming machine of 2-2 Example)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, as described above, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol when the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is two in the second specific period (the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol). The variable display period of the big hit (small hit V) based on is not dependent on the gaming state (high base state or low base state), but is determined depending on the number of holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It was explained that it is performed by the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery table, but when "the number of holdings and the gaming state related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a high base state". The second specific period may be generated by the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery table referred to on the condition of.

With this configuration, the number of holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol generates the second specific period in the period of the first specific period (the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high base state). Even if it matches the number of conditions to be made, the gaming state shifts to the low base state at the end of the first period, and one of the conditions for generating the second specific period is not satisfied. After the end of one specific period, it is possible to always shift to the big hit game (small hit V), and it is possible to control so that the second specific period is always executed after the big hit game (small hit V). Will be.

At this time, in order to acquire the execution right of the second specific period, the condition for generating the second specific period after the execution of the big hit game (small hit V) in the first specific period + 1 first. 2 It is necessary to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of special symbols, but as mentioned above, after the end of the first specific period and after the end of the second specific period, the game always shifts to a big hit (small hit V). However, the start of the first specific period and the second specific period can always be configured to be after the execution of the big hit (small hit V), and the transition of the gaming state is easy for the player to understand. Can be done.

[Example 2-3]
Regarding the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the third application example (the second to third embodiments) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the second and third embodiments, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big hit (small hit) symbols of the second and third embodiments.

The feature of the second and third embodiments is that the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has a special opportunity to execute a big hit game (small hit V) immediately before shifting to a specific game (high base state). Depending on the type of symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol), one of a plurality of high base states (electric support mode) with different controls related to the normal symbol lottery is set, so that a specific period (second special symbol) in the specific game is set. It can be configured to make the ease of obtaining the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the special symbol lottery (the period during which the hold related to the special symbol lottery can be obtained) different, and the game performance in a specific period (related to the normal symbol lottery). The difference in control) is to enhance the interest of specific games.

More specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second and third embodiments, the normal symbol lottery is a "hit" as a type of high base state (electric support mode) in which the control related to the normal symbol lottery in a specific period is different. It is composed of "electric support mode 1" with a probability of 1/1 (100%) and "electric support mode 2" with a probability of 1/10 (10%) that the probability of winning a normal symbol lottery is 1/10 (10%). In the case of controlling to the "electric support mode 2", the number of games to be maintained in the high base state is configured to be any one of 1 to 3 times.

That is, when controlled to "electric support mode 1", by playing the game as intended by the design, it is possible to always obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the four second special symbols, and to "electric support mode 2". If controlled, the game will be developed in which a normal symbol lottery is received in anticipation of the continuation of the specific game (ream villa).

Hereinafter, the details of the second and third embodiments will be described. The board configuration of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be described in the same manner as in the second embodiment, the 2-1 embodiment, and the 2-2 embodiment, but the game described below will be described. If it can be configured, it can be changed as appropriate.

(Game flow)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko gaming machine P according to the second and third embodiments. In the "normal game (low probability / low base state)" of FIG. 42, the player fires a game ball into the left side area P501L of the game area P501, causes the game ball to enter the first start winning opening P711A, and the first ball is inserted. 1 By receiving a special symbol lottery for special symbols, we aim to acquire the right to execute the "big hit (special figure 1)" (Fig. 42 (A)).

When the "big hit (special figure 1)" is started, the player launches a game ball into the right area P501R of the game area P501, inserts the game ball into the big prize opening P751, and uses the prize ball to play the game ball. Make an acquisition. At this time, as in the second embodiment, the 2-1 embodiment, and the 2-2 embodiment, if the launch is performed aiming at the big winning opening P751 during the big hit game, the first starting winning opening P711B is also entered. A ball is generated, and at least one special symbol lottery for the first special symbol is held during the big hit game (small hit V). After the "big hit (special figure 1)", the process shifts to "STOCK-TIME 1" as shown in FIG. 42 (FIG. 42 (B)).

"STOCK-TIME1" is a specific game that has a low probability / high base state (electric chew support state), and is a hit of a normal symbol lottery based on the symbol that triggered the execution of "big hit (special figure 1)". A big hit game (small hit V) is executed based on the symbol that triggered the execution of "big hit (special figure 1)" while controlling to one of two high base states (electric support mode) with different probabilities of becoming. The number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol that maintains the high base state when it is not performed is also controlled to one of 1 to 3 times.

A specific example of the gaming state of "STOCK-TIME1" is shown in FIG. 43. In the distribution of the big hit game (small hit V) symbols of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second to third embodiments shown in FIG. 43, the names of the "designs (groups)" are "Special Figure 1_Big Hit Symbol A" to "Special Figure 1_". It is a big hit symbol that the big hit symbol (group) which is "big hit symbol D" is controlled to "STOCK-TIME1".

Here, in the "selection probability" of FIG. 43, the jackpot symbol included in any of "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" to "special figure 1_big hit symbol D" as the jackpot symbol is selected by the jackpot symbol lottery of the special symbol. The "number of electric support" indicates the probability to be determined, and the "number of electric support" is the number of games to maintain the high base state set after each big hit game of "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" to "special figure 1_big hit symbol D". Is shown.

The "normal symbol probability" in FIG. 43 is the probability that the normal symbol lottery will be a "hit" in a specific game (high base state) controlled after "special figure 1_big hit symbol A" to "special figure 1_big hit symbol D". The high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/1 is defined as "electric support mode 1", and the high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/10 is defined as "electric support mode 2".

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second and third embodiments, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the high base state is 30 seconds, and the normal symbol based on the ordinary symbol lottery is set. The fluctuation time of is about 4 seconds per fluctuation. That is, about 7 normal symbol fluctuations are executed while the 1st special symbol deviation fluctuation in the high base state (electric support state) is performed once, and the duration of the high base state is the special symbol fluctuation display 2 times. Or, if it is 3 times, the maximum number of times the normal symbol lottery can be executed increases to about 14 times and about 21 times.

The “continuation rate” in FIG. 43 indicates the probability (expectation degree) of obtaining a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in a specific period (the total period of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high base state). It shows that the execution right of the specific game (STOCK-TIME2) is acquired at the indicated continuation rate (probability).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second and third embodiments, the number of times to maintain the high base state may be a plurality of times (the number of times of electric support may be two or three times), but the first to second times. If a hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can be obtained during the execution of the first special symbol out-of-order change, which is the second specific period, the second or third special symbol priority digestion control is used to specify the second or third special symbol. The big hit game (small hit V) is executed by the special symbol lottery related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol without executing the period (the deviation change of the first special symbol).

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second and third embodiments, in the specific game controlled by the "electric support mode 1", four reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired in a short time (30 seconds). On the other hand, when it is controlled to "electric support mode 2", even if the number of electric support is large, the specific period (first special) in which the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained is obtained. When the execution is controlled to "electric support mode 2" because the execution of a specific period in which the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the new second special symbol can be obtained is canceled at the moment when the symbol deviation change) is completed. It is a rare event to obtain a hold related to a special symbol lottery for a plurality of second special symbols.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description of the game state (game flow) will be continued. In "STOCK-TIME1", the special symbol of the second special symbol is used before the specified number of games (number of electric support times) is exhausted based on the jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of "big hit (special figure 1)". If the hold related to the lottery can be obtained, the "big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" is executed (FIG. 42 (C)). On the other hand, in "STOCK-TIME1", the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained before the specified number of games (number of electric support times) is exhausted by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. If so, the game returns to the "normal game" (FIG. 42 (D)).

"Big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" is a big hit game (small hit) until there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol acquired in "STOCK-TIME1" or "STOCK-TIME2". V) is controlled to be executed repeatedly, and after the "big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols is executed, it goes to "STOCK-TIME2". Transition (FIG. 42 (E)).

In addition, every time "big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" is executed, "STOCK-TIME2" is executed internally, but it is based on the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Since the big hit (small hit) fluctuation of the second special symbol ends in a short fluctuation of about 1 second, there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols, and the special symbol of the first special symbol is eliminated. Until the out-of-order fluctuation based on the lottery is executed, a specific period does not occur, and the ordinary electric accessory 770 is not released in a manner that facilitates entry into the ball.

"STOCK-TIME2" is a specific game that shifts after the big hit game (small hit V) based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and has three types of gaming states as shown in FIG. 43. Like "STOCK-TIME1", "STOCK-TIME2" is a combination of "electric support mode 1" and "electric support mode 2", which are the types of high base state, and the number of games (number of electric support) to maintain the high base state. There is no difference in the mechanism of the game. However, "STOCK-TIME2", which shifts after the big hit game (small hit V) of "Special Figure 2_Big Hit / Small Hit Symbol A" to "Special Figure 2_Big Hit / Small Hit Symbol C", is the normal symbol lottery. The distribution frequency controlled by "electric support mode 1", which has a normal symbol probability of 1/1, is high, and "STOCK-BONUS" of 4 big hit games (small hit V) is executed. It is highly likely that the game will be played, and it is easy to get a large amount of balls in a short time.

Further, "STOCK-TIME2" is configured so that the number of electric support in a specific game is at least 2 times even in the case of "electric support mode 2" having a normal symbol probability of 1/10. The minimum number of times of electric support when "STOCK-TIME1" is executed in "electric support mode 2" is more than one, and the expectation of continuation of the specific game (renso) is also set high.

In "STOCK-TIME2", when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained, the "big hit (special figure 2)" STOCK-BONUS "" is executed (FIG. 42 (F)), and the second If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol cannot be obtained, the game returns to the "normal game" (FIG. 42 (G)).

(Modification example of the pachinko gaming machine of the second and third embodiments)
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine P of the second and third embodiments will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the second and third embodiments, the control related to the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is different, and the "normal symbol probability", which is the probability of becoming a "hit" in the normal symbol lottery, is different. Although "support mode 1" and "electric support mode 2" have been described, the types of "electric support mode" are not limited to two, and "electric support mode 3" and "electric support mode 4" having different "normal symbol probabilities" are used. It may be configurable.

In addition, as a method to make the type of "electric support mode" different, instead of "normal symbol probability", the type of "normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function (normal symbol time reduction)" is made different, and the fluctuation per fluctuation of the normal symbol. The time may be set to 2 seconds per fluctuation instead of 4 seconds, or 8 seconds per fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols can be determined, and the average is 4 seconds. Such a case may be provided. By making it possible to execute different "electric support modes" by "ordinary symbol time reduction", the number of times the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in a specific period can be made different, and the more the ordinary symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter time, the more. It can be sent as a game state in which a high continuation rate can be expected. Further, the "electric support mode" may be configured as different specifications by combining the types of "ordinary symbol probability" and "ordinary symbol time reduction".

As described above, regarding the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, the first to second to third embodiments have been described as application examples thereof. These application examples, the pachinko gaming machines P of Examples 2-1 to 2-3 and their variants, can be implemented as independent technologies, but the technologies disclosed in each can be combined as appropriate. It is also possible to carry out.

Further, in the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery is generated, that is, a state in which the ball is easily entered in the second starting winning opening P721, and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed. Although described in the embodiment of obtaining the hold, as a modification to the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery is the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It is also possible to configure a modified example as follows so as not to acquire (the right to execute the big hit game (small hit V)).

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery does not acquire the hold (right to execute the big hit game (small hit V)) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. As an example of the method of executing the example, a distribution device (movable valve member, etc.) for distributing game balls to two flow paths is provided inside the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770, and one flow path is used as the general winning opening P731. It is conceivable to adopt a board configuration in which the flow path for guiding the game ball is formed, and the other is composed of the flow path for guiding the game ball to the second starting winning opening P721.

At this time, the operation pattern of the distribution device inside the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770 is different depending on the winning symbol lottery of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol lottery, the type of "electric support mode", etc., and the ordinary symbol lottery is performed. In order to create a state in which the winning probabilities for the second starting winning opening P721 when the result is "hit" are different. As a specific example, in "ordinary symbol_hit symbol A", the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 770 and the distribution device inside the winning device is set so that the winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 is 100%. In "ordinary symbol_winning symbol B", the winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 is 50%, and in "ordinary symbol_winning symbol C", the winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 is 10% (may be 0%). An example of the configuration is given.

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment configured in this way, if a "hit" is won in the ordinary symbol lottery during the execution of a specific period, the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect" is executed. Then, when the player is urged to insert the game ball into the ordinary electric accessory 770 and the player enters the game ball into the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770, the general winning opening P731 or the second start winning is won. Regardless of which of the mouths P721 the ball entered, the notification was made to raise the expectation level regarding whether or not the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurred (the color of the effect effect is "blue" ⇒ " "Green" ⇒ "Red" ⇒ "Gold" ⇒ "Rainbow (confirmation of hold acquisition related to the special symbol lottery of 4 second special symbols)") At the end timing, the game may be configured to notify the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (for example, the button effect is executed at the symbol fixed time of the special symbol at the expiration of the specific period. Then, by operating a button, the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is displayed as "V × ○").

In such a configuration, it is preferable not to display the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery (display by the hold display area P810, simple hold display P814). In addition, by adopting such a modified example, even if the normal symbol is a hit, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not always occur, so that the ordinary electric accessory 770 opens. The pachinko gaming machine P, which is a modification of the second embodiment and the application examples of the second embodiment, can send out many situations such as Can be provided.

(Activation of the fluctuation time shortening function triggered by the number of operations of the special symbol "Relief function")
When the variable display of the special symbol of the predetermined number of games is executed in the "relief function", which is the operation of the variable time shortening function triggered by the number of operations of the special symbol, and the low base state (so-called "normal game"). , It is a function to generate a high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function).

More specifically, after the transition to the low base state (immediately after the RAM is cleared, after the game end condition in the high base state is satisfied, and after the execution of the special game that shifts to the low base state), a predetermined game is performed. By generating a high base state when the special game that is the number of times is executed, the start winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 770 (starting winning opening related to the first special symbol or starting winning prize related to the second special symbol). It is a function that facilitates winning a prize in the mouth), facilitates the acquisition of the right to a special symbol lottery, and suppresses the player from excessively consuming the game ball.

The "relief function" sets a plurality of game times as a predetermined number of games, and the time reduction number (the number of games to maintain a high base state) given when the first relief function is activated and the second time (the number of games to maintain a high base state). The third time) may be configured so that the number of time reductions given when the relief function is activated is different.

In addition, if the "relief function" is configured to be activated by executing a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of games, depending on the performance of the "relief function" that is activated, the player may be allowed to play excessively. Therefore, when a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of games is executed, the lottery related to the operation of the "relief function" is configured to be executed, and for example, the operation of the "relief function" is won. The "relief function" may be activated at 1/2 with a probability of 50%.

(Activation of the function to shorten the fluctuation time of special symbols by "time saving symbols")
In the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P that operates the fluctuation time shortening function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function of the special symbol after the big hit game (special game) is executed has been described. .. The operation of the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function (time reduction function) and the electric chew support function is not limited to after the execution of such a special game, but a specific type of special symbol (missing symbol, small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. Even if the jackpot game is not executed, the operation may be started.

For example, in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, when the winning symbol lottery (missing symbol lottery) when the winning / failing lottery is "missing", the "missing symbol with time reduction" which is won at 1/800 is won. In addition, it may be configured to generate a high base state (time saving state, electric chew support state) that continues until 100 special symbol lottery is executed.

In addition, a type may be provided for the "time saving_missing symbol" so that the number of games for maintaining the high base state differs depending on the type of the "time saving_missing symbol". For example, up to 50 times for "Time saving _ Missing symbol A", 100 times for "Time saving _ Missing symbol B", and 10000 times for "Time saving _ Missing symbol C" (* Substantially the next big hit is confirmed) It can also be.

The special symbol variation time shortening function (time saving function), the "relief function" related to the electric chew support function, and the "time saving symbol" are the techniques disclosed in this embodiment and application examples of the second embodiment and the second embodiment. It is also possible to apply for.

In particular, with respect to the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the second embodiment application example in which the small hit V is adopted as the specifications (specs) of the gaming machine, the variable time shortening function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are related. When the "relief function" and the "time saving symbol" are adopted, the situation in which it is easy to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which is a big hit game (small hit V) with a high probability, is the first in the "normal game". It can be generated even when the special symbol lottery does not result in a "big hit", and the effect of suppressing the player's consumption of the game ball can be expected more effectively.

[Third Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the above-mentioned prerequisite technology and the basic configuration of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology and the present embodiment will be mainly described, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as the prerequisite technique or the elements described in the present embodiment and the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the “small hit V” as in the present embodiment and the second embodiment. In particular, in the low probability / low base state, which is a normal game, acquiring a small hit V (Special Figure 1), which has a lower winning probability than the big hit probability, is a prerequisite for shifting to the most advantageous state. By being designed, it is difficult to set the conditions for transitioning to the most advantageous state, while the game state that is once the most advantageous (“Self-powered rank-up bonus & continuation” of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment). It is a specification that you can get a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2) with a very high probability when you move to the specific game state of "battle", and it is a highly gambling and entertaining game. It is something that can be provided.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, when the game shifts to the most advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state of "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle"), the jackpot effect is within 3 fluctuations of the high base state. By continuously displaying the small hit V (or big hit), it seems that there is no upper limit to the game balls that can be obtained by the big hit. By repeatedly executing the "continuous battle" production that can obtain the "bonus" with a high probability, it is configured so that the player can experience a novel and highly entertaining production. The details of the outline of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 44, 45 and the like.

(Board composition)
Regarding the configuration of the board surface configuration (composition of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment can be implemented with almost the same board configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. Is.

(spec)
Next, the playability (specs) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment will be described. In this explanation, only the specifications related to "Setting 1" will be described for the "settings" (setting values) that affect the ball ejection performance, but various numerical values related to other setting values will be set as appropriate. Is.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, the probability of winning or losing lottery is 1/185 for the big hit probability (common to the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol), 1/555 for the small hit probability (1st special symbol), and 1 for the small hit probability. It is set to /3.7 (second special symbol), and the number of prize balls is one for the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) P711 and one for the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) P721. Two balls, the left general winning opening P731L is set to three balls, the right general winning opening P731R is set to three balls, and the large winning opening (attacker) P751 is set to 11 balls.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control as in the present embodiment, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved. Gives priority to the second special symbol and displays it in a variable manner. As in the present embodiment, if the game property is not lost, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is not limited to the second special symbol priority digestion control, but as a modification, the first special symbol priority digestion is performed. Needless to say, the control may be applied, or the entry-order digestion control that preferentially digests the ball that has entered first may be applied.

The types of jackpots (including small hits V) in the special gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment are 2 round jackpots (big hits of the 1st special symbol) and 5 round jackpots (small hits V of the 1st special symbol). A big hit or a small hit V) of the second special symbol is provided. Further, regarding the specific game which is an advantageous normal game state, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment does not have a probability fluctuation function, and has an electric chew support function (electric support) after various big hits (including small hit V). A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating the function.

Further, among the detailed control examples described later, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment is displayed with fluctuations of a maximum of four pending periods of the specific game (high base state) and / or after the end of the specific game. During the period, the special fluctuation pattern table (limited frequency pattern table) is referred to at a predetermined timing, and the fluctuation pattern for securing the fluctuation display time of the special symbol as needed is selected. However, at the timing of referring to the special variation pattern table, the variation display count of the first special symbol and the variation display count of the second special symbol after the execution of the special game are counted and stored separately, and the first special symbol is stored. Or, when the stored information of the number of fluctuations stored corresponding to each of the fluctuations of the second special symbol is a specific value, the special variation pattern table for the first special symbol or the special variation for the second special symbol The pattern table can be referred to.

(Game flow)
Next, the game flow of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

First, the player starts the game in a low probability / low base state, which is a normal game. At this time, the player fires the game ball toward the left side of the game area (left side area P501L) and puts the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 to hold the special symbol lottery for the first special symbol. Aim to acquire a small hit V (special figure 1) or a big hit (special figure 1) by receiving a special symbol lottery for the first special symbol. (See FIGS. 44 (A) and 44 (C))

As shown in FIG. 44, when a small hit V (special figure 1) is acquired in a normal game (low probability / low base state), a specific game (low probability / high base state) is performed after the small hit V (small hit development big hit). ) (See Fig. 44 (B)), and if you get a big hit (Special Figure 1) in a normal game (low probability / low base state), you will get a normal game again after the big hit game. It returns to (low probability / low base state) (see FIG. 44 (D)).

The "Katsumai Tamashii Battle Mode" of the specific game, which is in the low probability / high base state, is the state in which the electric chew support function is activated, and is related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 arranged in the right game area (right area P501R). The frequency with which the second starting winning opening P721 becomes easy to enter the ball is increased. Therefore, the player performs a "right hit" to launch the game ball into the right game area (right area P501R), and the game ball is inserted into the second start winning opening P721, so that the small hit probability is set high. By generating the right (holding) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is configured so that the small hit V (or the big hit) can be obtained more easily.

In the "Katsumai Tamashii Battle Mode" of the specific game that is in the low probability / high base state, the electric chew support function continues until the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is performed four times, and the fourth special symbol is the second. Until the variation display of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurring during the fluctuation of is completed, that is, until the variation display of the second special symbol up to a total of 8 times is completed. continue.

If you get a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2) in the "Katsumai soul battle mode" of a specific game that is in a low probability / high base state, you get a small hit V (small hit development big hit) or a big hit. After the game is executed, the game shifts to the "self-help rank-up bonus & continuous battle" state of the specific game, which is a low probability / high base state (see FIGS. 44 (F) and (G)). On the other hand, if neither the small hit V (Special Figure 2) nor the big hit (Special Figure 2) can be obtained in the "Katsumai Soul Battle Mode", the game returns to the low probability / low base, which is a normal game (Fig. 44 (Fig. 44). E) See).

As with the "Katsumai Soul Battle Mode", the "self-help rank-up bonus & continuous battle" of the specific game that is in the low probability / high base state is an electric chew until the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is performed four times. Until the support function continues and the change display of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurs during the fourth change of the second special symbol is completed, that is, a maximum of 8 It is a gaming state that continues until the variation display of the second special symbol of the times is completed.

If you get a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2) in the "self-made rank-up bonus & continuous battle" of a specific game that is in a low probability / high base state, you get a small hit V (small hit development big hit). ) Or after the jackpot game is executed, the game shifts to the "self-help rank-up bonus & continuous battle" state of the specific game, which is a low probability / high base state (see FIGS. 44 (G) and (H)). On the other hand, if neither the small hit V (special figure 2) nor the big hit (special figure 2) can be obtained in the "self-made rank-up bonus & continuous battle", the game returns to the low probability / low base, which is a normal game ( See FIG. 44 (I)).

(Explanation of production)
Next, in the explanation of the game flow, we will explain the outline of the production in the specific game (low probability / high base state) "Katsumai Tamashii Battle Mode" and "Self-powered Rank Up Bonus & Continuous Battle" for which the gameplay was explained. do.

《Katsumai Soul Battle Mode》
First, the "Katsumai Soul Battle Mode" will be explained. As explained in the game flow, the "Katsumai Soul Battle Mode" has a maximum of 4 changes that exist at the end of the 4th change of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state and the 4th change of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state. It is an effect executed in the variation display of the special symbol for a maximum of 8 variations corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

When entering the "Katsumai Tamashii Battle Mode", when determining the variation pattern to notify the result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the "Katsumai Tamashii Battle Mode", the special variation pattern lottery table A (Limited frequency table A) is selected. As the variation pattern selected in the special variation pattern lottery table A, for example, a variation mode of about 30 to 40 seconds is selected for the first to third variations, and a variation pattern of about 60 seconds is selected for the fourth variation. It has become like. Then, for the 5th to 8th fluctuations, a fluctuation pattern of 1 second is selected. Although it has been explained that the 1st to 3rd fluctuations, the 4th fluctuation, and the 5th to 8th fluctuations are selected in the special fluctuation pattern table A, strictly speaking, the special fluctuation pattern table A-1 (strictly speaking, in each of these periods) The variation pattern table to be referred to can be switched between (1st to 3rd variation), special variation pattern table A-2 (4th variation), and special variation pattern table A-3 (5th to 8th variation).

As an effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol determined by using the special variation pattern lottery table as described above, the battle effect as illustrated in FIGS. 30 to 32 of this embodiment is executed. ing. For example, for the 1st to 3rd fluctuations, the “first half of the battle mode” effect as shown in FIG. 30 is executed in response to each fluctuation, and for the 4th to 8th fluctuations, the collective fluctuation is executed, so that FIG. 31 Further, it can be exemplified to execute an effect similar to the “battle mode final battle effect” as shown in FIG. 32.

《Self-made rank-up bonus & continuous battle》
Next, the outline of the production of "self-made rank-up bonus & continuous battle" will be explained.

The "self-help rank-up bonus & continuous battle" production is divided into a "self-help rank-up bonus" production part and a "continuous battle" production part.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the production part of the "self-help rank-up bonus" is continuous with the production display during execution of the small hit V (special figure 2) or the big hit (special figure 2). It is a production state that continues until the period corresponding to the three variable display of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the high base state, and after executing the small hit V (special figure 2) or the big hit (special figure 2), the second 2 As long as the small hit V or the big hit (special figure 2) is continuously obtained by the time when the special symbol lottery of the special symbol is performed three times, the effect display as if the big hit is continued.

On the other hand, the "continuous battle" production corresponds to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred from the 4th fluctuation (final fluctuation) of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state to the end of the final fluctuation. It is an effect performed during the period in which the variation display is executed, and an effect in which the player-side character and the enemy-side character battle is executed by collecting the variation display for up to 5 times as the variation. As the display content of the effect, the same effect display as the "battle mode final battle" effect in this embodiment is executed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the characteristic production is the "self-help rank-up bonus", which will be explained in detail.

In the special game "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle", which is a low probability / high base state, in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the main control CPU of the main control board P40, the special variation pattern table B (Limited frequency B) is used to determine the variation mode, for example, as shown below.

(1) First to third fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the high base state: The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of 5 seconds is determined. (Determined by special fluctuation pattern table B-1)
(2) Fourth variation display of the second special symbol in the high base state: The variation pattern (variation time) of 60 seconds is determined. (Determined by special fluctuation pattern table B-2)
(3) 5th to 8th fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the high base state: The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of 1 second is determined. (Determined by special fluctuation pattern table B-3)

The fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the above-mentioned special fluctuation pattern table is a fixed time in any of the fluctuation displays, but it can be selected from multiple types of fluctuation time, depending on the fluctuation time. The expectation of a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2) may be different.

In the "self-help rank-up bonus", during the production of the running small hit V (special figure 2) or big hit (special figure 2), for example, the 5th round which is the final round and the big hit end demo (end of small hit development big hit) From the timing of (including the demo), over the period of 3 variable displays corresponding to 3 special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state, "Rank-up fanning effect" that informs whether the big hit effect will continue as an effect Is executed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the small hit V (special figure 2) or the big hit (special figure 2) is composed of 5 rounds, and the number of prize balls in the big winning opening is set to 11 balls. Therefore, one small hit V (Special Figure 2) or a big hit (Special Figure 2) can be expected to increase the number of gaming balls by about 500, and the "rank-up fanning" effect will display the effect of the success mode. (That is, the effect that the small hit V or the big hit is confirmed is displayed), "+500 shots are acquired" is displayed, and the big hit effect is continued, and the small hit V (special figure 2) or which is expected to end is displayed. The effect display is performed as if the big hit (Special Figure 2) continued without ending.

The "rank-up fanning" production starts from the final round of the big hit production and the production period of the big hit end demo, and then the main production display of whether it will be a small hit V or a big hit is the second special symbol in the high base state. It is displayed during the fluctuation display period of the fluctuation pattern determined by the first to third special symbol lottery, and is executed or changed in the mode of the button effect that prompts the operation of the effect button P381 in the variation display for, for example, 5 seconds. Immediately after the start, an embodiment in which the effect P560 operates without going through the button effect to notify that a small hit (big hit) is performed can be exemplified.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, since the probability of a small hit in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1 / 3.7, the special symbol of the second special symbol is set three times. The probability of becoming a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2) in the lottery is about 62%, and it seems that the probability of winning small hit V or big hit is increasing with a probability of more than half. It is possible to display the effect, and it is possible to display the effect as if a large number of game balls have been acquired, such as 1000 shots, 1500 shots, 2000 shots, and so on during the period of one big hit effect.

In addition, in the "continuous battle", the production corresponding to the 5th special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol corresponds to the 1 variable display period (the 4th special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state). Since it is executed in the variable display period), the probability that the player side character wins and the continuous villa state continues (returns to the specific game "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle") is as high as about 80%. It is a game that has a high probability of returning to the "self-made rank-up bonus" again.

Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, once the player acquires the right to shift to the specific gaming state of "self-made rank-up bonus & continuous battle", about 500 balls are ejected by 62%. You can enjoy a novel and highly entertaining production mode as if the state that can be continuously acquired in the game (“self-made rank-up bonus”) is looping with a probability of 80%.

[Fourth Example]
<Overview>
First, the game characteristics of the fourth embodiment will be briefly described. Since the game characteristics during the normal game are substantially the same as those in the present embodiment and the like, the description thereof will be omitted. In the fourth embodiment, a maximum of four second special symbols are held and the first special symbol is held while the first special symbol's out-of-order fluctuation is changed by one in the time saving state (also referred to as the easy entry state). After the end of the variation (the time saving state also ends due to the end of the variation of the first special symbol), the winning game is executed by holding the acquired second special symbol. Whether or not the hold of the second special symbol can be obtained while the first special symbol changes by one depends on whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is opened for a long time by hitting the ordinary symbol. In addition, when the ordinary electric accessory is opened for a long time, one hold of the second special symbol can be obtained. Therefore, the effect display device P80 displays an effect suggesting whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is opened for a long time by hitting the ordinary symbol. When all the hold of the second special symbol is exhausted, the time is shortened again, and the hold of the second special symbol is acquired while the first special symbol changes by one. The consecutive villa ends when the ordinary electric accessory is not opened for a long time due to the hit of the ordinary symbol and the hold of the second special symbol cannot be obtained.

For convenience of explanation, even if the same thing (same term) is used, it may be explained using a different numbering from other examples, but if it is the same thing (same term), it may be explained in another example. It has the same function as described. Further, since the control, structure, etc. provided as a basic gaming machine are the same as those in the present embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Board composition)
Next, FIG. 46 describes the board surface configuration in the fourth embodiment. The right side of the game board surface (the game area on the right side where the game ball flows down (right game area)) will be mainly described. In the right game area, there are an opening (P901) described later, a delay mechanism (P902) described later, a distribution unit (P903) described later, a normal drawing operating port 1 (P904) described later, and a normal drawing operation described later. A mouth 2 (P905), a first start winning device 2 (P906) described later, an ordinary electric accessory (P907), a large winning mouth (P909), and a specific area (P910) are provided. The first start winning device (1) (P710) is provided on the left side of the game board surface (the game area on the left side where the game ball flows down (left game area)).

After passing through the opening (P901), the game ball is distributed to the left route described later or the right route described later. The game balls distributed to the left route are: delay mechanism (P902) → distribution unit (P903) → normal drawing operating port 1 (P904) → first start winning device 2 (P906) → ordinary electric accessory (P907) (and The second start winning device (P908)) or the large winning opening (P909), or the delay mechanism (P902) → the distribution unit (P903) → the right route. The game balls distributed to the right route flow down in the order of the normal electric accessory (P907) (and the second starting winning device (P908)) or the large winning opening (P909).

Next, the mechanism, the device, and the like provided in the above-mentioned right game area will be described.
(Aperture)
The opening (P901) is a place where the game ball first passes when hitting to the right. The game ball that has passed through the opening (P901) is distributed to the left route or the right route. A delay mechanism (P902), a first start winning device 2 (P906), and the like are provided on the left route. A normal drawing operating port 2 (P905) is provided on the right route. The game balls distributed to the left route are configured to pass through the first start winning device 2 (P906), which triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, and the game balls distributed to the right route are the first start winning prizes. It is configured so that it cannot pass through the device 2 (P906) and heads for the second starting winning device (P908) or the large winning opening (P909).

(Delay mechanism)
The delay mechanism (P902) is a mechanism through which a game ball that has passed through the opening (P901) passes when it is distributed to the left route. The structure may be such that the game ball is delayed so as not to flow down at a constant speed, and here, the game ball is provided with a crune that is delayed by slightly moving back and forth and left and right. Two crunes for delaying the flow of the game ball are provided on the left side of the delay mechanism (P902), and one crune for delaying the flow of the game ball is provided on the right side of the delay mechanism (P902). There is. The crune is a structure in which a tapered surface is formed on the upper surface side of the circular opening (a structure in which the end of the circular opening is cut off to form a circumferential inclined surface), and the circular opening has a circular opening. The center is arranged so as to be offset (shifted) in the front-rear direction from the traveling locus of the game ball flowing down through the opening P901, and when the game ball reaches the circular opening of the crune, a circumferential tapered surface is formed. It orbits above, decelerates, and then falls downward through a circular opening. At this time, if the crune has two stages, the center of the circumferential opening of the first stage and the second stage is offset in either the front, back, left, or right direction, and is delayed again. It should be noted that the structure may be such that the game ball flows down in a zigzag manner on the left and right.

(Distribution section)
The distribution unit (P903) is a place where the game ball that has passed through the delay mechanism (P902) passes through. The sorting unit (P903) is provided with a sorting device, and the sorting device is electrically operated at regular time intervals. As a result, it is determined whether the game ball continues to flow down the left route or is changed to the right route. As for the operation of the sorting device, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the right side region P501R, one or two balls fall toward the normal operation opening 1P904 and the first start winning device 2P906 in about 20 to 30 seconds. For example, when firing toward the right side region P501R during a big hit game, the lottery value related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is set based on the winning of the first starting winning device 2P906 by the end of the big hit. At least one is configured to be acquired.

(Public drawing operation port 1)
The normal symbol operating port 1 (P904) is an operating port for acquiring a lottery value related to a normal symbol lottery.

(Public drawing operation port 2)
The normal symbol operating port 2 (P905) is an operating port for acquiring a lottery value related to a normal symbol lottery.

It should be noted that the normal drawing operating port 1 (P904) and the normal drawing operating port 2 (P905) are operating ports for executing the lottery of the same ordinary symbol. In addition, the lottery probability of a normal symbol is configured to be always (100%) in any gaming state. The lottery probability of the normal symbol may be 1 / 1.002 in the low probability state, 1 / 1.001 in the high probability state (in the easy entry state), and the like.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment has three types of easy ball entry states (easy ball entry states 1 to 3), and the normal symbol lottery is the same depending on the type of easy ball entry states to be set. Even in the case of hitting with the symbol of, the operation pattern (long opening / short opening) of the ordinary electric accessory P907 is configured to be different. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, regarding the easy-to-enter states 1 to 3, the easy-to-enter state 1 is the most advantageous state for the player, and the easy-to-enter state 3 is the most game. It is an easy state to enter the ball, which is disadvantageous to the person. The details of the easy entry state and the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory will be described later.

(1st start winning device 2)
The first start winning device 2 (P906) is a winning opening that can be entered when a right-handed hit is made, and is a winning opening for executing a lottery of the first special symbol. The first start winning device 2 (P906) is a winning opening for executing the same first special symbol lottery as the first starting winning device 1 (P710) that can enter a ball when hitting left. Here, since the first start winning opening 2 (P806) is provided directly under the normal drawing operating opening 1 (P904), it is the first change of the normal symbol after entering the time saving state (easy entry state). The first variation (first time reduction) of the first special symbol is configured to start almost at the same time. That is, it is difficult to execute only the lottery of ordinary symbols.

(Ordinary electric accessory)
The ordinary electric accessory (P907) operates when the ordinary symbol lottery is successful, and when the ordinary electric accessory (P907) operates, the game ball moves to the second start winning device (P908). It becomes possible to enter the ball. In the ordinary electric accessory (P907), an opening pattern (also referred to as an opening / closing pattern) is predetermined according to the game state and the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol. As the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (P907), the game ball mainly enters the second start winning device (P908) with a long opening (pattern) and the game ball enters the second starting winning device (P908). It has a short opening (pattern) that is difficult to ball.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory P907 is composed of a slide-type opening / closing member (slide plate), and when the ordinary electric accessory P907 is in the open mode (easy entry mode), the gaming board It protrudes forward and bridges the game ball to the second start winning device P908, which will be described later, so that it can be guided. When the normal electric accessory P907 is not operating (non-ball entry easy mode), the slide plate is in a state of being retracted from the surface of the game board, and the game ball goes downstream without going to the second start winning device P908. It is configured to fall toward you.

(2nd start winning device)
The second start winning device (P908) is a winning opening through which a game ball can enter when the ordinary electric accessory (P907) is operated with a long opening (pattern), and is for executing a lottery for a second special symbol. It is a winning opening. The second start winning device (P908) has the same big hit probability as the first start winning device (P710, P809), but if the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit, it always wins a small hit (example: 1/1). It is configured as .001). Since the operation end condition of the ordinary electric accessory P907 of the fourth embodiment is the lapse of the opening operation time or the winning of one game ball, the long opening pattern is executed once in the ordinary symbol lottery. When the symbol is stopped and displayed as a normal symbol, one ball game ball can be won in the second start winning device P908, and one right of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be acquired.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, since the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted, when there are a plurality of lottery values of the second special symbol, a small hit or a small hit or a small hit or a continuous special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed. It is a game in which big hits are continuously executed.

(Large prize opening)
The large winning opening is a winning opening that is opened when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a hit, as in the present embodiment. A specific territory area (P810) is provided in the large winning opening.

(Specific area)
As described in this embodiment, the specific area is provided in the large winning opening, and the accessory continuous operation device (to continuously operate the special electric accessory) triggered by the passage of the specific area during the small hit game. (Flag) is activated to grant the right to perform a jackpot game.

Next, FIG. 47 is a transition diagram showing the transition of the game in the fourth embodiment.

《Normal stage》
The normal stage is a stage in which the gaming state has a low probability / low base, and the gaming ball is shot toward the left gaming area to perform a left-handed strike. Here, when the first special symbol (first start winning device P710) becomes a big hit, the big hit game (first hit bonus described later) is started.

《First hit bonus》
In the first hit bonus, the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the effect display device P80. If you win the battle production, you will move to the stock mode described later. In addition, if there are 7 decorative symbols, the stock mode will be entered even if the special effect of the precursor zone, which will be described later, is won. If you lose in the battle production, you will return to the normal stage.

In addition, the first hit bonus is configured to display a battle effect with enemy characters with different victory expectations, but the effect mode is not limited to the battle effect, and whether or not the ally character achieves the command is determined. Any effect may be used as long as the player can recognize whether or not the stock mode has been acquired, which will be described later, in the form of success (advantageous result) or failure (disadvantageous result), such as a mission effect to notify. From the start of the first hit bonus, a big hit effect is executed in which the acquisition of stock mode or extra stock mode is executed in a definite manner, and there is no effect of notifying whether or not the stock mode has been acquired in the form of success or failure. The jackpot effect may be executed.

《Stock mode》
The stock mode is a one-time time saving state (high base state), and is mainly a state in which the first special symbol fluctuates by one. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is long (example: 170 seconds (170000 ms)), and the symbol fixing time is also long (example: 30 seconds (30,000 ms)). During this period (variable time of the first special symbol + fixed time of the symbol), the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating port 1 (P904) or the normal symbol operating port 2 (P905), hits the normal symbol, and is normally electric. When the character is opened for a long time, the game ball wins the second start winning device (P908) and the hold of the second special symbol can be obtained. The details will be described later, but while the first special symbol fluctuates by one, the normal symbol lottery can be performed four times, and a maximum of four hold of the second special symbol can be obtained. When the hold of the 2nd special symbol is acquired in the stock mode, the game shifts to the jackpot game (stock bonus) by the 2nd special symbol. In the fourth embodiment, it is configured to suggest by using the effect display device P80 whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is long-opened by hitting the ordinary symbol. In addition, as a result of performing the normal symbol lottery four times in the stock mode, if no hold of the second special symbol can be obtained, the stage returns to the normal stage. In addition, in the stock mode, "stock mode high" in which the expectation of acquisition of the hold of the second special symbol is high and "stock mode low" in which the expectation of acquisition of the hold of the second special symbol is low are provided.

《Stock Bonus》
The stock bonus is a big hit game with the second special symbol. During the stock bonus in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot movie is displayed on the effect display device P80. As a supplement, the big hit game by the second special symbol includes a big hit game (“small hit development big hit”, “small hit V”) in the case of small hit → passing through a specific area → big hit.

After the end of the stock bonus, the mode shifts to the stock mode, and if the second special symbol is still held, the stock bonus is started again. If the second special symbol is not held, the first special symbol changes once in a time-saving state. The game shifts to the game (stock mode or extra stock mode) in which the hold of the second special symbol is acquired.

When the stock bonus (big hit game) ends when the second special symbol is on hold, the special symbol lottery based on the next second special symbol hold is executed by the second special symbol priority digestion control, and the stock bonus (stock bonus) again. Small hit V or big hit) will be executed. At this time, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the same gaming state (low probability / high base state) as the stock mode or the extra stock mode, but the second special. When there is a symbol hold, unlike the stock mode (extra stock mode), the effect of notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is not executed, and the variable effect corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the low probability / high base state is composed of about 3 seconds, and as an example of the production, the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed immediately after the end of the stock bonus. The occurrence of a stock bonus is notified to the player.

Although not shown, the stock bonus has a structure in which multiple big hit (small hit V) games can be executed continuously, so that there are a plurality of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which are continuous. When the stock bonus is executed, the round display P820 is configured to be accumulated and displayed over continuous jackpots as shown in FIG. 29 of this embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the big hit (small hit V) of 4 rounds or 8 rounds can be executed up to 4 times (the maximum number of holdable numbers related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol). In the stock bonus, 4 to 32 round displays P820 can be displayed at the same time.

The round display P820 is configured to increase with each stock release of the stock bonus (every execution of a big hit or a small hit).

《Relief function》
In the fourth embodiment, a so-called relief function is provided, and when the game in the normal stage reaches 599 times, the relief function is activated from the 600th time. As a supplement, the relief function is a function that operates when the jackpot is not hit a predetermined number of times in the normal stage (low probability / low base), and in the initial state after clearing the ram, the normal stage (low probability / low base). When the number of games in the base) reaches a predetermined number, or when the cumulative number of games in a low probability state (low base or high base) after a big hit reaches a predetermined number, a predetermined easy ball entry state (time saving state) is set. be. The easy-to-enter state by the relief function is set to have a larger number of games, which is the end condition, than the easy-to-enter state that can be transferred after the end of the big hit. It should be noted that, after the rescue function is activated, when the game (missing) of the number of games, which is the end condition, is executed, or when a big hit occurs, the easy entry state by the relief function ends, and the small hit V is adopted. Is configured so that the easy entry state ends even when the ball does not pass through the specific area P910 during the small hit game.

The relief function has a low probability denominator (big hit probability 1 / X denominator X) of the special symbol, an operating range of n (the number of games in which the game state becomes a predetermined easy ball entry state), and easy ball entry. When the number of states (number of time reductions) is N (the number of games in which the easy entry state continues due to the activation of the relief function),
The operating range n is 2.5P ≦ n ≦ 3.0P.
The number of time reductions N is 0.4P ≦ N ≦ 3.8P.
It is configured to be.

In the fourth embodiment, since the denominator of the special symbol at the time of low probability is 200,
The operating range n is 500 ≦ n ≦ 600.
The number of time reductions N is 80 ≦ N ≦ 760
N is set to 600 and N is set to 80 so as to be included in.

《Omen Zone》
The precursor zone is an effect mode that suggests that the rescue function is about to be activated. In the fourth embodiment, when 570 games are played in the normal stage (low probability / low base), it becomes a precursor zone (in the case of after a big hit, since one out-of-order fluctuation is performed in the stock mode). When 569 games are played in the normal stage (low probability / low base), it becomes a precursor zone). In the precursor zone, the notice and reach effects that can be displayed on the effect display device P80 may be the same as or different from those of the normal stage. When it becomes a precursor zone, it is preferable to display the “precursor zone” on the effect display device P80 so as to indicate that the zone is in the precursor zone.

When the game is executed 599 times in the normal stage (including the precursor zone), the rescue function starts to operate, but in the fourth embodiment, when the rescue function is activated, the ball is easily entered and the rescue function is activated to enter. When the ball becomes easy, it shifts to the extra stock mode.

In addition, the precursor zone is provided with a super precursor zone that can be transferred when the operation of the rescue function is confirmed. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the game in the normal stage (low probability / low base state including the precursor zone) reaches 599 times, the relief function is activated from the 600th time, so that the hold of the first special symbol is completely missed. It is configured so that the player can move to the super-precursor zone when it is confirmed that there is a certain number and the number of times reaches 599 times, and when the lottery for whether or not the super-precursor zone can be executed is won. That is, since the maximum number of reserved 1st special symbols is 4, when the number of reserved 1st special symbols is 4 during the 595th game (during the change of the 1st special symbol) and all of them are out of order. (3 on hold during the 596th game, 2 on hold during the 597th game, and 1 on hold during the 598th game) It is confirmed that 599 times will be reached when all are out of order), so it is possible to draw a lottery for whether or not the super precursor zone can be executed. The timing of the lottery for whether or not the super-precursor zone can be executed may be at the time of entering the ball on hold or at the start of the fluctuation, but instead of shifting from the precursor zone to the super-precursor zone during the fluctuation, it is shifted at the start of the fluctuation. Is preferable.

In addition, the precursor zone is equipped with a special effect (reach effect) dedicated to the precursor zone, and is configured to shift to the stock mode whenever the hit is achieved in the reach effect.

《Extra stock mode》
In the extra stock mode, as in the stock mode, the game ball passes through the normal drawing operating port 1 (P904) or the normal drawing operating port 2 (P905), wins the normal symbol lottery, and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time. Then, the game ball wins the second start winning device and can obtain the hold of the second special symbol, and while the first special symbol fluctuates by one, the normal symbol lottery is possible four times, and the maximum is the first. 2 You can get 4 special symbols on hold.

The jackpot game (stock bonus) starts with the second special symbol from the extra stock mode, and when the jackpot game ends, if there is a hold for the second special symbol, the screen returns to the extra stock mode screen and the second immediately again. A big hit game (stock bonus) is started with a special symbol. When the jackpot game (stock bonus) is completed and there is no hold of the second special symbol, the mode shifts to the stock mode.

It should be noted that the first special symbol is configured to be a jackpot with the jackpot symbol A, and the mode can be shifted to the extra stock mode even after the first hit bonus is executed.

Next, the stock mode in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48.

(Direction in stock mode)
In the stock mode, the effect display device P80 is configured to perform an effect suggesting whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is opened for a long time by hitting a normal symbol. It is possible to indicate on the stock mode screen (normal symbol hold charge effect) whether or not the long opening is achieved at the first variation of the normal symbol, and the long opening is performed at the second to fourth variation of the normal symbol. It is possible to show whether or not it will be in the battle production.

<< Normal symbol 1st variation >>
In FIG. 48, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts in the big hit state (low base, that is, the non-electric chew support state), and ends in the time saving state (high base, that is, the electric chew support state) of the normal symbol. There is. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the operation pattern that changes to the winning easy state of the ordinary electric accessory (second starting winning device P908) is determined by the gaming state at the time when the symbol fixed time of the ordinary symbol elapses. It has become like. As a result, the first variation of the normal symbol in the time-saving state is hit (the example of FIG. 48 shows the situation where the normal symbol with long open is won). At this time, on the effect display device P80, a stock mode screen for acquiring the hold of the normal symbol and a right-handed instruction are performed. Here, since the long opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory is executed by hitting the first variation of the ordinary symbol, the effect display device is mainly during the closing time (example: 42400 ms) of the ordinary electric accessory during the operation period of the ordinary electric accessory. A hit effect is performed on P80. In the 1st variation of the normal symbol, the charge effect of the normal symbol hold to encourage the acquisition of the execution right of the 2nd to 4th variation of the normal symbol (details will be described later as an example of the stock mode screen) and the second start. The display for prompting the winning device (P908) to enter the game ball (example: the character display of "hit right and aim at the electric chew") is started. When the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory is completed, a long opening is performed. As described above, since the delay mechanism (P902) is provided and it takes a certain amount of time for the game ball to reach the ordinary electric accessory (electric chew), the game is played on the second start winning device (P908). The display for prompting the entry of the ball is usually configured to start at an earlier timing (for example, 5 seconds before) than the long opening of the electric accessory. When the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908) during the long opening and the hold of the second special symbol is acquired, the ordinary electric accessory is closed (the specified number of ordinary electric accessories is one). ), And the effect display device P80 displays that the hold of the second special symbol has been acquired (example: character display of "V stock"). In this example, the case where the long open is won is shown, but if the normal symbol that is the long open is not won, the display for prompting the second start winning device (P908) to enter the game ball (example). : "Right-handed and aim for electric chew") will be omitted.

《Normal symbol 2nd variation》
When the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory by hitting the first variation of the normal symbol is completed, then the variation of the second variation of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory by hitting the second variation of the normal symbol are started. In the example of FIG. 48, a case where short opening (opening pattern of a pattern having a short opening time of 40 ms for the second time) is selected as a normal symbol lottery is shown. At this time, the long opening pattern (the opening pattern of the pattern having a long opening time of up to 5000 ms for the second opening) is not executed due to the hit of the second variation of the normal symbol, and the short opening pattern is executed. When the fluctuation time of the second variation of the normal symbol and the fixed time of the symbol have elapsed, the short opening of the normal electric accessory is started, and the 1st game of the battle effect is started on the effect display device P80. After the short opening of the ordinary electric accessory, the closing time (eg, 47400 ms) is started, and the 1st game of the battle effect is displayed on the effect display device P80 at the short opening time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory. Here, since the normal electric accessory is short-opened after the closing time, the characters "NEXT production" are displayed after the display that the ally character is defeated in the 1st game of the battle production, and the normal symbol 3rd variation. It will be in a standby state until the 2nd game of the battle production by is started.

《Ordinary symbol 3rd variation》
When the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory by hitting the second variation of the normal symbol is completed, then the variation of the third variation of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory by hitting the third variation of the normal symbol are started. FIG. 48 shows an example in which a long open pattern is won as a normal symbol lottery, and the long open pattern is executed by hitting the third variation of the normal symbol. When the fluctuation time of the third variation of the normal symbol and the fixed time of the symbol have elapsed, the short opening of the normal electric accessory is started, and the 2nd game of the battle effect is started on the effect display device P80. After the short opening of the ordinary electric accessory, the closing time (eg, 42400 ms) is started, and the 2nd game of the battle effect is displayed on the effect display device P80 at the short opening time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory. Here, since the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time after the closing time, in the 2nd game of the battle production, after the display that the ally character wins is displayed, the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908). (Example: "Right-handed and aim for electric chew") is started. When the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory is completed, a long opening is performed. When the game ball enters the second start winning device (P809) during the long opening and the hold of the second special symbol is obtained, the ordinary electric accessory is closed and the second special symbol is closed on the effect display device P80. A display indicating that the hold has been acquired (example: character display of "V stock") is performed. This display is continued until the 3rd game of the battle effect by the 4th variation of the normal symbol is started.

《Normal symbol 4th variation》
When the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory by hitting the third variation of the normal symbol is completed, then the variation of the fourth variation of the ordinary symbol and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory by hitting the fourth variation of the ordinary symbol are started. In FIG. 48, the long opening pattern is not executed due to the hit of the fourth variation of the normal symbol, but the short opening pattern is executed. When the fluctuation time of the fourth variation of the normal symbol and the fixed time of the symbol have elapsed, the short opening of the normal electric accessory is started, and the 3rd game of the battle effect is started on the effect display device P80. After the short opening of the ordinary electric accessory, the closing time (eg, 47400 ms) is started, and the 3rd game of the battle effect is displayed on the effect display device P80 at the short opening time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory. Here, since the normal electric accessory is short-opened after the closing time, in the 3rd game of the battle production, the number of holdings of the second special symbol acquired as the result production after the display that the ally character is defeated is shown. It is displayed (example: here, two "V" s are displayed to acquire two), and it is in a standby state until the next special symbol change starts. When the 4th variation of the normal symbol wins the long open pattern, the effect display for V stock is executed as shown in the example of the 3rd variation of the normal symbol, and the effect is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds). It is configured to shift to the result effect after displaying the fact that the V stock has been made.

(Normal symbol fluctuation time and symbol fixed time)
The fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the jackpot state or the time reduction state is extremely short (example: 120 ms in the jackpot state, 100 ms in the time reduction state), and is short even when combined with the symbol fixing time (example: 500 ms (0.5 seconds)). It has become.

(Fluctuation of normal symbol + maximum time when normal electric accessory is activated)
When the normal symbol lottery is a long open pattern in the high base state, the maximum time required to execute the normal symbol fluctuation and the normal electric accessory opening pattern is 100 ms (normal). Symbol fluctuation time) + 500 ms (normal symbol symbol fixed time) + 40 ms (ordinary electric accessory short opening time) + 42400 ms (ordinary electric accessory closing time) + 5000 ms (ordinary electric accessory long opening time) = 48040 ms (48.04 seconds) ). If the normal symbol lottery is a short open pattern, 48.08 seconds = 48080 ms, and if the variable display has already started at the end of the big hit, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened. Since it is in a state, it will be +20 ms.

That is, the cycle of one normal symbol variation in the stock mode (or extra stock mode) in the fourth embodiment and the operation of the normal electric accessory is about 48 seconds. In addition, when the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is long open, if the game ball wins immediately after the start of the long open, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory will end at that point, so in the case of long open. It should be added that the cycle of one normal symbol change and the operation of the normal electric accessory may be shortened by up to 4 seconds to 4.8 seconds.

In addition, although not shown, when the normal symbol stops at the hit symbol in the non-electric chew support state (low base state), any hit because the normal electric accessory is controlled to the non-open extension state. Even when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the operation of the normal electric accessory P907 is terminated only by executing the short opening (40 ms) once.

(Relationship between the time required for one change of the first special symbol in the time saving state (including the symbol fixing time) and the fluctuation of the normal symbol (including the symbol fixing time) + the maximum time when the ordinary electric accessory is operated)
The total time of the first special symbol deviation variation (1700,000 ms) and the symbol fixing time (30,000 ms) in the time-reduced state is 200,000 ms (200 seconds). On the other hand, the total time of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (including the fixed time of the symbol) + the maximum time when the normal electric accessory is operated is 48060 ms (48.06 seconds). That is, since one set of the ordinary symbol lottery and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory is 48060 ms at the maximum, four sets of the ordinary symbol lottery and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory are performed within one fluctuation of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol. (Ordinary symbol lottery, 1 cycle of ordinary electric accessory operation [48s] x 4 times = 192s, and even if the 5th variation of the ordinary symbol is executed, the 1st special symbol is fixed. After the time has entered).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the high base state (electric chew support state) ends when the end condition is satisfied at the time when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses (the start time of the symbol fixed time). Since it is configured and the end condition of the high base state of the stock mode (or extra stock mode) is one variable display of the special symbol (80 times at the time of the rescue function), it shifts to the stock mode after the big hit ends. If so, if the variation display of the fourth variation of the normal symbol is completed by the timing of 170000 ms after the variation of the first special symbol is started, the second start winning device P908 can be won. .. (That is, until about 25 seconds after the start of the variation display of the first special symbol at the end of the big hit (170-48 × 3 = 26), even if the variation display of the first variation of the normal symbol is delayed, the game is played. Does not suffer any disadvantage)

<Characteristic 1 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 1, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment has, as described above, N times (win / fail lottery + winning symbol lottery) of the normal symbol lottery result (win / fail lottery + winning symbol lottery) in the deviation fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol in the time saving state. N is configured to be displayable (the maximum number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol).

Further, it takes a maximum of 144180 ms (≈144 seconds) to complete the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory due to the third variation of the ordinary symbol. Since the deviation time of the first special symbol in the time-reduced state is about 170 seconds, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the time-reduced state is 0.1 seconds, and the symbol fixing time is 0.5 seconds, the fourth variation of the normal symbol is , It is configured so as not to exceed the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Therefore, even if the opening pattern due to the hit of the 4th variation of the normal symbol ends the time saving state and straddles the normal gaming state, the 4th variation of the normal symbol is stopped in the shortened time state, so that it depends on the hit of the 4th variation of the normal symbol. The opening pattern is determined in the time saving state, and the long opening pattern can be executed during the normal gaming state.

Since the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory ends when one game ball enters the second start winning device (P908), it may end in an instant. That is, a difference of about 5000 ms (5 seconds) x 4 (times) = about 20000 ms (20 seconds) can occur at the maximum when all hits are made with long opening in the stock mode. Even if there is this difference, the 5th variation of the normal symbol always exceeds the timing of 170s after the start of the variation display of the 1st special symbol (ordinary electric accessory operating cycle 48s / time x 4 times -20s). = 172s), even if the game is played in the shortest time, the fifth normal symbol lottery is not executed in the high base state. Therefore, the four ordinary symbol lottery in the stock mode is configured so that the stop display of all the ordinary symbols is performed four times within the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Thus, in feature 1 of the fourth embodiment,
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710, P906) and
The second start winning opening (for example, the second starting winning device (P908)) and
Acting ports (for example, Fuzu operating port 1 (P904), Fuzu operating port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information when the ball enters the operating port, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the large winning opening, and
It is equipped with a main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game.
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A third winning / failing determination means for executing a third winning / failing determination based on a third lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A third hold control means that holds the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third hit / fail determination.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state in which the ball is easily changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state by the ball entry variation means.
Equipped with
As a special game, when the first special game (for example, a big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the first hit, and the result of the second hit / miss judgment is the second hit. A second special game (for example, a small hit) that can be executed, and a third special game (for example, a small hit → a specific area passage → a big hit) that can be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area after the second special game is executed. ) And
It is characterized in that, in a specific gaming state, the third hit / fail determination can be executed N times (N is the maximum number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value) while the first identification information is out of alignment in the first identification information display unit. It is a game machine.

In other words, in the specific gaming state, the third hit / fail determination can be executed N times (N is the maximum number of reserved numbers of the second lottery value) during the change of the symbol in the first symbol display device, but the N + 1th third. It can be said that the hit / fail determination is a gaming machine executed in a non-specific gaming state.

(Display screen in stock mode)
《Stock mode screen》
Next, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a display screen of the stock mode in the fourth embodiment. When the stock mode is entered, the effect display is displayed with the "ally character (P921)" displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device P80 and the "aura (P922)" of the ally character displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device P80. The characters "stock mode", which is the "effect mode display (P840)" displayed in the upper left of the device P80, and the special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special) displayed in the middle left end of the effect display device P80. The number of holds (simple hold display P814) related to the effect display device), the "effect symbol (P802)" displayed in the upper right of the effect display device P80, and the "right" displayed in the upper right of the effect display device P80 and at the bottom of the effect symbol. Hit notification (P832) ”(character string of“ right hit ”and right arrow symbol display),“ normal symbol hold display area (P923) ”displayed at the lower right of the effect display device P80, and the effect display device. The characters and symbols of "Charge !!" (Hold acquisition suggestion display P924), which are displayed at the lower right of P80 and at the top of the normal symbol hold display area to encourage entry (passing) into the normal symbol operation port, are displayed. To.

When the normal symbol hold is acquired in the stock mode, the normal symbol hold image (P925) is displayed in the normal symbol hold display area. Further, although the details will be described later, the normal symbol hold change fanning effect (P926) is configured to display whether or not the normal symbol hold image is changed after the normal symbol hold is acquired.

"aura"
It is a notice effect suggesting whether or not the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory includes the long opening in the first variation of the ordinary symbol and the hold of the ordinary symbol in the stock mode. Three types of auras (P922) are provided, and are configured to indicate that there is a high possibility of acquiring a hold that is a long open in the order of gold>red> blue. The change timing of the aura (P922) is 0 seconds (immediately after the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, displayed as the initial mode), 10 seconds, and 20 seconds after the operation of the ordinary electric accessory is started by hitting the first change of the ordinary symbol. It is set after (both are normally closed). Further, the aura is configured to be determined in consideration of the easy entry state, and has an aspect as a state suggestion effect in addition to the aspect as a notice effect. For example, in the case of the easy entry state 2 (the easy entry state with an intermediate expectation), the red aura is displayed from the start of the stock mode. In addition, in the case of the easy entry state 2, the red aura may not always be displayed from the start of the stock mode, but may be configured so that the possibility that the red aura is displayed from the start of the stock mode is high. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 51, in the easy-to-enter state 1 (the most promising and advantageous easy-to-enter state), the normal electric accessory is long regardless of which hit symbol the normal symbol is. Since it is open, even if there is no hold of the normal symbol, it is configured to be able to change to gold 10 seconds and 20 seconds after the operation of the normal electric accessory by hitting the first change of the normal symbol starts. ..

《Direction design》
The effect symbol in the fourth embodiment is configured to be variablely displayed according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but is configured to be variablely displayed according to the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Is also possible. Further, it may be configured to include a first effect symbol that is variablely displayed according to the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a second effect symbol that is variablely displayed according to the change of the normal symbol. It is possible.

In the fourth embodiment, when the normal symbol is displayed as an effect symbol (second effect symbol), the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set to 100%, so that the second start winning device P908 is won. In the case of an easy result (determined by the type of the current easy-to-win state and the normal symbol displayed as a stop), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in doublets, or the "V" symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify that the starting winning device P908 can be won.

Further, the effect symbol (second effect symbol) of the normal symbol is configured to be able to display only a maximum of 4 fluctuations after the start of the stock mode, and after the start of the result effect, the second effect symbol is executed even if the normal symbol lottery is executed. It is configured so that the variable display of the effect pattern is not performed. If the execution of the normal symbol lottery is delayed after the start of the stock mode and the normal symbol cannot be stopped and displayed by the start of the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol, it is the fourth or less variable display of the normal symbol. Is also configured so that the variable display of the second effect symbol is not displayed.

<< Normal symbol hold display area >>
The normal symbol hold display area (P923) includes a 1st hold display area (P927) that triggers the execution of the 1st game of the battle effect, a 2nd hold display area (P928) that triggers the execution of the 2nd game of the battle effect, and a battle. The 3rd hold display area (P929), which is the execution trigger of the 3rd game of the production, can be displayed.

《Ordinary design hold image》
The normal symbol hold image (P925) shows the degree of expectation of victory in the battle production (= the degree of expectation of execution of the long opening pattern of the normal electric accessory). The normal symbol hold image shows that the degree of expectation of victory in the battle production is high in the order of rainbow color>red>green> white. In addition, the battle victory is confirmed for the rainbow color.

《Ordinary symbol hold change fanning effect》
The normal symbol hold change fanning effect (P926) is an expectation that the victory expectation level in the battle production (the result of the 2nd to 4th fluctuations of the normal symbol is a long open) by changing the normal symbol hold image. It is an effect display used for the normal symbol hold change fanning effect indicating that the degree) is increased. There are three patterns of normal symbol hold change fanning effect, strong pattern, medium pattern, and weak pattern, and the possibility that the normal symbol hold image changes is strong pattern> medium pattern> weak pattern. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that a strong pattern is always displayed when the normal symbol reserved image changes to red or more. The strong pattern, medium pattern, and weak pattern are indicated by different sizes and colors of the effects.

As a supplement, the normal symbol hold image (P925) and the normal symbol hold change fanning effect (P926) are preliminarily determined for the special symbol when the main control CPU acquires the lottery value (random number) of the normal symbol. Similarly, the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is also pre-judged (pre-reading judgment), and the winning / failing lottery result of the normal symbol and the information of the winning symbol of the normal symbol (pre-judgment information of the normal symbol) grasped by the preliminary judgment are performed. Is received by the sub-control CPU, and at what timing the sub-control CPU determines which normal symbol hold image is displayed and which normal symbol hold change fanning effect is displayed. Further, it is not limited to these effects that the main control CPU determines the effect by using the look-ahead of the normal symbol, but it is also used in the long hit suggestion effect (for example, character determination of the battle effect) described later. .. In the fourth embodiment, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, whether or not the normal electric accessory P907 operates with a long open depends on the type of the easy-to-enter state, so that the normal symbol hold change fanning effect or the like is used. Various look-ahead effects (ordinary symbol look-ahead effects) for the normal symbol hold in the stock mode are configured to be determined based on the pre-judgment information of the normal symbols and the information of the easy-to-enter state type (type of game state). ..

<Characteristic 2 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 2, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment suggests whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is long-opened by hitting the ordinary symbol during the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the specific gaming state. The suggestion effect (aura) can be performed, and the suggestion effect is further configured to be able to suggest the current easy entry state.

Thus, in feature 2 of the fourth embodiment,
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710, P906) and
The second start winning opening (for example, the second starting winning device (P908)) and
Acting ports (for example, Fuzu operating port 1 (P904), Fuzu operating port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information when the ball enters the operating port, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the large winning opening, and
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of a game, an effect display unit that can display an effect (for example, an effect display device P80), and
It is equipped with a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control CPU) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A third winning / failing determination means for executing a third winning / failing determination based on a third lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A third hold control means that holds the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third hit / fail determination.
Auxiliary symbol determination means for determining the stop symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary symbol display unit based on the auxiliary symbol lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state) in which a game ball is easily changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state by the ball entry variation means.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed by the sub-control unit to the sub-control unit.
The specific game state control means includes a plurality of types of specific games including at least a first specific game state and a second specific game state in which the frequency at which the ball entry fluctuation means changes from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state differs. It is possible to set 1 specific game state from the state,
The sub-control unit
Equipped with a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main control unit,
As a special game, when the first special game (for example, a big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the first hit, and the result of the second hit / miss judgment is the second hit. A second special game (for example, a small hit) that can be executed, and a third special game (for example, a small hit → a specific area passage → a big hit) that can be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area after the second special game is executed. ) And
The sub-control unit
Suggestion effect (for example, aura) for showing whether or not the ball entry variation means becomes an advantageous opening pattern based on the third lottery value and the auxiliary symbol lottery value during the deviation variation of the first identification information in the specific game state. It is possible to display the effect) on the effect display section.
In the suggestion effect, it is possible to further suggest whether the current specific gaming state is the first specific gaming state (for example, the easy entry state 2) or the second specific gaming state (for example, the easy entry state 3). It is a gaming machine that has been played.

(Change pattern of normal symbol hold image and display pattern of normal symbol change fanning effect)
Next, FIG. 50 is an example of a table showing a change pattern of the normal symbol hold image (P925) of FIG. 49 and a display pattern of the normal symbol change fanning effect (P926). Here, the normal symbol hold image (P927) (1st hold) in the 1st hold display area, the normal symbol hold image (P928) (2nd hold) in the 2nd hold display area, and the normal symbol hold image (P929) in the 3rd hold display area (P929). An example will be described in which the ball enters with a white hold (3rd hold) and is finally determined to be a green hold.

《Changeable points》
First, the 1st hold, the 2nd hold, and the 3rd hold are configured to be variable at different points. The changeable point of the 1st hold is that the total number of game balls that have passed through the normal drawing operating port 1 (P904) and the normal drawing operating port 2 (P905) since the time saving state is started is the sixth ball (first time). This is the 9th ball (2nd time) and the 12th ball (3rd time). The changeable point of the 2nd hold is that the total number of game balls that have passed through the normal drawing operating port 1 (P904) and the normal drawing operating port 2 (P905) since the time saving state is started is the 7th ball (1st time). This is the 10th ball (2nd time) and the 13th ball (3rd time). The variable point of the 3rd hold is that the total number of game balls that have passed through the normal drawing operating port 1 (P904) and the normal drawing operating port 2 (P905) since the time saving state is started is the 8th ball (1st time). This is the 11th ball (2nd time) and the 14th ball (3rd time). The first change point of the 1st hold is the 6th ball, which is the introduction effect period (explanatory effect) when the random value of the normal symbol lottery is held from the 1st to the 3rd balls and then the hold change fanning is executed. Etc.), because the grace period for the 4th and 5th balls is set so that the change does not proceed ahead of time. In addition, by providing such a grace period, it is necessary not to dare to see the pending change fanning effect (so that the game ball staying in the right area P501R does not cause a prize to the normal drawing operation port after the 6th ball. ) It can also be configured so that the player can easily proceed with the game.

<< 1st hold, 3rd hold change pattern >>
The changes of the 1st hold and the 3rd hold are executed according to the ID determined by the lottery by the sub-control CPU. As shown in FIG. 50, in ID1, the first time: white (no change), the second time: white (no change), and the third time: green (one step change). In ID2, the first time is white (no change), the second time is green (one step change), and the third time is green (no change). In ID3, the first time: green (one-step change), the second time: green (no change), and the third time: green (no change).

<< 1st hold, 3rd hold normal symbol hold change fanning effect >>
The 1st hold and 3rd hold normal symbol hold change fanning effects are executed according to the ID determined by the lottery by the sub-control CPU. In ID1, the first time is a weak pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a weak pattern. In ID2, the first time is a weak pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a medium pattern. In ID3, the first time is a medium pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a weak pattern.

<< 2nd hold change pattern >>
The change of the 2nd hold is executed according to the ID determined by the lottery by the sub-control CPU, similarly to the 1st hold and the 3rd hold. Here, the change pattern of the 2nd hold is configured in the same manner as the change pattern of the 1st hold and the 3rd hold, but there is no problem even if they are configured differently.

<< 2nd hold normal symbol hold change fanning effect >>
The 2nd hold normal symbol hold change fanning effect is executed according to the ID determined by the lottery by the sub-control CPU, similarly to the 1st hold and the 3rd hold normal symbol hold change fanning effect. In ID1, the first time is a weak pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a weak pattern. In ID2, the first time is a medium pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a medium pattern. In ID3, the first time is a medium pattern, the second time is a medium pattern, and the third time is a medium pattern. As described above, the 2nd hold normal symbol hold change fanning effect is configured so that a medium pattern is more likely to occur than the 1st hold and the 3rd hold normal symbol hold change fanning effect. It should be noted that the strong pattern may also be configured so that the normal symbol hold change fanning effect of the 2nd hold is more likely to occur than the normal symbol hold change fanning effect of the 1st hold and the 3rd hold. In this way, the sub-control CPU is configured to be able to determine a lottery result ID different from the 1st hold and the 3rd hold for the change of the 2nd hold, so that the number of combinations for the change of the 1st hold, the 3rd hold and the 2nd hold can be determined. Can be diversified, and it can be configured to enhance the interest by avoiding the occurrence of the production in the minor pattern at each time of the normal symbol hold change fanning effect that occurs continuously.

(Selection ratio of ordinary symbols and open pattern for each easy-to-enter state)
Next, FIG. 51 is an example of a table showing the selection ratio of the ordinary symbol and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory for each easy-to-enter state in the fourth embodiment.
<< Premise >>
In the fourth embodiment, the easy entry state 1 (extra stock mode), the easy entry state 2 (stock mode (high)), and the easy entry state 3 (stock mode (low)) are set as the easy entry states. I have. In the easy-to-enter state 2 and the easy-to-enter state 3, the stock mode screen common to the effect display device P80 is displayed, but the internal states are different easy-to-enter states.

(Selection ratio of hit symbols of ordinary symbols)
The selection ratio of the normal symbol A is 330/1000, the selection ratio of the normal symbol B is 170/1000, and the selection ratio of the normal symbol B is 500/1000.

As described with reference to FIG. 48, the stock mode screen and the battle effect for notifying whether or not it is easy to enter the second start winning device P908 in the stock mode are operating the normal electric accessory (normally). Since the effect is executed after the symbol hits the symbol is stopped), it is necessary to prevent the normal symbol display device P53 from determining the type of hit and the type of the easy-to-enter ball during the stay during the effect. , The ordinary symbols A to C shown in FIG. 51 are configured so that a plurality of types of ordinary symbols can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the LED of the normal symbol display device P53 is configured with 6 lights, and the hit symbol of a maximum of 63 types (2 ^ 6-1 [all off]) can be stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. At this time, for example, there are 21 stop display patterns indicating the normal symbol A, 11 stop display patterns shown in the normal symbol B, 33 stop display patterns corresponding to the normal symbol C, and the like.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, since the ordinary symbol display device P53 is composed of six LEDs, the stop display mode of the ordinary symbol corresponding to each of the ordinary symbol A, the ordinary symbol B, and the ordinary symbol C. There are a plurality of types, and they constitute a "design group" which is a stop display mode in which the same control is performed. In the fourth embodiment, the symbol group A corresponding to the normal symbol A, the symbol group B corresponding to the normal symbol B, and the symbol group C corresponding to the normal symbol C are simply set for the symbol group under the same control. It is expressed as ordinary symbol A, ordinary symbol B, and ordinary symbol C.

In the fourth embodiment, each symbol group of the ordinary symbol A, the ordinary symbol B, and the ordinary symbol C has the same operation mode when the symbols are stopped and displayed and the symbols are the same symbol group. (Ordinary electric accessory P907) is executed, but as will be described later, even if the same symbol group is stopped and displayed due to the game state in which the symbols are stopped and displayed, the electric accessory is stopped and displayed. A different operation mode can be set as the operation mode of the above.

(Opening pattern of ordinary electric accessory when the ball is in the easy entry state 1)
In the easy entry state 1, regardless of which of the normal symbol A, the normal symbol B, and the normal symbol C is selected, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory is short opening (40ms) → closing (42400ms). → Long open (5000ms). The easy entry state 1 is a state to which a part of the "extra stock mode" or the "stock mode" in FIG. 47 is applicable, and is usually the second as long as the player plays a game that does not go against the intention of the designer. It is a gaming state in which four hold related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol can be accumulated, which is the upper limit of the hold.

(Opening pattern of ordinary electric accessory in easy entry state 2)
When the normal symbol A or the normal symbol B is selected in the easy entry state 2, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory is short opening (40ms) → closing (42400ms) → long opening (5000ms). .. When the normal symbol C is selected in the easy entry state 2, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory is short open (40 ms) → closed (47400 ms) → short open (40 ms). In the easy entry state 2, if the normal symbol C (selection rate 500/1000) is won, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In other words, in the easy entry state 2, it is a gaming state in which a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be obtained with a probability of 50% for one normal symbol lottery.

(Opening pattern of ordinary electric accessory when the ball is easy to enter 3)
When the normal symbol A is selected in the easy entry state 3, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory is short opening (40ms) → closing (42400ms) → long opening (5000ms). Further, when the normal symbol B or the normal symbol C is selected in the easy entry state 3 (total selection probability 670/1000), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory is short open (40 ms) → closed. (47400ms) → Short open (40ms). That is, in the easy entry state 3, the probability of obtaining the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 33% for one ordinary symbol lottery, which is the most disadvantageous easy entry state.

(Opening pattern of ordinary electric accessory when it is easy to enter the ball)
In the non-ball entry easy state, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory is short opening (40 ms) regardless of which of the ordinary symbol A, the ordinary symbol B, and the ordinary symbol C is selected. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the normal drawing operating port 1 or the normal drawing operating port 2 in the non-entry easy state, only the open pattern in which the game ball hardly enters the normal electric accessory is selected. Will not be done. If the game ball passes through the normal-figure operating port 1 or the normal-figure operating port 2 (for example, if two balls pass within 5 seconds) when the ball is not easily entered, "Please hit left. Is displayed on the effect display device P80, and the voice of "Please hit left" is output as an error sound.

Further, even when the ball is easy to enter, when the ball passes through the normal drawing operating port 1P904 or the normal drawing operating port 2P905 in a state where the first special symbol is not changed (for example, the ball is easy to enter and the first special symbol is entered). (When 3 or more balls pass without fluctuation), there is a possibility that the distribution unit P903 has been fraudulent, so the message "Please check the distribution device" and voice notification are executed. It may be configured to be possible.

<Summary of opening pattern of ordinary electric accessory by easy entry state and hit pattern>
In the easy entry state 1, the long opening is performed regardless of the hit symbol of the normal symbol A, the normal symbol B, or the normal symbol C, so that the ratio of the long opening is 1000/1000 (100%). Is. That is, in the easy entry state 1, since the lottery of the normal symbol having the execution rate of 100% of the long opening is performed four times, it is designed so that almost four hold of the second special symbol can be obtained.
In the easy entry state 2, the long opening is performed when the normal symbol A or the normal symbol B is selected, so that the ratio of the long opening being executed is 500/1000 (50%). That is, in the easy entry state 2, since the lottery of the normal symbol with the execution rate of the long opening of 50% is performed four times, it is designed so that approximately two hold of the second special symbol can be obtained.
In the easy entry state 3, the long opening is performed when the normal symbol A is selected, so that the ratio of the long opening being executed is 330/1000 (33%). That is, in the easy entry state 3, since the lottery of the normal symbol with the execution rate of the long opening of 33% is performed four times, it is designed so that about one or two hold of the second special symbol can be obtained.

In addition, in the easy entry states 1 to 3, the probability that the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained is the easy entry state 1 (0%), the easy entry state 2 (6.1%), and the easy entry state 2 (6.1%). It is an easy entry state 3 (19.9%), and if you turn it over, the probability that you will get at least one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol and the stock mode (or extra stock mode) will continue again. Is an easy entry state 1 (100%), an easy entry state 2 (93.9%), and an easy entry state 3 (80.1%).

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment has a configuration that does not normally have a design that is out of alignment, but as a modified example, it may be configured to have a design that is out of alignment. When a missed symbol is won (for example, winning probability 5/1000), for example, a cut-in that displays the degree of expectation regarding the remaining normal symbol hold is displayed, or a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the normal symbol hold. It is conceivable to execute a normal symbol look-ahead such as displaying, or to display a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value of the pachinko gaming machine P. In addition, the deviation of the normal symbol is also short (for example, 1 second to 3 seconds * including the fixed time of the symbol), and even if the deviation of the normal symbol occurs once or twice in the stock mode, the normal symbol is held again. It is preferable to configure the player so as not to suffer a disadvantage by executing the notification prompting the player immediately during or after the deviation change of the normal symbol.

<Characteristic 3 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 3, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment has a plurality of easy-to-enter states, and the rate at which long opening is executed in the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory differs depending on the easy-to-enter states. It is configured as. Further, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory by the hit symbol (ordinary symbol B or ordinary symbol C) of 1 is configured to be different depending on the easy-to-enter state.
Further, in one of the plurality of easy-to-enter states, when the game is played normally (for example, in the easy-to-enter state, an error state such as right-handed hitting or jamming does not occur. Etc.) are configured to be able to acquire N (maximum number of reserved second special symbols) of second special symbols at a higher rate than in other easy-to-enter states.

Thus, in feature 3 of the fourth embodiment,
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710, P906) and
The second start winning opening (for example, the second starting winning device (P908)) and
Acting ports (for example, Fuzu operating port 1 (P904), Fuzu operating port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information when the ball enters the operating port, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the large winning opening, and
It is equipped with a main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game.
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A third winning / failing determination means for executing a third winning / failing determination based on a third lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A third hold control means that holds the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third hit / fail determination.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state) in which a game ball is easily changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state by the ball entry variation means.
Equipped with
As a special game, the first special game (big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the first hit, and the second hit / fail judgment result are executed when the second hit. It has a second special game (small hit) that can be executed and a third special game (small hit → passage through a specific area → big hit) that can be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area after executing the second special game.
The specific gaming state has at least a first specific gaming state (for example, easy entry state 1) and a second specific gaming state (for example, easy entry state 2).
The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state are configured so that the opening / closing pattern of the ball entry variation means can be different even if the symbol of the auxiliary identification information displayed on the third identification information display unit is the same. Cage,
The ratio of the second lottery value of N (N is the maximum number of holdings of the second lottery value) held in the first specific game state is N (N is the maximum holding number of the second lottery value) in the second specified game state. It is a gaming machine designed to be higher than the rate at which the second lottery value of (number) is withheld.

(Selection ratio of jackpot symbols and game status after jackpot)
Next, the selection ratio of the hit symbol (big hit symbol) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the game state after the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 52. It is preferable to refer to FIG. 47 as necessary.

(Selection ratio of jackpot symbols)
The first special symbol (special symbol 1) is provided with four jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol A, a jackpot symbol B, a jackpot symbol C, and a jackpot symbol D. The selection ratio of the jackpot symbol A is 40/1000, the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol B is 120/1000, the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol C is 400/1000, and the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol D is 440/1000.

The second special symbol (special diagram 2) is provided with three jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol a, a jackpot symbol b, and a jackpot symbol c. The selection ratio of the jackpot symbol a is 40/1000, the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol b is 120/1000, and the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol c is 840/1000.

In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed regardless of the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game in which the number of rounds differs depending on the jackpot symbol may be executed. Further, a jackpot game in which the number of rounds differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be executed. For example, the first special symbol may be configured to execute a four-round jackpot game, and the second special game may be configured to execute an eight-round jackpot game.

(Easy entry after the big hit)
As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the ball entry easy states 1 to 3 are provided. Depending on the big hit symbol at the time of hitting, which state to move to the easy-to-enter state is determined as follows.
1st special symbol: jackpot symbol A → easy entry state 1 (1 time)
1st special symbol: Big hit symbol B → Easy entry 2 (1 time)
1st special symbol: jackpot symbol C → easy entry 3 (1 time)
1st special symbol: jackpot symbol D → None (non-ball entry easy state) (0 times)
2nd special symbol: jackpot symbol a → easy entry state 1 (1 time)
2nd special symbol: Big hit symbol b → Easy entry 2 (1 time)
2nd special symbol: jackpot symbol c → easy entry 3 (1 time)

(Transition of fluctuation pattern table after the end of the big hit game and the number of times the fluctuation pattern table is used)
The transition pattern of the fluctuation pattern table and the number of times the fluctuation pattern table is used after the jackpot game is completed are determined as follows by the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation pattern tables 0 to 6 are provided as the fluctuation pattern tables, and the fluctuation pattern table 0 is "0", the fluctuation pattern table 1 is "1", the fluctuation pattern table 2 is "2", and the fluctuation pattern table 3 is appropriately provided. Will be described as “3”, the variation pattern table 4 will be referred to as “4”, the variation pattern table 5 will be referred to as “5”, and the variation pattern table 6 will be referred to as “6”.

<< Fluctuation pattern table 0 >>
The variation pattern table 0 is a variation pattern table mainly used in a normal gaming state (low probability / low base), and is a number of times that can be counted in 1 byte as a reference period (number of games) until switching to the next variation pattern table. Is set.

<< Fluctuation pattern table 1 >>
The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table in the easy entry state 1. That is, it is a fluctuation pattern table used in the extra stock mode (or a part of the stock mode), and is a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern of 170 seconds is selected as the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

<< Fluctuation pattern table 2 >>
The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table in the easy entry state 2. That is, it is a fluctuation pattern table used in the stock mode height, and is a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern of 170 seconds is selected as the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

<< Fluctuation pattern table 3 >>
The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table in the easy entry state 3. That is, it is a fluctuation pattern table used in the low stock mode, and is a fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern of 170 seconds is selected as the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

The fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 3 are fluctuation pattern tables in an easy-to-enter state, and are intended to execute the game in the stock mode by the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the case of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the big hit fluctuation or the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol (the fluctuation that occurs as the fluctuation display during continuous digestion of the stock bonus), the fluctuation pattern of about 5 to 10 seconds is It is configured to be selected.

<< Fluctuation pattern table 4 >>
The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table used to perform a rush effect to the precursor mode. That is, it is configured to select a fixed fluctuation pattern for one fluctuation entering the precursor mode, and when this fluctuation pattern is selected, it is configured to execute a precursor mode entry effect indicating entry into the precursor mode. Has been done.

<< Fluctuation pattern table 5 >>
The variation pattern table 5 is a variation pattern table used during the precursor mode. By using the variation pattern table 5, it is possible to execute a notice, reach effect, etc. different from the normal stage in the precursor mode.

<< Fluctuation pattern table 6 >>
The variation pattern table 6 is a variation pattern table used to perform an effect of entering the extra stock mode (easy entry state 1 by the relief function). That is, it is configured so that a specific fluctuation pattern is selected for one fluctuation that enters the extra stock mode, and when this fluctuation pattern is selected, an extra stock mode entry effect indicating the entry into the extra stock mode is executed. It is configured to do.

(When jackpot symbol A and jackpot symbol a are selected)
When the first special symbol: jackpot symbol A (second special symbol: jackpot symbol a), the fluctuation pattern table is 1 (1 time) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (60 times) → 4 (1 time) → 5 (28 times) → 6 (1 time) → 1 (80 times) → 0 (0 times (= another fluctuation pattern table is set) (Used until) (same below)). Specifically, after the big hit game by the big hit symbol A (big hit symbol a) is completed, first, the first special symbol is changed (missing) once in the extra stock mode (easy entry state 1). Fluctuation 170 seconds) is executed. If the hold of the second special symbol cannot be obtained here, then 568 games are played in the normal game state (normal stage). Then, at the 570th fluctuation, the precursor mode entry effect is executed. Subsequently, 28 games are played in the precursor mode, and the extra stock mode entry effect is executed at the 599th fluctuation. Then, the extra stock mode is set at the 600th fluctuation.

(When jackpot symbol B and jackpot symbol b are selected)
When the first special symbol: jackpot symbol B (second special symbol: jackpot symbol b), the fluctuation pattern table is 2 (1 time) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (60 times) → 4 (1 time) → 5 (28 times) → 6 (1 time) → 1 (80 times) → 0 (0 times (= another fluctuation pattern table is set) It is used until))). Specifically, to explain including the production, after the big hit game by the big hit symbol B (big hit symbol b) is completed, first, the first special symbol fluctuates (misses) once at the stock mode high (easy entry state 2). Fluctuation 170 seconds) is executed. If the hold of the second special symbol cannot be obtained here, then 568 games are played in the normal game state (normal stage). Then, at the 570th fluctuation, the precursor mode entry effect is executed. Subsequently, 28 games are played in the precursor mode, and the extra stock mode entry effect is executed at the 599th fluctuation. Then, the extra stock mode is set at the 600th fluctuation.

(When jackpot symbol C and jackpot symbol c are selected)
When the first special symbol: jackpot symbol C (second special symbol: jackpot symbol c), the fluctuation pattern table is 3 (1 time) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (60 times) → 4 (1 time) → 5 (28 times) → 6 (1 time) → 1 (80 times) → 0 (0 times (= another fluctuation pattern table is set) It is used until))). Specifically, after the big hit game with the big hit symbol C (big hit symbol c) is completed, first, the first special symbol fluctuates (misses) once in the stock mode low (easy entry state 3). Fluctuation 170 seconds) is executed. If the hold of the second special symbol cannot be obtained here, then 568 games are played in the normal game state (normal stage). Then, at the 570th fluctuation, the precursor mode entry effect is executed. Subsequently, 28 games are played in the precursor mode, and the extra stock mode entry effect is executed at the 599th fluctuation. Then, the extra stock mode is set at the 600th fluctuation.

(When the jackpot symbol D is selected)
1st special symbol: When the jackpot symbol D, the fluctuation pattern table is 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (61 times) → 4 (1 time). ) → 5 (28 times) → 6 (1 time) → 1 (80 times) → 0 (0 times (= used until another fluctuation pattern table is set)). Specifically, if the effect is included, the time saving state is not set after the big hit game by the big hit symbol D is completed, so that the fluctuation pattern table in any of the easy-to-enter states is not set. Therefore, 569 games are played in the normal game state (normal stage). Then, at the 570th fluctuation, the precursor mode entry effect is executed. Subsequently, 28 games are played in the precursor mode, and the extra stock mode entry effect is executed at the 599th fluctuation. Then, the extra stock mode is set at the 600th fluctuation.

In addition, the relief function sets the extra stock mode (easy entry state 1) 80 times from the 600th fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern table 1 is used 80 times. , 0.4P ≦ N ≦ 3.8P ”, and in the fourth embodiment, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the normal gaming state is 1/200, the condition of the time saving number N is satisfied.

Even if the player enters the extra stock mode (easy entry state 1) by the relief function, only one change is easy to enter the ball, as in the extra stock mode (easy entry state 1) immediately after the big hit game. 1 may be set and the variation pattern table 1 may be used.

(Selection ratio of small hit symbols and game status after big hit)
Next, the selection ratio of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the gaming state after the big hit (small hit + passing through the specific area) will be described with reference to FIG. 53. It is preferable to refer to FIG. 47 as necessary.

<< Selection ratio of small hit symbols >>
The second special symbol (special symbol 2) is provided with six small hit symbols: a small hit symbol 1, a small hit symbol 2, a small hit symbol 3, a small hit symbol 4, a small hit symbol 5, and a small hit symbol 6. Has been done. The selection ratio of the small hit symbol 1 is 10/1000, the selection ratio of the small hit symbol 2 is 30/1000, the selection ratio of the small hit symbol 3 is 210/1000, the selection ratio of the small hit symbol 4 is 30/1000, and the small hit. The selection ratio of the symbol 5 is 90/1000, and the selection ratio of the small hit symbol 6 is 630/1000.

In the fourth embodiment, the small hit symbols 1 to 3 are configured so that 8 rounds of big hit games can be executed, and the small hit symbols 4 to 6 are configured so that 4 rounds of big hits can be executed.

《Easy entry after big hit》
As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the ball entry easy states 1 to 3 are provided. Which of the easy-to-enter states will be determined by the small hit symbol when it becomes a hit is determined as follows.
2nd special symbol: Small hit symbol 1 (8R) → Easy entry state 1 (1 time)
2nd special symbol: Small hit symbol 2 (8R) → Easy entry 2 (1 time)
2nd special symbol: Small hit symbol 3 (8R) → Easy entry 3 (1 time)
2nd special symbol: Small hit symbol 4 (4R) → Easy entry 1 (1 time)
2nd special symbol: Small hit symbol 5 (4R) → Easy entry 2 (1 time)
2nd special symbol: Small hit symbol 6 (4R) → Easy entry 3 (1 time)

(Transition of fluctuation pattern table after the end of the big hit game and the number of times the fluctuation pattern table is used)
The transition pattern of the variation pattern table after the end of the big hit game and the number of times the variation pattern table is used are determined by the small hit symbol. The small hit symbol 1 and the small hit symbol 4 are the same as those of the large hit symbol A of the first special symbol and the large hit symbol a of the second special symbol. The case of the small hit symbol 2 and the small hit symbol 5 is the same as that of the large hit symbol B of the first special symbol and the large hit symbol b of the second special symbol. The case of the small hit symbol 3 and the small hit symbol 6 is the same as that of the large hit symbol C of the first special symbol and the large hit symbol c of the second special symbol.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the ratio of the small hit symbols is set as shown in FIG. 53, and the transition rate to the easy entry state 1 is 4% and the easy entry state 2 is achieved regardless of the number of rounds. The transition rate is 12%, and the transition rate to the easy-to-enter state 3 is 84%. For example, for small hit symbols 1 and 2, the selection ratio is higher than in the example of FIG. 53, while for small hit symbols 3. By lowering the selection ratio, in the case of 8R with a large number of balls to be acquired, it is possible to shift to the easy-to-enter state 1 or the easy-to-enter state 2 which is advantageous to the player with a higher probability than in the case of 4R. Depending on the number of jackpot rounds that triggered the start of the stock mode, it may be configured so that the game can be played with a sense of expectation that a more advantageous stock mode will be executed.

<Characteristic 4 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 4, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment corresponds to the transition pattern (transition order) of the variation pattern table and the number of times each variation pattern table is used based on the jackpot symbol after the jackpot game is completed. It is predetermined. The number of times the variation pattern table used in the non-ball entry easy state (non-time saving state) is all manageable with one byte. For example, the variation pattern table 0 is set to be used 127 times, and then the variation pattern table 0 can be set to be used 127 times or 60 times (or 61 times) again. With this configuration, for example, in order to set the fluctuation pattern table 0 continuously for 568, it is not necessary to provide a counter (RAM storage area) for counting the number of times setting of 2 bytes or more, and thus the data capacity. Can be reduced.

Thus, in feature 4 of the fourth embodiment,
Starting winning openings (for example, first starting winning devices P710, P906, second starting winning device (P908)),
An identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying identification information when a ball enters the starting winning opening, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball, and
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
It is equipped with a main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game.
The main control unit
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on a lottery value acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening, and
A symbol determination means for determining a stop symbol indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment, and
A variation pattern table determining means for determining a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern of identification information for showing the result of a hit / fail judgment, and a variation pattern table determining means.
A variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the identification information from the variation pattern table,
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state in which the ball is easily changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state by the ball entry variation means.
Equipped with
It is configured to be in a specific game state when a predetermined number of games are executed without becoming a special game after the end of the special game.
After the end of the special game, it is configured to determine the fluctuation pattern table based on the selection criteria of the fluctuation pattern table predetermined based on the stop symbol.
The selection criteria include the change pattern and the number of references in the variation pattern table.
In the non-specific gaming state, after playing a game using a predetermined variation pattern table until the predetermined number of references is reached, the variation pattern table newly set based on the change pattern is a predetermined variation pattern table and is a predetermined variation pattern table. It is a gaming machine that can be set to be used until the number of references is reached.

(End timing of easy ball entry state (time saving state))
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the end timing of the ball entry easy state (time saving state) will be described. (A) is the case where the first easy-to-enter state is a missed fluctuation, and (b) is the case where the first easy-to-enter state is a hit fluctuation.

<< (a) Easy entry state When the first time is off and fluctuates >>
Easy entry state (time saving state) In the case of the first fluctuation, when the fluctuation display period of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) ends, when the symbol fixing time starts. It is configured to end the easy entry state (time saving state) and enter the normal game state (non-time saving state).

<< (b) Easy entry state When the first hit fluctuates >>
Easy entry state (time reduction state) If the first fluctuation is a hit variation, the easy entry state (time reduction state) is terminated when the hit variation of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) starts. It is configured to be in a normal gaming state (non-time saving state).

Even in the case of the big hit fluctuation or the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol, the ball entry easy state (time saving state) is configured to end at the start of the small hit fluctuation.

With this configuration, it will be in a non-ball entry easy state (non-time saving state) during the big hit or small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol, so it will be a normal symbol lottery during the big hit or small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the selection of an opening pattern including a long opening from being selected. That is, there is no additional hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the period in which the stock bonus is continuously consumed by the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol acquired in the stock mode. , The game nature that the stock bonus is executed by the number of stocks acquired in the stock mode becomes clear.

<Characteristic 5 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 5, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment has, as described above, when the first special symbol change in the easy-to-enter state (time saving state) is out of order, and when the out-of-order change of the special symbol is completed. If the ball entry easy state (time saving state) is finished and the first special symbol change in the ball entry easy state (time saving state) is a hit (big hit, small hit) change, the hit change of the special symbol is It is configured to end the easy entry state (time saving state) when it starts.

Thus, in feature 5 of the fourth embodiment,
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710, P906) and
The second start winning opening (for example, the second starting winning device (P908)) and
Acting ports (for example, Fuzu operating port 1 (P904), Fuzu operating port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information when the ball enters the operating port, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the large winning opening, and
It is equipped with a main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game.
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A third winning / failing determination means for executing a third winning / failing determination based on a third lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A third hold control means that holds the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third hit / fail determination.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state) in which a game ball is easily changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state by the ball entry variation means.
Equipped with
As a special game, when the first special game (for example, a big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the first hit, and the result of the second hit / miss judgment is the second hit. A second special game (for example, a small hit) that can be executed, and a third special game (for example, a small hit → a specific area passage → a big hit) that can be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area after the second special game is executed. ) And
It is configured so that the specific gaming state is terminated by the change of the first identification information of the specified number of times or the change of the second identification information of the specified number of times.
If the first identification information or the second identification information of the specified number of times in the specific gaming state is a variation related to the deviation, the specific gaming state is terminated at the end of the variation, while the specified number of times in the specific gaming state is reached. When the first identification information or the second identification information is a variation related to the first hit or the second hit, the gaming machine is configured to end the specific gaming state at the start of the variation.

In addition, when the number of consecutive villas is a predetermined multiple (for example, the situation where a big hit of 7n-1 (n> = 2) such as 6 consecutive villas, 13 consecutive villas, 20 consecutive villas, etc. is obtained), the next stock mode is set. 1 The fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of the special symbol may be designed so that the number of lottery of the normal symbol is N (maximum number of reserved symbols) + 1 time.

Specifically, for example, after the hit game by the second special symbol related to the sixth stock mode is performed four times (the end of the six consecutive villas), the ball is easily entered into any of the easy-to-enter states 1 to 3. Even in the case of migration, the variation pattern table X is configured to be selected. In this fluctuation pattern table X, the fluctuation pattern x is always selected when the first special symbol is out of alignment. The fluctuation pattern x has a fluctuation time of 21860 ms (218.06 seconds). 218060 ms (218.06 seconds) is a fluctuation time of 170000 ms (170 seconds) of the out-of-order fluctuation of the first special symbol selected when the fluctuation pattern table X is not in the easy-to-enter state, and one fluctuation of the normal symbol. It is the time obtained by adding the maximum time of 48060 ms (48.06 seconds) required for hitting. With this configuration, it is possible to easily generate the 7th consecutive villa in the case of 6 consecutive villas.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, a hold related to a special symbol lottery of a maximum of four second special symbols can occur. For example, in a situation where five consecutive villas are located, the special symbol of the second special symbol can be held. If there are two holds related to the lottery, the number of consecutive villas at the time of transition to the stock mode is intentionally avoided by avoiding the small hit V of the 6th consecutive villa (the game ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area P910). By making adjustments, a strategy that creates a favorable situation is assumed.

In order to prevent such a capture, whether or not to set the fluctuation pattern table for the advantageous stock mode as described above is determined by the hit symbol of the big hit (small hit V) that triggered the execution of the 7n-1 consecutive villa. It may be configured to switch. By doing so, the winning symbol and the number of consecutive villas are the conditions, and it is possible to configure it so that it cannot be captured unless the correspondence with the winning symbol is known. In addition, if the combination of the winning symbol and the number of consecutive villas is a condition, it is possible that the reference opportunity of the advantageous stock mode fluctuation pattern table will decrease, so the other winning symbols are the 7n-2 consecutive villas. The timing at which the stock mode becomes +1 times may be irregular, such as by configuring the variation pattern table for an advantageous stock mode to be set.

In addition to the above-mentioned strategy measures, the counter that counts the number of consecutive villas with the execution of the small hit game is updated so that it is counted as the number of consecutive villas regardless of whether or not the specific area P910 has passed. If it is configured, even if the game is played so as not to generate the small hit V intentionally, it only damages the big hit ball, so it can be taken as a capture measure.

(Relationship between fluctuation patterns (main fluctuation patterns) and production patterns (sub fluctuation patterns) in easy entry states 1 to 3)
Next, a variation pattern of the special symbol controlled by the main control CPU (main variation pattern) and an effect pattern controlled by the sub control CPU (sub variation pattern) in the easy-to-enter state will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

As described above, the fourth embodiment includes three easy-to-enter states, and the main control CPU selects different variation pattern tables in each of the three easy-to-enter states, and is selected at the time of loss. A common fluctuation pattern A is selected as the fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-control CPU is provided with three effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern A, and is configured to select different effect patterns according to the easy entry state. Specifically, the sub-control CPU selects the effect pattern a when the ball is in the easy entry state 1, selects the effect pattern b when the ball is in the easy entry state 2, and selects the effect pattern c when the ball is in the easy entry state 3. do.

With this configuration, the sub-control CPU recognizes which easy-to-enter ball state is in the sub-variation pattern, and the normal symbol is displayed in the stock mode or the extra stock mode. Regarding the content of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display, the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device P80 can be switched. Specifically, since the sub-control CPU is in the stock mode when the effect pattern b or c is stored, the screen suggesting the mode of the extra stock mode and the variable effect (notice and look-ahead) of the normal symbol are displayed. It will not be displayed. In addition, as will be described later, in the extra stock mode, in the battle production that suggests whether or not the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory includes the long opening, the enemy character (enemy character 5) that can be played only in the extra stock mode Since the battle effect of is executed, it is possible to control not to execute the battle effect with the enemy character 5 when the effect pattern b or c is memorized.

Further, the sub-control CPU changes the selection ratio of the effect content of the long hit suggestion effect (the suggestion effect of whether or not the normal electric accessory is a hit including the long opening) based on the stored sub-variation pattern. It is also possible. That is, whether or not the normal electric accessory P907 is long-opened depending on the result of the normal symbol lottery (especially the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed) by grasping the type of the current easy-to-enter ball state by the sub-variation pattern. It is possible to determine the content of the advance notice regarding the degree of expectation.

(Transition diagram of stock mode and extra stock mode)
Next, the transition of the displayed effect in the stock mode and the extra stock mode will be described with reference to FIG. 56. Transitions in stock mode are indicated by thin lines, and transitions in extra stock mode are indicated by thick lines.

《Stock mode transition》
First, when the mode shifts to the stock mode, the display of the stock mode screen of FIG. 49 starts.

Next, the characters "Aim at the gate" are displayed on the effect display device P80. In the fourth embodiment, since it is important to pass through the gates (Public drawing operating port 1 and Pinging drawing operating port 2) in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, a plurality of displays ("Aim at the gate", "Right hit", and "Charge" are displayed. !! ”etc.) to encourage you to pass through the gate. It may be configured to display "Aim at the gate" larger than "Stock mode", "Right-handed", and "Charge !!".

In particular, if the fluctuation display of the first variation of the normal symbol is not started until about 26 seconds after the start of the stock mode and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, the normal symbol lottery is held three times. Even if it is accumulated, it is difficult to stop and display the normal symbol within the fluctuation display period of the first special symbol (during the period of easy entry), so 10 seconds from the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. If the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation of the normal symbol does not start even after a certain amount of time has passed, a warning display such as "Aim for the gate early!" Or "If you do not start within X seconds, the battle right will be lost!" It may be executed additionally. If the fluctuation display of the first variation of the normal symbol is not started, only the hold display according to the number of completed fluctuation display of the first variation of the normal symbol within the period of easy entry is possible. It is configured to erase the display areas P927 to P929 of the normal symbol reservation one by one.

Next, as described above, when a predetermined number of game balls pass through the gates (normal symbol operating port 1, normal symbol operating port 2) after acquiring four normal symbol holding images, the normal symbol holding image (normal symbol holding image) P925) change fanning effect (normal symbol hold change fanning effect) is performed.

Next, when a predetermined period elapses after acquiring four hold of ordinary symbols, the stock completion screen described later is displayed.

When the stock completion screen is displayed, depending on the type of normal symbol that is easy to enter and the type of normal symbol, the hit of the first fluctuation of the normal symbol will be successful production (example: character display of "hit") only when it is long open. And the characters "Aim for the electric chew" are displayed on the effect display device P80. On the other hand, when the hit of the first fluctuation of the normal symbol is not long open (when it is the hit of short opening), the hit of the second fluctuation of the normal symbol is long after waiting for the next fluctuation display of the normal symbol (operation of the normal electric accessory). It shifts to a long hit suggestion production that suggests whether or not it will be open.

The display of "Aim for electric chew" is before the start of the second opening (long opening) of the ordinary electric accessory P907, and the game ball launched in the right area P501R passes through the delay mechanism P902 and the like, and the second 2 The start is started about 5 seconds before the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory P907 in anticipation of the timing when it becomes easy to reach the start winning device P908. In addition, since the long opening period of the ordinary electric accessory P907 is 5 seconds, the passage of time and the remaining time are shown under the characters "Aim for the electric chew" according to the long opening period of the ordinary electric accessory P907. It is configured to execute the indicator display of the above and the display of the remaining seconds such as "remaining XX".

In the first variation of the normal symbol, the operation mode of the normal electric accessory P907 is long open, and when the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908), the character "V" is displayed on the effect display device P80, and the second Indicates that a special symbol hold has been acquired. If there is a hold of a normal symbol, it will be in a standby state as it is, and will wait for the next long hit suggestion effect to start. At this time, if the situation is controlled by the extra stock mode, the appearance effect of the enemy character 5 is generated after the character "V" is displayed or during the period of waiting for the start of the second variation of the normal symbol.

《Long hit suggestion production》
The long hit suggestion effect is an effect that suggests whether or not the hit of the second to fourth fluctuations of the normal symbol becomes a long open, and can be executed up to three times. The long hit suggestion effect includes a battle effect, a music effect (described later), and a special effect (described later).

《Battle production》
In the battle effect in the stock mode, the battle with any one of the opponent characters 1 to 4 is displayed on the effect display device P80. If the ally character wins, the normal electric accessory will be released for a long time and the hold of the second special symbol can be obtained, and if the ally character is defeated, the ordinary electric accessory will be short-released and the hold of the second special symbol can hardly be obtained.

The degree of expectation of victory in the battle production is enemy character 1 <enemy character 2 <enemy character 3 <enemy character 4. Of these, when the enemy character 3 is defeated, it is configured to indicate that the hit of the normal symbol of the next fluctuation includes a long opening. In other words, the variation effect of the normal symbol that wins the enemy character 3 is determined in consideration of the fact that the pre-judgment information of the normal symbol related to the next normal symbol lottery is a hit (long open), and the enemy character 3 is won. In that case, it is possible to obtain two holds for the second special symbol. Further, when the enemy character 3 is defeated, the normal symbol reserved image of the next fluctuation can be changed to a rainbow color. Further, after defeating the enemy character 3, in the next long hit suggestion effect, a special effect indicating that the long release is confirmed may be executed. The production screen for battle production will be described later.

《Music production》
In the music production, the player can operate the production button P381. It is configured to suggest whether the hit of the normal symbol is a long opening or a short opening depending on the success degree of the operation of the effect button P381 of the player. The music effect is configured so that it does not occur when one or more hold of the second special symbol is acquired. In other words, the musical rendition is configured so that it can only occur in situations where the second special symbol hold has not yet been acquired. The reason for controlling in this way is that if there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the continuation of the stock mode is definite, and there is one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. However, because the music for blessing the player is played from the situation that occurred to the rest of the stock mode, the music reach and the music for blessing overlap and affect the audibility of both. Is. The production screen for music production will be described later.

《Special production》
The special effect is an effect that can occur only when the hit of the normal symbol is long open. That is, the player can recognize that the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time at the time when the special effect is started, and the hold of the second special symbol can be obtained. The special effect may display a rare scene such as displaying the story of a ally character, for example.

Returning to the transition diagram, if you win (success) in the long hit suggestion effect, the characters "Aim for the electric chew" will be displayed on the effect display device P80 in order to acquire the hold of the second special symbol, and if you lose (fail), the next The characters "NEXT" are displayed and the device is in a standby state until the long hit suggestion effect is started.

In addition, when all the hits of the normal symbols 1 to 4 fluctuations are short open and the 2nd special symbol is held 0, the first result effect is to display the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa period. It is displayed on the effect display device P80 over the remaining fluctuation control period (design fixed time) of the special symbol, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state (normal stage). If any of the 1st to 4th fluctuations of the normal symbol is open for a long time and there is 1 or more holds related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol, the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol (stock number). ) Will be continued to be displayed on the stock result screen, and the winning game due to the variable display of the second special symbol will be awaited. When the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the effect display device P80 is configured to display a variable effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol for suggesting the number of rounds. are doing.

In this way, the effect display in the stock mode (one deviation of the first special symbol) is a variation effect of the normal symbol corresponding to four fluctuations of the normal symbol (operation of the ordinary electric accessory P907). It consists of a variable effect of the effect symbol P802, a notice effect such as an aura effect on the stock mode screen, and a notice effect such as a battle effect and a music effect. In the variable display of the effect symbol P802, the specification is such that the execution mode of the advance notice effect is switched between the first variable display of the normal symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol after the second time. It is possible to provide a high level of production.

《Extra stock mode transition》
When the mode shifts to the extra stock mode, the display of the extra stock mode screen starts. Similar to the stock mode, the characters "Aim at the gate" are displayed and the stock completion screen is displayed. In the extra stock mode, regardless of which hit symbol the normal symbol hits, the open pattern of the normal electric accessory includes a long open, so a successful effect (the word "hit" is displayed) is always performed. The extra stock mode screen is almost the same as the stock mode screen described above, but the aura effect and other advance notice effects and look-ahead effects are extra based on the advance notice lottery for the change effect of the normal symbol corresponding to the first change of the ordinary symbol. It can be displayed in a mode that can only be displayed in stock mode (for example, aura P922 becomes rainbow color, the content of the character display of stock completion is displayed as "standby perfect", all normal symbol hold is Kirin It is possible to display effects such as a pattern (a mode in which the long opening of the normal figure is confirmed).

Next, the character "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed, and when the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908), the character "V" is displayed on the effect display device P80, and the second special symbol is held. Indicates that has been acquired. If there is a hold of the normal symbol, it will be in the standby state as it is, wait until the next fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the operation of the normal electric accessory P907 are started, and then the next battle effect (enemy character 5) starts. You will have to wait for it to be done.

After the second change of the normal symbol, a battle effect with the enemy character 5 is performed, but in the extra stock mode, as described above, the open pattern of the normal electric accessory is displayed regardless of which hit symbol the normal symbol hits. Since it includes a long opening, it will definitely be a victory, and the words "Aim for the electric chew" will be displayed.

In this way, in the stock mode and the extra stock mode, the effect corresponding to one hold of the normal symbol is mainly performed by the effect display device P80, and in the case of a hit including a long opening, the effect is a victory (success). , The hold of the second special symbol is configured to be able to be acquired. This is done 4 times (including the success effect of the 1st change in the normal figure), and a maximum of 4 holds of the 2nd special symbol can be obtained.

《Stock completion screen》
Next, the stock completion screen will be described with reference to FIG. 57. As mentioned above, the stock completion screen is displayed after acquiring 4 hold of normal symbols. In detail, after the operation of the normal electric accessory is started by hitting the first fluctuation of the normal symbol (the first hold of the normal symbol), the normal symbol is held by the time when a specific period (example: 25 seconds) elapses. It is configured to be displayed when 3 more have been acquired. As a supplement, the period until the stock completion screen is displayed is the period of the above-mentioned normal symbol hold change fanning effect. If the total number of reserved normal symbols is less than 4, the stock completion screen will not be displayed.

On the stock completion screen, the maximum number of normal symbol hold has been acquired based on whether or not there is a hit including long opening in the acquired normal symbol hold (within 3) and the current easy entry state. A character indicating that is displayed. The displayed character patterns include three patterns: "standby completed", "standby OK!", And "standby perfect !!".

"Standby completion" is configured to be likely to occur when the expectation that there is a hit including a long opening in the hold is low and / or when the ball is in the easy entry state 3. That is, it is configured to be likely to occur when the expectation of holding acquisition of the second special symbol is low. For example, it is easily generated when the number of hits including the long opening is one or less in the easy entry state 3 and the easy entry state 2.

"Standby OK!" Is configured to be likely to occur when the expectation that there is a hit including a long opening in the hold is medium and / or when the ball entry easy state 2 or 3 is performed. That is, it is configured to be likely to occur when the expectation of holding acquisition of the second special symbol is relatively high. For example, it is configured to be likely to occur when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state 2 or when two or more are won in the easy-to-enter state 3 including a long opening.

"Standby perfect !!" is configured to be likely to occur when the expectation that there is a hit including a long opening in the hold is high and / or when the ball entry easy state 1 or 2 is reached. That is, it is configured to be likely to occur when the expectation of holding acquisition of the second special symbol is extremely high. For example, it is configured to be likely to occur when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state 1 or when 3 pieces are won in the easy-to-enter state 2 including the long opening.

With this configuration, it is possible to collectively instigate whether or not the hold of the second special symbol can be obtained by holding the acquired normal symbol. That is, it is possible to provide the enjoyment that the player can predict how many second special symbols can be held at the time of displaying the stock completion screen. Further, in the above example, depending on the content of the characters displayed on the stock completion screen of the normal symbol hold, the type of the easy-to-enter ball state and the pre-judgment information of the normal symbol whether the normal symbol hold is a hit symbol that is long open. However, the content is not limited to the character content, and the same content may be notified due to differences in font, size, color, etc., additional display of a character image, and the like.

(Display screen of battle production)
In the battle effect in the stock mode, the battle movie of the ally character and the enemy character displayed on the entire effect display device P80, the effect symbol (P802) displayed on the upper right of the effect display device P80, and the upper right and the effect symbol. "Right-handed notification (P832)" (display of "right-handed" character string and right arrow symbol) displayed at the bottom of the effect symbol and "normal symbol hold image" displayed at the lower right of the effect display device P80. (P925) ”and the number of holds (simple hold display P814) related to the special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol) displayed in the middle left end of the effect display device P80 (FIG. 58). reference).

The production pattern of the battle movie (battle production notice pattern) is "Friend character special move attack"> "Friend character first strike"> "Competition"> "Enemy character" in descending order of expectation that the result of the normal symbol lottery will be long open. First strike ". In addition, in order to show the result to the player at the timing before the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory P907, the result notification effect (result notification button notice) for notifying the result of the battle is produced by the effect button P381 or the lever P382 (lever). P382 has a higher expectation), and it is configured by a button effect to be notified by an operation. By executing the button effect before the second opening of the ordinary electric accessory P907 in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to miss the timing of long opening even if the ordinary electric accessory is operated for a long time. If the result of the battle effect is won, the "Aim for electric chew" effect is started after that, and the player fires a game ball into the right area P501R based on the start of the display. 2 The start winning device P908 is configured to facilitate winning.

(Display screen for music production)
The display screen in the music effect is displayed on the ally character displayed in the center column of the effect display device P80, the effect symbol (P802) displayed on the upper right of the effect display device P80, and the effect symbol on the upper right and below the effect symbol. "Right-handed notification (P832)" (display of "right-handed" character string and right arrow symbol), "normal symbol hold image (P925)" displayed at the lower right of the effect display device P80, The number of holds (simple hold display P814), five-line staff (P930), timing bar (P931), timing related to the special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol) displayed in the middle left end of the effect display device P80. A mark (P932), a button image (P933), a long opening suggestion display (P934) described later, and a suggestion display history (P935) described later are displayed (see FIG. 59).

《Music production》
In the music production, the player operates a button when the timing mark (P932) reaches the position of the timing bar (P931), and if the button operation is an allowable timing, it suggests whether it is a hit including long opening. A long opening suggestion display (P934) is performed.

As the pattern of the long opening suggestion display (P934), three patterns of "EXCELLENT!", "GREAT!" And "NICE" are provided, and EXCELLENT! > GREAT! It suggests that there is a high expectation that ordinary electric accessories will be open for a long time in the order of> NICE. In other words, when the ordinary electric accessory is open for a long time, "EXCELLENT!" Is easily displayed and "NICE" is difficult to be displayed. If the button operation is not at the permissible timing, the long open suggestion display may not be displayed, or only "NICE", which suggests that the expectation that the normal electric accessory will be long open, may be displayed. Can be configured.

The history of the long opening suggestion display displayed in this music production is displayed as the suggestion display history (P935). As a result, the player does not need to memorize the displayed long opening suggestion display, and it is easy to predict whether or not the hit of the normal symbol this time will be the long opening.

In the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned "battle effect" and "music effect" are performed during the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P907 after the normal symbol that is a hit is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device P53. Although it is an effect display, the variation display of the effect symbol P802 is also executed as a variation effect of the normal symbol.

The variation display of the effect symbol P802 multiple times in the stock mode (or extra stock mode) is immediately before the second opening (short opening / long opening) in the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P907 (for example, 0.5 seconds before). It is configured so that all symbols can be stopped and displayed immediately before "Aim for electric chew", and if it is long open, special symbols such as doublet and "VVV" are stopped and displayed, and it is short. In the case of opening, it may be configured so that doublets such as "158" and reach deviations such as "212" are stopped and displayed. In addition, the production symbol P802 of the normal symbol is varied and displayed in a reach mode such as "7 (during fluctuation) 7" in order to suggest the degree of expectation of "battle production" and "music production" to form a reach mode. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the type of the symbol (“7” in this example).

<Characteristic 6 in the fourth embodiment>
The gaming machine in the fourth embodiment has the feature 6 as described above. It is configured to determine the effect content displayed on the effect display device P80.

Thus, in feature 6 of the fourth embodiment,
Starting winning openings (for example, first starting winning devices P710, P906, second starting winning device (P908)),
Acting ports (for example, Fuzu operating port 1 (P904), Fuzu operating port 2 (P905)),
An identification information display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device P51, the second special symbol display device P52) that can display identification information when the ball enters the start winning opening.
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information when the ball enters the operating port, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball, and
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device P80) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control CPU) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main control unit
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state) in which a game ball is easily changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state by the ball entry variation means.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed by the sub-control unit to the sub-control unit.
The sub-control unit
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main control unit, and
It is equipped with an effect symbol control means for controlling the effect symbol displayed on the effect display unit.
The effect pattern control means is
It is possible to change the effect symbol multiple times while the identification information changes by one in the specific game state.
The effect displayed on the effect display section is the display content (normal symbol 1st variation "stock mode screen", normal symbol 2nd to 4th variation "battle effect", "music effect" according to changes in the effect symbol multiple times. It is a gaming machine that is configured so that """specialeffects" etc.) can be changed.

If the enemy character 3 is defeated in the battle production in the stock mode, it is confirmed that the normal electric accessory P907 will be opened for a long time by hitting the normal symbol and hitting the next normal symbol (after one change). The specifications have been described, but the specifications are not limited to this. For example, if you win the enemy character 3 in the battle production in stock mode, the normal electric accessory will be long due to the hit of the next normal symbol (after 1 change) or the hit of the next next (after 2 changes) normal symbol. It is also possible to have a specification that confirms that it will be open (that is, at least one of the remaining holds suggests that the winning symbol with a long open is stopped and displayed). Further, in the case of the enemy character 3 in the 3rd game (variable display of the normal symbol which is the final of the stock mode), it is possible to make the specification that the victory is confirmed.

In addition, when the enemy character is 3 in the battle production in stock mode, it is confirmed that the normal electric accessory will be open for a long time by hitting the normal symbol, but the next normal symbol (after 1 change) hits. Therefore, it may be configured so that it is not determined whether or not the normal electric accessory is long open. In this case, the hit variation related to the hit of the ordinary symbol and the opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory are being executed, and the hit variation related to the hit of the next ordinary symbol and the opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory are being executed. It is also possible to configure the effect display device P80 to display the straddling effect. For example, during the execution of the hit variation related to the hit of the normal symbol and the opening / closing pattern of the normal electric accessory, a dominant scene such as the enemy character 3 attacking once or multiple times is displayed, and the next normal symbol is displayed. During the hit fluctuation related to the hit and the opening / closing pattern of the normal electric accessory, the scene where the ally character attacks and wins (the ordinary electric accessory becomes long open) or the enemy character attacks and the ally character is defeated. It is also possible to display the scene to be played (normally the electric accessory is short-opened). In other words, if the ally character's dominant result is displayed in the first variation (when it is a hit of a normal symbol that becomes a long open), it develops in the latter half of the battle production with the second variation enemy character 3, and the second variation enemy The expectation of the battle production with the character 3 is higher than that of the enemy character 4 (although it is the highest expectation, there is a slight possibility that the type of the hit symbol of the normal symbol will be short-opened). It can also be configured.

<Characteristic 7 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 7, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment suggests whether or not the ordinary electric accessory is opened for a long time by hitting the ordinary symbol during the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the specific gaming state. It is configured to perform normal symbol variation effects (battle effect, music effect, special effect, etc.), and in a specific normal symbol variation effect (battle effect with enemy character 3), it is more normal due to the current normal symbol hit. It is suggested that the electric accessory will be open for a long time and that the normal electric accessory will be open for a long time by the next hit of the ordinary symbol.

Thus, in feature 7 of the fourth embodiment,
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710, P906) and
The second start winning opening (for example, the second starting winning device (P908)) and
Acting ports (for example, Fuzu operating port 1 (P904), Fuzu operating port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information when the ball enters the operating port, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the large winning opening, and
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of a game, an effect display unit that can display an effect (for example, an effect display device P80), and
It is equipped with a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control CPU) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A third winning / failing determination means for executing a third winning / failing determination based on a third lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A third hold control means that holds the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third hit / fail determination.
Auxiliary symbol determination means for determining the stop symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary symbol display unit based on the auxiliary symbol lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state) in which a game ball is easily changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state by the ball entry variation means.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed by the sub-control unit to the sub-control unit.
The game information transmitting means can transmit the game information related to the third lottery value and the auxiliary symbol lottery value held by the third holding control means to the sub-control unit before the start of the variable display of the auxiliary identification information related to the third lottery value. Is configured in
The sub-control unit
Equipped with a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main control unit,
As a special game, when the first special game (for example, a big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the first hit, and the result of the second hit / miss judgment is the second hit. A second special game (for example, a small hit) that can be executed, and a third special game (for example, a small hit → a specific area passage → a big hit) that can be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area after the second special game is executed. ) And
As the specific gaming state, it has at least a first specific gaming state and a second specific gaming state having different advantages for the player.
The sub-control unit
A normal symbol variation effect (for example) for showing whether or not the ball entry variation means becomes an advantageous opening pattern based on the third lottery value and the auxiliary symbol lottery value during the deviation variation of the first identification symbol in the specific game state. , Battle production, music production, special production, etc.) can be displayed on the production display section.
When a specific result (for example, winning a battle) is obtained in a specific normal symbol variation effect (for example, a battle effect with an enemy character 3), based on the stop symbol displayed on the auxiliary identification information display unit. It is a gaming machine that suggests that the ball entry variation means has an advantageous opening pattern and that the ball entry variation means has an advantageous opening pattern based on the stop symbol displayed thereafter on the auxiliary identification information display unit. There is.

(Example of display screen during the jackpot end demo in the 4th embodiment)
Next, FIG. 60 is an example of a display screen during the jackpot end demonstration in the fourth embodiment. (A) is when there is no hold of the second special symbol, and (b) is when there is hold of the second special symbol.

<< (a) When there is no hold of the second special symbol >>
First, the case where the second special symbol is not held will be described. As described above, when the easy entry state (time saving state) is given after the big hit game is completed, the mode shifts to the stock mode (or the extra stock mode). Here, the case of shifting to the stock mode will be described. When the mode shifts to the stock mode, the same screen as in FIG. 49 is displayed. Since the big hit end demonstration is in progress here, the fluctuation of the production design has stopped.

<< (b) When there is a hold for the second special symbol >>
Next, the case where the second special symbol is on hold will be described. If there is a hold of the second special symbol at the end of the big hit, the stock mode will not be entered after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit game with the second special symbol (including the small hit + the big hit game by passing through a specific area) will be performed immediately. Since it will be started, the number of holdings of the second special symbol will be displayed during the big hit end demo time. Here, three "V" s are displayed, indicating that there are three pending numbers of the second special symbol. In addition, although the image of the ally character is displayed in the background, this is the stock mode displayed when the hold of the normal symbol is acquired in the out-of-order fluctuation of the first special symbol in the easy entry state (time saving state). It is substantially the same as the image display of the ally character displayed on the V-stock result screen (the effect screen for notifying the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol).

In this way, even in different situations such as when the normal symbol is held (there is a hold) and when there is a special symbol hold, by displaying the same image, whether or not there is a hold now. It is configured so that the player can easily recognize the image.

When the big hit end demo time elapses, a special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is performed, a variable display (about 6 seconds) of the effect symbol P802 according to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and the effect symbol P802 is displayed. The stop display suggests the type of jackpot (small hit V) to be executed thereafter. For example, when the "7" symbol or the "3" symbol is stopped and displayed, 8 rounds of big hit (small hit V) are executed, and when other symbols are stopped and displayed, 4 rounds are executed. It is suggested that the big hit (small hit V) is easy to be executed.

Even when the symbols other than the "7" symbol and the "3 symbol" are stopped and displayed, the small hit V is executed even when the specific area P910 is passed during the small hit game. During the period for notifying (the demo period for starting the operation of the continuous differential device), it is possible to execute a promotion effect to notify that the bonus for 8 rounds is suddenly executed from the display of the bonus screen suggesting 4 rounds. Has been done.

<Feature 8 in the fourth embodiment>
As feature 8, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment is configured so that the effect content displayed during the end demonstration of the jackpot game generated after the stock mode differs depending on whether or not the second special symbol is held. ..

Thus, in feature 8 of the fourth embodiment,
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710, P906) and
The second start winning opening (for example, the second starting winning device (P908)) and
Acting ports (for example, Fuzu operating port 1 (P904), Fuzu operating port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information when the ball enters the operating port, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the large winning opening, and
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of a game, an effect display unit that can display an effect (for example, an effect display device P80), and
It is equipped with a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control CPU) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A third winning / failing determination means for executing a third winning / failing determination based on a third lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A third hold control means that holds the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third hit / fail determination.
Auxiliary symbol determination means for determining the stop symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary symbol display unit based on the auxiliary symbol lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state) in which a game ball is easily changed from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state by the ball entry variation means.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed by the sub-control unit to the sub-control unit.
The sub-control unit
Equipped with a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main control unit,
As a special game, the first special game that can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first hit (for example, the big hit by the first special symbol) and the execution when the result of the second hit / miss judgment is the second hit. A second special game that can be executed (for example, a small hit by the second special symbol) and a third special game that can be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area after the second special game is executed (for example, by the second special symbol). It has a small hit → passing through a specific area → a big hit) and a fourth special game (for example, a big hit with a second special symbol) that can be executed when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the fourth hit.
The effect displayed on the effect display unit during the end period of the third special game or the end period of the fourth special game becomes a different gaming machine depending on whether or not the second lottery value is reserved by the second hold control means. There is.

(Separate notification)
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the transition of the gaming state and the display of the separate notification in the first time saving state will be described. The upper figure shows the main control display device P50 and the right-handed indicator light P56, and in the lower figure, "1" indicates a gaming state or a change status of the gaming state, and "2" indicates a separate notification. In addition, it is generally recommended to hit left in the normal game state (non-time saving state) and right-handed in the time saving state, but here, the hitting is different from the hitting notification recommended in the game state. The time when the division notification is displayed will be mainly described.

<< Right-handed indicator light P56 >>
A plurality of LEDs are arranged as the main control display device P50, and as shown in FIG. 61, one LED of the main control display device P50 is a right-handed indicator lamp P56. The right-handed indicator light P56 is an LED controlled by the main control CPU. The main control CPU turns on the right-handed indicator lamp P56 when giving a right-handed instruction as a display indicating the launch area of the game ball recommended to the player, and when giving a left-handed instruction as a separate notification. Turn off the right-handed indicator light P56. Mainly, the right-handed indicator light P56 is turned on during the execution of the special game or in the specific game state (in the fourth embodiment, the ball entry easy state).

《Fluctuation of the first special symbol off》
First, a case where the first special symbol is out of alignment and fluctuates will be described. If the first special symbol is out of alignment, the time saving state is terminated at the start of the symbol fixing time as described above. At this time, while the easy entry state, which is the specific game state, is terminated, the right-handed instruction is given as a separate notification. This is a second start winning device arranged in the right area P501R by opening the ordinary electric accessory P907 based on the hit of the fourth variation of the ordinary symbol at the symbol fixed time and launching a game ball into the right area P501R. This is because there is a possibility of entering the ball on P908. That is, in the operating period of the ordinary electric accessory P907 in which the operation pattern is set when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed as a hit symbol in the easy-to-enter state, the ordinary electric accessory after the start of the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol Since the object P907 will be short-opened or long-opened, there is a possibility that the hold of the second special symbol can be obtained, so that the right-handed instruction is given.

Then, if there is no hold of the second special symbol at the end of the symbol fixing time, the left-handed instruction is given.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol is held at the end of the symbol fixing time, it is in a non-time saving state, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively short (example: about 6 seconds), and the second special symbol is immediately placed. 2 Since the hit game with the special symbol is started, it is configured to give a right-handed instruction. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, since the delay mechanism P902 is arranged in the right side region P501R, the gaming ball launched at the end of the symbol fixing time (at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol) wins a big prize. It takes about the same time as or longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to reach the mouth P909, and even if the game ball is fired at the end of the fixed time in the easy-to-enter state, the big winning mouth P909 This is because it is considered that there is little disadvantage to the player because there is a possibility of entering the ball.

<< 1st special symbol hit variation] >>
Next, a case where the first special symbol is a hit variation will be described. When the first special symbol is a hit variation, the time saving state is terminated at the start of the symbol fixing time, and a right-handed instruction is given as a separate notification. This is because the hit variation of the first special symbol started in the time saving state is relatively short (example: about 4 seconds), and the hit game by the first special symbol is started immediately, so give a right-handed instruction. It is configured to do. After that, a right-handed instruction is given although it is in a non-time saving state until the hit game of the first special symbol is started.

When the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started by the hit fluctuation, a blackout suddenly occurs from the display during the big hit end demonstration shown in FIG. 60 (a), and the hit of the first special symbol is notified. Therefore, a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (an effect in which the decorative symbol P802 is highlighted and stopped after the blackout is released) is generated, and an effect of shifting to the jackpot game is executed. Although only the blackout effect is illustrated in this example, the jackpot of the first special symbol may be notified by another effect method.

<< 2nd special symbol small hit fluctuation >>
Next, a case where the second special symbol is a small hit variation will be described. When the second special symbol is a small hit variation, the time saving state is terminated at the start of the symbol fixing time, and a right-handed instruction is given as a separate notification. This is because the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol started in the time saving state is relatively short (example: about 6 seconds), and the small hit game by the second special symbol is started immediately, so right-handed. It is configured to give instructions. After that, a right-handed instruction is given although it is in a non-time saving state until the small hit game of the second special symbol is started.

《Fluctuation per 2nd special symbol》
Next, a case where the second special symbol is a hit variation will be described. When the second special symbol is a hit variation, the time saving state is terminated at the start of the symbol fixing time, and a right-handed instruction is given as a separate notification. This is because the hit variation of the second special symbol started in the short time state is relatively short (example: about 6 seconds), and the hit game by the second special symbol is started immediately, so give a right-handed instruction. It is configured to do. After that, a right-handed instruction is given although it is in a non-time saving state until the hit game of the second special symbol is started.

<Characteristic 9 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 9, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment acquires the hold of the normal symbol while the first special symbol is out of alignment in the easy-to-enter state (time saving state), and further holds the second special symbol. It is a game to acquire. In the out-of-ball fluctuation of the first special symbol in the easy entry state (time reduction state), the easy entry state (time reduction state) is configured to end at the end of the fluctuation, in other words, at the end of the symbol fixing time. There is. However, if the second special symbol is held at this time, the easy entry state (time saving state) ends when the symbol fixing time ends, but the right-handed instruction is given by turning on the right-handed indicator lamp. Will be done. As a result, the game can be played without having to bother to return to the left-handed movement in the fluctuation of the second special symbol (variation in a relatively short time) started after the end of the symbol fixing time.

Thus, in feature 9 of the fourth embodiment,
A game board in which a left game area where a game ball can flow down and a right game area where a game ball can flow down are formed.
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710) provided in the left game area,
A second start winning opening (for example, a second starting winning device (P908)) provided in the right game area,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
It is equipped with a main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game.
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, an easy entry state) that is advantageous to the player, and a specific game state control means.
It is equipped with a right-handed suggestion means that suggests that the game ball should be launched into the right game area by turning on a predetermined lamp.
Right-handed suggestion means
It is configured to turn on a predetermined lamp during a special game or in a specific game state.
A game configured to be able to turn on a predetermined lamp when a hold exists in the second hold control means even in a situation where neither the special game is being executed nor the specific game state is set. It is an opportunity.

In addition, the data of the lighting data of the right-handed indicator light P56 (lighting "1" when right-handed, extinguished "0" when left-handed) should be recommended from the main control CPU to the sub-control CPU. It is also used as data to generate a command for the recommended launch position specification command (also called the launch position specification command) for specifying the position, and the recommended launch position specification command is mainly used at the start and end of fluctuations. It is transmitted to the sub-control CPU at the start of the game, at the end of the winning game, when the game state is changed, etc., and the sub-control CPU notifies the recommended firing position (for example, right-handed notification P832 or left-handed notification P834). It is used for the display control of the separate notification P830).

That is, it is indirectly understood that the effect display device P80 displays according to "2. Right-handed instruction" or "2. Left-handed instruction" shown in FIG. 61 ("2. Left-handed instruction"). Can be hidden). Further, FIG. 61 shows a table for the first time reduction variation display, but the variation display occurs in a situation where a hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol occurs after the first time reduction (stock mode). In the non-time saving (non-ball entry easy state), the variation display of the second special symbol is also the same as the "special figure 2 small hit variation" and "special figure 2 hit variation" in FIG. It is configured to run.

<Feature 10 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 10, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment has a delay mechanism (P902) → a distribution unit (P903) → a normal drawing operating port 1 (P904) → a first start winning device in order from the upstream side on the left side route as described above. 2 (P906) → normal electric accessory (P907) (and second start winning device (P908)) → large winning opening (P909) are provided in this order, and when hitting right in a specific gaming state, the normal symbol It is configured so that the game ball does not pass only through the operating port and does not enter the starting port of the first special symbol. Further, in one of the plurality of easy-to-enter states, when the game is played normally (for example, in the easy-to-enter state, an error state such as right-handed hitting or jamming does not occur. Etc.) are configured so that N (maximum number of holdings of the second special symbol) of the second special symbol can be held in the easy-to-enter state.

Thus, in feature 10 of the fourth embodiment,
A game board in which a left game area where a game ball can flow down and a right game area where a game ball can flow down are formed.
The first start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device P710) and
The second start winning opening (for example, the first starting winning device (P906)) and
With the third start winning opening (for example, the second starting winning device (P908)),
Acting ports (for example, Fuzu operating port 1 (P904), Fuzu operating port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information triggered by a ball entering the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening.
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information when the ball enters the third start winning opening, and
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information when the ball enters the operating port, and
A ball entry variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball.
It is equipped with a main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game.
The main control unit
A first winning / failing determination means for executing a first winning / failing determination based on a first lottery value acquired when a ball is entered into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the third starting winning opening.
A third winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a third lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operating port.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A third hold control means that holds the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third hit / fail determination.
Equipped with
The first start winning opening is provided in the left game area,
The right game area is provided with a second start winning opening, a third starting winning opening, an operating opening, a ball entry variable means, and a large winning opening.
In the right game area,
A distribution unit (for example, a distribution unit (P903)) that is provided on the upstream side of the second start winning opening and can move at regular intervals, and
The gaming machine is provided with a delay unit (for example, a delay mechanism (P902)) for delaying the flow of the gaming ball provided on the upstream side of the sorting device.

<Change example 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the transition to the extra stock mode after the end of the hit game is when the hit symbol that triggered the immediately preceding big hit (small hit V) hits the hit symbol that is in the easy entry state 1. Only. However, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the probability of transitioning to the easy entry state 1 (the ratio of the winning symbols that transition to the easy entry state 1) is 4%, and the extra stock mode is set. It is very rare to be controlled. In this way, if the execution trigger of the extra stock mode is only the type of the easy-to-enter ball state during the stay, the frequency with which the player enjoys the extra stock mode (the most advantageous gaming state) decreases, which may lead to a decrease in the motivation for playing. There is.

As a response to such a problem, after shifting to the stock mode (the first fluctuation of the normal symbol), the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time due to the current fluctuation of the first fluctuation of the normal symbol (operation of the ordinary electric accessory P907). And, when it is definite from the pre-judgment information of the normal symbol that all the remaining normal symbols are reserved for long opening (when four long opening is a definite situation). , Even if it is not the easy entry state 1, it may be configured to forcibly shift to the extra stock mode, or the effect of winning the transition to the extra stock mode with a high probability (for example, about 70%). It may be configured to perform an execution lottery.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to generate a large number of extra stock modes with a high expectation that a large number of balls can be obtained, and it can be expected that the player's motivation to play will be improved.

<Change example 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the aura is executed based on the information of whether or not the ordinary electric accessory P907 is long-opened based on the type of the ball entry easy state currently staying and the hit of the first fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. The configuration is determined and displayed as an effect, but the configuration is not limited to this, and whether or not the result of the normal symbol lottery for the first variation of the normal symbol (the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P907) is a long open. It may be configured to be displayed only based on.

With this configuration, the player can recognize the expectation of a long open per hold by the normal symbol hold image of the effect display device P80, and the expectation of a long open by all holds by the aura (that is, the expectation of a long open per hold). , How many times it is likely to be a long open hit) can be recognized.

Further, as another modification, the timing at which the aura changes based on the information of whether or not the normal electric accessory P907 is long-opened based on the type of the easy-to-enter state and the first change of the normal symbol is set as the normal symbol. It may be when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating port (gate) (the same timing as the normal symbol hold change fanning effect) under the situation after three hold related to the lottery are stored. That is, since the change of the normal symbol hold image may occur when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation port (gate), the aura may be configured to change according to the change of the normal symbol hold image. ..

With this configuration, the promotion of the aura effect (increased expectation) depends on the player's game (passing through the normal drawing operating ports P903 and P904), and the presence or absence of notification of the type of easy entry state is played. Can be configured to be selectable by a person. That is, it becomes possible to enjoy the production in a state where it is unclear which normal symbol hold (the second to fourth fluctuations of the normal symbol) is likely to stay in the easy-to-enter state.

<Change example 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the display pattern of "V" indicating that the second special symbol is reserved is not particularly described, but it may be configured to include a plurality of "V" display patterns. For example, two types of gold and red may be provided, and if gold is used, 8 rounds may be confirmed, and if red, 4R rich (possibly 8 rounds) may be used. In addition to this, the 4th variation of the normal symbol in stock mode (the 3rd variation of the normal symbol if the 4th variation of the normal symbol is not stopped and displayed before the transition of the symbol fixed time of the 1st special symbol) After the variable effect (battle effect) is completed, the V stock result screen in stock mode (a screen substantially similar to FIG. 60 (b)) is displayed, and then until the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol has elapsed (in other words). During the period (until the variable display of the second special symbol is started), the promotion effect of the "V" display (the effect of inciting whether or not to promote from "red" to "gold") may be performed. .. In the fourth embodiment, after the V-stock result screen is displayed, the player only waits until the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, but by providing the promotion effect, the player simply waits. The state of can be resolved. Whether or not the "V" display is promoted by the promotion effect may be determined by a lottery by the sub-control CPU each time the game ball passes through the normal drawing operation port (gate), or the effect button P381 is operated. In this case, the sub-control CPU may be determined by lottery, or may be configured to change at a fixed timing such as 5 seconds after the display of the V stock result screen.

Further, on the screen (see FIG. 60 (b)) in which the remaining stock number is notified as V on the jackpot end demo screen instead of the V stock result screen, it corresponds to the special symbol lottery of the next second special symbol. The V image, which is a V image and is displayed in red, is displayed on the jackpot end demo screen or immediately after the start of the change of the second special symbol when the next special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is 8 rounds. It can also be configured to be promoted to gold at such timings.

The effect of promoting the number of rounds due to the promotion of the V image performed on the stock result screen, the big hit end demo screen, etc. to 8 rounds (the maximum round in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 4th embodiment) is the above-mentioned small hit V. As a promotion effect that can be announced prior to the promotion effect after passing through the specific area P910, it is also possible to call it a prior notice promotion effect.

<Change example 4>
In the fourth embodiment, the effect during the stock bonus is only the jackpot movie is displayed. In such a configuration, as described in FIG. 47, after the start of the stock bonus, the big hit is repeated until the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol disappears, but the big hit is a game effect during the big hit. There is a risk that the production will be monotonous as the movie is repeated. Therefore, by executing a battle effect or other mission effect that can notify the success or failure of the stock bonus related to the final hold of the second special symbol, it is configured to suggest the type of easy entry state after the big hit game is completed. You may. When the stock bonus related to the final hold of the second special symbol is used as a special jackpot effect pattern in this way, only when there are two or more holds to avoid the possibility that the normal jackpot movie cannot be viewed. , The final hold stock bonus may be configured to perform an effect suggesting an easy entry state after the end of the big hit game.

As a result, for example, if the battle effect is won, the player enters the extra stock mode (easy entry state 1) after the big hit, and if the battle effect is defeated, the stock mode (easy entry state 2 and 3) is entered after the big hit. Can be configured as follows. The reward at the time of success of the production may not be success = extra stock mode (easy entry state 1), but success = chance stock mode or higher (easy entry state 1 or easy entry state 2). These rewards may be set differently depending on the opponent of the battle effect (for example, success = easy entry state 1 for enemy character A, success = easy entry state 1 or easy entry state 2 for enemy character B). Etc.).

In addition, for players who want to play without being suggested by the type of easy-to-enter ball in stock mode, it is possible to cancel the battle production based on the production custom in advance and the operation of the production operation means P380 at the start of the production. It may be configured.

It should be noted that the effect suggesting the easy entry state (stock mode, extra stock mode) after the end of the big hit is not limited to the time during the big hit game. For example, it may be executed during the change of the final hold of the second special symbol, and when the change display of the final hold of the second special symbol is performed, the change display of the effect symbol P802 corresponding to the change display of the special symbol and the opponent character You may execute the decision-introduction effect of the stock bonus (battle effect).

In this way, when the fluctuation display of the final hold of the second special symbol is used to encourage the determination of the opponent character, the fluctuation time of about 6 seconds as in the fourth embodiment may not be sufficient. Only when the number of reserved 2nd special symbols is 1, the variation pattern table may be switched so that the variation time of the big hit (small hit) of the 2nd special symbol becomes the variation pattern of 15 seconds. By making the symbol fixing time about 9 seconds longer than usual (variable time 6 seconds) according to the number of holdings, the change display of the second special symbol can be changed to a special game (big hit or small hit). It is also possible to configure the control market price until the transition to be long and to secure the production time.

In addition, when taking measures to secure such a production time, even if only one is held for the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the stock mode (a situation where the battle production is not generated during the big hit). Since a similar effect scale is generated, an alternative effect to be executed in such a case may be prepared. For example, promotion of V image corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol stocked only once (V image can be promoted from red to gold only when the stocked hold is per 8 rounds. V The image may be configured to be promoted (changed to gold). In addition, this promotion fanning does not fan the type of big hit (small hit), but it is in an easy-to-enter state that shifts after the big hit (small hit V) executed by holding the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol stocked. When the display suggests the type, for example, the hold is related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that shifts to the easy entry state 1, the V image changes to rainbow color to shift to the extra stock mode. The effect display to be confirmed may be executed as a notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, during the stock mode (one deviation change of the first special symbol), the ordinary symbol lottery (operation of the ordinary electric accessory P907) is performed up to four times (the special symbol of the second special symbol). The maximum number of holdable items related to the lottery) can be held, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is short (100 ms), and the operation time of the normal electric accessory P907 is long. By doing so, the operation of the normal electric accessory P907 of the first variation of the normal symbol immediately after the start of the stock mode immediately after the end of the big hit is accelerated, and the fifth and subsequent ordinary symbol lottery in the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol is performed. It was configured to be executed in a non-ball entry easy state.

As a modification, the variation display time of the normal symbol in the easy-to-enter state is configured to be long (47 seconds when the short is opened, 42 seconds when the long is opened), and the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P907 is configured as one opening. It may be good (0.04s when the short is open, 5.0s when the long is open). In the case of such a configuration, the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P907 should be set in advance according to the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol won at the start of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, not at the time when the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is stopped. It is preferable to do. In the case of such a design, in the non-ball entry easy state, the fluctuation time is 0.1 s regardless of which winning symbol is won, and the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory P907 is only short-open.

In this configuration, when the variation effect of the effect symbol P802 corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol (operation of the ordinary electric accessory P907) such as the battle effect is executed as in the fourth embodiment, It is not necessary to use 6 LEDs of the normal symbol display device P53, which is a measure to prevent the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P907 by the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 in the main control display device P50. It is only necessary to arrange two LEDs that can display three types of hit symbols, and it is possible to prepare LEDs for other game displays, and it is thought that it is possible to enhance game playability other than stock mode.

<Modified example for measures against illegal games related to the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, as shown in FIG. 46, the delay mechanism P902 and the distribution unit P903 are arranged upstream of the first start winning device 2P906 to avoid winning the first start winning device 2P906. It is difficult to play a game aiming only at the normal drawing opening 2P905, the second starting winning device P908, and the large winning opening P909.

More specifically, when a game ball is launched toward the right side area P501R of the game area P501 for 20 to 30 seconds, one ball is configured to win a prize in the first start winning device 2P906, and the big hit game is digested. Therefore, when the game ball is launched toward the right area P501R, at least one hold related to the first special symbol lottery is generated by winning the first start winning device 2P906 during the big hit game, and the stock. It is configured to start stock mode (or extra stock mode) immediately after the end of the bonus.

However, if a malicious player commits some kind of fraudulent act against the sorting device P903 and the fraudulent game is performed so as to hinder the winning of the first starting winning device 2P906, the first special symbol is performed. Because the fluctuation display of is not performed, the easy entry state does not end, a situation occurs that continues indefinitely, and an illegal game can be played so that the normal symbol lottery can be received 4 times or more, which is the design value. It ends up.

If such an illegal game is performed, it will be possible to receive the normal symbol lottery until the normal symbol that will be open for a long time in the normal symbol lottery is won, and as a result, the hold related to the second special symbol lottery will always be held. There is a risk that a state that can be acquired will be created illegally.

Therefore, as a modification of the fourth embodiment, adoption of any of the following measures against illegal games can be considered.

(Countermeasure 1)
First, as a countermeasure against fraud, it is conceivable to provide a limiter function (hereinafter referred to as "time saving limiter") for the continuation of the easy entry state.

In the "time saving limiter", when a big hit (small hit V) occurs continuously during a period in which it is easy to enter the ball, a big hit (small hit V) occurs continuously for the same number of times as the number of judgments defined as the limiter. In this case, it is a function to control so as not to forcibly generate the easy-to-enter state that was planned to occur after the big hit (small hit V).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the well-meaning player who normally plays the game ends the easy entry state when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the stock mode, is executed. At the time of occurrence of the big hit (small hit V), the easy entry state has ended, and the counter value related to the operation of the limiter function is controlled to be reset.

In the case of such a configuration, the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which the easy entry state ends at the start of the hit variation, so that the hit variation occurs in the easy entry state. When is started, it is preferable not to clear the counter related to the operation of the "time saving limiter", but to configure the counter value to be continuously counted as it is due to the occurrence of a big hit (small hit V). ..

With this configuration, a malicious player forcibly keeps the ball easy to enter, waits for the long opening winning by the normal symbol lottery, and holds the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol. If you repeat to acquire the hit and forcibly acquire the hit fluctuation, the "time saving limiter" will occur, and you will be able to forcibly end the easy entry state and shift to the normal game state. (In the case of an illegal game method that does not display the fluctuation of the first special symbol, a big hit (small hit V) is immediately performed by the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs. ) Is generated, there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol after the big hit game, and the easy entry state due to the illegal game is surely ended).

In the case of the "time saving limiter" of the countermeasure 1, it is preferable to set the number of determinations for the operation of the limiter to a small number of about 7 to 8 times. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, even if a well-meaning player is playing normally, the stock bonus may be repeated four times in a row, and the subsequent lottery of the first special symbol is rarely a big hit. In consideration of this, the number of judgments is set to the extent that the easy entry state ends in a highly accidental situation where the big hits are consecutive about 3 to 4 times by the lottery of the first special symbol after the start of the stock mode. There is.

(Countermeasure 2)
Next, the second countermeasure will be described. The second countermeasure is the end condition of the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment as the end condition of the easy entry state (at the end of the change of the first special symbol or at the start of the hit change of the special symbol). In addition to this, there is an example of adding "when the normal symbol lottery is carried out N times (N is 4 times in this example)".

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment to which the countermeasure 2 is applied, even if a malicious player illegally repeats the ordinary symbol lottery, the well-meaning player plays the stock mode as usual. As in the case of doing this, you can only receive the normal symbol lottery four times, so you can eliminate the effect of cheating.

When such a countermeasure is taken, it is configured so that the easy-to-enter state can always be ended by four times of the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, the "first special" which is the end condition of the easy-to-enter state in the fourth embodiment. It is also possible to configure so that the end condition such as "when the variable display of the symbol ends" is not set.

When the countermeasure 2 is applied, as in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the time of the deviation of the first special symbol, the variation of the ordinary symbol, and the operation time of the ordinary electric accessory are set in four cycles. It is not necessary to adjust it so that it fits in the minute, it is also possible to set the deviation time of the first special symbol longer and configure the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery so that various patterns can be selected over a long time. Become.
(However, it is necessary to set the control time (variable time and fixed symbol time) of the first special symbol only for the time that the maximum time of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol + the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory P907 can be accommodated four times. .)

In this way, by configuring the variation time of the normal symbol so that various patterns can be selected from a short time to a long time, the variation effect of the normal symbol is the same as the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol in the normal gaming state, and the normal reach. It is possible to display the content of the effect that has a difference in the time of the variable effect such as SP reach and SP reach, and the time to notify about the hit or miss of the normal symbol is given by the type of the displayed effect and the composite pattern with the notice effect. Can be created.

In addition, when the easy-to-enter state is always completed by the number of lottery of the normal symbol as in the countermeasure 2, the variable display time can be configured to be long, so that the symbol is normally stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device P53. It is not always necessary to execute the variable effect related to the result of the normal symbol lottery during the operating time of the electric accessory P907, and all or large of the variable effect of the normal symbol during the period when the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device P53. Since it is possible to display the part and it is not necessary to stop and display the normal symbol in advance, the pattern that is out of the normal symbol without setting the hit probability of the normal symbol to 100% as in the fourth embodiment. Can also be prepared. Furthermore, when it is cut off that there is a gap in the normal symbol lottery, instead of making a difference in the presence or absence of the open extension function of the hit symbol of the normal symbol for the type of easy entry state, only the normal symbol that is a hit of 1 is selected. It is also possible to adopt specifications (see FIG. 43, etc.) in which the hit probability differs depending on the easy-to-enter state.

[Fifth Example]
Subsequently, the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment is a production control technique applied to a pachinko gaming machine that employs a small hit V as in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, and more specifically, a special symbol that is a small hit game. When a specific reach is executed as a variable effect in the variable display of, by executing the afterglow effect after the hit notification of the reach effect across the small hit game, the period of the hit afterglow effect is a special game (small hit). It is a technology that can be assigned to and can prevent the fluctuation time of special symbols from becoming too long.

Hereinafter, the effect control content of the specific reach effect of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. Here, FIGS. 62 and 63 show production time charts when a small hit game is won in a specific reach or a non-specific reach (reach production other than the specific reach) of the pachinko gaming machine, respectively, and FIG. 64 shows the non-specific. An effect display example showing the flow of the effect display of the reach effect is shown, and FIG. 65 shows an effect control example regarding the execution time of the afterglow effect, which is a feature point of the fifth embodiment.

The playability (specs) and game state transition (game flow) of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment are any specifications as long as they adopt the small hit V (small hit development big hit). However, in the description of the fifth embodiment, the same game playability and game state transition (see FIG. 21) as in the present embodiment will be described.

(Direction time chart of specific reach)
First, with reference to FIG. 62, the content of the variation effect in the variation display in which the specific reach is executed in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment will be described. In this explanation, the specific production of the specific reach effect and the process leading up to the reach effect are omitted because they are the production contents that can be set appropriately, but as an example, the specific reach is omitted. Is a character reach with one (or two, three, etc.) of the main character and multiple heroine characters as the main heroine, and a reach production pattern with multiple execution patterns for the number of multiple heroines or for the number of people or more. Is to be executed as.

In FIG. 62, (a) in the figure simply shows a control state of a special symbol and a special electric accessory on the main control board P40 (main control CPU). In the figure, (b) shows an outline of the state of the effect (contents of the effect being executed) controlled by the effect control board P41 (effect control CPU). FIG. (C) describes a typical part of the effect content executed by the effect display device P80, and FIGS. (D) and (e) are characteristic of the effect execution timing of FIG. (C). Lamp control and sound control (voice, BGM, sound effect control) are shown. The following detailed explanation will be given for each effect period shown in (b) in the figure.

<< Production control during reach-afterglow production (start) >>
First, in the effect time chart during the specific reach of FIG. 62, an effect example from the execution of the reach effect to the start of the afterglow effect, which is the effect period shown at the start time, will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the effect period immediately after the start of the reach effect and the afterglow effect is the execution period of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol or the fixed time of the symbol of the special symbol.

In the production period immediately after the start of the reach effect and the afterglow effect, the following four points are executed as the main effects constituting the feature points of the fifth embodiment.

"Winning branch of reach effect" is the period during which the reach effect is executed in the execution process of the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery, and is the effect of the effect period for notifying whether or not it is a big hit. .. In the fifth embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381, effect lever P382), it is determined that the special symbol lottery this time is a win (small hit or big hit) or a miss (not shown). It is an effect that suggests switching to the effect to be notified (an effect that can be said to be an "operation input effect" when prompting an effect input). In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the effecting object P560, which will be described later, is evacuated. It is also possible to capture the timing of "evacuation of production role + stop of decorative design" as a winning branch effect.

The "effect action + effect action effect" is input when the player performs an input operation to the effect operation unit P380 or to the effect operation unit P380 during the period of the above-mentioned "winning branch of the reach effect". It is an effect of a period to be shifted when a predetermined period (for example, an operation valid period of the effect operation unit P380) has elapsed without the operation being performed. Specifically, the motion effect of the effect display device P560 that moves forward in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 and the reach effect on almost the entire screen of the effect display device P80 in order to enhance the operation effect of the effect display device P80. This is the production period for displaying the effect images that are displayed in layers.

"Evacuation of effect object + stop of decorative symbol" is a predetermined evacuation position (other than the initial position which is the first standby position) after the effect operation such as the initial position of the effect object P560 which has advanced to the front of the display area of the effect display device P80. In addition, another position such as the second standby position may be used as the evacuation position), and at the same time as the effect P560 moves, the image displayed as the effect of the effect is whitened out. After that, the image is gradually transmitted and the result image of the reach effect (may be a lingering effect described later) is configured to be visible. In the fifth embodiment, when the result image of the reach effect is displayed, the decorative symbol P801 is in a state of being stopped (temporarily stopped) at the third doublet, and is in a short time of about 1 second. After making the inter-decorative symbol P801 visible to the player, the decorative symbol P801 is made smaller and retracted to the corner of the screen, and the "afterglow effect" is started.

Next, there is a "afterglow effect" that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol or during the fixed time of the symbol of the special symbol. The "afterglow effect" at this timing is the "afterglow effect" that is executed during the small hit game described later. In order to display the reach effect as a series of flows, the effect of the effect display device P80 is executed as a short-time effect of about 0.5 seconds for the purpose of switching to the background image of the "afterglow effect" in advance. In the "afterglow effect" performed after the start of the small hit game, various effect displays are executed in addition to the background image, and the details thereof will be described later.

The contents of the lamp effect and the sound effect during the effect period of "during reach-afterglow effect (start)" of FIG. 62 will be described.

Regarding the lamp production and sound production during the production period of "during reach-afterglow production (start)", there is no difference from the reach production of conventional gaming machines, and there are no special features. Regarding the lamp effect and sound effect during the effect period of "during reach-afterglow effect (start)", the effect lamp P82 (board lamp P550) is matched with the reach effect displayed on the effect display device P80 and the operation of the effect character P560. The frame lamp P350) emits light, and the speaker P83 (curtain plate speaker P141, upper speaker P371) produces sound.

<< Production control in lingering production >>
Next, the content of the effect control will be described with respect to the "afterglow effect" period, which is the effect period during the small hit game, which is a feature of the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the period is a period during the small hit game. More specifically, it is a period during which the special electric accessory control process based on the small hit is executed on the main control board P40 (main control CPU), the small hit start demo period, and the small hit round game (unit game). It is a period controlled by the execution period, the small hit end demo period, and the like.

The specific content of the “afterglow effect” is shown in FIG. 62 (c).

When the small hit game is started, we congratulate the player that he has won a hit (small hit) by saying "Congratulations!" To the "afterglow production" that started from the fixed time of the symbol while the special symbol is changing. A message (blessing message P879) is displayed. At the same time, as a lingering effect, a story effect corresponding to the content of the reach effect progresses. As mentioned above, since the reach production is composed of the character reach in which the story develops with the main character and the heroine character, the story production (later talk, etc.) that follows the process up to the winning branch production is developed. In addition, the story production is continuously displayed until the start time of the round notification production during the big hit start demo period (role continuous operation start demo period) described later, and 5 seconds or more in consideration of the digestion speed of the player's small hit game. It is composed of a relatively short production mode of about 10 seconds. If the round notification effect is started in the middle of the "afterglow effect", the round notification effect is started without waiting for the completion of the "afterglow effect", and the small hit game continues even at the end time of the "afterglow effect". Stops and displays the final image of the "afterglow effect" and puts it on standby.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the right to execute the jackpot game is given to the player at the same time as the start of the “afterglow effect” on the effect display device P80 (the display of “Congratulations!” Starts). In order to obtain the game, a "specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the specific area P760 provided inside the large winning opening P750 is displayed superimposed on the story effect. The "specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" is an effect displayed on the effect display device P80 during the small hit game period in the non-specific reach, "specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" (details will be described later). The area occupying the display area of the effect display device P80 is smaller than that of), and the visibility is reduced so as not to obstruct the content of the story effect as much as possible.

The "specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" and the "specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" are the effects of the separate notification P830 (recommended launch position notification) that informs the player of the recommended launch position. Characters such as "Aim for V!" And "Aim for the big winning opening!" And an image imitating the big winning opening P751 are displayed on the effect display device P80.

Further, during the "afterglow effect" period, when the player plays a small hit game and the game ball passes through the specific area P760 provided inside the large winning opening P751, the "specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" The display ends, and "V winning effect (small)" is displayed. In the "V winning effect (small)", the player plays a small hit game, and the passage of the game ball to the specific area P760 provided inside the large winning opening P751 is detected, that is, the player is a big hit. It is a production to notify that the execution right has been acquired normally.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, during the "afterglow production" period, the player is configured to recognize the production display of the production content of the story production to enhance the interest, so that the "V prize production" is produced. "(Small)" is preferably configured to be inconspicuous like "Specific area launch promotion effect (Small) P838", and "Specific area launch promotion effect" so that it is easy to confirm that a prize has been generated for the specific area P760. It is displayed at almost the same position as "(Small) P838" (near the position where "Specific area launch promotion effect (Small) P838" was displayed), and "V prize effect (Small)" is displayed as "Specific area launch promotion effect (Small) P838". Small) By making the occupied area of the display area in the effect display device P80 smaller than that of "P838", the visibility of the story effect can be further improved.

Subsequently, the feature points of the lamp effect and the sound effect during the effect period of the “afterglow effect” in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 (d) and 62 (e).

First, the lamp effect during the "afterglow effect" is characterized in that at least two lamp effects are executed at the same time.

As one of the lamp effects during the "afterglow effect" period, the "rainbow-colored light emission effect (also referred to as" hit notification light emission effect ")" that continuously emits light from the time of executing the hit branch effect corresponds. The "rainbow-colored light emission effect" is an effect of causing the effect lamp P82 (board lamp P550 or frame lamp P350) to emit light in rainbow colors in order to notify the player that a hit has been obtained. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, at least the frame lamp P350 emits rainbow colors to execute the effect. Although rainbow-colored light emission is given as an example in this description, it does not have to be rainbow-colored light-emitting as long as it notifies a hit, and the light-emitting part that emits rainbow-colored light is a frame lamp P350 or a board lamp P350. In the other light emitting unit, which is assigned to a part of the light emitting unit, a light emitting effect corresponding to the story effect, a light emitting effect corresponding to the winning of the large winning opening P751 during the small hit game, and the like may be appropriately executed.

Another light emission effect of the lamp effect during the "afterglow effect" is a light emission effect corresponding to the "specific area emission promotion effect (small) P838", which is referred to as "guided light emission notification P839". The "guided light emission notification P839" is a production lamp provided on the center and right side of the production lamp P82 (board lamp P550 or frame lamp P350) from the production lamp P82 provided on the left side of the pachinko gaming machine P or the game area P501. By displaying lighting (for example, emitting light in white) so as to flow in order toward P82, it is notified that the game ball should be launched toward the large winning opening P751 provided in the right area P501R of the game area P501. It is a lamp production. The "guided light emission notification P839" can repeat the termination of light emission based on the "guided light emission notification P839" a plurality of times after a certain period of time has elapsed from the timing when each of the effect lamps P82 starts lighting (for example, repeating three times or repeating). The configuration is such that during the small hit game, or until the V prize effect (small) is executed, etc.), and when the "guided light emission notification P839" is completed, the light emission effect that is executed at the same time, for example, the above-mentioned It is configured so that the "rainbow-colored light emission" and other directing light emission can be visually recognized.

That is, the "guided light emission notification P839" is set to have a high priority as a light emission effect of the effect lamp P82 among the light emission effects that can be executed as a normal effect, except for the light emission effect for notifying a special situation such as an error. ing.

Next, regarding the sound production during the production period of the "afterglow production", in the sound production during the period, the BGM, the voice (line), and the sound effect in the story production are output with the highest audibility (for example, the volume is high). It is configured to output the largest).

During the period when the story production is being executed, there was a sound effect (winning sound) notifying that the game ball was won in the large winning opening P751 and the passing of the game ball to the specific area P760 when the small hit game was executed. It is possible to output a V winning sound or the like to notify the player, but a sound effect for notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening P751 in the small hit game executed when a small hit is made due to a non-specific reach or the like ( The volume is set lower than that of the winning sound), or the sound is not output. From the timing before the end of the story production or the end of the story production is almost fixed, the volume of the sound effect (winning sound) that informs the large winning opening P751 that the game ball has won is raised, or the sound of the sound is increased. It may be configured to improve audibility by starting output. In addition, the V winning sound and the sound effect for notifying that the V winning effect (small) is started are audio outputs of about 0.5 seconds, and are temporary, so that the story effect is produced. It may be configured to have higher audibility than BGM, voice, etc. (increase the volume or output a small sound with a high pitch).

In addition, during the period when the story production of "afterglow production" is being executed, the player forgets to launch the game ball toward the big winning opening P751 because the small hit game is in progress. A situation that is presumed to be present (for example, a situation after about 10 seconds have passed since the start of the story production and all the lines of the character have been output, or in the case of a long story production, a small hit game regardless of the progress. When a certain amount of time has passed since the start of the game), a game ball is fired toward the big winning opening P751 and a warning is issued to cause the game ball to pass through the specific area P760. It may be configured to run. Since it is considered that "calling attention to avoid big hit loss" should be prioritized over the story production, the player's performance display device P80, the production lamp P82, and the speaker P83 have priority over the above-mentioned production content. Directing in a manner with high distinctiveness and audibility (for example, an image imitating the big winning opening P751 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the light emitting part provided in the big winning device P750 is highlighted in white or the like to emit light with white or the like. It is preferable to execute a dialogue voice such as "Aim for" from the speaker P83).

<< Production control in round notification production >>
Then, as the designer intended, the big hit start demo (roles) that shifts to the case where the small hit game ends in the situation where the player passes the game ball to the specific area P760 (V prize is won). Operation start demo) We will explain the effect control related to the "round notification effect" period of the effect period corresponding to the period.

The "round notification effect" is the same effect as the "big hit type notification effect" (see FIG. 26) described in this embodiment, and the stop display mode (small hit) of the special symbol that triggered the start of the small hit game. It is executed for the purpose of notifying the number of rounds of the big hit executed as the small hit V (small hit development big hit) according to the symbol). In the technique of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 26, the type of the big hit effect selected is different depending on whether or not there is a small hit (big hit) in the hold. However, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the production is basically composed of productions that notify different types of jackpot productions depending on the difference in the number of rounds, such as whether it is a 10-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot. (In some cases, the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment may also notify the hit in the hold as in the present embodiment).

As an example of the execution mode of the "round notification effect", an object described as "HYPER_BIG_BONUS (10 rounds)", "BIG_BONUS (7 rounds)", "BONUS (4 rounds)" or the like circulates around the character. , An example is given in which a character selects one object from among them to notify the type of jackpot to be executed. The number of rounds described in this explanation is the number of rounds converted from the small hit game as the first round. For example, when "HYPER_BIG_BONUS (10 rounds)" is notified, 9 during the big hit game. It means that a round game (unit game) is performed.

The "round notification effect" is not limited to this example, and has a plurality of patterns of effects including characters and selection methods, and is executed as a "round notification effect" depending on the degree of profit of the jackpot to be executed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation of the effect is different, or the notification method can be switched by the player's effect customization or effect selection.

Further, in the light emitting effect and the sound effect on the effect lamp P82 and the speaker P83 during the effect period of the "round notification effect", the light emission effect and the sound effect corresponding to the "round notification effect" are appropriately executed.

<< Production control in jackpot round production >>
Finally, as an effect control when a small hit is achieved in a specific reach, an effect control during a period in which the big hit game is being executed will be described.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the production during the period in which the "big hit round effect" is executed is the same as the general pachinko gaming machine P, in which the effect of reproducing the movie effect is executed as the basic effect. There is.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, the following effects may be executed in a specific round during the small hit game.
(1) Reservation Uchirenso fanning production (executable time: 3rd round, big hit end demo)
(2) Promotion of the number of rounds (executable time: big hit start demo, 4th round, 7th round)
(3) Time saving promotion production (executable time: 10th round)
It should be noted that these effects do not necessarily occur at the time (timing) that can be executed, and the timings that can be executed at the same time are set for a plurality of effects, not limited to the above-mentioned feasible time. , Which effect may be executed may be determined by lottery or whether or not the executable condition is satisfied (in the case where the enablement condition of a plurality of effects is satisfied at the same time, a predetermined priority).

The production of the in-suspended villa fanning is related to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbol held during the execution of the jackpot game (in particular, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that is the main body of the game in the easy-to-enter state). It is an effect to notify whether or not there is a "hit" hold in the hold). In addition, the continuous villa fanning effect in the hold informs that there is a hold (small hit, big hit) in the hold by the special symbol lottery by displaying the success mode of the effect, but it is special in the hold. Even if there is a hold that is a hit (small hit, big hit) by the symbol lottery, the failure mode can be displayed, and even if the hold inner consecutive villa fanning effect is displayed in the failure mode. Is also configured to have the potential to be a hit within the hold. In addition, when the playability of the small hit V is adopted as in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, there is a high probability that the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol will be a hit. It is also configured to display the success mode multiple times and notify that a plurality of hits are in the hold.

The round number promotion effect is actually carried out on the main control board P40 (main control CPU) after "BIG_BONUS (7 rounds)" and "BONUS (4 rounds)" are announced in a dramatic manner during the big hit start demo period. The big hit rounds are 7 rounds and 10 rounds, and it is a production to notify that the jackpot will shift to a jackpot with a higher profit level than the current jackpot production. As the execution time, the execution time is set during the execution of the "round notification effect" of the big hit start demo, and the 4th and 7th rounds corresponding to the final round of each big hit effect.

In the time reduction promotion effect, the number of times the ball is set to the easy entry state (time reduction state) after the big hit of the small hit V is, for example, 6 times or 95 times (see FIG. 21) as in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. In the case of having a small hit (big hit), when the number of easy entry states is 95 times, an effect of notifying that the easy entry state is 95 times during the big hit game can be exemplified. As a more specific example, there is an example of switching (promoting) to an effect of notifying that the next small hit is substantially confirmed, such as "TWIN_BONUS" of this embodiment.

Regarding the light emission effect and sound effect of the lamp P82 and the speaker P83 during the effect period of the "big hit round effect", the execution modes of the above-mentioned big hit round effect ("movie playback", "holding in-house consecutive villa fanning effect", "promotion of the number of rounds" "Direction", "Time reduction number promotion effect", etc.) are performed.

(Specific reach production time chart_transformation example)
Here, a modification of the effect control in the case of a small hit in a specific reach, which is also shown in FIG. 62, will be described.

<< Modification example of production control during the production period of round notification production >>
First, a modified example of the effect control executed during the effect period of the “round notification effect” in FIG. 62 will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment is a period before the execution of the effect period of the "round notification effect", that is, the effect period of "during reach-afterglow effect" and "afterglow effect" (control on the main control board P40 side). The period is the number of rounds of the big hit game (performed in the small hit game) executed as the small hit V (or big hit) in the period from "during the variable display of the special symbol" to "during the small hit game"). It may be deterministically notified that the number (including rounds) becomes a specific number (for example, the maximum) by linking with the content of the production.

In such a case, even if the effect for notifying the type of the jackpot is executed during the effect period of the "round notification effect", the number of rounds that can already be executed is recognized by the player or easily estimated. It is possible that the situation is possible, and it is considered that the effect of notifying the type of jackpot that has been acquired is diminished by the "round notification effect".

Such specific conditions (when a "round notification effect" is executed for a player, there is a situation in which it is possible to easily guess what kind of result can be notified as a result). If the condition is satisfied, the content of the "afterglow effect" (for example, "story effect") executed during the small hit game will be replaced with the "round notification effect" as it is, and the after story of the afterglow effect (following). It can be configured to perform special effects such as the continuation of the "afterglow effect" that is not normally seen by controlling the effect such as displaying the effect) or continuously displaying the related effect. It can be configured to enhance the directing effect of "directing" (effect such as enjoying the afterglow of winning a big hit).

When a special effect such as a continuation of the "afterglow effect" that is not normally seen is performed, the light emission effect and the sound effect of the lamp P82 and the speaker P83 are performed in place of the "round notification effect". It is preferable that an effect corresponding to the "afterglow effect" is executed.

Here, a specific condition (a situation has occurred in which it is possible to easily guess what kind of result can be notified as a result when the "round notification effect" is executed for the player). Here are some examples of productions shown as specific conditions during the production period of "during reach to afterglow production" and "afterglow production".

(Production example 1 that meets specific conditions)
First, when the hit is notified by the execution mode of the reach effect, the profit degree of the jackpot that can be executed (the number of rounds, the number of easy entry states after the jackpot game, etc.) is the specific profit state (maximum number of rounds and entry). An example in which it is definite that the number of times the ball is easy to reach is 95 times will be described.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, it was explained that the specific reach is a reach effect developed by the main character and the heroine character. For example, the specific reach effect is a combination of the main character and the specific heroine character A. In the case where there is a heroine character and the combination of the heroine character B, the heroine character C, and the heroine character D, etc., it is a configuration that makes it certain that a specific profit state will occur in the case of a hit. May be. That is, there is an example in which it is configured so that the player can easily understand that a specific profit state is generated when a hit occurs due to conditions such as reach including a specific character and an increase in the number of characters. ..

(Production example 2 that meets specific conditions)
Next, as another example of the production example satisfying a specific condition, the establishment of the condition based on the game method during the small hit game (during the production period of the “afterglow effect”) will be described.

Since the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that employs a small hit V as a game playability, the operation termination condition (closing condition) of the large winning opening P751 (special electric accessory) during the small hit game is performed. ) Is not satisfied, the game can be executed in which the main control board P40 (main control CPU) delays the transition to the jackpot start demo period and intentionally lengthens the effect period of the “afterglow effect”. For example, the execution mode of the small hit game is to repeat the process of opening the large winning opening P751 for a short time (about 0.120 seconds) and closing it for about 1 second 13 times, so that the total operating time is about 14.560 seconds. If it is set, it is possible to intentionally prevent the large winning opening P751 from winning a specified number of game balls (10 balls, etc.), which is another operation end condition, to produce a lingering sound. The period can be extended up to about 15 seconds.

Using such specifications, in the small hit game that is the production period of the "afterglow production", the timing after the story of the "afterglow production" has finished progressing (for example, "for example, when the story ends in 6 seconds" "1 second later", which is the timing 7 seconds after the start of the afterglow effect, and may differ depending on the effect pattern). Specific conditions when there is no ball (V prize) and the small hit this time generates a specific profit state (maximum number of rounds, number of easy entry states, etc. 95 times). Assuming that is satisfied, there is an example in which the additional effect of the "afterglow effect" is executed from the effect period of the "afterglow effect" to the effect period of the "round notification effect", and the "round notification effect" is not executed. Can be mentioned.

With this configuration, the player can deterministically recognize that a specific profit state has occurred during the "afterglow production" production period prior to the transition to the "round notification production" production period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability and the dramatic interest such as intentionally delaying the progress of the game in the small hit game.

In addition, instead of the "round notification effect" shown as a modified example, the after-story (follow-up effect) of the displayed afterglow effect or other related effect (not related like the after-story, but the heroine that appears) Regarding the effects that the characters have in common, etc.), it does not suggest the type of jackpot immediately after as a specific profit state, but suggests the setting value related to the jackpot probability of the pachinko gaming machine P, or the pending inner villa (reserved inner villa). It may be used as an effect to notify (there is a hit in the subsequent hold). However, in such a configuration, the number of rounds of the big hit may be unknown, so the player intentionally plays the small hit game as in "Production example 2 satisfying a specific condition". Only when it is extended to, it may be executed as an effect that can be displayed during the small hit game, and the "round notification effect" may be configured to be executed as originally planned (the occurrence of a specific profit state is "set". If it is a precondition related to the execution of the notification effect of "value" or "held inner villa", the specific profit state + set value etc. will be notified at the same time, so as in the above-mentioned modification, "round notification effect" You may straddle during the production period of).

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine that adopts a small hit V, delaying the launch during a small hit game may cause a risk of non-passage of the game ball to the specific area P760 (loss of the big hit game) and a maximum specified number of game balls. Since there is a risk that winning will not be possible, if it is considered that there is a disadvantage to the player due to the end of the small hit game at a specific timing or the presence or absence of V winning, the production period of "round notification production" The conditions for executing the alternative "afterglow effect" in the above are as the game progresses, such as "when the effect execution lottery at the time of V prize is won" and "when the lottery is won for each prize of the large winning opening P751". It may be configured to be executed by a dramatic lottery.

It should be noted that, with respect to the "afterglow effect" that replaces the "round notification effect" described as "a modification of the effect control during the effect period of the round notification effect", the purpose is not to announce the occurrence of a specific profit state, but simply. The execution may be decided for the purpose of enhancing the interest of "afterglow production". At this time, if the "round notification effect" is not executed, the type of the jackpot game, which is information that is of great interest to the player, may be unknown. Therefore, the "round notification effect" is wiped (small screen), etc. It may be displayed on top of the "afterglow effect" (at this time, the effect corresponding to the "afterglow effect" is prioritized for the light emission effect and the sound effect of the lamp P82 and the speaker P83).

<< Modification example of production control during the production period of jackpot round production >>
Next, an effect performed during the effect period of the "big hit round effect" will be described with respect to a modified example of the effect control when a small hit is achieved in a specific reach.

In the production period of the "big hit round production", the "big hit round production" is performed in response to the presence or absence of the alternative "afterglow production" shown as a modification in the production period of the "round notification production" which is the immediately preceding production period. The effect of "" is also configured to be executed in a different manner, and the details will be described below.

If an alternative "afterglow effect" is executed during the effect period of the "round notification effect", the fifth execution is performed until the execution of the "afterglow effect" is completed (until all the effects such as the after story are displayed). The production of the "big hit round production" shown as an example ("movie playback", "holding in-house fanning production", "round number promotion production", "time reduction number promotion production", etc.) is restricted (cancelled or canceled). Then, when the execution of the alternative "afterglow effect" is completed, it is configured to return to the effect of the "big hit round effect".

At this time, if there is an execution time such as "Holding Uchirenso fanning effect", "Round number promotion effect", "Time saving number promotion effect", the timing when the alternative "afterglow effect" is completed is each. If the execution start timing of the effect is exceeded, it is configured not to be executed (cancelled).

It should be noted that, due to the execution of the alternative "afterglow effect" that started from the effect period of the "round notification effect", the state of the big hit start demo in which the big prize opening P751 does not open is changed to the big hit game in which the big prize opening P751 opens. Since there is a risk that the transition timing will not be clear, there is a case where an alternative "afterglow effect" is being executed, and based on the transition to the state during the big hit game, the effect display device P80 has a big prize opening. In addition to displaying an image imitating P751, the lamp P82 emits light in the same manner as the guided light emission notification P839, and a temporary effect such as "aiming at the big winning opening" as a character line is temporarily (for example, on the large winning opening P751). It may be configured to be executed until one or three balls are won, or within 3 seconds from the start of the effect (referred to as "large winning opening launch promotion effect").

(Non-specific reach production time chart)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 63, the effect control content when a small hit is won by a non-specific reach in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment will be described.

The effect control in the non-specific reach of FIG. 63 is an effect control at the time of a small hit that can be performed by the conventional pachinko gaming machine, and is a feature point in the pachinko gaming machine P of the fifth embodiment, "specific reach". Since it is described for the purpose of explaining the contrast with the effect control in the above, a brief explanation will be given.

<< Production control during reach-afterglow production (start) >>
First, an example of the effect control in the effect period of "during reach to afterglow effect (start)" when the non-specific reach is executed will be shown.

In the case of non-specific reach, it has at least four points of effect control during the effect period of "during reach to afterglow effect (start)".

As in the case of the specific reach, the "winning branch of the reach effect" is the effect timing for notifying whether or not the result (success result) is that the end of the reach effect of this time is a hit. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the embodiment, the operation input effect is such that the player is requested to operate the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381, effect lever P382). The timing to clearly notify the player whether it is a hit or a miss is after operating the effect operation unit P380, and in the case of a hit, the "effect action + effect" described later will be described. It is configured to notify the player of a hit (small hit, big hit) by the effect of "feature motion effect" transition. It should be noted that the winning branch of the reach effect may not be an operation input effect, but may be an effect that progresses automatically (in the case of a specific reach, it does not have to be an operation input effect as well).

The "directing accessory motion + directing bonus motion effect" is an effect of notifying the player that a hit has been obtained by using the directing motion of the directing bonus P560, and advances to the front of the effect display device P80. This is a period during which the effect control is executed by the effect operation of the effect effect P560 and the effect (effect effect) image displayed on substantially the entire screen of the effect display device P80 according to the operation of the effect accessory P560.

"Evacuation of effect character + temporary stop of decorative pattern" is to evacuate the effect character P560 that performed the effect operation by the effect control of "effect character operation + effect of effect effect" from the front of the display area of the effect display device P80. In the state of effect control, the image showing the end of the non-specific reach is displayed, and the decorative symbol P801 for notifying that the reach effect of this time is a hit is temporarily stopped (in a state of shaking and fluctuating). be. In the case of specific reach, the special symbol was configured to end the fluctuation time and display a stop display (during the symbol fixed time) at almost the same timing as this, but in non-specific reach, the special symbol is also configured at this timing. The fluctuation display of is continuing.

The production control of "afterglow effect + decorative symbol stop" is the effect control of "effective character evacuation + decorative symbol temporary stop", after the player is made to recognize the hit by displaying the end of the reach, and then the afterglow. It is a production period to make you feel that you have won a hit, and it is a period to execute a blessing message such as "Congratulations!" .. In the non-specific reach, the stop display of the special symbol and the fixed time of the symbol are set so as to shift to the effect period of the "small hit effect" described later at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect control of the "afterglow effect + decorative symbol stop". It is configured to stop and display the decorative symbol P801 according to the end timing.

As for the light emitting effect and the sound effect of the lamp P82 and the speaker P83 during the effect period of "during reach to the afterglow effect (start)", the light emission effect and the sound effect according to the reach effect and the afterglow effect are executed.

<< Production control in small hit production >>
Subsequently, the effect control during the effect period of the "small hit effect" performed during the small hit game when the non-specific reach is executed and the small hit is obtained will be described. The state of "small hit game in progress" is the small hit start demo of the control process of the special electric accessory on the main control board P40 (main control CPU), the small hit round game (during the special electric accessory operation), and the small hit end. The period of the demonstration is equivalent. Regarding the small hit end demo, when a V prize is won, it may be omitted or it may be treated as if it is only executed for a short time such as 4 ms and is practically nonexistent.

In the effect period of the "small hit effect", as shown in FIG. 63 (c), two feature points are shown as characteristic effect controls.

The display of "specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" is an effect executed during the small hit start demo or from the small hit round start demo to the small hit round game, and is in the large winning opening P751. It is an effect display that continues until "V passage effect (large)" (described later), which is an effect displayed by the game ball passing through the specific area P760 provided, is displayed. Unlike the "specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" at the time of the specific reach, since the situation is such that other story effects are not executed, it is notified that the game ball is launched to the specific area P760. The effect is displayed on substantially the entire display area of the effect display device P80 so as to be most conspicuous as the main effect (for example, the occupied area is the largest). As a specific example, a character image, the characters "Aim for V!", An image imitating the grand prize opening P751 and the like are displayed on the effect display device P80.

The "V-passing effect (large)" is an effect displayed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area P760 provided in the large winning opening P751 during the small hit round game. It is a production to notify that the right of big hit (operation of the accessory continuous differential device) has been acquired. Similar to "Specific area launch promotion effect (Large)", since story effect etc. are not implemented in non-specific reach, "V passage" displayed in specific reach is displayed in order to surely notify that V prize has occurred. It is configured to display in a more conspicuous manner than "effect (small)" (for example, display on the full screen of the display area of the effect display device P80). The "V-passing effect (large)" may be continuously displayed until the period of the small hit game (during the small hit round game or the small hit end demo) continues, or after displaying for about several seconds, the "round" described later will be performed. The display may be started in advance of the "notification effect".

During the production period of the "small hit effect", the light emission effect of the lamp P82 is characterized by the induced light emission notification P839 at the timing of executing the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" as in the case of the specific reach. It is characterized by the point of execution. In the case of non-specific reach, since the blessing production by the afterglow production such as the story production has been completed, the guided light emission notification P839 is not performed in addition to the rainbow-colored light emission of the light emission mode which is the so-called blessing mode. , Only the light emission effect data of the induced light emission notification is executed, and while the entire frame is darkened, the light emission of the bright guided light emission notification P839 is configured to induce the launch of the game ball to the grand prize opening P751. If it is not rainbow-colored light emission, the light emission pattern of the guided light emission notification P839 is superimposed on the place where the light emission pattern is performed according to the character effect of the "specific area emission promotion effect (large)". It may be controlled to emit light. In addition, in the case of shifting to "V passage effect (large)", it is configured to emit rainbow colors in order to congratulate the acquisition of the right to win the jackpot.

Regarding the sound effect of the speaker P83 during the effect period of the "small hit effect", BGM, voice, and sound effect are generated according to the effect modes of "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" and "V passage effect (large)". It is controlled to let.

<< Production control in round notification production and jackpot round production >>
Since the effect control during the effect period of the "round notification effect" and the "big hit round effect" is the same as the control similar to the specific reach (however, the modification example related to the "afterglow effect" is excluded), the detailed explanation is given. Omit.

(Examples of specific reach and non-specific reach production)
Subsequently, when the specific reach and the non-specific reach are carried out, an example of how the effect is executed in the above-mentioned effect control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

FIG. 64 shows an example of the effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 at the time of non-specific reach. In the case where the non-specific reach is executed and a small hit is obtained, the variation display of the special symbol and the effect during the fixed time of the symbol are illustrated by the period from FIG. 64 (a) to FIG. 64 (c). In 64 (d), an example of the effect display of the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" of the small hit game (particularly the small hit start demonstration period) is shown.

In FIG. 64 (a), a battle effect is executed as a reach effect, and an image in which the player side character (two female characters on the right side of the figure) and the enemy side character (male character on the left side of the figure) face each other. Is displayed. Instructions such as "Battle mission" and "Defeat Mr. B" are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen, indicating that the player is given profits (wins, etc.) by defeating the male character on the left side. Has been done. Decorative symbols P801 forming a reach mode are retracted and displayed on the left and right sides of the upper side of the screen, and a substantially central area of the screen is easily visually recognized as an effect area.

After that, the battle effect, which is a non-specific reach, progresses, and the ending screen shown in FIG. 64 (b) is displayed. As described above, the winning branch effect of the non-specific reach is an operation input effect, and is produced when the player operates the effect operation unit P380 (or when a certain period of time, which is the operation valid period, has passed without any operation). It has been explained that the accessory P560 operates and proceeds in a manner of notifying the hit, but in FIG. 64 (b), the effect accessory P560 operates after the operation input effect of the winning branch effect. The ending screen after evacuation is illustrated. At this time, the character string "WIN" is displayed at the lower right of the screen to clearly inform that the result is successful, and that the decorative symbol P801 is a hit in the center of the lower part of the screen. It is a situation in which it is displayed in doublet, which is the mode shown, and is swaying and fluctuating (temporarily stopped).

FIG. 64 (c) shows a screen of “afterglow effect” displayed at the end time of the variation display of the special symbol and the fixed time of the symbol when the non-specific reach is in the mode of showing a hit. In the display area of the effect display device P80, the characters "WIN" are continuously displayed from FIG. 64 (b), and the decorative pattern P801 is made smaller and then moved to the corner (lower left corner) of the screen for display. (Note that the decorative symbol P801 in FIG. 64 (c) may be a simplified design P802 that was not shown, and the decorative symbol P801 may be hidden). In the "afterglow production", it is shown that the two female characters of the player side characters who appeared in the battle production are talking the deciding lines ("Leave it to TA!") While taking the deciding pose. , The telop display of the decision line is displayed in the vicinity of the player side character.

FIG. 64 (d) shows the result of the non-specific reach notifying the hit (small hit) during the small hit game when the small hit game is executed (especially during the small hit round game from the small hit start demo). An example of the effect display of the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" executed in is shown. A character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and by performing an action, the player's attention is focused on the display area of the effect display device P80. "Promotion effect (large) P837" is displayed. "Right-handed notification P832" and "specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" are a type of effect of the separate notification P830 that suggests the launch position (launch intensity) recommended for the player, and are small hit rounds. It suggests to the player the game method during the game (to launch the game ball toward the specific area P760 provided in the large winning opening P751 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501).

In the example of FIG. 64 (d), the "specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" is a game of aiming at "V (commonly known as the specific area P760)" by displaying the characters "aim!" And "V". By arranging an image that imitates the big winning opening P751 and an arrow image that points to the image that imitates the big winning opening P751, it is configured to remind the person to win the game ball for the big winning opening P751 as an image. are doing. In addition to the arrow image, an image imitating a game ball may be displayed in order to further enhance the image. Further, as described above, during the period when the effect display device P80 displays the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)", the effect lamp P82 (board lamp P550 and frame lamp P350) executes the guided light emission notification P839. At this time, the position of the large winning opening P751 is clearly indicated by constantly blinking the light emitting unit provided in the large winning device P750.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the effect display in the “afterglow effect” (during the small hit game) when the specific reach is executed with the result of a small hit. In the case of the specific reach, unlike the non-specific reach, the main part of the "afterglow effect" is executed during the small hit game. As described above, a specific example of the reach effect is character reach, and the non-specific reach effect shown in FIG. 64 is shown in FIG. 64 except for the image display content (and the accompanying sound effect and light emission effect) displayed as the effect. The explanation is omitted because the flow of the production is almost the same as that of (a) and (b).

The biggest feature when the specific reach is executed and the small hit is notified is that the "afterglow effect" is controlling the small hit game on the main control board P40 (main control CPU). In Fig. 65, in order to advance the small hit game during the execution of the "afterglow production" to give the player a real feeling about the end of the reach (acquisition of a hit) and to enhance the interest. Shows what is displayed in. Note that FIG. 65 is shown so that the frame lamp P350 of the pachinko gaming machine P can be visually recognized in order to show the explanation of the guided light emission notification P839 in the lamp P82 in addition to the effect display of the effect display device P80.

First, the display contents of the “afterglow effect” effect display device P80 in the specific reach effect example of FIG. 65 will be described.

In the "afterglow effect" of the specific reach, the decorative symbol P801 stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special symbol is shown on the upper left side of the screen of the effect display device P80. In the case of the specific reach, as described above, after the effect P560 is retracted after the winning branch effect, the decorative symbol P801 is immediately stopped and displayed, and there is a possibility that the stop display mode of the decorative symbol P801 cannot be sufficiently recognized. Therefore, the decorative symbol P801 is continuously displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 even during the small hit game.

On the other hand, "right-handed notification P832" is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the effect display device P80, and a display is performed to clearly indicate to the player that right-handed hitting should be performed as a game method during the small hit game. There is.

In the central area of the display area of the effect display device P80, the heroine character that appeared in the character reach performed as the reach effect is displayed as the effect of the "afterglow effect", and the story is the "afterglow effect" related to the character reach. The effect is displayed (in the example of FIG. 65, an image of a female character facing the player side and pointing with the right hand is displayed, and "well done" and "praise" corresponding to the dialogue effect. An example is shown in which a telop image of the congratulatory message P879 "I'll give you" is displayed).

"Specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" is displayed superimposed on the story effect, which is the "afterglow effect", at the substantially center position in the height direction on the right side of the display area of the effect display device P80, and is specified in the small hit game. It informs that the situation should pass through the area P760. In addition, the display of "specific area launch promotion effect (small)" is "V passage effect (small)" (for example, "V") in response to the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area P760 in the large winning opening P751. It is configured to switch to the character image). Unlike "V-passing effect (large)", "V-passing effect (small)" is not displayed in almost full screen, and is displayed in a small position at almost the same position as "specific area launch promotion effect (small)". It is configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the story production.

For example, "V passage effect (small)" is an image imitating the large winning opening P751 displayed as "specific area launch promotion effect (small)", the letter "V", and an arrow image pointing diagonally to the lower right. Of the combinations, only the letter "V" may be left and displayed, and further, a rainbow-colored effect image may be superimposed on the letter "V" to emphasize that the "V prize" has been won. .. In this way, by configuring the "V passage effect (small)" to be displayed smaller than the "specific area launch promotion effect (small)", the game ball is passed through the specific area P760 in the small hit game. As a result, the visibility of the story production is enhanced (the visible display area is expanded), and it is possible to enhance the interest of the story production.

While the "specific area launch promotion effect (small)" and "V passage effect (small)" are display objects that are displayed (in the upper layer) in preference to the story effect of the "afterglow effect". It is displayed with low visibility (small occupying area of the display area) so as not to hinder the interest of "afterglow production" as much as possible, but it is not related to the production image and is not related to the progress of the production. A system image with a high display priority such as an error display that is displayed makes it difficult to see (for example, a part or all of "specific area launch promotion effect (small)" or "V passage effect (small)" is covered. There is a risk. In order to avoid such a problem, not only the display position shown in FIG. It may be configured to display "V passage effect (small)". With this configuration, even if the visibility of the story production is reduced by the system image, the notification of the game method, which is important information for the progress of the game, can be surely visually recognized, and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent risks such as a person losing the right to a big hit.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 65, an production example of the light emission effect “guided light emission notification P839” of the effect lamp P82 in the effect example of the specific reach will be described.

When the "afterglow effect" of the specific reach is executed, the effect lamp P82 (in the board lamp P550 and the frame lamp P350, the light emission effect of the base (priority is relatively lower than the "guided light emission notification P839"). ), And the effect lamp P82 is visually recognized by the player as performing gradation light emission in various colors such as red, green, and blue.

Then, when the "guided light emission notification P839" is executed, a part of the effect lamp P82 is included in the rainbow color in order to enhance the distinctiveness from the light emission effect of the base, as shown in the dotted line region (P839) in FIG. The region that lights up in white, which is not a color, and lights up in white as the guided light emission notification P839 moves from the left side of the gaming machine to the right side via the upper side as shown by the arrow direction A in the figure. When the light emitting region of the effect lamp P82 corresponding to the induced light emitting notification P839 moves to the right region, the lighting display is restarted from the start point of the left region. As shown in FIG. 65, the region that emits light as the induced light emission notification P839 is a part of the effect lamp P82, and the lighting portion is configured to move so as to have a dynamic display mode. Regarding the light emitting portion of the effect lamp P82 at a position that does not correspond to the induced light emission notification P839, the light emission effect is executed by the rainbow-colored light emission which is the base light emission effect or the light emission pattern corresponding to the “afterglow effect”.

The "guided light emission notification P839" continues until the game ball passes through the specific area P760 in the small hit game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area P760, the "guided light emission notification P839" ends and the base light emission effect. (Luminous effect corresponding to the story effect of "afterglow effect") is configured to be visible. At this time, at the timing of switching to the "V passage effect (small)", the "V prize notification light emission" (for example, the "guided light emission notification P839") for notifying that the V prize is temporarily won by the effect lamp P82 is executed. All of the lamps are configured to be executed (such as blinking white twice regardless of the execution timing of the "guided light emission notification P839").

The "guided light emission notification P839" shown in the fifth embodiment is merely an example, and any light emission mode that can suggest to the player that the game ball should be fired toward the grand prize opening P751. It may be an embodiment. For example, the frame lamp P350 provided on the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine P may also be a target for executing the effect, and may be lit from the left side to the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, and may be lap-lit so as to return to the left side as it is. There may be multiple locations that are partially lit as "notification P839" (it may be difficult to understand what is suggested if multiple locations emit light at the same time, so for example, multiple light emission in the right region, which is the end point. May be displayed so that the lights are sequentially merged and enlarged, and multiple light emissiones are finally combined into one and disappear). Further, the lighting pattern as the "guided light emission notification P839" does not have to be white, which is not included in the rainbow color, and is configured to display a plurality of colors at the same time or display them in different colors in order. May be good.

[Sixth Example]
Subsequently, the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, which is characterized by the light emission control of the effect lamp P82, will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment performs characteristic light emission effect control of the effect lamp P82, and the light emission effect control is various such as the present embodiment and the second to sixth embodiments. It is applicable to pachinko gaming machines, and is also applicable to other pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, Jiyan ball gaming machines, etc., as long as there are no special factors that hinder its characteristics. ..

The pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment is a light emitting unit composed of a plurality of light emitting units (in the sixth embodiment, a character accessory light emitting unit P692 and a logo light emitting unit P690) as a characteristic light emitting effect control. , Details will be described later), and depending on which stage is reached as a result of the staged production, a game result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit with a pachinko machine or a slot machine) Performs a step-by-step effect (step-up effect, etc.) that informs or suggests that a specific combination such as a bonus combination has been won, or that there is a possibility that an advantageous game result will be obtained.

In the sixth embodiment, the main advance notice effect developed in the display area of the effect display device P80 is a game by executing a step-by-step light emitting effect of the effect lamp P82 having low or irrelevant effect. By performing an effect that informs or suggests that an advantageous game result can be obtained for a person or a possibility that an advantageous game result can be obtained, a light emitting effect of the gaming machine that has an effect of enhancing the interest of the effect of the gaming machine. The control will be explained.

(Structure of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment)
First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG. 66 is a front view including the gaming machine frame structure (outer frame P1, front frame P2, glass frame P3) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, and FIGS. 67 to 69 are front views of the gaming board P5. In the figure, the position of the effecting object P560 is different from each other.

《Frame structure》
As shown in FIG. 66, the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment has a different appearance from the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and the pachinko gaming machines of the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, but is different. The part that is used is mainly the design aspect, and the essential structure of the pachinko gaming machine is the same as that of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and the pachinko gaming machines of the 5th to 5th embodiments. Except for the above differences, detailed explanations are omitted.

Regarding the structure of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the major differences between the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment are the design of the frame lamp P350 and the production operation unit P380. The design and structure of.

The structure of the frame lamp P350 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment is such that the design of the frame lamp P350 on the right side when viewed from the player protrudes greatly forward from the frame lamp P350 on the left side, and further upward. It has a structure that protrudes toward. The right-side frame lamp P350 is detachably configured with respect to the glass frame P3, and inside the right-side frame lamp P350, an effect sheet according to the model installed as the game board P5 can be included. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light emission effect using an effect sheet. Further, although it is not visible in FIG. 66, the frame speaker P370 is arranged above the inside of the right frame lamp P350, and pairs with the frame speaker P370 on the upper left side of the glass frame P3 to form the upper speaker P371. It has become like. The right frame lamp P350 can be attached not only to a unit containing an effect sheet as shown in FIG. 66, but also to a unit having a movable object or structure such as a frame movable accessory P360 or a figure depending on the product. Is.

As shown in FIG. 66, the structure of the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment has a structure in which the effect button P381 is arranged on the top of the design unit imitating an alien character. Further, the production operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment also has a function as a production lever P382 like the presupposed pachinko gaming machine and the like, and has a head of a character imitating an alien. It is possible to perform an input operation by tilting the player to the player side (front).

The effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment moves to the unlocked position unlike the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine or the like, which is assumed when the input operation is performed as the effect lever P382. It is configured so that the tilting operation can be executed by operating a lock mechanism (for example, a lock member driven by a solenoid or the like) provided inside (for example, a lock member driven by a solenoid or the like), which does not perform a displacement operation for performing the displacement operation. ..

Further, the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment has a role as a frame movable accessory P360 configured to be operable for the purpose of effect operation, not for the purpose of unlocking. The production operation unit P380 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment can move the head of a character imitating an alien in the front-back and left-right directions with the position shown in FIG. 66 as a reference point, and can move the head of the character in the front-back or left-right direction. It is configured to be able to perform a swinging motion, a circling motion of the head, and the like, and it is possible to perform an operation input effect such as a button effect, and a character motion effect as a notice effect and a look-ahead effect.

<< Game board structure: Game area >>
Subsequently, the structure of the gaming board of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment sandwiches the center accessory P540 (or the effect display device P80) arranged in the center of the gaming board as the gaming area P501. It is designed to have a left side area P501L on the left side and a right side area P501R on the right side, and by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball according to the operation amount of the player's handle P204, any game area of the player. It is configured so that the game balls can be shot separately.

When a game ball is launched into the left game area P501L, it is easy to win a prize in the first start winning device P710 (first starting port P711) and the left general winning device P730L (left general winning school P731L), and the right side. When a game ball is launched into the area P501R, the normal operating gate device P740 (normal operating port P741), the second starting winning device P720 (second starting opening P721), the large winning device P750 (large winning port P751), and the right side. It is configured to be able to win a prize in the general prize device P730R (right side general winning school P731R). An out port P790 is arranged at the lower position of the game board for the purpose of discharging the game balls that do not win any prize.

《Game board structure: directing characters and other directing devices》
The area surrounded by the center accessory P540 and a part of the back of the transparent game board forming the game area P501, which is a substantially central area of the game board, have various effects to enhance the interest of the game machine. The device is arranged.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, as the effect device arranged in the effect area of the game board P5, the effect display device P80 that displays the effect, one logo light emitting unit P690 of the board lamp P550 that performs the light emission effect, and the effect. It has an effecting accessory P560 that performs an operation and a light emitting effect, and is configured to have a character accessory P691, an upper swinging accessory P694, and a lower elevating accessory P695 as the effecting accessory P560. Further, although not shown, a light guide plate having a light emitting effect unit is arranged in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 in the opening of the center accessory P540.

As shown in FIG. 67, the "character accessory P691" is in a state of waiting six times in the vertical and horizontal directions of the display area of the effect display device P80 as a normal standby position (initial position). The character character light emitting unit P692 can be visually recognized by the person through the opening of the center character P540 and the transparent game board P5. The character accessory P691 has the character accessory P691a, the character accessory P691b, the character accessory P691c, the character accessory P691d, and the character accessory P691e clockwise from the one arranged at the upper part of the display area of the effect display device P80. The character accessory P691f is arranged so as to hide a part of the display area of the effect display device P80 in front view, while not obstructing the visibility of the effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 as much as possible. It is configured in.

The character accessory P691 is provided with a character accessory light emitting unit P692, so that light emission effect can be executed. In the character accessory light emitting unit P692, an effect sheet on which different character symbols are printed is arranged for each of the six character accessory P691, so that the light emission effect can be executed, and the character accessory light emitting unit is configured. As shown in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 68, P692 is configured so that the swing / rotation operation can be executed.

Further, the character character light emitting unit P692 arranges a light guide plate, which is a light emitting unit for emphasizing the character design, on the back surface of the sheet on which the character design is printed, and a design different from the character design is arranged on the back surface of the light guide plate. In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, a print sheet on which six character symbols) are printed is arranged, and by emitting an LED different from the LED which is a light source for the light guide plate, it is not a character symbol. The structure is such that the design (character design) of the effect sheet on the back of the light guide plate can be visually recognized (see FIG. 69). More specifically, the printing method of the effect sheet of the character pattern is printing by the inkjet method with coarse particles (low density), while the effect sheet on the back of the light guide plate is silk-printed with fine particles (high density). Since it is printed by the above method, the player's visible pattern can be switched by switching the lit LED.

As shown in FIG. 68, the effect operation of the character accessory P691 is such that the six character accessories P691 move so as to be close to the center of the display area of the effect display device P80, and the hexagonal character accessory light emitting unit P692 It is possible to perform an advancing / retreating operation (for example, the advancing / retreating operation of the character accessory P691 on the left side is in the B direction of FIG. As shown by the arrow A in FIG. 68, the light emitting unit P692 can execute the swing / rotation operation (the rotation operation can also be executed at the initial position).

Further, the character accessory P691 is provided with a mirror unit P693 that follows the advance / retreat operation of the character accessory P691 and performs an advance / retreat operation of the character accessory P691 as shown in FIG. 68. P693 is also configured to form a hexagonal shape along the outer periphery of the character accessory light emitting unit P692, and when the character accessory light emitting unit P692 is swung / rotated after the advance / retreat operation as shown in FIG. , The character design of the character character light emitting unit P692 is reflected on the mirror unit P693, and the mirror image of the actual character character light emitting unit P692 and the mirror unit P693 can perform a kaleidoscope-like light emitting effect. ..

As shown in FIG. 68, the "upper rocking accessory P694" has a hexagonal main design (light emitting unit) in a space formed on the inner circumference when the six character accessory light emitting portions P692 of the character accessory P691 are close to each other. ) Is moved, and the production is performed in cooperation with the character character P691. The upper rocking accessory P694 is in a state where the normal standby position is retracted to a position where it is difficult to see the upper part of the display area of the effect display device P80, and when operating at the effect position shown in FIG. 68, the effect display device It is configured to swing around the rotation axis on the upper right of the display area of P80.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the upper swinging accessory P694 is configured to operate only in the case of a production linked with the character accessory P691, and the upper swinging accessory P694 and the character accessory P691 are configured to operate. The collaborative effect with P691 is, for example, a winning branch effect or a revival effect that informs the final result of the reach effect, and an effect that informs the player that the final result of the reach effect is advantageous to the player (wins). It is designed to be executed as a deciding effect, which is an effect of notifying what has been done.

As shown in FIG. 69, the "lower evacuation accessory P695" is a rod-shaped effect object that extends linearly in the width direction of the display area of the effect display device P80, and is a normal effect object. The standby position is retracted to a position that is difficult to see at the bottom of the display area of the effect display device P80, and is configured to perform an ascending / descending operation during the effect operation. The highest position of the elevating operation is configured to be when the character accessory P691A arranged at the upper part of the display area of the effect display device P80 overlaps with the character accessory P691A. It is possible to execute the effect in cooperation with the effect display device P80, the character accessory P691, and the effect device such as a light guide plate (not shown) arranged in front of the opening of the center accessory P540.

FIG. 69 shows an example of an effect using the lower elevating accessory P695 (a collaborative effect with the character accessory P691). FIG. 69 shows a diagram in which the lower elevating accessory P695 has risen to a height substantially at the center of the display area of the effect display device P80. At this time, the height of the lower elevating accessory P695 is in a state of moving to a position higher than the three of the character accessory P691 from the character accessory P691c to the character accessory P691e. The character accessory light emitting unit P692 of P691 is in a position where the relative positional relationship is lower than that of the lower elevating accessory P695 in accordance with the operation of the lower elevating accessory P695. The object light emitting unit P692c to the character accessory light emitting unit P692e are configured so that the display mode is switched from the display of the character symbol effect sheet to the display of the character symbol effect sheet.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, three characters "mysterious", "good (not shown)", and "machine" are displayed as character symbols when the display mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 changes. It is a display mode that suggests that something is likely to happen (for example, a reach effect is likely to be executed) or a chance (high expectation of hitting) as the effect development of the variable display this time. The state shown in FIG. 69 indicates a state in which the operation of the lower elevating accessory P695 is performed twice (up to the second stage), and when the operation is performed once, the lower elevating accessory P695 serves as a character. It is located above the object P691d, and only the character accessory P691d is switched to the display of the character symbol.

The cooperative production of the lower elevating accessory P695 and the character accessory P691 is up to the third stage (the next stage of the stage shown in FIG. 69), in which the lower elevating accessory P695 overlaps with the character accessory P691a. Along with moving to the position, the character characters P691a, b, and f have three characters "high", "period", and "waiting" in the light emitting part (to SP reach, which is a high expectation reach before the reach production starts. Aspects that are suggested to develop) are now displayed.

(Lamp step-up effect using character character P691)
Next, "lamp step-up effect", which is a characteristic light emission effect control using the effect lamp P82 implemented in the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 75.

In the sixth embodiment, the "ramp step-up effect" will be described using an example of being executed by the back button effect during the high expectation reach effect (SP reach effect) having a high expectation of big hit. Here, the "back button effect" is a case where the effect operation unit P380 is operated without displaying the button image P881 or the lever image P882 for prompting the player to operate the effect operation unit P380. It is an effect of switching the display contents of the effect display device P80, the light emitting mode of the effect lamp P82, the contents of the sound effect output from the speaker P83, and the like, and is also referred to as a "hidden button" effect.

Regarding the effect control of the "lamp step-up effect" described in the sixth embodiment, not only the back button effect during reach, but also other button effects (operation input effect) such as a notice effect and a big hit effect (for example). It may be configured to be feasible in promotion production, hold continuous production, etc.). Further, instead of operating the effect operation unit P380, the main control is the detection information of the sensor related to the progress of the game, such as winning a prize in the start prize device (first start prize device P710, second start prize device P720) or the grand prize device P750. It may be configured to proceed by receiving a command from the board P40. Furthermore, it is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but other games such as light emission production used for the expected degree of winning a specific role (bonus role) of a slot machine, and chance zone production that suggests AT winning etc. across multiple games. It can be used for the production of machines by changing the design as appropriate as long as it does not deviate from its essence.

<< Overview of lamp step-up production >>
First, an outline (outline of the progress of the production) will be explained about the "lamp step-up production" of the sixth embodiment.

The "lamp step-up effect" of the sixth embodiment is a logo that is a light emitting effect unit in the effect area of the game board P5 of the pachinko gaming machine P (the opening of the center accessory P540 and the back area of the transparent game area P501). This is a light emitting effect executed with the light emitting unit P690 and the character accessory light emitting unit P692 as the main effect areas.

In addition, a related light emitting effect is executed in a light emitting unit other than the logo light emitting unit P690 and the character accessory light emitting unit P692 (for example, a frame lamp P350 and a light emitting unit provided in various winning devices such as a start port device and a large winning device). As a modification, a plurality of characters are printed on the effect sheet of the right frame lamp P350 instead of the character accessory light emitting unit P692, the light emitting area is divided for each character, and the light is emitted for each character. The area may be configured to be turned on in sequence, or the board effect lamp P550 (character accessory light emitting unit P692, etc.) of the game board and the right frame lamp P350 may be linked and executed. ..

The character accessory light emitting unit P692 is provided with six light emitting regions (character accessory light emitting unit P692a to character accessory light emitting unit P692f) on which six printing sheets on which different symbols (character symbol, character symbol) are printed are provided. In the "ramp step-up effect", the character accessory light emitting unit P692 operates the player's effect operation unit P380, and according to the operation status (for example, the number of operations of the effect button P381), a predetermined pattern is used. It is configured to light one by one (a plurality of lights are lit together in a special pattern) or to change the emission color.

In the "ramp step-up effect", the character accessory light emitting unit P692 is lit or the emission color is changed in this order, for example, the character accessory light emitting unit P692a, the character accessory light emitting unit P692b, and the character accessory light emitting unit P692c. When all six light emitting units are lit or emit light in the same color, the lighting mode with higher expectation (increase in brightness or higher expectation) is again in a predetermined order (for example, clockwise from the character character light emitting unit P692a). It is configured to change to (lit with the suggested emission color).

In the sixth embodiment, as a basic lighting pattern, the character accessory light emitting unit P692a is configured to light or change the emission color clockwise, and when the six light emitting units are turned on, one cycle of light emission effect is completed. It is moving to the next stage. As for the light emitting mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692, the light emitting colors are sequentially "turned off (initial light emitting mode)", "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "gold (dark)" in each cycle of the light emitting effect. By changing to "light emission that mixes yellow and white)", it is suggested that the expectation for big hits is high. The final reachable production cycle (stage) is determined by lottery. For example, when the final result is determined by the production lottery, the six character character character light emitting units P692 are set to "green". Even if it changes to "red" after that, all six character accessory light emitting units P692 cannot change to "red", and the production cycle cannot be completed, and "green" is emitted as the final stage. It is configured to be an embodiment (described later with reference to FIG. 72).

As described above, the "ramp step-up effect" is configured to proceed by the operation of the player's effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381), but has six character character character light emitting units P692 and a maximum of five cycles. It is necessary to operate for minutes (up to 5 cycles including the premier pattern), but since the production period is limited to during SP reach (about 15 seconds), the light emission of one character accessory light emitting unit P692. The change timing is set so that the change of the mode can be switched from one operation to three times of the operation of the effect operation unit P380 (for the character accessory light emitting unit P692f, an important timing of whether or not the effect cycle is completed. Therefore, the number of operations of the effect button P381 required for switching the lighting mode may be set to be larger than that of the other character accessory light emitting unit P692 (for example, 5 times).

The logo light emitting unit P690 indicates a situation in which one cycle of the character character light emitting unit P692 is completed, that is, one cycle of the light emitting effect is completed each time the six character character light emitting units P692 are lit in the same light emitting mode. As described above, the light is emitted in a light emitting mode according to the completed production cycle. For example, a process in which all six of the character character character light emitting units P692 change to "blue" at the timing when they are all lit in "blue", and then the character character character light emitting unit P692 gradually changes to "yellow" (6). In the situation where the light emitting unit P692 of one character accessory is not "yellow"), it is maintained as "blue". That is, the logo light emitting unit P690 is a light emitting unit that suggests a "final stage" when the "lamp step-up effect" is completed in the current progress state in the effect process. In the sixth embodiment, the "final stage" is not only the final stage of the "ramp step-up effect" determined in the effect lottery, but also the player ends the button operation in the middle of the "ramp step-up effect". Including the situation where "" has stopped progressing.

In FIG. 70, in a situation where the SP reach effect, which is a high-expectation reach effect, is in progress, the player operates the effect button P381, and the “lamp step-up effect” as the back button effect is simultaneously progressing. It is a figure which shows the situation on the way. FIG. 70 shows a situation in which the light emitting modes are different between the character character light emitting unit P692a to the character character light emitting unit P692c after the change and the character character light emitting unit P692d to the character character light emitting unit P692f before the change. ing. Further, the logo light emitting unit P690 shows a situation in which light is emitted in the same color as the character accessory light emitting unit P692d or the like before the change.

(Specific production example of lamp step-up production)
Subsequently, using FIGS. 71 to 73, when the ramp step-up effect is executed (and is not executed) in a situation where the SP reach, which is a high expectation reach, is executed as a variable effect. I will explain a concrete production example of.

"(A) Production period" in FIGS. 71 and 73 indicates the progress of the production content as a variable production, and "(b) Production content example" is the production content executed in the corresponding production period. Of these, a part of the characteristic production is described, and "(c) Lamp production_feature_ * No back button" is the light emission of the production lamp P82 when the "lamp step-up production" is not executed. An example of the effect in the effect control is shown, and "(d) Lamp effect_feature_ * with back button" shows an example of the effect in the light emission effect control of the effect lamp P82 when the "lamp step-up effect" is executed. .. Further, "(a) effect period" in FIG. 72 indicates the progress of the variable effect as in FIG. 71, and "(b) button operation (valid period)" is the effect button which is the effect operation unit P380. The situation in which the operation of P381 is effective is shown in black (in this example, the situation where the operation is continuously performed during the operation valid period will be described). (C) to (i) in FIG. 72 show specific examples of changes in the lighting mode from the character accessory light emitting unit P692a to the character accessory light emitting unit P692f and the logo light emitting unit P690.

<< Production example 1_Lamp step-up production (halfway stage: at the end of the final result "green", the deviation fluctuates) >>
FIG. 71 is a time chart diagram showing an example of an effect when the “ramp step-up effect” is executed in a variation effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is an out-of-order variation. be. In addition, in the example of FIG. 71, since it is the result of "off", even in the "lamp step-up production", the progress is made in the situation where "green", which has a low expectation, is determined by the production lottery as the final stage. There is.

First, an example of production during the production period "SP reach first half" will be described.

In the sixth embodiment, the SP reach is a reach effect that progresses in a story effect in which the main character and the heroine appear and develop, as described as the first half of the heroine reach as shown in FIG. 71 (b). .. As the content of the reach effect, in addition to the story effect that progresses in the background, "reach title display (notice)" and "character character movement fanning" are executed. "Reach title display (notice)" is whether the title display, which is the title of the reach production, is displayed in normal colors, a chance mode based on red, or a large chance mode based on the manufacturer's pattern. It is a notice that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. "Character character movement fanning" is a production that suggests whether or not to shift to the production period of the latter half of SP reach (the latter half of SP reach described later), and if it succeeds (character character P691 is an upper swinging role). (When the effect operation as shown in FIG. 68 is performed without the operation of the object P694), the "SP reach second half development" and "SP reach second half" shown in FIG. , If it fails (when the character character P691 stops only by rattling), it is a production to be notified that it is "off" during the production period of "SP reach first half".

The "ramp step-up effect" is a back button effect set during the period when the heroine reach of the "SP reach first half" is executed, and after the heroine reach starts (the display of the "reach title display (notice)" ends. This is an effect in which the operation valid period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) continues from the predetermined timing of (after) to the timing immediately before the execution of the "character accessory motion fan". It should be noted that the light emission effect (light emission effect control in the light emission mode of the "final stage") in the character accessory light emitting unit P692 when the "ramp step-up effect" is executed will be described later if it continues to the subsequent effect period. Production period to be performed If the character is continuously performed until the predetermined timing of the "SP reach second half" (for example, until the occurrence of the "winning branch cut-in") and the deviation is notified during the production period of the "SP reach first half", the character It is configured to end in accordance with the execution of the character character movement fanning (note that during the "character character movement fanning", the character character character light emitting unit P692 displays the light emitting mode of the "character character motion fanning" effect. In order to give priority, even if the light emission mode of the "ramp step-up effect" is finished, it is not detected that the "SP reach first half" is out of alignment).

In FIG. 71 (c), the effect lamp P82 (particularly, the character accessory light emitting unit that is the target of the “lamp step-up effect”) during the effect period of the “SP reach first half” when the “ramp step-up effect” is not executed. The control contents about the light emission effect control of P692, the logo light emitting part P690) are shown. When the "ramp step-up effect" is not executed, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the background effect of the heroine reach, the "reach title display (notice)", and the "character character role" during the effect period of the "SP reach first half". Normal light emission effect linked to each notice such as "motion fanning" (light emission effect linked to image display such as notice effect, look-ahead effect, reach effect, jackpot effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, and thereafter. The light emission effect control of (referred to as "normal light emission mode") is performed.

In FIG. 71 (d), the effect lamp P82 (particularly, the character accessory light emitting unit that is the target of the “lamp step-up effect”) during the effect period of the “SP reach first half” when the “ramp step-up effect” is executed. The control contents about the light emission effect control of P692, the logo light emitting part P690) are shown. When the "ramp step-up effect" is executed, that is, after the heroine reach starts (after the display of the "reach title display (notice)" ends), the player operates the effect to execute the "ramp step-up effect". When the unit P380 (effect button P381) is operated, the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 change from the normal light emitting mode to the light emitting mode corresponding to the "lamp step-up effect". A specific change mode of the light emitting mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 in the "ramp step-up effect" will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Next, the production period of "SP reach second half development" will be explained.

During the production period of "SP reach second half development", the "character character movement fanning" production is successful in the "SP reach first half", the movement of the character character character P691 is executed, and the character character character P691 displays the effect display device P80. The effect display period in which the effect image corresponding to the operation of the character accessory P691 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 while advancing to the front area of the area to perform the effect operation is shown. There is.

In the example of FIG. 71, since it is a fluctuation effect executed by the deviation variation, the operation effect of the character accessory P691 related to the development of the latter half of the SP reach (the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the like which are the targets of the “ramp step-up effect”). As a light emitting mode of the effect lamp P82 including the effect lamp P82), a situation is shown in which a weak pattern effect with a low expectation of a big hit is executed. When the operation effect of the character accessory P691 developed in the latter half of the SP reach is executed in a weak pattern, the character accessory light emitting unit P692 or the like is configured to execute the light emission effect in a color based on purple. At this time, the light emission effect control related to the operation effect of the character accessory P691 is configured to be lit (on the upper light emission control layer) in preference to the light emission effect control of the “lamp step-up effect”. That is, the light emission mode of the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" is the control of other light emission effects from the start time of the "character character movement fanning" in the "first half of the reach" to the start time of the "second half of the SP reach". Is prioritized, but it is controlled so that it is not visible as a player (the production is discontinued and interrupted as a player), although it continues as a production, and the start of "SP reach second half". Later, it is configured to return to the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation of the "ramp step-up effect".

Next, the content of the production during the production period of "SP reach second half" will be explained.

In the production period of "SP reach second half", the latter half production of the heroine reach, for example, the continuation of the story production of the main character and the heroine character developed in the first half of the heroine reach is developed as a background production. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, in the "SP reach second half", the notice effect during the combined reach (the notice effect displayed during the reach and suggesting the big hit expectation, the notice effect in the first half of the reach "Cut-in before winning branch" is executed as "reach title display (notice)"). The "pre-winning branch cut-in" has a favorable result for the player before the "winning branching effect" that informs whether or not the ending of the reach effect is advantageous for the player. It is an expectation announcement production that suggests the possibility. In the "cut-in before winning branch", the effect of superimposing the cut-in image on the background display in which the story effect of the heroine reach is developed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, and the effect lamp P82 and the speaker. The corresponding light emission effect and sound effect are executed using P83. In the sixth embodiment, only the “cut-in before the hit branch” is exemplified as the advance notice effect during the reach during the effect period of the “SP reach second half”, but other notices during the reach may be executed.

If the "ramp step-up effect" is not executed, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), in the effect lamp P82, during the effect period of "SP reach second half", the story effect of the heroine reach and "before the hit branch" are performed. It is configured to perform light emission effect control (normal light emission mode) corresponding to the "cut-in" effect.

On the other hand, when the production period of the "SP reach second half" is reached after the "ramp step-up effect" is executed, the character character light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 are used in the "SP reach second half" production period. Then, the light emission effect control related to the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" is continued (restarted), and the light emission effect control of the "ramp step-up effect" is performed until the "cut-in before the hit branch" effect occurs. The jackpot expectation is suggested. The reason why the production of the "lamp step-up effect" continues until the production period of the "SP reach second half" is that the production progressed with the operation of the production operation unit P380 (effect button P381) during the "SP reach first half" production period. The display of the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" is the light emission of the "final stage" in the remaining period of the operation valid period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) and the remaining period until the "character character movement fanning". This is because there is a risk that the aspect may not be sufficiently recognized and the process may end.

When the "ramp step-up effect" is executed and the "cut-in before the hit branch" effect is executed during the effect period of the "SP reach second half", the effect of the "cut-in before the hit branch" is performed. Since the light emission effect control is performed with priority over the light emission effect control of the "final stage" of the "lamp step-up effect", the light emission of the "final stage" of the "lamp step-up effect" is not recognized by the player. For example, in the "cut-in before hitting branch" effect, a green frame or "green cut-in" of the cut-in image, which is a background image, is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, and the effect lamp P82 emits light based on green. When the effect is performed, the light emission effect control of the "ramp step-up effect" is not visually recognized because the control such as continuing the light emission effect based on green is performed until the timing of the winning branch effect. That is, in the light emission effect control of "cut-in before winning branch", even if the cut-in image is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, the display of the winning branch effect (or the operation input effect as the winning branch effect is executed. Since it is configured to display the expected degree of the winning branch effect longer than the display period of the cut-in image, it is practically the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect". The light emission effect control of is configured to be in a state unrecognizable to the player (finished state) at the start of execution of the "cut-in before winning branch" effect.

Finally, a specific example of the production content during the production period of "off-the-shelf notification" will be described.

In the example of FIG. 71, since the SP reach is executed in the out-of-order fluctuation, the result of the out-of-order is notified as the winning / branching effect in the effect period of the “second half of the SP reach”. There is.

When the result that is out of order is notified as the winning branch effect, the effect period of "out of place notification" is entered, and it is notified that the story of the heroine reach has not reached the end of the aspect suggesting the advantageous result to the player. The story production is displayed.

During the effect period of the "offset notification", the "lamp step-up effect" has already ended, and as shown in FIGS. 71 (c) and 71 (d), the heroine is used as the light emission effect control of the effect lamp P82. The light emission effect control (normal light emission mode) for the out-of-reach effect is executed.

Subsequently, the change in the light emitting mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 when the "ramp step-up effect" is executed during the effect period of the "SP reach first half" will be described with reference to FIG. 72. conduct. The example of FIG. 72 is the same as the situation shown in FIG. 71, and the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 are “green” as the “final stage” light emitting mode of the “lamp step-up effect” effect mode. The case where the light is emitted is illustrated.

FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b) show the relationship between the progress of the production during the production period of the “SP reach first half” and the valid period of the production operation unit P380 (effect button P381). As described with reference to FIG. 71, the “lamp step-up effect” is an effect operation for the “lamp step-up effect” after the “reach title display (notice)” of the heroine reach, which is the “first half of the SP reach”, is executed. The validity period of the unit P380 (effect button P381) is started. Then, the valid period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) continues until the start time of the "character character movement fanning" in the "SP reach first half", and the period expires or the "ramp step-up effect" When the progress to the "gold" stage, which is the final aspect of the above, the progress of the "ramp step-up effect" is stopped, and the light emitting state is switched to the "final stage".

FIGS. 72 (c) to 72 (i) show changes in the light emitting modes of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690.

First, when the heroine reach, which is the SP reach, is started, until the start time of the "lamp step-up effect", the story effect of the heroine reach and the light emission effect control according to the "reach title display (notice)" (normal light emission mode). Is executed. This situation is described as "normal" in FIG. 72, and indicates a situation in which light is emitted in a normal light emitting mode, which is a light emitting mode linked to a warning effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.

Next, when the effect period of the "lamp step-up effect" starts, the valid period (indicated by the black-painted period in FIG. 72) of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) is started, and the "lamp step-up effect" is started. Moves to the situation where is started. In the example of FIG. 72, it is assumed that the player is continuously executing the operation of the effect button P381 during the valid period of the effect operation unit P380.

When the effect period of the "ramp step-up effect" is started and the player operates the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381), all the light emission modes of the character character light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 are turned off. The state (which is the initial light emission mode of the "ramp step-up effect" and is described as "turn off" and "off" in the figure) is switched, and the effect of the "ramp step-up effect" is started. In addition, the initial light emission mode in the "ramp step-up effect" is not limited to turning off, but emits white light, and is a normal state linked to the main effect (SP reach effect) and the advance notice effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. Any mode may be used as long as it has distinctiveness from the light emitting mode.

When the "lamp step-up effect" is started and the light emission mode of the effect lamp P82 targeted for all the "lamp step-up effects" of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 becomes the initial light emission mode (extinguished), the following When the player operates the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381), the light emission mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 is switched to the first stage "blue" in a predetermined order. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 72, it is shown that the character accessory light emitting unit P692a is sequentially switched clockwise to the character accessory light emitting unit P692f one by one in “blue”.

In the "ramp step-up effect", there is a period indicated as "dot" immediately before the light emitting mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 is switched, but this indicates "blinking", and the light emission in the current light emitting mode is used. It is shown that the target lamp that switches to the next light emission mode is indicated by "blinking". For example, when the effect changes from "blue" to "yellow", the light emission mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 that changes next every time the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) is operated changes to "yellow" for a moment. It shows a state in which the light emission mode is switched to and the state returns to "blue" again. When the number of operations of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) satisfies the number of operations (about 1 to 3 times) which is a condition for switching the light emission mode, the light emission mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 is as follows. It is configured to switch to stages. If the number of operations for switching is one, the process directly proceeds to the next stage without going through the "point". Further, in this example, the mode of "blinking" is a momentary emission with the emission color of the next stage, but it may be "off" or "white" (the emission color of the next stage is the color that changes next). It is clear and easy to understand, and it is easy to create a chance pattern that changes from "blue" to "green" by breaking the order rules such as "blue", "yellow", and "green").

By the "ramp step-up effect", the timing at which the six light emitting units of the character accessory light emitting unit P692a to the character accessory light emitting unit P692f have the same light emitting mode (in the example of FIG. 72, the light emitting mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692f). Is changed to the next stage), the logo light emitting unit P690 is also configured to switch the light emitting mode at the same time. The logo light emitting unit P690 is a production lamp that suggests which mode will be the final mode when the "lamp step-up effect" is completed at that timing, and the sixth character character character light emitting unit P692 blinks. Even in the situation where there is, the display of the immediately preceding stage is to be continued.

The logo light emitting unit P690 may be configured to perform blinking in the same manner as the blinking of the sixth character accessory light emitting unit P692, but if this is done, the sixth character accessory light emitting unit may be configured to perform blinking. When P692 blinks, there is a possibility of falling into the illusion that it was possible to proceed to the next stage momentarily. It may be configured to output from (Note that a notification sound may be emitted even when the logo light emitting unit P690 is not interlocked with the sixth character accessory light emitting unit P692).

In the example of FIG. 72, when the stage of the production has progressed to "green" (when the light emitting mode of all the character character light emitting units P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 is "green"), the subsequent effect of the player. In the operation for the operation unit P380 (effect button P381), in the example of FIG. 72, the five light emitting units from the character character light emitting unit P692a to the character character light emitting unit P692e should be the "final stage" of this time. It changes to "red", which is the next stage of "green", and is configured to perform a production that incites whether or not expectations will increase further. In this case, the sixth character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 blink without changing to "red" no matter how many times the operation on the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) is executed. It is configured to repeat the change of the light emission mode that turns "red" for a moment and then returns to "green".

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381), which is the effect execution period of the "lamp step-up effect", expires, all the character character light emitting units P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 are activated. It is configured to emit light at the "final stage" of "green".

If the player stops the operation during the production of the "ramp step-up effect", for example, if the operation is stopped during the cycle of changing from "yellow" to "green", the "final stage" is selected by the production lottery. Even when is "green", "yellow" is displayed as "final stage".

Further, since it is configured so as not to change beyond the "final stage" determined by the effect lottery, for example, the character accessory light emitting unit P692f is repeatedly blinking in the effect cycle of "red" in FIG. 72. It may be detected that the player does not change depending on the situation, and the operation of the effect button P381 may be stopped. In such a case, it takes about 2 to 3 seconds after the operation is stopped without waiting for the expiration of the operation valid period of the effect operation unit P380, which is the effect execution period of the "lamp step-up effect". It may be configured to switch to the display mode of the "final stage" in the timing.

After the end of the "ramp step-up effect", when the effect period of the "character accessory movement fan" comes, the "ramp step" is set according to the start time of the operation of the character accessory P691 which is started from a predetermined timing of the period. The light emission mode at the final stage of the "up effect" effect is switched to a mode that gives priority to the light emission mode linked to the effect of the "character accessory movement fanning". During this period, the "final stage" light emission effect control of the "lamp step-up effect" effect is not visible to the player, but is continued, and in FIG. 72, the light emission effect for the "lamp step-up effect" effect is continued. In order to indicate that the control "green" is being executed, and at the same time, to indicate that the light emission effect control (normal light emission mode linked to the advance notice effect) based on the "character character movement fanning" is executed repeatedly, " Green (normal) "is shown.

<< Production example 2_Lamp step-up production (final stage: final result "gold" end, hit fluctuation) >>
Subsequently, a second example of the effect when the "ramp step-up effect" is executed during the effect period of the "SP reach first half" will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is an example of a case where the SP reach, which is a high expectation reach, is executed with a hit fluctuation, and shows an example of an effect when the “ramp step-up effect” is the final stage “gold” with the highest expectation. ing. In the following description of the production example 2, since there are many parts that overlap with the production example 1, the differences will be mainly described.

First, the contents of the production performed during the production period of the "SP reach first half" will be explained.

In the case of the hit variation of the production example 2, the configuration of the production content executed in the production period of the “SP reach first half” is almost the same, and the execution pattern is different from the case of the deviation fluctuation shown in FIG. 71. Is shown. That is, the example of FIG. 73 shows a situation in which various effects are executed in the execution pattern of the advance notice effect in which the expectation of the big hit is relatively higher than that of FIG. 71.

In the example of FIG. 73, when the heroine reach is started and the "title display (notice)" effect is executed, the title displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 by the "title display (notice)" is "red". The title is displayed in the basic color. It is displayed in a chance pattern. The display of the chance pattern is configured so that the display is once performed in the normal pattern and then switched to the chance pattern. At this time, the effect lamp P82 emits light in accordance with the timing at which the display mode of the title display is switched. It is configured to emphasize that the "title display (notice)" has been switched to the chance mode by emitting light in a color based on "red".

Further, in the example of FIG. 73, the “ramp step-up effect” is executed, and the process proceeds until the light emitting mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 becomes “gold”. The main difference from 1 is only the display mode (progress of the production) of the "final stage", and detailed explanation is omitted.

If the "lamp step-up effect" progresses to "red" or "gold" (and its higher-ranking premier), which is the "final stage" aspect of high expectations, "green" or "yellow" should be used. It is configured so that it is easier to adopt a light emission mode switching method that suggests that it is more likely to reach the higher "final stage" in the progress process of the "lamp step-up effect" than in the case of the "final stage". You may. For example, in the example of the switching method of the basic light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the six character character light emitting units P692 are configured to light clockwise from the character character light emitting unit P692a. In the chance mode, switching of the light emitting mode is started from a lamp other than the character accessory light emitting unit P692a, the light emitting mode is switched in a counterclockwise order, the light emitting mode is switched in a random order, or a plurality of light emitting modes are switched. The character character character light emitting unit P692 may be configured to execute a light emitting mode switching method such as switching the light emitting mode at once, or the effect cycle may be omitted from "blue" or "yellow". By making anomalous changes such as changing to "red", it tends to be easier to reach the "final stage" with higher expectations than the basic light emission mode switching method shown in FIGS. 71 and 72. An example is given which makes it possible to determine the execution pattern of the "ramp step-up effect".

Next, a production example of the production period of "SP reach second half development" in the case of hit fluctuation will be described.

As the production of the production period of "SP reach second half development" shown in FIG. 73, an example in which the production operation of the character character P691 is executed is shown as in the case of FIG. 71, but the expectation of a big hit is higher. The embodiment is shown in FIG. 73.

As a high-expected production execution pattern (strong pattern) of the production operation of the character character P691 used for the latter half of the SP reach, the light emission mode of the production lamp P82 during the production operation of the character character P691 is based on "red". An example is shown in which an effect of emitting light in the same color is executed (in the case of a weak pattern, it emits light in "purple"). In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, as the production operation of the character character P691 developed in the latter half of the SP reach, in addition to the weak pattern shown in FIG. 71 and the strong pattern shown in FIG. It is configured to have a "promotion pattern" in which the effect lamps P82 arranged below the gaming board are sequentially switched to red after the light is emitted. The jackpot expectation of each pattern is configured so that the expectation increases in the order of "weak pattern" <"strong pattern" <"promotion pattern". In addition, when the "promotion pattern" is executed, the player realizes that the production operation period of the character character P691 is set longer than in the case of the "weak pattern" or the "strong pattern", and the degree of expectation is increasing. It is configured to be able to.

Next, an example of production in the production period of "SP reach second half" in the case of hit fluctuation will be described.

Regarding the example of the latter half of the heroine reach in the hit variation of the production example 2, the difference from the production example 1 is whether or not the “telop chance up” is executed.

In the "telop chance up" production executed in the production example 2, the telop display corresponding to the dialogue of the reach production is a normal display mode (for example, white text color) at the early timing after the latter half of the heroine reach begins. It is configured to change from the display mode of the chance mode (for example, the character color of red). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the effect operation of the character character P691 (for example, the character character P691d arranged in the vicinity of the telop rises) in accordance with the timing when the telop display changes to the chance mode. (Returning effect operation) is executed, and at this time, the effect lamp P82 is configured to emit light in a light emitting mode based on a light emitting color (“red”) corresponding to the chance mode of telop display.

In the "telop chance up" effect, when the effect lamp P82 (particularly the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690) executes the light emission effect corresponding to the "telop chance up", the light emission effect of the "lamp step-up effect" is performed. Control is given priority over. The light emitting effect corresponding to the "telop chance up" effect is limited to the character accessory P691d that performs the effect operation and the effect lamp P82 in the vicinity thereof, and in the other light emitting parts, the "lamp step up effect" is used. The light emission mode of the "final stage" may be controlled so as to be visible.

Finally, an example of the production during the production period of "hit notification" will be described.

When the winning result is notified in the winning branch production executed in the production period of "SP reach second half", the production period of "hit notification" is started, and the story of the heroine reach gives the player an advantageous result. A story effect is displayed to inform that the end of the suggested mode has been reached.

During the "hit notification" effect period, the "lamp step-up effect" has already ended, and as shown in FIGS. 73 (c) and 73 (d), the heroine is used as the light emission effect control of the effect lamp P82. A rainbow-colored light emission effect (hit notification light emission effect) is executed as a light emission effect control (normal light emission mode) for the reach hit effect.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment configured as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a highly interesting light emitting effect using the effect lamp P82 by executing the "ramp step-up effect". It becomes. In particular, by using a plurality of light emitting units so as to change the light emitting mode so as to gradually increase the degree of expectation, the situation in which the degree of expectation is increased due to the state of change in the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting units. It is possible to experience it as the "ramp step-up effect" progresses, and it is possible to induce an increase in the expectation of the player according to the change of the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the execution of the "ramp step-up effect" is configured to be executed by using the character character character P691 which is the effect character P560, and the light emitting unit having a high degree of attention. Since the execution of the "ramp step-up effect" progresses in, it is possible to configure it so that it is easy to raise interest in the subsequent operation of the character character P691, and the character character P691 at the timing of the latter half of SP reach development. It is easier to pay attention to the production operation of the character character P691 at the timing of the production operation and the winning branch effect, and it is easier to raise the interest in the production of important timing such as reach development with high expectations and notification of hits. There is.

Then, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, when the "ramp step-up effect" is executed, two light-emitting units (character accessory light-emitting unit P692 and logo light-emitting unit) having different effects are among the plurality of light-emitting units. P690) is used to provide the player with a combination of a light emitting unit (character accessory light emitting unit P692) that suggests the presence or absence of development to the next stage and a light emitting unit (logo light emitting unit P690) that suggests the final stage. The light emitting part (logo light emitting part P690) that suggests the final stage always makes it easy to understand the progress of the suggestion situation of the expected degree that the effect is advantageous, and the light emitting part that suggests the development to the next stage (the light emitting part (logo light emitting part P690)). The character character light emitting unit P692) makes it possible to carry out a highly entertaining production in which a change to a higher degree of expectation is expected.

Further, the light emission effect control of the "final stage" after the execution of the "lamp step-up effect" is performed even after the execution period of the "lamp step-up effect" (the operation valid period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381)) has expired. The game is continued for a while, and the light emission effect control for suggesting the possibility of obtaining a favorable result for the player based on the "ramp step-up effect" is continued until a predetermined timing in the progress of the subsequent effect. It can be configured to make the person fully aware of the possibility of obtaining favorable results for the player.

Subsequently, some examples of applicable modifications will be illustrated with respect to the "ramp step-up effect" of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment.

<Modification 1>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, as the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect", the most promising mode was explained as "gold", but the SP reach was executed with a hit fluctuation. If so, it may be configured to have "rainbow color" as a premier pattern for deterministically notifying that it is a hit.

As a premier pattern, when the "final stage" is set to "rainbow color" when executing the "lamp step-up effect" effect, as shown in the effect example of the sixth embodiment, the character accessory light emitting unit P692 Until the logo light emitting part P690 becomes "gold", the same effect as when the "final stage" of the "lamp step-up effect" is "gold" is performed, and when it becomes "gold", the subsequent effect is performed. The mode of light emission effect control relating to the progress of the "lamp step-up effect" is a special control.

More specifically, when the "lamp step-up effect" with "rainbow color" as the "final stage" is executed as the premier pattern, the character character light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 become "gold". After that, even if the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) is pressed, it is configured so that no change occurs in appearance, and as a player, whether or not it changes to "rainbow color" is fueled. The production progresses in an unknown situation. Then, after the character accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 become "gold", when the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), the character is executed. All the light emitting units of the accessory light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690 are configured to suddenly switch to "rainbow-colored" light emitting.

In this way, after reaching the final stage of "gold", which is set with the highest expectation as the execution mode of the normal "ramp step-up effect" that can be selected even with out-of-range fluctuations, the premier pattern can be selected only by hit fluctuations. By making the change of It is possible to enhance the interest of "step-up production".

<Modification 2>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the light emitting effect device using the light guide plate (not shown) is arranged in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 at the opening of the center accessory P540. When executing the "lamp step-up effect", a light emitting effect using the light emitting portion of the light guide plate may be combined and configured to be feasible.

More specifically, when the "lamp step-up effect" is executed, the light guide plate of the light guide plate is at the timing when the cycle of the effect is completed and the timing at which the light emitting mode of the logo light emitting unit P690 is switched (excluding the timing at which the light emitting mode is switched to the initial light emitting mode). The light emitting unit may be configured to temporarily emit light with the same light emitting color as the logo light emitting unit P690.

In addition, when the light emitting part of such a light guide plate is interlocked, the light emitting mode with high expectation that the ending of the reach effect is advantageous to the player, such as "red", "gold", and "rainbow color". It is advantageous for the player because the light emitting part of the light guide plate is limited to the timing of change, and when the light emitting part of the light guide plate is combined with the "ramp step-up effect" and executed, the light emitting part corresponding to the back button effect increases. It may be configured to make the player recognize that the expectation of the result is higher.

Also, as a similar variant, when the "lamp step-up effect" becomes "gold", it is to suggest that it will develop into a reach effect with a higher expectation that is not related to the story of the first half of the heroine reach. Only when the light emitting mode is "gold", an implementation method in which the light emitting portion of the light guide plate is linked to the "lamp step-up effect" can be considered.

<Modification 3>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, as a "ramp step-up effect", the six light emitting units of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 are switched one by one (or a plurality) in order, and all the light emitting units are switched. When the same mode is switched, the production cycle of 1 is completed and the process proceeds to the next stage. However, under the circumstances other than the case where long-term fluctuation such as SP reach is performed, the sixth embodiment is used. With a method of switching light emission modes such as the pachinko gaming machine P, there is a possibility that it cannot be executed in a limited time.

Therefore, the progress mode of the production of the "lamp step-up effect" (the mode of the process in which the stage suggesting a result advantageous to the player progresses) is expected every time the lighting portion of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 increases. May be configured to increase. That is, when the character accessory light emitting unit P692a lights up in white, the character accessory light emitting unit P692b lights up, and when the character accessory light emitting units P692a and b emit blue light, the character accessory light emitting unit P692a lights up in the second stage. The number of lighting locations and lighting locations according to the progress of the "ramp step-up effect", such as the situation where the light emitting unit P692c lights up and the character accessory light emitting units P692a, b, and c emit yellow light in the third stage. By configuring the light emitting mode to switch sequentially, it is possible to display the progress status of the "ramp step-up effect" with a maximum of 6 changes, which is from the mode shown in the effect example of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment. However, the total number of switching of the light emitting mode is suppressed, and the effect can be executed even within the limited effect time.

<Modification example 4>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, during the production period of "SP reach second half development", the production operation of the character character P691 is executed, and the degree of expectation that the execution pattern gives a favorable result (big hit) to the player. However, the content of the reach effect developed in the "SP reach second half" may be different depending on the execution pattern of the effect operation of the character character P691 in the effect period of the "SP reach second half development". For example, when executed in the "promotion pattern", a special character appears in the display area of the effect display device P80 in conjunction with the effect lamp P82 gradually switching from "purple" to "red" from the bottom. It may be configured to shift to a special reach effect in which a special character that appeared in the "second half of SP reach" is displayed.

<Modification 5>
In the production example of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the light emission effect controlled with priority over the light emission effect control indicating the "final stage" of the "lamp step-up effect" (for example, "character character movement fanning"". Also, I explained that there is a light emission during the production operation of the character character P691 of "reach second half development", "cut-in before hitting branch", etc.), but the light emission of "lamp step-up production" rather than these productions. The effect control may be preferentially executed, and the execution of the "ramp step-up effect" may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, the start timing of the winning branch effect).

In addition, as a condition in which the light emission effect control of the "lamp step-up effect" is prioritized over the light emission effect control corresponding to other effects, the "final stage" of the "lamp step-up effect" has a pattern of expectation of "red" or higher. If it is the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" with low expectations by adding certain conditions, the light emission effect linked to the effect is given priority by giving priority to the light emission effect control based on other effects. On the other hand, if the expectations are high, it is expected that the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" will continue to be displayed and favorable results will be displayed until the final development. It may be configured so that the feeling can be easily maintained.

<Modification 6>
In the production example of the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the production of the “lamp step-up effect” is configured to proceed in a format not related to the effect display in the display area of the effect display device P80, but it is a modified example. The effect related to the “lamp step-up effect” may be configured to be displayable in the display area of the effect display device P80.

FIG. 74 shows an example of an effect when the effect display related to the “lamp step-up effect” is displayed on the effect display device P80.

In the example of FIG. 74, the cut-in image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 at the timing when the effect cycle of the “lamp step-up effect” is completed, and the cut-in image (character accessory light emission) is displayed from the speaker P83. It is configured to output the dialogue corresponding to the cut-in image of the heroine character corresponding to the character symbol of 1 of the effect sheet of the part P692.

When displaying such a cut-in image, the appearance of the story effect of the reach effect is greatly affected. Therefore, for example, the "lamp step-up effect" exceeds a certain degree of expectation such as "green" or "red". The related display of the "lamp step-up effect" to the effect display device P80 may be configured to be executable only at the timing. Further, the effect related to the "lamp step-up effect" does not have to be the display of the effect display device P80, and at the timing when one effect cycle of the "lamp step-up effect" is completed, for example, the character accessory light emitting unit. It is also possible to execute an example in which one of P692 emits light in a manner different from the other, and the character corresponding to the light emitting unit outputs an effect of speaking a line indicating that the degree of expectation is increasing from the speaker P83.

In addition, when displaying a cut-in image or outputting dialogue from the speaker P83, the main character or the heroine character and the heroine are displayed in addition to the heroine character, or the dialogue of the main character or the main character and the heroine are displayed. It is also possible to provide a chance pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, such as outputting a character's dialogue.

Further, as a display of the effect display device P80 related to the "lamp step-up effect", an effect (effect) related to the light emission mode of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 around the character accessory P691. ) It may be configured to display an image. By displaying the effect image in this way, the effect lamp P82 (particularly the character character light emitting unit P692 and the logo light emitting unit P690) emits light based on the "lamp step-up effect" when an error occurs in the gaming machine. Even when the effect control is not possible, the progress of the "ramp step-up effect" can be confirmed in the effect image displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. Combining the effect image with the light emission effect control of the "ramp step-up effect" can be expected to have the effect of simply enhancing the effect of the "ramp step-up effect" in addition to the countermeasures in case of an error. ..

<Modification 7>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, an example is shown in which the character accessory light emitting unit P692 is developed so as to increase the degree of expectation by switching the emission color by displaying the character symbol. The step-up effect may be executed in a manner of displaying another effect sheet (sheet on which a character pattern is printed) provided on P692.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, the character character light emitting unit P692a to the character character light emitting unit P692f have "mystery" (character character light emitting unit P692d), "good" and "machine" (character character e), respectively. , C), "High", "Period", "Waiting" (Character character character light emitting unit P692f, a, b) Since the effect sheet on which the character pattern is printed is arranged, the lower part of the character character character light emitting unit P692. Therefore, it may be configured to execute a "ramp step-up effect" in which the lighting mode is sequentially switched between the first stage "mystery", the second stage "opportunity", and the third stage "high expectation".

<Modification 8>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, it was explained that the "ramp step-up effect" is executed as the back button effect during the execution period of the SP reach, but the back button effect does not display the effect button image P881 or the like. Since it is an effect period in which the player is not positively notified that the operation input effect is being executed, the player unintentionally touches the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) and "lamp step up". If the light emission effect is controlled in the initial light emission mode of the "effect", the progress of the reach effect may be affected.

Therefore, during the period from the start of the initial light emission mode of the "ramp step-up effect" to the completion of the effect cycle of the first stage (change of the light emission mode to "blue"), the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) If the operation is not performed for a certain period of time, it may be configured to return to the light emission effect control of the normal light emission mode, which is the light emission effect control linked to the reach effect and the advance notice effect.

<Modification 9>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment, an example of the light emission effect control of "ramp step-up effect" is shown as the light emission effect control using the character accessory light emitting unit P692, but the light emitting unit of the effect character P560 is used. As an example of the light emission effect, the light emission effect control other than the notice related to whether or not the player has obtained an advantageous result can also be applied.

FIG. 75 shows an example of the volume / light amount adjustment function, in which the light emitting unit of the character accessory light emitting unit P692 is used to perform notification regarding the volume adjustment in a plurality of light emitting units during the period when the volume adjustment is being executed. ing.

FIG. 75 shows a situation in which the four light emitting units P692b, c, d, and e of the character accessory are lit and the currently set volume value is 4 (the total volume is 4). The voice of the heroine character printed on the production sheet of the character accessory light emitting unit P692b that was lit when set to is output, "The volume is" 4 "!").

In this way, regarding the setting of the production environment such as the volume and the amount of light, the light emitting unit of the character accessory light emitting unit P692, which is a plurality of light emitting units, is used to display the setting degree of the effect and is arranged in the plurality of light emitting units. By configuring the character corresponding to the character design of the production sheet to perform navigation related to the setting degree of the current production environment, various characters can be notified in a production manner regarding the setting of the production environment. It will be possible to enhance the interest of the production even in the setting of the production environment.

[7th Example]
The pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration based on the above-mentioned prerequisite technology. Hereinafter, the differences from the prerequisite technology will be mainly described, and the common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the same or corresponding elements as those described in the prerequisite technique will be described with the same reference numerals.

[Machine configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment]
The mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine P according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the appearance of the front view of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. 77 to 81 show the mechanical configuration of the center decoration unit P6 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment (in particular, the superior object P650, the horizontal accessory P670, and the lower accessory P680 as the directing accessory P560). It is a figure.

FIG. 76 shows the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment as viewed from the player side. The differences between the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment and the premised pachinko gaming machine are the arrangement configuration of various winning devices such as the first starting winning device P710 and the large winning opening P750 in the gaming board P5, and the center decoration unit. It is the configuration of the production accessory P560 provided in P6, and various configurations of the other gaming machines are the same as those of the presupposed pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, the arrangement configuration of various winning devices in the gaming area P501 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described.

(Composition of the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 76, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the center decoration unit P6 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the left side area P501L (left-handed area) sandwiches the center decoration unit P6. It is divided into a right side region P501R (right-handed region).

The left side region P501L is a gaming region in which the gaming ball tends to flow down when the firing intensity of the gaming ball is relatively weak, and as shown in FIG. 76, the first starting winning unit P710 (first starting) is located below the center of the gaming region. The winning openings P711) are arranged, and three general winning openings P730 are arranged as the left general winning unit P730L on the lower left side of the game area.

The right side area P501R is a game area in which the game ball easily flows down when the firing strength of the game ball is relatively strong, and the second start winning unit P720A (2nd start winning unit P720A related to the ordinary electric accessory P770 is located at the lower right of the center decoration unit P6. The second starting winning opening P721A) and the large winning opening unit P750 are provided at the lower right position of the game area P501R. The large winning opening P750 unit is provided with a large winning opening P751 and an operating opening P741.

In the right side region P501R, a second starting winning unit P720B (second starting winning opening P721B) without a normal electric accessory P770 is further provided on the left side of the large winning opening unit P750.

Here, the first start winning opening P711 in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as "special drawing 1"), and is a second starting winning opening. P721A and the second starting winning opening P721B are starting winning openings corresponding to the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as "special drawing 2").

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the normal game (low probability / low base), the player fires a game ball toward the left side region P501L (left-handed region) (left-handed). ), The basic game is to put a game ball into the first start winning opening P711 and receive a lottery related to the first special symbol to acquire the right to shift to a special game state (big hit, small hit). Designed as a sex.

On the other hand, in the normal game state and the specific game (at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is operating) or the special game state (during the big hit game and the small hit game), the player is in the right area P501R (during the big hit game and the small hit game). Special by launching a game ball toward (right-handed area) (right-handed), inserting the game ball into the second start winning opening P721A or the second starting winning opening P721B, and receiving a lottery related to the second special symbol. Aiming to acquire the right to shift to the game state (big hit, small hit), during the big hit game or small hit game, it is possible to aim to get a large amount of prize balls by entering the game ball into the big prize opening P751. Designed for basic playability.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is configured to have the arrangement configuration of various winning devices in the above-mentioned gaming area P501 and basic game playability, but it does not affect the effects and game control described later. Or, if the relevance is low, it can be changed as appropriate.

(Structure of the center decoration unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment)
Next, using FIGS. 77 to 81, the directing accessory P560 (also referred to as “directing movable accessory” or “movable accessory”) provided in the center decoration unit P6 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment). Will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 77, the effect P560 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is a representative effect P560 that can advance to the front of the effect display device P80 (effect display device). Three movable accessories (exposed, concealed, etc.) are provided so as to reduce the visibility of at least a part of the display area of the P80. Although not illustrated and described in detail in the seventh embodiment, the visibility of the display area of the effect display device P80 is not affected so as not to advance to the front of the display area of the effect display device P80. It is composed of an effect device that operates with almost no change in position, and an effect operation means P81 (effect button P381, lever P382) as a frame movable object P360 provided in the game machine frame (glass frame P3) shown in FIG. The production operation unit P380) is also included in the “production accessory P560 (production movable accessory)”.

As a production accessory P560 in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, a superior object P650 is arranged in the upper region of the production display device P80, and a horizontal character P670L and a horizontal character are arranged on the left and right sides of the effect display device P80. The P670R is arranged, and the lower part P680 is arranged below the effect display device P80.

《Superior》
The pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is provided with a superior object P650 on the upper part of the center decoration unit P6, and in a normal standby state, as shown in FIG. 77, on the upper side of the display area of the effect display device P80. It is in the retracted state, and when performing the effect operation, it advances to the front of the display area of the effect display device P80 as shown in FIGS. 78 and 81.

In the superior object P650, the elevating belt P654 (not shown) is rotated by the operation of the elevating motor P653 (not shown) from the initial state shown in FIG. 77 (detection state of the elevating initial position sensor P657 (not shown)), and the elevating belt P654 (not shown) is The central decorative portion P651 and the rotary decorative portion P652 perform a descending operation according to an elevating guide (not shown) until the indicated state is reached (until the detection state of the elevating effect position sensor P658 (not shown)).

Further, the superior object P650 is in a state of being lowered to the position of FIG. 81, and the rotation decoration portion P652 is expanded by the action of the rotation motor P659 (not shown) until the effect state shown in FIG. 78 is reached, and the rotation decoration is performed from that state. The decorative part imitating the five petals, which is the part P652, rotates clockwise. The operating position of the rotation decoration unit P652 is controlled by a rotation position sensor P660 (rotational initial position sensor) (not shown), and in order to bring the rotation decoration unit P652 into a non-deployed state, it is constant after the detection of the rotation position sensor P660. By rotating the rotating decorative portion P652 counterclockwise from a state in which the rotating decorative portion P652 is rotated by an amount or more, the rotating decorative portion P652 is housed and becomes a non-deployed state.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the superior object P650 is used during a production operation that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is increased (for example, when notifying the development of SP reach or a specific high expectation reach). , The effect operation content is set so as to deterministically notify that it is a big hit in the effect of notifying the end of the reach effect (sometimes referred to as "winning branch effect"). Therefore, the frequency of the effect movement is set to be relatively low compared to the other production accessory P560, and the operation of the superior object P650 reminds the player of a high expectation, or the player's movement. It is a movement that has the meaning of congratulating the acquisition of a big hit, "texture movement" (texture production). In this way, the superior character P650 plays a major role in notifying the effect of raising expectations and the hit itself with respect to the event of the highest interest of the player, such as the game result (whether or not). Alternatively, it may be referred to as "main production character", "texture character"), or the like.

In the operating state of FIG. 78, the superior object P650 is operating at the same time as the horizontal accessory P670 described later, and both the superior object P650 and the lateral accessory P670 are configured so as not to interfere with each other. .. On the other hand, if the upper accessory P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 operate at the same time as the lower accessory P680, they may come into contact with each other (interfere with each other) and do not move to the effect position at the same time. ing.

Further, the superior object P650 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment has a position shown in FIG. 81 in addition to the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern) which is an effect operation pattern accompanied by the expansion of the rotation decoration portion P652 described above. It is possible to execute a second effect operation pattern (weak pattern), which ends at the stage of moving to, or performs an operation of slightly moving up and down in the vicinity of the position shown in FIG. 81 and ends with an operation in which the rotation decoration unit P652 is not expanded. At this time, the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern) operates to suggest the development of a specific reach or to notify the final effect result (or the result of the winning / failing lottery) such as the reach. , The second production operation pattern (weak pattern) is used to suggest the development to a production with a low expectation even in a specific reach or SP reach, and is used in a special situation (“B reach” described later). (Lever chance) ”), the second effect operation pattern is not used when notifying the effect result (note that the probability is lower than when the first effect operation pattern is executed, but the second effect pattern). Even when the effect operation pattern is executed, there is a possibility that it will develop into a reach effect with a high degree of expectation as it develops in the first effect operation pattern).

When the superior object P650 operates, as shown in FIG. 81, the superior object operation effect P870 can be displayed in the display area located around the superior object P650 of the effect display device P80. In particular, as shown in FIG. 78, the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern) is configured to display the accessory full-screen effect P873 in the entire display area of the effect display device P80 when operating. ..

The superior object motion effect P870 and the accessory full-screen effect P873 have a plurality of display modes (for example, white, green, red, gold, etc.) according to the jackpot expectation of the variable display of the special symbol accompanied by the motion of the superior object P650. When the giraffe pattern (maker pattern), rainbow color) can be displayed and the effect operation of the superior object P650 executes the first effect operation pattern, the character full screen effect P873 is red or more (red, It is displayed in a display mode (gold, giraffe pattern, rainbow color).

Further, the superior object motion effect P870 and the accessory full-screen effect P873 are displayed with priority over the advance notice effect, reach effect, and decorative pattern P801 (displayed in the upper display layer), while the simple drawing P802. The display priority is set so that the display of information indicating the game status such as the right-handed small display (P832), the left-handed small display (P834)), and the simple hold display P814 can be visually recognized. It is set.

《Horizontal character》
The pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is provided with horizontal characters P670 on the left and right sides of the center decoration unit P6. In the state in which the horizontal accessory P670 is normally in standby (non-execution state of the effect), as shown in FIG. 77 (and FIG. 79), the horizontal upper decorative portion P671L, R, the horizontal center decorative portion P672L, R, and the horizontal lower The decorative portions P673L and R are in a state of waiting by expanding in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 79, the horizontal accessory P670 has the horizontal upper decorative portions P671L, R, the horizontal center decorative portions P672L, R, and the horizontal lower decorative portions P673L, R from both side portions of the center decoration unit P6. It is configured to advance while keeping the relative positional relationship in the vertical direction close to each other.

The horizontal accessory P670L arranged on the left side and the horizontal accessory P670R arranged on the right side are each driven by a stepping motor (drive motor P674) (not shown) which is an individual drive source, and the drive motor P674 on the left side. When is driven, the horizontal upper decorative portion P671L and the horizontal center decorative portion P672L are directed toward the center of the display area of the effect display device P80 by the action of a drive transmission mechanism (for example, a rack & pinion mechanism or a link mechanism) (not shown). , The horizontal lower decorative portion P673L is configured to operate (the explanation is omitted, but the same applies to the horizontal accessory P670R arranged on the right side).

The operating positions of the horizontal accessory P670L and the horizontal accessory P670R detect the storage position sensors P675L and R for detecting the initial position provided corresponding to each, and the effect operation position provided corresponding to each. It is detected by the shielding position sensors P676L and R for the purpose of.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the horizontal character P670 is a pre-reach advance notice effect, a look-ahead effect, a post-reach advance notice during the reach effect, and a decorative pattern (special design) at the start of fluctuation or before the reach effect. It is configured so that it is possible to perform an operation effect at any timing such as a liveliness before and after the temporary stop (including) and a timing when the chance eye is finally stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect. This is the most frequently operated effect P560 among the three effect P560s typically described in the pachinko gaming machine P.

Such an operation of the horizontal character P670 may be incorporated into the production as a part of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice, post-reach advance notice), or it may be combined with the advance notice effect as a look-ahead effect independent of the advance notice effect. The purpose is to create an effect that raises the expectation that the advance notice production will lead to a suitable ending for the player and that the subsequent production content will be changed to a production content with high expectation for big hits. It is set.

As described above, the purpose of the horizontal accessory P670 is to directly notify the big hit only by the operation of the horizontal accessory P670 and to suggest that the expectation of the big hit is very high, like the above-mentioned superior object P650. It is not set, and the purpose is to create a lively effect to enhance the gorgeousness and appearance of the entire production by combining it with other production devices such as the production display device P80, other production accessories P560, and speakers P83. It is a secondary production that is used as a speaker. Therefore, the horizontal character P670 may be referred to as a "sub-directing character" (or "sub-directing character", "lively character", etc.).

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a state when the horizontal accessory P670 is performing an effect operation. In FIG. 79, the horizontal upper decorative portion P671L, R, the horizontal center decorative portion P672L, R, and the horizontal lower decorative portion P673L, R of the horizontal accessory P670 are in a state of shielding the display area of the effect display device P80. Whether or not the special design P804 (a symbol described as "NEXT" and a "pseudo-ream" effect is performed when the stop is displayed), which is a decorative symbol for a special effect, is temporarily stopped during the execution of the normal reach. It is a situation that is inciting the player.

In FIG. 79, the left decorative symbol P801L and the right decorative symbol P801R that are already in the stop display state (or the temporary stop display state) are displayed smaller than the middle decorative symbol P801C that is about to be stopped and displayed as a special design. It is highlighted by the operation of the horizontal effect object P670 and the horizontal character motion effect P871 whether or not the special design is stopped as the intermediate decorative symbol P801C (already displayed as the first and second stop symbols). The left and right decorative symbols P801L and R are displayed small in a position that avoids interference with the horizontal accessory P670 in order to recognize the tempai symbol or not to reduce the visibility. If it is not the purpose, the left and right decorative patterns P801L and R may be hidden).

In the example of FIG. 79, the display area of the effect display device P80 (the display area not hidden behind the horizontal character P670), which is easy to see when the horizontal character P670 is moved to the shielding position, is not yet displayed. The special design P804 is displayed larger than the normal decorative symbol P801 in the stop decorative symbol row (decorative symbol row that is not in the temporary stop display mode), and has already been displayed in the other stop display mode (temporary stop display mode). The decorative symbol P801 of the decorative symbol row (left column, right column) of is displayed small. By displaying in this way, the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol configured as the final stop symbol row is attracted by the player by limiting the area that can be visually recognized by the shielding of the horizontal accessory P670. Can be done.

In such a situation that at least a part of the display area of the effect display device P80 is shielded by the operation of the effect object P560, the timing for drawing attention to the display of the decorative symbol, which is the next stop display mode, is pseudo. It can be applied not only to continuous production but also to reach production. Further, not only in the final stop symbol row, but also at least a part of the display area of the effect display device P80 by the operation of the effect accessory P560 at the time of the stop display of the second stop symbol row that switches to the second stop display mode. It can also be used to shield and draw attention to whether it forms a reach mode with a symbol sequence that has already been stopped and displayed.

Further, the horizontal object motion effect P871 has a plurality of effect patterns (for example, when the display color is white, blue, green, or red, or the display size is small, medium, or large) as in the superior object motion effect P870. In some cases, the operation animation of the effect is different, etc.), and the possibility (expectation degree) of producing an effect advantageous to the player differs depending on the display mode. For example, in the example of FIG. 79, when the horizontal object motion effect P871 is white, the special design P804 (“NEXT” symbol) is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol P801C, and a symbol such as “4” is displayed as it is. There is a high possibility that an outlier mode such as "343" will be notified, and when the horizontal object motion effect P871 is red, the special equipment drawing P804 is always stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-rearrangement (pseudo-variation) is performed again. An example is given.

As mentioned earlier, the horizontal accessory P670 starts the operation at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation as a warning effect before the reach, or operates at the timing of the end of the fluctuation such as the stop of the chance eye such as the end of the fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 79, since it is a production accessory P560 that includes and operates relatively frequently, it is configured so that there is no or less interference with the simple mounting drawing P802 and the simple hold display P814 during the production operation. (That is, the display position of the display indicating the game state such as the simple loading P804 and the simple hold display P814 or the not shown separate notification P830 is determined based on the operating range of the horizontal accessory P670). The display position of the simple loading drawing P802 and the simple hold display P814 may be determined including the operating range of other accessories such as the upper accessory P650 and the lower accessory P680 described later, but the seventh implementation In the pachinko gaming machine P of the example, the display position is determined based on the horizontal character P670, which is the effect character P560 that is easy to operate immediately after the start of the fluctuation and immediately before the stop of the fluctuation. If the lower accessory P680 is easy to operate at the timing before and after the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop like the horizontal accessory P670, the simplified drawing P804 or the simple drawing P804 based on the operating range of the horizontal accessory P670 and the lower accessory P680. It is preferable to determine the display position of the simple hold display P814 (the textured accessory is basically configured to return to the initial position by the end of the fluctuation under any situation if there is no abnormality or the like. Therefore, do not consider it).

Further, as shown in FIG. 79, the accessory motion effect such as the horizontal accessory motion effect P871 is displayed (displayed in the upper display layer) in preference to the display of the decorative symbol P801 or the like or the advance notice effect. , The display priority is lower than the operation promotion image (button image P881 etc.) that prompts the operation of the effect operation means P81 such as the effect button P381 displayed to instruct the player of the effect content, and the above simple drawing Rather than the display for making the player recognize the state of the game even in the situation where the effecting object P560 is operating, such as display information indicating the game state such as P804, the simple hold display P814, or the not shown separate notification P830. The display priority is set low.

《Subordinates》
The pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is provided with a lower part P680 at the lower part of the center decoration unit P6. In the normal standby state (non-execution state of the effect), the lower accessory P680 is in a state of evacuating from the display area of the effect display device P80 and waiting as shown in FIG. 77. On the other hand, when the lower accessory P680 is executing the effect operation, as shown in FIG. 80, the lower accessory P680 rises to a position where the visibility of the lower region of the display area of the effect display device P80 is reduced, and the lower accessory P680 The central decorative portion P681 and the pinnate decorative portion P682 are in an easily visible state.

The operation of the lower object P680 is driven by a drive motor P684 (not shown), and when the drive motor P684 rotates, a rack & pinion mechanism (not shown) is activated, and the central decorative portion P681 rises to the lower position sensor P686 (initial position). It is possible to move up and down within the detection range (effect operation range) of the position sensor P687 (effect position). In the feather-shaped decorative portion P682 of the lower accessory P680, the connecting gear (not shown) rotates in conjunction with the elevating operation of the central decorative portion P681, and the central decorative portion P681 is moved in accordance with the operation of raising the central decorative portion P681. It switches from a state of downward inclination toward the outside as a center to an upwardly inclined state (state shown in FIG. 80).

The operation range in the effect operation of the lower accessory P680 overlaps with the respective effect range of the upper accessory P650 and the horizontal accessory P670, and either the superior object P650 or the horizontal accessory P670 operates at the same time. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, only the one in which the effect operation of the lower character P680 is performed independently is prepared because there is a possibility of interfering with each other. It should be noted that the effectants P560 can operate at the same time as the upper accessory P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 in FIG. 78 as long as they do not interfere with each other within the operating range. However, the more the effect P560 that operates at the same time, the more power is devoted to the operation of the effect P560, and other effect devices and control devices such as the effect control CPU of the effect control board P41, the effect lamp P82, and the speaker P83. In some cases, an electrical limit may be provided to limit the combination of the effectors P560 that can be driven at the same time (the total current value when a plurality of effectors P560 are driven). be.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the lower accessory P680 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. The lower character P680 is a "sub-directing character" similar to the horizontal character P670 described above, and is set to have a relatively higher production execution frequency than the superior character P650, which is the "main production character". It is a directing character P560.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the subordinate object P680 is related to the content of the advance notice effect, such as when a character appears in the advance notice effect (see FIG. 80) or immediately after the start of re-variation of the decorative symbol P801 in the pseudo-continuous effect. The effect operation for the purpose of executing a certain effect is mainly set, and the effect display device P80 is performed in combination with the display content of the effect display device P80 like the horizontal character P670. The effect operation is set so that it is rarely used as an effect suggesting a content different from the display content of the above (Note that the effect operation pattern used as a look-ahead effect may also be set for the lower character P680). .. Since the lower character P680 set in this way is a production character that has more production operation contents in a situation where there is an effect that leads to the subsequent effect as the effect content than the horizontal character P670, the horizontal character P670 operates. It is a directing role that makes it easier for the player to get a sense of expectation about winning a big hit than if he did.

In the effect example of FIG. 80, as a post-reach advance notice effect (notice during reach effect), a character cut-in (an effect in which a band-shaped character image is superimposed and displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device P80) and a subordinate object are used. An example of the effect in which P680 is operating is shown. As shown in FIG. 80, the lower character operation effect P872 is displayed (displayed in the upper display layer) with priority over the character cut-in notice displayed over the background reach effect as a post-reach advance notice effect. It has become. At this time, the subordinate movement effect P872 has a plurality of effect patterns (for example, patterns in which the display colors are blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors), which are displayed at different frequencies depending on the expected degree of jackpot of the fluctuation during execution. It is configured to have a pattern in which the display size is small, medium, or large, a pattern in which the movement of the display animation is different, and the like). Further, at this time, the character of the character cut-in displayed as the subordinate movement effect P872 is associated with each other to some extent, and the character A of the first composition and the blue effect, and the character A or B of the second composition and the green effect. , The combination is defined such as the red effect of the character A or the character C in the third composition.

While the lower character P680 and the horizontal character P670 play a role as a secondary effect, the horizontal character P670 is directly related to the effect content of the advance notice effect displayed on the effect display device P80. The lower character P680 is mainly used for the effect action related to the advance notice effect, while it is also used for the execution of the effect effect action (effect effect action look-ahead) as a low look-ahead effect and is widely and frequently used. Although it is used as an effect operation less frequently than the horizontal character P670 (the execution frequency of the effect operation is low), it directly suggests the result (expectation) of the variation display of the special symbol being executed. It is a directing character that is easy to get involved with.

(Movable frame: Operation explanation of the production operation unit)
FIG. 82 is an operation explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit P380, which is one of the frame movable objects provided in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 82 (a) shows a state (initial state) of the initial position in which the effect operation unit P380 is not performing the effect operation, and FIG. 82 (b) is an effect state after the effect operation unit P380 performs the effect operation. Is shown. In the effect operation unit P380, the effect button P381 and the lever P382 are integrally configured. In the initial state, the lever P382 cannot be operated, and in the effect state, the lever P382 can be operated. It has become.

More specifically, in the effect operation unit P380, the effect button P381 and the lever P382 are rotated by the operation of the lever elevating motor P389 to rotate the effect button P381 and the cylindrical groove cam (not shown) connected to the indicator shaft of the lever P382. Ascends from the detection position of the lever initial position sensor P386 shown in FIG. 82 (a) to the position detected by the lever ascending position sensor P387 shown in FIG. 82 (b). When the effect operation unit P380 moves to the position of the lever raising position sensor P387, the lever input sensor P388 can detect the input operation of the lever P382 by the tilting operation of the lever P382 of the player.

(Other examples of character movement effects)
As described above, the upper character movement effect P870, the horizontal character movement effect P871, the lower character movement effect P872, and the lower character full screen effect according to the movements of the upper character P650, the horizontal character P670, and the lower character P680. It has been described that an effect image such as P873 (an effect that displays a uniform effect image (rainbow effect or the like) in the entire display area of the effect display device P80 at the time of the effect of FIG. 78) is displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, there is another effect (referred to as "effect interlocking display effect") displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 with respect to the operation of the effect character P560. do. The following is an example of another effect-linked display effect.

<< Pseudo-role motion image >>
The "pseudo character motion image" enhances the character movable effect of the effect character P560 by operating an image imitating the actual effect character P560 (or a similar image with some design changes). It is a display effect that makes it possible to execute an effect that is displayed in place of the actual movable character effect.

For example, a pseudo character motion image similar to that of the effector P560 is linked to the operation of the effector P560, and the pseudo character is forward or backward in the movement direction of the effector P560 within the operation range of the effector P560. By displaying the motion image, the player may be made to recognize it as an afterimage or blur, and an impression may be made by giving an illusion of the motion speed of the effecting object P560.

Further, when the pseudo character operation image is in a situation where the effect character P560 cannot be operated (for example, the effect character P560 cannot be restored due to step-out or the like, and the operation is prohibited, which is a character error state. Etc.), even in a situation where the actual production accessory P560 cannot perform a movable production by displaying a pseudo-effect operation image at the timing when the production accessory P560 operates, the production including the operation of the production accessory P560 is performed. It can be made to recognize that it was an aspect.

Since the "pseudo accessory motion image" is an image having an effect of substituting the effect accessory P560 located in front of the effect display device P80 and enhancing the effect, the above-mentioned superior character operation effect P870 and the horizontal character operation The image has a higher display priority than the effect images such as the effect P871, the lower character operation effect P872, and the character full screen effect P873. Has a low display priority).

Further, the "pseudo character motion image" is an image (or similar image) imitating the effect character P560, but the display color and the like do not need to be configured with the same color as the design of the actual effect character P560. , The image may be changed in appearance due to a display effect such as gray scale or sepia.

《Character movement fanning effect》

The "feature motion fanning effect" is one of the staging bonus motion interlocking display effects, and includes the staging timing at which the staging bonus P560 is performed (including the case of a gasse pattern in which the staging bonus P560 is not actually performed). ), The effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the effecting object P560, or the pseudo accessory operation image is displayed in the vicinity within the operating range of the effecting object P560. It is a production that suggests to the player that the movement may be performed.

The "feature motion fanning effect" is an effect suggesting that the motion of the effect accessory P560, which leads to the degree of expectation of acquisition of the special game, is performed, and has a plurality of display patterns as the display pattern. As a display pattern, the display color may be white, red, or gold, or the display size may be switched between small, medium, and large, so that the operation of the effect P560 may be executed. Suggest (expectation) to the player.

(Direction movable accessory_initialization / return operation processing)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85, the “directed movable accessory_initialization / return operation process” of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process includes the "initial position return operation process" for returning the position of the effect object P560 to the initial position, and the effect accessory. It is composed of a process including two processes of "initial operation confirmation process" for confirming whether or not P560 can operate normally (see FIG. 83).

In the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process, there is an operation abnormality (an event such as an error that is judged to be necessary to confirm the operation) in the effect object P560 or when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. It is a process to be executed when it is executed. The determination of the operation abnormality is based on the result of the input port monitoring process (step 4008), which is the process of the effect control board (effect control CPU), in the effect control process (step 4012), the effect movable accessory_initialization. The flag for the request for the return operation process (operation instruction, operation control) is established, and the effect device control process (step 4010) executes the request for the initialization / return operation to the effector P560.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, there are the following four situations in which a request for the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is made. In addition, the process executed in the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process under each situation is also described.
1. 1. Initialization operation when the power is turned on. Requests for both "initial position return operation processing" and "initial operation confirmation processing" are executed.
2. 2. When an over-number of steps error occurs, both the "initial position return operation processing" and "initial operation confirmation processing" requests are executed.
3. 3. When a position check error occurs, only the request for "initial position return operation processing" is executed.
4. When a time monitoring check error occurs, only the request for "initial position return operation processing" is executed.

Here, the "step number over error" drives the number of steps that becomes a determination threshold after the operation request is executed by design when an operation request (effect operation or initial position return operation) is made to the effect object P560. It is an error that occurs when the sensor to be detected is not inspected even if it is output to the motor, and the "position check error" is produced at a predetermined game timing such as when the change starts (or ends) or when the game state changes. As a result of determining whether or not the accessory P560 is in the position where it should exist (initial position sensor of the effect accessory P560, effect position sensor), the effect accessory P560 is not in the expected position (the sensor to be detected is detected). This is an error that occurs when (not done), and the "time monitoring check error" is an error that can occur as a result of determining the same determination as the "position check error" at regular time intervals (for example, 5 seconds).

The "time monitoring check error" is excluded from the error monitoring target for the "position check error" and the effect P560 that is executing the effect operation assigned by the variable effect or the look-ahead effect.

Further, the request for the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is when the special symbol is variablely displayed (for example, when the effect character P560 is operated as a variable effect). Is also feasible. Then, when a request for the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is made, the change is performed according to the change display of the special symbol until the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is completed. The operation of the effect character P560 (at least the effect effect movable object_initialization / return operation process target) based on the effect execution pattern is prohibited.

<< Directional movable accessory_Initialization / return operation processing >>
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a processing flow of “effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation processing” (step 5800). The "effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process" is a process performed in the effect device control process (step 4010) of the effect control board (effect control CPU). Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

First, the "effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process" determines whether or not the request related to the initialization / return operation of the effect accessory P560 is executed (step 5802). If the initialization / return operation is not requested for the effecting object P560 (step 5802NO), the processing is terminated without performing the subsequent processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a request for the initialization / return operation for the effecting object P560 (step 5802YES), the process proceeds to the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804), which is the submodule process.

Details of the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. When the "initial position return operation process" is completed, it is subsequently determined whether or not the current situation is in a game stop state such as when the setting is being changed (or the setting is being confirmed) (step 5806). When the game is stopped, such as when the setting is being changed (setting is being confirmed), the effect control board (effect control CPU) waits for the "initial operation confirmation process" without the determination result being NO until the game stop state is released. It becomes a situation to do.

The reason for waiting for the "initial operation confirmation process" (step 5810) after the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) when the game is stopped, such as during setting confirmation (setting change), is when the power is turned on. In a game stop state such as when the setting to be transferred is being changed (setting is being confirmed), a security notification indicating that the current setting status or setting change has been made to the effect display device P80, and other settings for the gaming machine are to be performed. The administrator menu screen and the like can be displayed, and the effect P560, which was located in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 before the power failure, is displayed in the display area by the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804). This is because the situation is considered to be optimal because the display area of the effect display device P80 is not hindered by an abnormality in the operation of the accessory such as step-out during the "initial operation confirmation process" after the evacuation from the front.

If it is determined that the settings are not being confirmed (settings are being changed), etc. (step 5806NO) in the "effect movable accessory_initialization / restoration operation processing", then it is at the time of power startup or due to an error in the number of steps. It is determined whether or not there is (step 5808). As described above, the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment has a specification of making a request for "initial operation confirmation processing" when the power is turned on and when an error over the number of steps occurs. Because it is. In other words, if the request is based on a position check error or a time monitoring check error, there is no need to execute the "initial operation confirmation process", so the effect control board (effect control CPU) is a submodule process "initial operation". The transition to "confirmation process" (step 5810) is not performed.

The details of the "initial operation confirmation process" will be described later. When the "initial operation confirmation process" is completed, the information of the request related to the execution of the initialization / return operation is cleared, and the "effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process" is completed.

<< Initial position return operation processing >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the “initial position return operation process” (step 5804) relating to the operation control of the effect object P560 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described. It is determined that the "initial position return operation process" does not exist in the initial position (the effect position sensor or the intermediate position sensor may be the "initial position" instead of the initial position sensor depending on the effect situation). Is a process for returning to the initial position.

In the "initial position return operation process", first, a request (operation instruction, operation control) for stopping the operation is output to all the effectors P560 (step 5820). This process stops the operation of the other production accessory P560 that is in operation when an error occurs due to a request for the production operation that was output before the power failure, a position check error, or a time monitoring check error. This is a process for the purpose of preventing interference with other production accessories when returning the production accessory P560 to the initial position.

When the stop request for the operation for all the effecting objects P560 is completed, the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is subsequently moved to the initial position (detection position of the descending position sensor P686) with respect to the lower accessory P680. Give instructions. If the lower accessory P680 is already located at the initial position (when the lowering position sensor P686 has been detected), the process is omitted.

When the lower accessory P680 moves to the initial position (or the initial position return operation is omitted), then the upper accessory P650 shifts to the initial position return operation. In the initial position return operation of the superior object P650, first, it is confirmed on the superior object P650 whether the elevating initial position sensor P657 and the rotation position sensor P660 of the sensor related to the initial position are in the detection state (step P5824). As described above, the superior object P650 is configured to switch between the deployed state and the retracted state depending on the rotation direction at the timing when the rotation decoration unit P652 detects the rotation position sensor, and the rotation position. Even if the sensor P660 is in the detection state, the rotation decoration portion P652 may be deployed, so that it cannot be immediately moved to the detection position of the ascending / descending initial position sensor P657. Therefore, when returning the superior object P650 that does not exist in the initial position to the initial position, the rotary decoration unit P652 is expanded while being moved to the effect position once, and after surely changing to the stored state, the ascending / descending initial position is reached. It is necessary to have the sensor P657 detect it.

When it is determined that the superior object P650 does not exist at the initial position (step 5824NO), the superior object P650 is moved until the elevating effect position sensor P658 is in the detection state (step 5826). If the superior object P650 is already at the position of the elevating effect position sensor P658, the process is omitted.

In the initial position return operation of the superior object P650, when the superior object P658 moves to the position (effect position) where the elevating initial position sensor P658 is detected, the rotary motor P659 is subsequently moved in the direction in which the rotary decoration portion P652 is in the deployed state. Drive (step 5828). In addition to the next detection of the rotation position sensor P660, the rotation amount is rotated to a position where the rotation decoration body P652 is stored at the detection position of the rotation position sensor P660 by the return operation (reverse rotation of the rotation motor P659).

When the superior object P650 changes to the expanded state at the effect position, the "initial position return operation process" subsequently instructs the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 to perform the initial position return operation at the same time (step). 5830). In other words, the process of moving the rotary decorative portion P652 of the superior object P650 to the position detected by the elevating initial position sensor P657 and moving the horizontal accessory P670 to the position detected by the storage position sensor P675 after the rotating decorative portion P652 is stored. (The processing is omitted when the horizontal accessory P670 is the initial position detected by the storage position sensor P675). Only the process of step 5830 is specified to execute the operation for the plurality of effecting objects P560 at the same time, but the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 have an operation pattern for returning to the state of FIG. 77 from FIG. 78. It is a combination of the operations of the production accessory P560, which has no problem in terms of electrical limitation (limitation of the total current value) even if it operates at the same time in the production.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the lower accessory P680, the upper accessory P650, and the horizontal accessory P670 are sequentially performed in the "initial position return operation process". The processing order of the "initial position return operation process" is configured to determine whether or not the plurality of effectors P560 should be executed in a predetermined order, and perform an operation of returning to the initial position. When the operations are performed in order, the electric power for the operation is not supplied to the effecting objects that are not the operation targets. The initial position return operation process configured in this way prevents interference during the return operation by not starting the return operation of the initial position at the same time for all the effectors P560, and by driving them at the same time. It is possible to prevent the use of a large amount of electric power from adversely affecting the operation of the effect control board and other effect devices. Further, as in step 5830, the effector P560 that does not interfere with each other and that does not hinder the electrical limitation even if driven at the same time can be instructed to return to the initial position at the same time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the initial position return operation of the entire effecting object P560 from becoming excessively long.

<< Initial operation check processing >>
Subsequently, detailed processing will be described for the “initial operation confirmation processing” (step 5810). The "initial operation confirmation process" is a process of confirming whether or not the effect operation can be executed in order for all the effect characters P560 provided in the gaming machine (for example, all the effect characters P560 are initially positioned. It is a process to confirm that it can be operated normally by operating from to the effect position).

When the "initial operation confirmation process" is started in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the operation confirmation process of the lower character P680 is first performed (step 5850). In the operation confirmation process of the lower accessory P680, the drive motor P683 is operated to operate the lower accessory P650 from the state detected by the lower position sensor P686 to the position detected by the ascending position sensor P687, and then the lower position sensor P686 is operated again. It is configured to perform processing to operate until it is detected in.

When the confirmation operation of the lower accessory P680 is completed, the operation confirmation process of the upper accessory P650 is subsequently executed. In the operation confirmation process of the superior object P650, the elevating motor P653 is operated to move the central decorative portion P681 of the superior object P650 from the detection position of the elevating initial position sensor P657 to the position to be detected by the elevating effect position sensor P658. (Step 5852). Then, when the central decorative portion P681 of the superior object P650 moves to the effect position, the rotary motor P659 is operated to check whether the rotary decorative portion P652 can be deformed to the deployed state, and the rotary position sensor P660 is next. The rotation motor P659 is operated by the additional drive amount that can be stored in the rotation decoration unit P652 during the detection and return operation, and the deformation operation of the rotation decoration unit P652 is confirmed (step 5854).

When the confirmation of the effect operation of the rotary decoration unit P652 at the effect position of the superior object P650 is completed, an instruction is subsequently given to return the superior object P650 to the initial position, and the horizontal accessory P670 is instructed to perform the operation. Give an instruction to perform the operation check process. In the operation confirmation process of the horizontal accessory P670, by operating the drive motor P674, each decorative portion of the horizontal accessory P670 (horizontal upper decorative portion P671, horizontal center decorative portion P672, horizontal lower decorative portion 673) is moved to the production position. Make it work. That is, after the drive motor P674 is operated from the state detected by the storage position sensor P675 to the state where the shield position sensor P676 is detected, the drive motor P674 is operated in the reverse direction until the state is detected by the storage position sensor P675 again. It is configured to let you.

In the "initial operation confirmation process", the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 have a period in which the operation is executed at the same time, but each operation is performed at a timing different from that when the effect operation is actually performed (see FIG. 78). It is configured as follows. More specifically, when the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 are operated as the effect operation, the overlap period of the operation output for simultaneously outputting the operation is the operation output when the operation output is simultaneously performed in the initial operation confirmation process. It is configured to be longer than the overlapping period, and in the case of the initial operation, by reducing the period of simultaneous operation as much as possible, the period in which each operation of each production accessory P560 is performed becomes longer. It is configured so that the confirmer can accurately and easily visually recognize the operation of the effecting object P560.

(Correspondence at the time of operation error of the production character)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, when a malfunction occurs in the production accessory P560 (for example, when the above-mentioned step number over error or position check error occurs), the production movable accessory_initialization occurs. -The return operation process is executed, but even if the effect movable accessory_initialization / return operation process is executed, the situation in which the effect operation can be executed cannot be secured for the effect object P560 (for example, initial). (When a situation occurs such as the position return operation process and the initial operation check process are not returned to the initial position or cannot be moved to the effect position even after being executed three times), this is applicable in order to prevent the effect P560 from malfunctioning. It is configured to prohibit the operation of the production accessory P560 and the production accessory P560 that may interfere with the corresponding production accessory P560.

Even when the movable effect operation of the effect P560 based on the occurrence of such an error is prohibited, the light emitting portion of the effect P560 is configured to execute the light emission effect. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the operation is prohibited, the light emitting pattern for lighting the light emitting portion of the effecting object P560 is not set exclusively, so that when the normal movable effect operation is executed, Lighting is controlled in the same way.

(Gameability of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment)
Next, the playability of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a transition and an effect state between a normal game and a specific game in a normal game state. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the types of jackpots in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table normally used in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment employs parallel control, and is a gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be independently varied and displayed.

It should be noted that the playability described below is the playability when the player normally plays the game, and the description is omitted for irregular situations.

<< Normal game (low probability / low base) >>
First, the playability of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the player first starts the game, the game is played in the normal game (low probability / low base) shown on the left side of FIG. 86.

In a normal game (low probability / low base), the player shoots a game ball toward the first start winning opening P711 and aims to win a big hit by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol (see FIG. 86 (a)). ). When a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, after the big hit game, the big hit game is executed by the special symbol (big hit symbol) stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device P51 when the big hit is started. Either "short-time game (low probability / high base)" (see FIG. 86 (b)) or "probability variation game (high probability / high base)" (see FIG. 86 (d)) depending on the type of It is distributed to the specific game of.

In normal games, game production is performed based on "normal stage" (normal production mode) such as "A stage" to "C stage" as the type of production state (production mode), and "special stage" in addition. (Special production mode) includes "D stage", "E stage", and "complete notification mode for characters".

The "D stage" is an effect stage (effect mode) dedicated to the look-ahead effect, and when the dedicated look-ahead effect lottery is won, somewhere in the change display before the start of the change display of the hold of the look-ahead target. It is a production stage that shifts at the timing. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the stage shifts to the "D stage", the effect content displayed on the effect display device P80 until a predetermined timing during which the hold subject to the look-ahead effect is changing is special. In addition to becoming The amount is increasing and the display pattern is changing to one with high expectations.

The "E stage" is a case where the pseudo-variation effect (pseudo-ream) is executed, and the re-variation display after the third time (referred to as "pseudo X" depending on the number of re-variations, in this case, "pseudo 3"). It is a special production stage (special production mode) that shifts when becomes. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, when it becomes pseudo 3, it is definite to shift to the high expectation reach (SP reach) in the reach production, and it shifts to any high expectation reach. A special effect for suggesting whether to do is displayed before the start of the reach effect. In this "E stage", when it develops into normal reach, multiple icons suggesting high expectation reach production are displayed, and along with the movement display of the displayed icon image, the superior character P650, the right side character P670R, and the lower character The object P680 and the left side accessory P670L operate in order, and finally one of the effect objects P560 operates to the effect position and the icon image is displayed, which suggests the high expectation reach of the development destination (). In the case of the superior character P650, it will develop into a high expectation reach with the highest expectation, and before the icon image becomes visible, the movable character effect using the rotating decoration part P652 and the character full screen effect P873. Coordinating production).

The "feature complete notification mode" is a special production stage that can be selected by the player by operating the production operation means P81 during the non-game (during the game standby demo display) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. Special production mode). When the "complete notification mode for the character" is selected in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the superior character P650 and the horizontal character P670 have moved to the front of the effect display device P80 (shown in FIG. 78). (State), and the advance notice effect mainly based on the operation of the light emitting unit and the horizontal accessory P670 provided in the superior object P650 and the horizontal accessory P670 is executed (in the display area of the partially visible effect display device P80). Character display, button image P881, etc. may be displayed). In the "complete notification mode of the character", it is notified that the rotation decoration part P652 of the superior character P650 is finally rotated in the fluctuation that becomes a big hit, and then the superior character P650 is notified. When the horizontal accessory P670 returns to the initial position and the display area of the effect display device P80 becomes visible, an effect of notifying the type of the jackpot game acquired is performed (light emission mode when the rotation decoration unit P652 rotates). The type of jackpot that can be obtained in (may be suggested).

The "D stage", "E stage", and "feature complete notification mode" are examples, and may be executed during a specific game as a modified example. Further, the "complete notification mode for the character" does not have to be the one in which the production character P560 (in the previous example, the superior character P650 and the horizontal character P670) is operating in advance. If P881 is displayed and the effect stage is such that if the effect P560 (superior character P650 and horizontal character P670) operates when the button is pressed, a big hit is made, and the predetermined action of the character is confirmed as a big hit. good.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the normal game (low probability / low base), the symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 660 times) after the ram clear or the previous big hit game. In either case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing", the game shifts to the "support mode" which is a specific game (low probability / high base) without going through the big hit game. "Support mode" is one of the specific games (low probability / high base) described later, and whether the variable display corresponding to 500 special symbol lottery is performed or whether the big hit game is acquired by the special symbol lottery. (The big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices P51 and P52). In addition, "support mode" does not exist when shifting via a big hit.

<< Specific game: Short-time game (low probability / high base) >>
Next, a time-saving game (low probability / high base), which is one of the specific games in the normal game state, will be described. As shown in FIG. 86, there are two types of specific game (low probability / high base) states. One is the "revival chance" and the other is the "support mode" mentioned above. "Resurrection chance" and "support mode" have different entry triggers and termination conditions.

"Resurrection chance" and "support mode" are the rush opportunity and the end condition, "revival chance" shifts after the big hit game (especially after the big hit game of the normal big hit described later), and 100 special symbol lottery is held. Or, it is a specific game state that continues until a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery within 100 times. On the other hand, in the "support mode", as described above, the symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 660 times) after the ram is cleared or after the previous big hit game, and the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing". It is a specific game state that shifts to the case where there is, and continues until 500 special symbol lottery is performed or a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery within 500 times.

In the normal game state of a specific game (low probability / high base), the player launches a game ball into the right game area P501R, passes the game ball through the operating port P741, and makes the second start winning unit P720 a normal electric accessory. P770 is operated to make the opening / closing member P771 of the second starting winning unit P720 in an easy-to-win state, the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening P721, and the game is played by receiving the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (this). A game performed by launching a game ball into the right side game area P501R is referred to as a “right-handed game”).

When a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (see FIG. 86 (c)), the jackpot game is started (the special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device P52). Depending on the type of, the game shifts to the "support mode" again after the big hit game (when the normal big hit, see Fig. 86 (b)), or the "X rush" (high probability / high base) or "X" of the probabilistic game described later. It shifts to "rush SUPER" (high probability / low base) (for probabilistic jackpot, see FIG. 86 (d)).

<< Specific game: Probability change game (high probability / high base or high probability / low base) >>
Subsequently, among the specific games of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the game in the normal game state of the probabilistic game will be described. As shown in FIG. 86, there are two types of probabilistic games, "X rush" (high probability / low base) and "X rush SUPER" (high probability / low base).

The probabilistic game "X Rush" and "X Rush SUPER" shift to after a specific jackpot game (after the probabilistic jackpot jackpot game) and continue until the next jackpot game starts. As a modification, if a special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) during "X rush" (high probability / high base), the electric chew support function ends and "X rush SUPER" (high probability). / Low base) may be configured so that it can be migrated.

The game method of "X Rush" and "X Rush SUPER" is performed by a right-handed game similar to the time-saving game described above. When a jackpot is won in a right-handed game (see FIG. 86 (e)), the jackpot game depends on the type of jackpot symbol (special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device P52) that starts the jackpot game. Later, either shift to "support mode" (normally when a big hit, see Fig. 86 (b)), or again the probabilistic game "X rush" (high probability / high base) or "X rush SUPER" (high probability / low). (Base) (see FIG. 86 (d) at the time of probability variation jackpot).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set high even when the electric chew support function is not activated (for example, in the low probability state of the normal symbol lottery: 299/300). , High probability state: 300/300), Operation of the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the second start winning unit P720 even in normal games (low probability / low base) and "X rush SUPER" (high probability / low base) Is becoming more frequent.

In the state where the electric chew support function is operating, regarding the operation of the ordinary electric accessory P770, the opening extension function is activated, and when the right-handed game is performed, the ordinary electric accessory P770 is operating. It is configured to occupy most of the space (for example, after the normal electric accessory P770 is activated for 6 seconds, the ordinary electric accessory P770 is activated again after about 1 second by the next ordinary symbol lottery. ), When playing a right-handed game in a high base state (state in which the electric chew support function is operating), the game ball is located downstream (large winning opening unit P750) from the second starting winning opening P721. It is configured so that it does not flow down too much.

On the other hand, in the situation where the electric chew support function is not operating (normal game or "X rush SUPER"), the second start winning opening P721 is won and the game is played when the normal electric accessory P770 is not operating. A game ball can flow down toward the large winning opening unit P750 downstream of the second starting winning opening P721, and when a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit game It is possible to increase the number of game balls based on the winning of the large winning opening P751 in the middle.

In addition, during "X Rush SUPER", since the probability fluctuation and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated, the fluctuation time of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be shortened fluctuation (about 1 to 2 seconds). On the other hand, since the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is not activated in the normal game, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be varied for a long time (for example, 3 minutes). It is configured so that the number of game balls decreases even if the right-handed game is continued. A game state such as this "X rush SUPER" in which a small hit game frequently occurs in a short time in a right-handed game and the number of game balls can be increased by the small hit game is collectively called "small hit rush". be.

(Type of special game of pachinko gaming machine P of the 7th embodiment)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 87, the types of special games of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 87, the jackpot probability of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is 1/200 during the low probability, while the jackpot probability during the high probability is set to 1/40. (Common to the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol). Further, the small hit probability is 1/500 in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and 1/2 in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

As an explanation of the types of special games of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 87, the "types of special games" include the names of the types of big hit games and small hit games that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. It is shown. The "state after the special game" indicates whether the normal game state to be transferred after the corresponding special game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed is a specific game or a normal game. "Ratio" indicates the ratio of which type of big hit game (small hit game) is selected when a big hit or a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ing.

The notation of "special figure 1_" and "special figure 2_" described in "type of special game" is either the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). It indicates whether it is the lottery result of the lottery, and "○ R" indicates the number of rounds of the corresponding big hit game. Whether the "probability change jackpot" and "normal jackpot" will shift to the probability variation game ("X rush", "X rush SUPER") after the jackpot game (after the probability variation jackpot) or the time-saving game ("revival chance") (Usually after a big hit) is shown. "Small hit" indicates a small hit game, but as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit _1" and "small hit _2" are configured to have different execution modes of the small hit game. (For example, "small hit _1" is opened once for 0.6 seconds, and "small hit _2" is opened twice for 0.6 seconds).

The content described in the "state after the special game" indicates whether to shift to the state of the specific game described in FIG. 86. In addition, "depending on the state before the start of the special game" after the "small hit" indicates that the game state shifts to the same game state as before the start of the special game (note that the end condition of the specific game is satisfied. If the variable display shows "small hit", the game shifts to a normal game instead of a specific game).

(Variation pattern table of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 7th embodiment)
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a representative example of the types of variation patterns (variation times) related to the variation display of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. The vertical axis of FIG. 88 shows the types of fluctuation patterns, and the horizontal axis of FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the types of fluctuation pattern tables used in the situation when the fluctuation pattern lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed. The variation pattern shown in FIG. 88 is a typical example, and the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment can select other types of variation patterns.

The symbols "○", "△", and "□" in the figure indicate the approximate frequency of selecting the target fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table, and "○" indicates the high frequency (1/3 of the total). It indicates that it is selected with a low frequency (about 1/10), "△" indicates that it is selected with a low frequency (about 1/20 to 1/50 of the whole), and "□" indicates a very low frequency (1 /). It is shown that it is selected in about 70 to 1/200).

Since the type of the variable pattern table shown in FIG. 88 is a game in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly used during the normal game, the distribution of the variable pattern lottery of the first special symbol is illustrated. ("Out of place (Special Figure 1) Normal game" table). The variable pattern lottery in the first special symbol lottery of the normal game is performed by switching the variable pattern table depending on the number of reserved first special symbols. Although the result of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not illustrated, the variation pattern table in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the normal game is a variation dedicated to the special figure 2. A lottery is performed using a pattern table.

On the right side of the "out of place (special figure 1) during normal game" table, an example of the out of time fluctuation pattern during time reduction is shown. Since the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment mainly plays the game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the out-of-time fluctuation pattern table is a lottery of the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The variation pattern selected in is illustrated. The variation pattern lottery during the time reduction of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) is determined by using the variation pattern lottery table for the special time reduction medium special figure 1.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern table of "big hit" and "small hit" shown as the fluctuation pattern table, it is shown that different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the type of the big hit game and the type of the special symbol at the time of winning the small hit. There is.

Here, there are two types of SP reach (A reach), "SP reach (A reach)" and "SP reach (A reach) _ role", but "_ role" has a target fluctuation pattern. When selected, the effect character P560 always operates (the first effect pattern of the superior character P650, which is a texture character) in the winning branch effect that informs the player whether or not the player is a big hit at the end of the reach. Shows that to do. In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, in the variable display of the SP reach (A reach), which is the 10R probability variation jackpot that is most advantageous to the player, the effect pattern for executing the operation of the superior P650 is executed. In the case of other big hits, the operation of the superior P650 is not accompanied (or the execution frequency is extremely low because it is determined by the advance notice lottery, and it operates at the timing other than the winning branch effect, for example, at the time of the development effect to SP reach. It is configured to execute the (possible) effect pattern. In addition, even in the fluctuation pattern without "_-role", the superior character P650 operates at another timing during the variation display, or a notice accompanied by the operation of the horizontal character P670 or the lower character P680 is carried out. It is possible to do.

Further, although not shown, for example, during the execution of the small hit game "X Rush SUPER", the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is either "small hit _1" or "small hit _2". Depending on whether or not the small hit game is performed, the type of the special game (small hit game) won by the operation pattern of the lower character P680 (or the horizontal character P670) or the type of the lower character operation effect P872 is different, or the type of the special game (small hit game) is notified. It may be configured to be suggestive.

(Execution example of effective production using the production character of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment)
Subsequently, in the variable effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, it is effective to execute the movable character effect that gives the player a highly entertaining effect by using the effect character P560. An example of the use of the effect P560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91 along the flow (time chart) of the variable effect at the time of A reach and B reach.

The contents shown in each of FIGS. 89 to 91 are as follows.

The "(a) production period" is a rough division of the production period of the variable production according to the production content. "Before reach (pseudo 1)" indicates the period from immediately after the start of fluctuation to the end of the first fluctuation display or the development of reach production, and "Before reach (pseudo 2 to)" indicates the pseudo-continuous production. It is the variable display period of the decorative symbol P801 from the second time onward, which is dramatic during the one change of the special symbol when it is performed, and corresponds to the period until the reach effect development (because it is the same after pseudo 3). Included in the period). The pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is configured so that the normal reach is always executed when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, but in the case of the pseudo 2, the second decorative symbol P801 is executed. You may end by displaying the disengagement mode without performing the reach effect on the variable display.

Of the "(a) production period", the period indicated by "normal reach" indicates the period during which the low-expected reach production is performed, and the result of the normal reach is notified of the result of the winning / failing lottery, or is succeeded. It is a production period in which the development of SP reach is notified. The period shown in "SP reach" is a reach production period with a higher expectation of being a big hit than the above-mentioned normal reach, and is a production period in which the result of the winning / failing lottery is always notified as a result of the reach production. In the seventh embodiment, the production period called "revival effect" and "reversal effect", in which the content of the notification is overturned and the hit is notified, is also included in this period).

"(B) Example of effect content" shows an example of the content of the effect executed in the corresponding effect period in the above-mentioned "(a) effect period". It should be noted that the examples are only representative ones, and other notice effects and the like are naturally configured to be feasible.

"(C) Example of operation of the accessory" is linked to the effect as shown in "(b) Example of effect content", and is linked to the effect of the effect P560 (superior item) provided in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. P650, the horizontal accessory P670, and the lower accessory P680 are described as examples) to show what kind of effect operation is performed.

In "(d) Example of accessory lamp", the light emitting unit in the production accessory P560 (explained by taking the upper accessory P650, the horizontal accessory P670, and the lower accessory P680 as examples) provided in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment is used. , What kind of light emission effect is executed when a movable character effect (exemplified in "(c) effect example"), a notice effect, a look-ahead effect, etc. (exemplified in "(b) effect content example") are executed. An example of how to do it is shown.

In "(e) Other lamps / sound_features", what kind of light emission effect is produced by the effect lamp P82 (frame lamp P350, board lamp P550, or effect operation means P81 lamp) other than the light emitting part provided in the effect P560. An example of how to perform the effect and an example of the sound effect output from the speaker P83 are shown, and the contents to be particularly described are illustrated on the premise that the effect is performed in conjunction with the effect content.

The "(f) button valid period" is an effect (referred to as "button effect") using the effect operation means P81 (effect button P381, lever P382, etc.) in each effect period (see "(a) effect period"). Indicates whether or not Since the presence or absence of the button effect depends on the advance notice effect to be executed, the reach effect (such as the advance notice effect during reach), the timing of execution and the presence or absence of execution are not limited to the examples shown in the figure.

In the "(f) button valid period", the area shown in black indicates the period during which the operation of the effect operating means P81, which the player needs to operate in order to advance the effect, is effective. Is an effect period in which an image imitating the effect operation means P81 (operation promotion image such as the button image P881 and the lever image P882) is displayed, and the player is urged to input the necessary effect operation means P81. On the other hand, during the period shown by the diagonal lines in the figure, the input operation of the predetermined effect operation means P81 defined for the effect is effective, but the operation promotion image such as the button image P881 is not displayed and the button effect is displayed. It indicates that it is an effect period (referred to as "back button effect") that does not clearly indicate that it is a period. The area painted on the checkered pattern in the figure indicates the timing of the winning branch effect, which is the effect timing for notifying the result of the winning / failing lottery, among the button effects. During the back button effect period, the operation promotion image such as the button image P881 is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, while the light emitting unit provided in the effect operation means P81 is effective for input operation. It may be shown that the operation is effective.

"Back button effect" means the possibility of developing into a subsequent high-expectation effect such as SP reach when it is executed before reach (pseudo 1), before reach (pseudo 2 ~), or during the normal reach period. It is one of the button effects that are configured to suggest or suggest the jackpot expectation, and when performed during SP reach, are executed as an effect of notifying the jackpot expectation.

《SP Reach (A Reach): Missing, Small Hit》
First, based on FIG. 89, an example of the effect when the fluctuation pattern “SP reach (A reach)” shown in FIG. 88 is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is “missing” or “small hit”. explain. The variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" performed in this explanation will be described with one variation pattern name, but as a variation effect, "pseudo-continuous effect" is performed and the variation is displayed multiple times. It can be applied to various fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) as long as the A reach is finally executed as an effect, such as whether or not to go through the normal reach and whether or not to go through the normal reach. As shown in FIG. 88, A reach is a variation effect that can be executed with a variation pattern selected even in the case of a jackpot, but is a 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot) that is the most advantageous type of jackpot for the player. , Special figure 2_10R probability variation jackpot), A reach is always executed according to the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach (A reach) _ role" in which the superior object P650 operates in the first production operation pattern in the winning branch effect. Will be done.

In the following explanation, the explanation will be given based on the flow of the variable effect that develops into the SP reach (A reach) via the pseudo-continuous effect and the normal reach. In addition, in FIG. 89, an example including the various branching patterns described above is given.

When the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to "SP reach (A reach)" is started, the variable effect corresponding to "Before reach (pseudo 1)" is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 as the variable effect. , As an example of the production content to be executed, one character or multiple characters emit dialogue notice, and various images change step by step (shape changes, size changes, colors change, gradually A notice effect determined by lottery is executed at the start of the variable effect, such as a step-up notice (such as moving to). In addition to the effect content that is decided by lottery as the effect content at the start of the variable effect, the look-ahead takeover effect (pre-reading) corresponding to the look-ahead effect that was executed as the variable effect during the variable display prior to the variable display. It is the same effect as the effect, and one effect pattern of the look-ahead effect assigned up to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead) is executed. In the seventh embodiment, such a look-ahead takeover effect is also described as a "look-ahead effect" (in the case of explaining a look-ahead effect of only the variable display to be pre-read, the "look-ahead takeover effect" or "the relevant". The explanation may be given as "look-ahead").

Examples of the production operation related to the production accessory P560 during the production period of "before reach (pseudo 1)" are as follows (in FIG. 89, "(c) Production operation example" and "(d) Example of the effect lamp". See).

Superior object P650: Does not work. The light emitting part of the superior object P650 performs an effect according to a notice effect or the like. (Fig. 89 shows the case of pseudo 1⇒SP reach (A reach) as another example of variable effect)
Horizontal character P670: When the operation of the horizontal character P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (line notice, step-up notice, etc.), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting part of the horizontal character P670 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect, but if the horizontal character P670 is used to suggest a big hit expectation or a development expectation for reach, a notice is given. Except for the period in which the operation is executed in conjunction with the effect, the movable accessory effect and the light emission effect according to the look-ahead effect are executed in preference to other notices.
Subordinate object P680: When the operation of the subordinate object P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous generation notification, normal reach development notification, etc.), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect, but if the lower character P680 is used to suggest a big hit expectation or a development expectation for reach, a notice is given. Except for the period in which the operation is executed in conjunction with the effect, the movable accessory effect and the light emission effect according to the look-ahead effect are executed in preference to other notices.

During the period of "Before reach (pseudo 1)", the light emitting part (effect lamp P82) and the speaker P83 other than the effect P560 are basically determined as a variable effect by the lottery decision of the advance effect. Executes light emission effect and sound effect according to the execution pattern. In addition, when the look-ahead effect (pre-reading takeover effect) is executed at the same time as the advance notice effect in the look-ahead effect, etc. In order to effectively show the look-ahead effect using the effect item P560 together with the light emitting part of the object P670 and the subordinate object P680, the light emission display and sound effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect are executed (or prioritized over the advance notice effect). It may be executed at the same time).

Further, in the "before reach (pseudo 1)" period, if the execution of the button effect is decided as the lottery result of the advance notice lottery that determines the content of the variable effect at the start of the variable effect, the button validity period is set at the corresponding timing. Occur. In the example of FIG. 89, one button validity period is exemplified. Depending on the content of the advance notice effect to be executed, the button effect may be executed multiple times, and each button is valid for a plurality of advance notice effects that are combined during the "before reach (pseudo 1)" period. Depending on the period, there may be multiple button validity periods. (Although not illustrated in FIG. 89, it may include a notice that the button validity period is executed as a back button effect).

Next, an example of the production content will be described for the production period of "before reach (pseudo 2 to)" during the variable production period of "SP reach (A reach)".

When a variable display related to "SP reach (A reach)" is performed and the production of "before reach (pseudo 2 ~)" is approached, a notice that can be executed in "before reach (pseudo 1)" is given as the content of the notice production. The production can be executed even during the period of "before reach (pseudo 2 ~)". In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 7th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86, when the pseudo 3 or later is performed, the tendency (content, type) of the advance notice effect that occurs because the effect mode changes to the “E stage”. ) Is changed, but if such a stage change is not accompanied, the same advance notice effect can be executed in Pseudo 3. Further, in the effect period of "before reach (pseudo 2 to)", "pseudo-ream effect" (for example, display or horizontal role of the effect display device P80) for notifying that the pseudo-ream (revariable display) has been executed. The display combined with the advance notice effect using the object P670, the movable accessory effect, etc.) and a part of the look-ahead takeover effect (for example, hold change look-ahead, zone transition look-ahead, etc.) are continued.

Examples of the production operation related to the production accessory P560 during the production period of "before reach (pseudo 2 to)" are as follows (in FIG. 89, "(c) Production operation example" and "(d) Example of the effect lamp". See).

Superior object P650: Does not work. The light emitting part of the superior object P650 performs an effect according to a notice effect or the like. (Fig. 89 shows the case of pseudo 2 ⇒ SP reach (A reach) as another example of variable effect)
Horizontal character P670: When the operation of the horizontal character P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (line notice, step-up notice, etc.), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting unit of the horizontal character P670 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect, but when the effect operation is performed using the horizontal character P670 in a pseudo-continuous effect or the like, the execution period of the pseudo-continuous effect (for example, re-variation start). In (about 2 to 3 seconds immediately after), the effect operation of the pseudo-continuous effect and the light emission effect are prioritized and executed. As an example of executing the pseudo-continuous effect, for example, the horizontal character P670 is shaken for about 2 to 3 seconds immediately after the start of the re-variation, and the green (notify the pseudo 2 fluctuation) or red (notify the pseudo 3 fluctuation) horizontal character. Examples thereof include a light emitting effect by the light emitting unit of P670 and a display of the horizontal object operation effect P871.
Subordinate object P680: When the operation of the subordinate object P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous generation notification, normal reach development notification, etc.), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect, but if the lower character P680 is used to suggest a big hit expectation or a development expectation for reach, a notice is given. Except for the period in which the operation is executed in conjunction with the effect, the movable accessory effect and the light emission effect according to the look-ahead effect are executed in preference to other notices.

During the period of "before reach (pseudo 2 to)", the light emitting part and the speaker P83 other than the effecting object P560 basically correspond to the execution pattern of the advance notice effect determined by the lottery decision of the advance notice effect as a variable effect. Performs light emission effect and sound effect. At the start of the re-variation, etc., as described above, the horizontal accessory P670 is used to perform a pseudo-continuous effect that is a notification that the re-variation has been performed. And other effect lamps P82 may also be configured to execute an effect display corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, if the light emitting unit other than the effect P560 and the speaker P83 are performing the effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect due to the hold change look-ahead or the zone shift look-ahead, the light-emitting effect and the sound effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect continue. It is possible to continue.

The button validity period occurs during the "before reach (pseudo 2 to)" period once or multiple times depending on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery at the start of the variable effect, as in the case of "before reach (pseudo 1)". Button validity period may occur (in FIG. 89, the case of once is illustrated).

Next, in the variable display in which "SP reach (A reach)" is executed, an example of the effect execution mode of the effect period in which "normal reach" is executed will be described. In this example, since it is a variable display in which the development to SP reach (A reach) is executed, the icon image (special drawing) corresponding to SP reach (A reach) is displayed as the display content of the effect display device P80 during normal reach. The display such as P804) is finally displayed as a result of the normal reach.

An example of the effect operation related to the effect item P560 in the effect period of "normal reach" is as follows (see "(c) effect example" and "(d) example of the effect lamp" in FIG. 89).

Superior character P650: Executes the movable character effect of the second effect operation pattern (weak pattern) at the timing when the icon image suggesting the development to SP reach (A reach) is displayed or at the timing after it is displayed. At the same time, the superior object operation effect P870 (red) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.
Horizontal object P670: Performs an effect operation according to the effect content displayed as the reach effect of normal reach. If the corresponding effect operation is not set, it does not operate.
Subordinate item P680: Performs an effect operation according to the effect content displayed as the reach effect of normal reach. If the corresponding effect operation is not set, it does not operate. Further, when the back button effect is executed based on the input operation to the player's effect operation means P81 during the execution of the back button effect, the effect operation corresponding to the back button effect may be executed. In addition, when the execution timing of the character operation of the reach effect and the movable character effect of the back button effect overlap, the back button effect is prioritized and executed.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the back button effect during normal reach, the player continuously operates the effect operation means P81 (effect button P381) during a predetermined button valid period (back button valid period) during normal reach (the effect button P381). By performing multiple operations or long-pressing operations), the light emitting part of the lower accessory P680 steps up in the order of white ⇒ blue ⇒ green (⇒ red ⇒ gold) and the lower accessory P680 each time the number of operations and operation conditions are met. Executes a "back button step effect" that produces a vibration effect as an effect action so that is slightly increased and returns to the initial position. The final stage of arrival differs depending on the type of, but it is always configured to reach green).

During the period of "before reach (pseudo 2 to)", the light emitting unit and the speaker P83 other than the effecting object P560 execute the effect linked to the content of the reach effect. When the back button effect is scheduled to be executed during the reach effect, the effect lamp of the frame lamp 350 (effect operation unit P380) is made to emit light in a manner indicating that the effect operation means P81 is effective. When the player operates the effect operation means P81 at the time of executing the back button effect, the light emitting unit provided in the lower character P680 is supposed to execute the light emission effect of the back button step-up effect. In order to increase the height, the panel lamps 550 provided around the panel may be configured to emit light at the same time.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the step-up effect is executed based on the back button step-up, the light emission display in the finally reached emission color even after the end of the back button step-up effect during normal reach. Can be continuously displayed until the subsequent production timing. More specifically, the back button step-up effect during normal reach is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation, and the advance notice effect (cut-in) of SP reach (A reach, B reach, etc., which will be described later). It is possible to continuously display the final light emission mode of the back button step-up as the big hit expectation until the timing of the notice) and the winning branch effect. By doing so, as a player, when executing the SP reach, it is possible to confirm the display mode of the back button step-up as one reference information as to whether the result is a big hit, and the fun of the SP reach production is improved. Leads to. In addition, as a modification, from the final light emission mode of the back button step-up, in conjunction with the chance-up effect during SP reach, the light-emitting part of the subordinate P680 has a light-emitting color corresponding to a higher jackpot expectation. The light emission mode may be changed.

The occurrence of the button validity period in the "normal reach" period can be set at the period corresponding to the back button step-up effect as described above and the timing of the subsequent normal reach result notification (big hit notification or development notification to SP reach). Is. As described above, since the lower accessory P680 is an accessory that interferes with the horizontal accessory P670 and the upper accessory P650, the operating range of the lower accessory P680 for the back button step-up effect is set to a minute amount. However, as another method, during the back button step production period, only the lower character P680 can be operated, and the horizontal character P670 and the upper character can be operated. The effect content may be configured so that the effect operation is not assigned to P650.

Finally, among the production periods of "SP reach (A reach)", the production contents executed during the production period of "SP reach" will be described. In "SP reach (A reach)", a part of the background effect of the reach effect is configured to be different from the normal pattern (the pattern with the lowest expectation among the A reach effect patterns) during the SP reach. A chance-up notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high, a cut-in notice that characters and lines are displayed overlaid on the background of the reach production, and a notification of whether the result of the winning or losing lottery is a big hit. It is a period in which various effects such as button effects performed at the timing of the winning branch effect can be performed in a complex manner.

An example of the effect operation related to the effect item P560 in the effect period of "SP reach" is as follows (see "(c) effect example" and "(d) example of the effect lamp" in FIG. 89).

Superior item P650: Does not work (because the result of the lottery is wrong and a small hit). If the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit other than the 10R probability variation big hit, and the execution of the button effect is decided as a result of the lottery, the superior object P650 is operated in the first effect operation pattern. It may be configured in.
Horizontal character P670: When the operation of the horizontal character P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (notice of chance up during SP reach), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting unit of the horizontal object P670 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect (red light emission, and as a modification, white light emission in the case of the effect that the surrounding board lamp 550 emits red light). When operating the horizontal character P670, the horizontal character P670L, which is close to the place where the chance-up notice different from the normal pattern is displayed in a part of the background effect during SP reach, so that attention is paid to the chance-up notice. One of R may be configured to operate.
Subordinate item P680: When the operation of the subordinate item P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (cut-in notice during SP reach), the operation is performed in conjunction with each other. The light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect (for example, in the case of a green cut-in, the light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits green light, and the effect display of the green lower character operation effect P872 is performed. If it is a red cut-in, the light emitting part of the lower character P680 emits red light, and the effect display of the red lower character operation effect P872 is performed). If the back button step effect is executed in advance during normal reach, the light emitting unit of the lower part P680 continues to display the final light emission mode of the back button step effect until the timing of the winning branch effect. It is configured to preferentially emit light. As a modification, for example, in the back button step effect, when the red cut-in notice occurs while the light emitting part of the lower part P680 is emitting green as the final light emitting mode, the degree of expectation is higher. The red display that suggests that is displayed according to the execution of the notice effect, and then the red light emission mode is continued without returning to the light emission mode corresponding to the green back button step effect until the winning branch effect. You may.

The generation of the button validity period in the period of "SP reach" can be configured to be performed when the button effect is executed when the cut-in notice is generated or other notice effect (chance up notice, etc.) is generated. Further, the cut-in notice and other notice effects during SP reach may be configured as back button effects. Note that this example (see “(f) Button validity period” in FIG. 89) is SP reach (A reach) in the case of a missed or small hit, and is configured so that the button effect is not determined as the winning branch effect. ..

<< SP Reach (A Reach) _ Role: Big Hit >>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 90, the content of the variation effect when the “SP reach (A reach) _-combination” is determined among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 88 will be described. The fluctuation pattern "SP reach (A reach) _-combination" is a fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the case of a 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot, special figure 2_10R probability variation jackpot), and the content of the variation effect is shown in FIG. Since it is almost the same as the case of "SP reach (A reach)", only the characteristic differences will be explained.

In the example of the effect content of FIG. 90 and the example of FIG. 89, the effect content that can be executed by the start of "SP reach" is the same. In the example of FIG. 90, the biggest difference is that the button effect (winning branch button effect) is always executed during the effect period of "SP reach (A reach)" (that is, in the advance notice lottery at the start of the variable effect). The winning branch button effect is always won), the special period is set before and after the start of the valid period of the winning branch button effect, and the superior product P650 operates in the winning branch effect to notify the big hit. It differs from the effect example of FIG. 89 in that (it operates based on the operation of the effect operation means P81).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern “SP reach (A reach) _role” is a variation pattern that can be determined in the case of 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation jackpot, special figure 2_10R probability variation jackpot). Therefore, in order to greatly congratulate the player on winning the jackpot, the superior character P650 (texture character) is configured to always operate in the fluctuation effect performed when the variation pattern is determined, and further effect. In order to enhance the effect, the operation start of the superior object P650 is configured to be the operation timing for the effect operation means P81 of the button effect (winning branch button effect). In addition, in the case of other types of big hits, since the fluctuation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" is one of the results that can be selected, even if the A reach is executed, the winning branch button effect is produced unless the lottery is won. Is configured so that it does not occur.

The operation of the superior object P650 in the winning branch effect is executed in the first effect operation pattern, the light emitting unit provided in the superior object P650 emits light in rainbow colors, and the superior object is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. The motion effect P870 is displayed in rainbow colors. In addition, in the example of FIG. 89, the pattern in which the superior object P650 operates in another type of jackpot is also mentioned, but in the case of another type of jackpot, it is differentiated from the case where the 10R probability variation jackpot is obtained. In order to achieve the above, the effect content may be configured so that the superior object P650 is operated not by the first effect operation pattern but by the second effect operation pattern, and the light emitting unit or the superior object of the superior object P650 may be operated. The object motion effect P870 may be configured to emit light and display in another mode (a mode other than the rainbow color).

During the special period provided before and after the start of the button validity period of the winning branch button effect, the operation of the effect object P560, which had been in a movable state until then, is stopped (returned to the initial position or stopped on the spot), and the board lamp P550. , The light emitting part of the frame lamp P350 and the effect P560 is turned off (or dimmed until it becomes dark), and the sound effect from the speaker P83 (at least the sound effect corresponding to the reach effect) is temporarily stopped, and the effect display device P80. The display in is blacked out (black screen display, notification that it is changing with the simple drawing P802, the retracted symbol P803, etc.), making the pachinko gaming machine P dark and quiet, and the button image according to the button validity period. It is configured to display an operation promotion image such as P881.

Then, after the start of the special period, when the player executes the operation of the effect operation means P81 during the button validity period of the winning branch button effect, the operation effect of the superior object P650 is started and the reach effect is supported. It is configured so that the light emission effect of the effect lamp P82 and the sound effect of the speaker P83 are restored.

In this way, in the variable production corresponding to "SP reach (A reach)" _ role ", the quiet period (attention period) is before the first production operation pattern (texture movement) of the superior character P650 (texture character). By providing the above, it is possible to make it easy for the player to pay attention to the operation of the superior object P650 and the execution of the button effect, and to further enhance the effect of the operation of the superior object P650. Can be done.

In the "special period", as described above, the effect lamp P82 of the pachinko gaming machine P is darkened to limit the sound effect of the speaker P83, and the effect lamp P82 is made to emit light in a unified color. It may be such that a special dedicated sound effect is emitted from the speaker P83, and it is easy to increase the degree of attention to the operation promotion image displayed on the effect display device P80 by the effect of the winning branch button, and the superior product P650 ( Any mode may be used as long as it is easy to draw attention to the textured character).

In addition, the "special period" is the fluctuation pattern "SP reach (A reach)", and when another type of big hit is notified by the winning branch button effect (the winning branch button effect is displayed as a result of the notice lottery at the start of the variation effect). It may be executed when it is decided to be executed), and by doing so, it is possible to prevent the "occurrence of a special period" from becoming a "10R probability variation jackpot". In addition, the "special period" for attracting attention to the operation of the effect P560 does not necessarily have to be a button effect, and is the period before normal reach or reach (before reach (pseudo 1) or before reach (pseudo 2 to)). It may be provided to attract attention to the superior product P650 immediately before the development of the S and P reach is notified by the superior product P650 (texture character) in the period) or the like. Further, at this time, the superior object operation effect P870 is displayed on the display of the effect display device P80 which is blacked out so that the superior object P650 can be easily attracted attention, or the superior object P650 is slightly vibrated and the superior object P650 is displayed. You may perform a preparatory operation to blink the light emitting part of.

《B Reach: Hit》
Subsequently, an example of the content of the variation effect executed when the variation pattern “SP reach (B reach)” shown in FIG. 88 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Here, to briefly explain the outline of "B reach", "B reach" means that the "missing" mode is once notified in a normal reach or SP reach with a low expectation. It is one of the types of SP reach that is notified that it is a big hit if the superior object P650 is operated by the operation of the effect lever P382, which is called "lever chance" that develops after being done.

In the production example of FIG. 91, a case where the “missing” is once notified in the normal reach, then shifts to the B reach (lever chance), the B reach becomes a successful mode, and the big hit is notified is illustrated.

In FIG. 91, there is almost no difference in the production period of “before reach (pseudo 1)” and “before reach (pseudo 2 to)” from the time of “A reach” described above. The difference is that the B reach is "before reach (pseudo 1)" and "before reach (pseudo 2 to)" because the B reach is after the notification of the loss in the normal reach or the SP reach set to a lower expectation. ) ”, It is configured so that the development from the operation of the superior P650 to the high-expected SP reach (A reach, etc.) is not suggested. Other details are the same as A reach, so the explanation is omitted.

Subsequently, an example of the effect executed in the effect period “normal reach” of the variation in which the variation pattern “SP reach (B reach)” is executed will be described.

When the variable effect related to "SP reach (B reach)" is performed, in the normal reach, the evacuation symbol P803 during reach is displayed in the corner of the effect display device P80, while the abbreviation for the effect display device P80. The changing decorative symbol P801 (final stop symbol) is displayed in a variable manner in the central region. In the decorative symbol row that is the final stop symbol, an icon image or the like suggesting the development of SP reach may be displayed as a special symbol in addition to the type of decorative symbol that is the evacuation symbol of the reach. Then, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol string that becomes the final stop symbol in the vicinity of the evacuation symbol during reach and the symbols before and after, or the special symbol (icon image) decreases, and notification of whether the reach becomes a big hit (reach evacuation). Notifications related to SP reach development (stopping the icon image as the final stop symbol) are executed, and notification is performed in a hit mode in which the symbol and the final stop symbol are the same or in a different mode in which the symbols are different. In this example, in order to explain an example of shifting to the lever chance after the notification of the loss of the normal reach, it is assumed here that the normal reach ends in the missed mode, but the B reach (lever chance) is performed with a special symbol such as an icon image. ) May be configured.

In this effect example, when the normal reach ends in an out-of-order manner, as shown in FIG. 92 (an example of effect display of the timing of (A) in FIG. While performing a rattling motion that repeats the vertical movement of, the superior object motion effect P870 is displayed in the vicinity of the superior object P650. Then, in the vicinity of the stop display area of the decorative symbol P801 of the effect display device P80, the pseudo accessory operation image P874 regarding the superior object P650 is faded in (changed and displayed so as to be clearly visible by lowering the transmittance). As a result of repeating the effect of fading out display (changing display so as to increase the transmittance and slowly disappearing) multiple times, the pseudo-role motion image P874 is changed and displayed multiple times in this way, it is finally clearly displayed. In that case, it is notified that the transition to B reach (lever chance) is made, and if it is also out of alignment, the pseudo accessory operation image P874 is not displayed and the variation effect is displayed by the stop display of the out-of-order mode of the decorative symbol P801. finish. In this way, whether or not the pseudo accessory motion image P874 is displayed and the effect of inciting the transition to B reach (lever chance) by the movable effect operation of the target superior object P650 are referred to as "lever chance generation fanning".

When executing the "lever chance generation fanning", it is configured to display the superior object operation effect P870 together with the rattling motion of the superior object P650. It may be configured to suggest the degree of development expectation for B reach (lever chance) depending on the emission color and display mode of the accessory operation effect P870. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a hit, the light emitting portion of the superior object P650 and the superior object operation effect P870 during the lever chance generation are rainbow-colored (rainbow). By temporarily (momentarily) mixing light emission and display, it is possible to have a rare premier production pattern that can detect the acquisition of a big hit at the timing before the timing of the winning branch production during B reach (lever chance). It may be configured.

Further, at the time when the fade-in display and the fade-out display of the pseudo accessory operation image P874 are repeated in the "lever chance generation fanning", the pseudo accessory operation image P874 is displayed in gray scale, and finally B reach (lever chance). ) Is configured to display the pseudo accessory motion image P874 in color, but the pseudo accessory motion image P874 is also other than grayscale depending on the degree of development expectation for B reach (lever chance). It may be configured to have a single-color gradation display of a red system or a premier pattern mixed with a rainbow-colored display. In addition, in the repeated display before the final display of the pseudo accessory motion image P874, not only the display method of the fade-in display / fade-out display but also other factors such as slide-in depending on the degree of development expectation for B reach (lever chance). The appearance method of may be adopted, or a plurality of patterns may be combined.

Further, in the "normal reach" period executed during the variable effect of "SP reach (B reach)", the horizontal accessory P670 and the subordinate object P680 are assigned when the movable effect operation is assigned to the reach effect. The operation is performed according to the produced production operation pattern. As for the lower part P680, the effect operation and the light emission effect based on the back button effect are assigned as in the case of "SP reach (A reach)". However, even if the back button step-up is executed as the back button effect of the lower character P680, in the case of "SP reach (B reach)", the stop display (stop display in the detached mode of the decorative symbol P801 once) in the normal reach. When the temporary stop display) is made, the light emission display of the final light emission mode of the back button step effect is terminated before the execution of the lever chance generation fanning. This is effective as a highly entertaining reach production by suggesting that the lever chance generation fanning is once disengaged and the player is disappointed and the player is disappointed. This is to demonstrate, and if the light emission display based on the back button step effect continues in the light emitting part of the lower part P680, the effect of the lever chance generation will be diminished (the development to B reach (lever chance) is detected. It will be done).

Next, an example of the production content during the production period "SP reach" and the specific production content of B reach (lever chance) in the fluctuation production during the fluctuation pattern "SP reach (B reach)" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 93 (an example of producing the timing shown in the special period (B) in FIG. 91), the B reach (lever chance) is the B reach (lever chance) when the lever chance occurs at the end of the normal reach. After the start of, the effect lever P382 (frame movable accessory P360) is changed to a state in which input is possible (see FIG. 82 (b)), and an effect display is performed to urge the player to operate the effect lever P382. At this time, the variable display is started again from the display of the disengagement mode at the end of the normal reach, and the decorative symbol P801 (“3” in FIG. 93), which is a big hit if displayed, is disengaged together with the pseudo accessory operation image P874. The decorative design P801 (“2” in FIG. 93) is crushed to display the effect. Then, when the player operates the effect lever P382, the superior object P650 performs the effect operation (second effect operation pattern) and crushes the out-of-order decorative symbol P801 to show that it is a successful mode (in FIG. 93). Only "3" is displayed, and the combination of doublets is displayed). In addition, instead of the combination of the decorative symbol P801 and the pseudo accessory operation image P874, which is a hit, the superior accessory P650 is configured to rattle at the upper position of the decorative symbol P801 instead of the pseudo accessory operation image P874. May be good.

During B reach (lever chance), the horizontal accessory P670 and the lower accessory P680 do not have a pattern for performing a movable effect operation, and are configured to stand by at the initial position and emit light from the light emitting unit. The embodiment is also configured to emit light according to the reach effect.

The effect lever P382 is effective at the timing of the winning branch button effect during B reach (lever chance), but in order for the operation of the effect lever P382 to be effective, a preparatory operation is required in advance as shown in FIG. The preparatory operation is performed before the valid period of the effect operation means P81 (effect lever P382) for the effect of the hit branch button effect. Since B reach (lever chance) is an effect aimed at notifying a big hit by a movable effect operation of the superior object P650 based on the operation of the effect lever P382, it is an effect to increase the degree of attention to the effect lever P382. When the preparatory operation of the lever P382 is performed, the frame lamp P350 is configured to move and light the portion that emits light in order toward the effect lever P382 side, and is configured to attract attention to the effect lever P382. ing. On the other hand, the panel lamp P550 is moved and displayed so that the light emitting portion moves toward the superior object P650 in sequence.

The effect period and the special period of the effect operation means P81 are configured to be generated according to the timing when the preparation operation of the effect lever P382 is completed. In the special period, the above-mentioned "SP reach (A reach)" is used. In the same manner as above, the light emitting mode of the effect lamp P82 of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned off and dimmed (excluding the effect lever P382 and the superior P650), and at least a part of the sound effect output from the speaker P83. By stopping the effect and displaying the effect lever image P882 together with the character string "Drop the superior object !!" on the effect display device, the effect lever P382 and the superior object P650 are displayed to the player. Configure to focus on movement.

(Priority of display layer of pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, display priorities relating to the display of various effect displays displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 shows an example of the effect screen during the variable display of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 95 shows the display priority of various effect displays.

FIG. 94 shows an example of effect display during execution of the variation effect of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. In the display area of the effect display device P80, an image of two female characters walking on the road is displayed as a background image P876, and in the example of FIG. 94, a black figure is displayed as a character appearance notice P877. (At this time, since the two female characters in the background image P876 are also performing the action for character appearance notice, the background image P876 is switched to an image in which the two female characters do not exist, and the character appearance notice is given. The images of the two are displayed).

Then, in the effect display example shown in FIG. 94, the dialogue notice P878 (the dialogue of "who !?" and the female character image) that is displayed in combination at the same timing in preference to the character appearance notice P877 is displayed. The lower character movement effect P872 is displayed in the vicinity of the lower character P680 with priority over the dialogue notice P878 (at this time, the lower character P680 is a movable effect operation when the character appearance notice P877 is switched from the human figure to the character display. Because it is set to perform the preparatory operation or the fanning operation).

Further, a button image P881 is displayed in the vicinity (lower side) of the dialogue notice P878, and is displayed to urge the player to operate the effect operation means P81. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, in order to surely prompt the player to operate the effect operation means P81, the operation promotion image (button image P881, lever image P882) is used as a character movement effect (subordinate movement effect). It is displayed with priority over P872).

In FIG. 94, as other display objects, a decorative symbol P801 and a simplified design P802 for producing a lottery result of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner are shown. In addition, as a display for displaying necessary information for the player, which is not directly related to the current fluctuation display, a hold display object P811 and a simple hold P814 regarding hold, a separate notification image P830, a cumulative acquisition number display P824, and the like are displayed. it's shown.

FIG. 95 shows high and low priorities (that is, display layer assignments and priorities) set in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment with respect to the various effect displays and other effect displays exemplified in FIG. 94. The higher the value, the more easily the player draws on the display layer). Hereinafter, the display contents will be described by exemplifying the display contents in order from the one with the lowest priority.

《Background production》
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the "background effect" is set to have the lowest priority as the effect display content displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. "Background effect" is often displayed for the purpose of grasping the effect stage (effect mode) by the player, and the display of landscapes, characters, and objects is displayed as an animation, and the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner. It is an effect image that can be continuously displayed even if it does not exist. It should be noted that the "background effect" may not be visible in the game standby demo display, the notice effect of displaying the full screen, the big hit effect, etc., which shifts due to the continuation of the period in which the special symbol is not displayed.

<< Notice >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, most of the image displays of the notice effect are set to have the lowest priority of display next to the background effect. As shown in FIG. 95, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of types of advance notices are set with different priorities, and a plurality of advance notice effects such as "notice 1", "notice 2", ..., "Notice N". It is stipulated which display should be given priority when the displays of are displayed at the same time. According to the example described with reference to FIG. 94, since the character appearance notice P877 corresponds to "notice 1" and the dialogue notice P878 corresponds to "notice 2", the dialogue notice P878 is visually recognized by superimposing on the image of the character appearance notice P877. It is supposed to be done.

<< Look-ahead / Pseudo-continuous production >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the look-ahead effect and the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect of displaying "x2" or the like at the start of re-variation) are displayed over a plurality of times of the variation display. It has an important role of notifying that the expectation of big hits is increasing (look-ahead effect) and that the expectation of big hits is increasing due to the development of pseudo-continuous production in the variable display during execution. Therefore, the priority is set higher than most of the preview images. In addition, there are exceptional look-ahead effects that do not apply to the display priority, such as hold change look-ahead displayed as a hold display.

《Character movement effect》
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation of the effect object P560, the look-ahead effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect occur, the jackpot expectation is relative to that without the operation of the effect character P560. It is designed to be high. Therefore, the display of the character motion effect (superior character motion effect P870, horizontal character motion effect P871, lower character motion effect P872, character full screen effect P873, etc.) that emphasizes the motion of the effect character P560 is announced. By raising the display priority over images, pre-reading effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc. so that the accessory operation effects are not hidden by these effect displays, it is easy to attract attention to the movable effect operation of the effect character P560. It has become like. By configuring the operation of the effect P560 so that it is easy to attract attention in this way, it is effective that an event advantageous to the player is approaching, such as an increase in the expectation of a big hit of the effect P560. It will be possible to notify.

《Direction auxiliary display》
The "directing auxiliary display" is a stage name display that notifies the player that the directing stage (directing mode) has changed for a few seconds at the timing when the directing stage (directing mode) is switched, and a character or the like during the reach production. Auxiliary display such as telop display that displays lines is equivalent. These displays are display objects that can be displayed only in a narrow display area at a very short timing when the character being reached speaks a line (timing when voice is output from the speaker P83) when the effect mode is switched. On the other hand, by displaying it, it can be used as a notice to notify the player of the production content or indirectly to inform the jackpot expectation (for example, the display color of the telop character is configured so that the jackpot expectation is different). In order to improve the visibility when displayed as much as possible, the priority is set higher than the notice and the character movement effect.

《Decorative pattern》
Since the "decorative symbol" (decorative symbol P801) is an important display object for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery of the special symbol, the display priority is set so as not to be hidden by the notice display or the character movement effect. It is configured to increase. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, during the high-speed fluctuation period during the variable display of the decorative symbol P801, the transmittance is increased with respect to the display of the decorative symbol P801 so that the player can hardly see it, and the display priority is displayed from the player's point of view. The display of various notice effects, etc., which are set lower than the decorative design, is visible.

Regarding the display of the decorative symbol P801, the transmittance is not changed to facilitate visual recognition such as a notice, but the decorative symbol P801 (display priority is low) that is changing and the decorative symbol P801 (display) that is being stopped and displayed. By configuring the display priority (high priority) to be different, the visibility of the changing decorative symbol P801 may be lower than that of the advance notice effect or the like.

<< Custom display (menu screen, volume / light intensity adjustment) >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the menu screen (effect custom screen) for the player to arbitrarily select the effect mode, the volume output from the speaker P83, the brightness and color of the effect lamp P82, etc. are adjusted. It is possible to execute a custom display for adjusting the effect during the game, such as a volume / light amount adjustment display for adjusting the amount of light to be played, and an automatic operation mode setting for setting the operation mode of the effect operation means to automatic operation. These custom displays include those that can be displayed even during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and can be adjusted and set even during the execution of a notice or the like.

In addition, the display of the custom display is prohibited and switched to non-display at the timing of displaying important information of the game result such as the stop display of the decorative symbol P801 mentioned above, and during the period when the reach with high expectation is performed. It can be configured so that the information necessary for the player can be easily visually recognized. In addition, since the "custom display" is information that is not closely related to the effect such as the advance notice effect, it is possible to freely switch from the normal position to be displayed by default to a different display position. When a part of the image display area is covered by the operation of P560, the custom display to be displayed (or scheduled to be displayed) in the area can be configured to change the display position to ensure visibility.

<< Display of cumulative number of acquisitions >>
The "cumulative acquisition number display" is a display unit that displays the total number of game balls acquired by the player during the period in which the specific game state and the big hit game (or small hit game) are repeatedly executed, that is, during the so-called consecutive villa period. be. In addition to the cumulative number of winnings display P824, the round display P820 displaying the current number of rounds during the jackpot game, the jackpot icon P821 showing the number of times the jackpot has been executed, and the number of jackpot winning balls displaying the winning balls during one jackpot. The display P823, the count display P825 indicating the number of balls entered in the big winning opening during one round of big hits, and the like are also set to the same display priority.

<< Hold display >>
The "hold display" is the hold object P811 in the hold display area P810 and the hold object P813 in the hold object display area P812, and is special corresponding to the special symbol lottery which is the main body of the game in the current effect state (effect mode). It is a display area for performing display related to the hold corresponding to the number of hold of the symbol lottery and the random value used for the current variable display. Distinguished from the simple hold display P814 described later, in the "hold display", the effect display (for example, hold change) regarding the jackpot expectation of the hold random value and the random value used for the special symbol lottery corresponding to the current fluctuation is displayed. Production etc.) is feasible. The hold display may be difficult to see due to the effect display displayed as a special notice when executing the special notice in which the display priority is set to be high, which will be described later. The display priority of the hold display area P810 and the hold object display area P812 are different, for example, the display priority of the hold object display area P812 is set higher than the special notice, and the special notice (during reach) is set. While the hold display area P810 disappears due to blackout, etc.), by continuing to display the hold object display area P812 corresponding to the fluctuation that is giving the special notice, the expectation of the special notice can be changed. It is also possible to configure the pending object P813 to be indirectly notified by displaying the included result P813 in a complex manner.

《Special notice (example: blackout display, result production, etc.》
"Special notice" is a production display that attracts attention to the production (especially the production display content that follows) for the player such as the blackout of the special period of the SP reach (A reach) mentioned above, and the SP reach that wants to emphasize other things. This is a variable display of a special symbol that is displayed with priority over other display objects in order to concentrate on a specific notice such as the effect inside. In addition, such a display is also used when it is desired to change the display mode of the hold display due to the effect display for displaying the game result such as the result effect executed at the timing of the final change of the time-saving game, or the stage change effect. It may be set as a special notice with high priority.

Although not shown, as the display priority of such a special notice, the notice display, the look-ahead, and the character movement effect corresponding to the fluctuation are not displayed by setting the display priority higher than the character movement effect, but it is reserved. Alternatively, a medium priority notice may be set so that the display such as the cumulative number of acquisitions is continuously visible.

Further, as a modification, among the above-mentioned character movement effects, the character full-screen effect P873 (rainbow color) when the superior character P650 (texture character) is used to notify that the jackpot is a big hit is reserved. Since the interest in the display or the like is reduced, the display priority may be set to be equivalent to that of the special notice.

<< Operation promotion image (button image) >>
The "operation promotion image (button image)" is for urging the player to operate the effect operation means P81 in order to switch the effect of the variable effect during execution, and for setting the selection content of the above-mentioned custom display. Since it is an image that guides the operation method and is a highly necessary display, the display priority is set high so that it will not be hidden by other displays. In addition, it is configured so that it is always displayed at a position that does not overlap with a display object having a higher display priority such as a simple drawing or a simple hold described later, or the display timing is not the same.

《Simple hold》
"Simple hold" is a display relating to the number of holds displayed in a display area different from the hold display area P810 which is the above-mentioned hold display, and the first special symbol and the second special are displayed regardless of the effect stage (effect mode). It is a display showing the display of the number of reserved symbols by numbers, symbols, and the like. The display of "simple hold" is positioned as important information (important UI) for the player so that it can be visualized even when a special effect such as a special notice is performed.

《Separate notification》
The "striking notification" (striking notification image P830) is a display indicating to the player the position where it is currently recommended to launch the game ball, and is important in the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. Right-handed small display P832, left-handed small display P834, right-handed attention alert notification P835, and left-handed attention alert notification P836 are assigned as UI. The right-handed large display P831 and the left-handed large display P833 are special displays that are displayed when the game state is switched (eg, the big hit start demo period, the start or end of a specific game (shorter time), etc.). It is treated almost the same as the notice (display priority).

《Simple drawing》
The "simple design" (simple design P802) is a display that indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by the variable display and that the lottery result of the special symbol is notified by the stop display mode, and the decorative symbol P801 is used. It is displayed as one of the important UIs so that variable display and stop display can always be performed even in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized. In addition, during the special game (particularly the big hit game), the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the display of the big hit effect may switch to non-display in order to give the player a feeling of happiness. During the small hit, the variable display of the special symbol is only interrupted, so it will not be hidden even during the special game (during the small hit game), and the stop display will be displayed during the small hit game. If this is done, it will be mistaken for a game result, so even if the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted, the variable display of the simplified drawing P802 can be continuously executed (the symbol is switched as the variable display). However, it is also possible to execute the shaking fluctuation during the execution period of the small hit game, that is, during the interruption of the fluctuation display of the special symbol).

Further, the simple drawing P802 displays one or two depending on the playability (game machine specifications, specifications) of the game machine. For example, in the second special symbol (special diagram 2) priority digestion control and inbound order digestion control, only one special symbol is always displayed in a variable manner, so only one simple design P802 may be displayed, but in parallel control. In this case, since there is a possibility that the two special symbols may be displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that the simplified drawing P802 is also displayed in two places. Even in the case of parallel control, only the special symbol designed as the main body of the game may be displayed as the simplified drawing P802 according to the effect stage (effect mode).

"error indication"
Further, although not shown in FIG. 95, since it is preferable to configure the error display when an error occurs in the gaming machine so that it can be visually recognized in any situation, the display priority equivalent to that of the important UI is set. Set. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the display priority is set higher than that of the important UIs 1 to 3, such as simple hold, separate notification, and simple drawing, but the respective display position settings do not overlap. Therefore, even if the order of each display priority is changed, there is substantially no effect.

In addition, when designing the right-handed warning alert P835 and the left-handed alert alert P836 with a large image in the separate notification, there is a risk of overlapping with the error image, so the separate notification is displayed. It is preferable to set the priority to the lowest of the important UI and error display.

(A production stage characterized by the operation of the production performance of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment)
Next, "X Rush SUPER", which is a production stage (effect mode) characterized by the operation of the production accessory P560 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, will be described. "X Rush SUPER" is a production stage (production mode) corresponding to the gaming state of a probabilistic game (high probability / low base) shown in FIG. 86, in which small hits occur frequently and a normal electric accessory is used. Since the operation mode is the non-electric chew support state, by launching the game ball to the right game area P501R, the ball enters the large winning opening P751 arranged downstream from the normal electric accessory P770 during the small hit game. Is easy. Therefore, in "X Rush SUPER", the number of game balls is gradually increased by winning the big winning opening P751 during the small hit game even if the big hit is not obtained (referred to as "small hit rush").

As shown in FIG. 87, in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, the winning probability of the small hit is as high as 1/2, and the small hit is frequently won. Mode) In "X Rush SUPER", the same type of decorative pattern (for example, not doublet but the same display color) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 in order to visually notify the winning of the small hit. Three decorative symbols and special symbols for notifying small hits) are stopped and displayed, and the lower character P680 is made to rise at the same time. In addition, the production to notify that a small hit was won in such a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed only in "X Rush SUPER", and other right-handed hits such as "X Rush" and "Resurrection Chance". In the production stage (effect mode) in which the game is recommended, even if a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is not executed.

The operation pattern of the lower character P680 in "X Rush SUPER" is set to a different operation pattern depending on the type of the small hit game won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 87, there are two types of small hit symbols of the second special symbol, "special figure 2_small hit_1" and "special figure 2_small hit_1", and "special figure 2_small hit_1" is This is a small hit game in which the large winning opening P751 is opened once for 0.6 seconds, and "Special Figure 2_Small hit_2" is opened twice for the large winning opening P751 for 0.6 seconds. That is, there is a possibility that a player can obtain more prize balls when he / she wins "Special Figure 2_Small Hit_2", which is advantageous. Therefore, as the operation pattern of the subordinate P680 when notifying that the small hit has been won in "X Rush SUPER", the production operation pattern for "Special Figure 2_Small Hit_1" and "Special Figure 2_Small Hit" An effect operation pattern for "_2" is prepared.

In the effect operation pattern for "Special Figure 2_Small Hit_1", the lower object P680 rises to the ascending position sensor P687 and immediately returns to the position of the descending position sensor P686, and the position of the ascending position sensor P687 is performed. Along with the movement to, the light emitting portion of the lower object P680 emits white light, and the small white lower object operation effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. On the other hand, in the effect operation pattern for "Special Figure 2_Small Hit_2", the lower accessory P680 moves to the position detected by the ascending position sensor, and in the process, the lower accessory P680 emits white light from the light emitting portion and produces the effect. It is the same until the lower object operation effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the display device P80, while the lower object P680 rises to the position detected by the ascending position sensor again in the process of returning to the lowering position sensor P686. At the same time, the light emitting portion of the lower accessory P680 is made to emit red light, and the large red lower accessory operation effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.

In addition, as a special production operation pattern of the subordinate P680 in "X Rush SUPER", when a small hit is continuously won in a plurality of special symbol lottery (preliminary judgment information of a hold existing due to a fluctuation that becomes a small hit). (Judgment is made by confirming the preliminary judgment information for the hold of the second special symbol that occurs thereafter), for the above-mentioned production operation pattern for "special figure 2_small hit_1" or for "special figure 2_small hit_2". The small hit game is executed a plurality of times without performing the return operation to the descending position sensor P686 (returning operation to the initial position) in the effect operation pattern and keeping the state of moving to the position detected by the ascending position sensor. In the meantime, the light emitting part of the lower part P680 is made to emit gold (a light emitting pattern in which yellow, white, and orange are mixed), and the large golden operation effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. Is feasible. By determining the types of small hit games with different profits and the number of consecutive small hit games using the pre-judgment information, the effect operation pattern of the lower prize P680 and the display contents of the effect display device P80 are different. Even if the small hits are won frequently, the notification related to the small hits is not monotonous, and the effect of giving a sense of expectation to the game profit (the number of prize balls of the game ball) that may be given is produced. It will be possible to execute.

When a big hit is made in "X Rush SUPER", it is a superior when notifying the acquisition of a big hit with the operation of the directing character P560, as in the production stage (directing mode) corresponding to other game states. It is configured to use the object P650. Here, in "X Rush SUPER", when the interval of the small hit game (the fluctuation display period of the second special symbol for each time) becomes long, the feeling of getting out of the ball based on the acquisition of the game ball by the small hit game (a large amount of games). Since the feeling of getting a ball) fades, in the probabilistic game that is in the game state (high probability / low base) corresponding to "X Rush SUPER", the electric chew support function is not working, but a special pattern The fluctuation time shortening function of is in the operating state, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is configured so that a short-time fluctuation can be easily selected. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 7th embodiment, even when a big hit is made in "X Rush SUPER", the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than when a big hit is made in another gaming state. Most of the big hits are configured to be notified using the operation of the superior P650 (except for the exceptional big hit notification effect, the variable effect accompanied by the operation of the superior P650 is always selected. It has become).

By adopting the operation mode of the production accessory P560 in such "X rush SUPER", in the "X rush SUPER", the player "big hit when the superior object P650 operates" and "the lower accessory P680 operate". You can enjoy the feeling and production of small hits and big hits with a simple and easy-to-understand game production with the feeling of "If you hit a small hit".

As a modification of "X Rush SUPER", a 2R jackpot or 4R in which an opening pattern (0.6 seconds x 5) having a large winning opening opening time similar to that of a small hit is executed in multiple rounds is executed. A big hit is provided as a result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and when these big hits are won, the operation of the lower prize P680 is the same as when the small hit is won, not the upper prize P650 (described above). It is configured to execute a "special production operation pattern") that is performed across multiple small hit games, and it is configured to make it appear as if the player has won multiple small hits even though it is a big hit. You may.

(Modification example of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment)
<< Modification 1 >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the display content of the effect display device P80 and the effect operation pattern of the superior character P650 (texture character) during the reach effect are used to notify that a big hit is achieved. It was explained that it is a pachinko gaming machine that provides a highly entertaining production that combines the movements of the character P560.

Here, as a modification, depending on the type of the production operation pattern of the superior character P650 (texture character) during the reach production, the degree of advantage in the special game (the number of prize balls acquired or the jackpot game) will be changed. It may be configured to be able to make suggestions regarding the type of specific game).

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, the "10R probability variation jackpot" shown in FIG. 87 is the most advantageous type of special game, and when the 10R probability variation jackpot is notified, the superior object P650 is used as shown in FIG. 78. The rotating decoration unit P652 is expanded at the effect position, the horizontal accessory P670 is expanded behind the superior object P650, and the accessory full screen effect P873 is displayed in rainbow colors in the display area of the effect display device P80. (The light emitting part of the superior object P650 emits light in a color corresponding to the full screen effect P873).

Here, as a modification, as a pattern suggesting the type of special game by the effect operation pattern of the superior object P650, when the 4R probability variation jackpot (or some 10R probability variation jackpot) is obtained, the superior accessory P650 is produced. While the rotating decoration unit P652 is expanded and operated at the position, the horizontal accessory P670 is not expanded on the back surface of the superior object P650, and the red accessory full screen effect P873 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 (upper). The light emitting portion of the accessory P650 may prepare a pattern for executing the medium expectation mode (light emitting in a color corresponding to the full screen effect P873). Further, in the case of a 10R normal jackpot (or some 10R probability variation or 4R probability variation jackpot) in which the expectation of profit that can be given to the player is low, the superior product P650 is used as the second production operation pattern (. It is also possible to prepare a pattern that operates in a weak pattern), does not expand the horizontal accessory P670 to the effect position, and executes a small expectation mode in which the superior object operation effect P870 is displayed in large red.

In addition, when shifting to a special game (big hit game) in a medium expectation mode or a small expectation mode, the effect of the light emitting portion of the superior object P650 and the effect image displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. When the effect is continuously displayed in red or the like and it is notified during the jackpot game that the jackpot is actually a more advantageous jackpot (for example, 10R probability variation), the light emitting unit of the superior P650 or the effect display device P80 is displayed. The effect image or the like in the area may be configured to switch to the rainbow-colored light emission and display mode displayed during the jackpot game when the 10R probability change is notified.

<< Modification 2 >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, when the winning branch button effect is generated at the timing of the winning branch of the reach effect, the operation of the effecting object P560 attracts attention. Therefore, it is configured to provide a special period in which the player is in a quiet state, but if the expectation is excessively raised, there is a risk that the player's willingness to play will be significantly reduced if the player is out of the game.

Therefore, as a condition for providing such a special period, a chance-up effect occurs during the SP reach effect period, and a cut-in notice during the reach effect is an effect pattern (for example, blue <green < It may be configured to generate a special period on condition that red <there is a gold cut-in pattern and red cut-in or more) is executed. By doing so, there is a possibility that the situation where a special period occurs is a situation where SP reach occurs and the chance-up effect is executed in the advance notice effect lottery, which is a big hit. It can be limited to high situations.

Further, in the case of such a configuration, the winning branch button effect is generated without causing the situation of being in a quiet state as a special period, so that the preparatory operation (rattling operation and the light emitting part of the superior object P650) is performed. While the light emission and the display of the superior object operation effect P870) are continued, the button validity period of the winning branch button effect is generated, and the setting is made from the mode of the preparatory operation based on the operation of the player's effect operation means P81. It may be configured to switch to the effect operation pattern (for example, the first effect operation pattern is used at the time of hitting, and the stop pattern is used at the time of hitting).

<< Modification 3 >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the "lever chance" which is the SP reach (B reach) shown in FIG. Is configured to execute the preparatory operation of the effect lever P382 of the effect operation unit P380 in advance, but the start timing of the preparatory operation of the effect lever P382 is changed at the same time as the start of the special period or after the start. It is also good.

Further, when configured in this way, the winning branch button effect requires the operation of the effect button P381 (weak pattern, relatively low expectation of big hit) and the operation of the effect lever P382 (strong pattern). , With a relatively high expectation of a big hit), and in any of the special periods (such as the special period of B reach shown in FIG. 93 and the blackout display period of A reach). It may be configured to draw attention to whether the operating means P81 is required.

Further, after shifting to the special period for attracting attention to the operation of the effect effect P560 in this way, the button is valid when notifying the operation content requested to the effect operation means P81 and requesting the operation of the effect lever P382. By delaying the display start timing of the operation promotion image for notifying the occurrence of the period occurrence timing than when the operation of the effect button P381 is requested (for example, delaying by about 0.5 seconds), a sense of incongruity is given. , The length of the special period up to the button validity period (the period for accepting the input of the effect lever) including the preparation operation period of the effect lever is configured to be long, and the player is given impatience by the length of the special period. It may be configured to increase the degree of attention to the winning branch button effect.

<< Modification 4 >>
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment, even if an error occurs in the effect object P560 and the movable effect operation is prohibited, it is the same as the situation where the movable effect operation is not prohibited. Although it is configured to control the lighting of the light emitting portion of the effecting object P560 in the light emitting mode of the above, under the situation where the movable effect operation is prohibited, the light emitting mode of the effecting object P560 is different from the situation where the movable effect operation is prohibited. It may be configured to have a light emission effect pattern dedicated to the case of an error so as to light the unit.

Further, even if the movable effect operation of the effect object P560 is prohibited, the effect image that was planned to be displayed corresponding to the movable effect operation of the effect object P560 such as the advance notice effect and the look-ahead effect is also movable. By making it possible to display the image in the same manner as in the situation where the effect operation is not prohibited, it may be possible to configure the game to be playable without damaging the information related to the expected degree of the look-ahead effect.

Further, when the movable effect operation of the effect item P560 is prohibited, the operation of the effect item P560 is replaced with the operation of the effect item P560 at the timing when the movable effect operation of the corresponding effect item P560 should be executed. Corresponds to the effect image and other effects P560 by displaying the pseudo-effect operation image of the corresponding effect P560 and outputting the movable effect operation sound corresponding to the movable effect operation of the effect P560 from the speaker P83. The meaning of the image display to be displayed may be configured to be understandable.

(Characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment)
<< Feature composition 1 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the first characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. A game having a device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.) and an effect movable body (effect object P560) included in the effect device and capable of performing a predetermined displacement operation. In the machine, the main control means executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied based on the progress of the game, and the special game includes at least the first special game. It has a second special game (10R probability variation big hit, etc.) that is more advantageous than the first special game (10R normal jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, small hit, etc.), and is at least the first as a production movable body. It has a production movable body (upper character P650) and a second production movable body (horizontal character P670, lower character P680), and the effect control means is a specific effect (suggesting that a special game is executed). The first effect operation pattern of the superior object P650) can be executed, and the specific effect is an effect that enables a movable effect in which the first effect movable body is displaced in a specific mode, and is a second special game. Is scheduled to be executed, a specific effect may be executed, and when the first special game is scheduled to be executed, the specific effect is not executed.

By adopting this feature configuration, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of effect characters P560, in which a superior character (texture character), which is a specific effect character, has a specific motion (first effect operation pattern, The special game acquired when the textured motion) is performed can be easily recognized as a special game that is advantageous to the player, and the content of the production can be simply and clearly configured.

<< Feature composition 2 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the second characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , An effect movable body (effect P560) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and an effect light emitting unit (effect lamp P82, effect light emitting unit P560, etc.) included in the effect device and executing a predetermined light emission effect. A game machine having a (Special symbol lottery) is executed, and the effect control means can select an execution pattern from a plurality of types of effect patterns including a specific effect pattern (A reach, B reach, etc.) as an effect execution pattern related to the result of the winning / failing lottery. The specific effect pattern is to displace the effect movable body (superior object P650) to a predetermined position in front of the effect display means when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the result of executing the special game (superior object). (Execute the first effect operation pattern of P650), in a predetermined period (special period) immediately before the effect movable body moves toward a predetermined position, a specific display (for example, blackout display, etc.) is performed on the effect display means, and the effect is produced. A gaming machine characterized in that a movable body is stopped at a position other than a predetermined position, and the light emitting mode of the effect light emitting unit is set to a special light emitting mode (dimming mode or extinguishing mode).

By adopting this feature configuration, immediately before the performance (winning branch button production) is performed by the superior character P650 (texture character) in order to notify the result of the special symbol lottery in SP reach or the like. After the special period (effect operation means), the operation of the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82, and the effect accessory P560 (superior object P650) is set to a quiet mode (a mode in which the effect object P650 is concentrated) during the special period. It can be configured to attract attention to the operation of the effecting object P560 (superior object P650) (after the operation of P81), and the effect of the jackpot acquisition notification accompanying the operation of the superior character P650 can be enhanced.

<< Feature composition 3 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as a third characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , A gaming machine having an effect movable body (superior object P650, horizontal accessory P670, lower accessory P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement motion, and a main control means is predetermined based on the progress of the game. When the execution conditions of The pattern can be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns, and the display priority is predetermined for the display content displayed on the effect display means according to the display content. When an effect pattern accompanied by a displacement motion is selected, it is possible to display a movable body motion-related display (feature motion effect), which is a display content related to the motion of the effect movable body, on the effect display means, and as an effect execution pattern. , In the situation where the effect pattern accompanied by the predetermined displacement motion of the effect movable body is selected, the movable body operation-related display is displayed on the effect display means, and is a predetermined notice which is the display content related to the execution or non-execution of the special game. A gaming machine characterized by having a higher display priority than the production display (notice production).

By adopting this configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the advance notice effect and the operation of the effect P560 are combined, and in the gaming machine, the accessory operation effect (superior character operation effect P870) is higher than when the action is not combined. , Horizontal character movement effect P871, lower character movement effect P872, character full screen effect P873, etc.) is higher than the display priority of the advance notice effect executed by combining the operation of the effect character P560. By setting, the effect of the character movement is not hidden by the notice effect, etc., and the visibility to the player is improved. It can be configured so that the display mode of the related full-screen effect of the accessory can be surely recognized.

<< Feature composition 4 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the fourth characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , A gaming machine having a plurality of effect movable bodies (upper character P650, horizontal character P670, lower character P680) capable of executing predetermined displacement movements, and the effect control means is a plurality of effect movable bodies. When a predetermined operation abnormality (step number over error, position check error, power start-up, etc.) is detected in at least one effect movable body of the body, the effect is being executed according to the progress of the game of the main control means. However, for each of the plurality of effect movable bodies, it is possible to execute the initial position return operation process for returning to the initial position of each of the plurality of effect movable bodies in a predetermined processing order, and the initial position return can be performed. While the operation process is being executed, power is supplied to the drive source of the effect movable body for the return operation to the effect movable body whose processing order is currently such that the return operation to the initial position is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that power for a return operation is not supplied to the drive source of the other effect movable body that is not in the current processing order.

By adopting this feature configuration, if an operation abnormality of the effecting object occurs while the game is in progress (during the variable display of the special symbol), all the effecting objects P560 that can advance to the front of the effect displaying device P80 are Drive of the effector P560 that executes the process of returning to the initial position in a predetermined order (however, it is ignored if it is already in the initial position) and is performing the initial position return operation process. While power is supplied to the source, power is not supplied to the drive source of the effecting object P560 which is not the target of the initial position returning operation processing, so that the initial position returning operation processing of the effecting object P560 is performed. It is possible to reduce the amount of electric power required for the operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation of other production devices from being affected.

<< Feature composition 5 >>
The pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the fifth characteristic configuration.

The main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, the effect control means (effect control CPU) that controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and the effect controlled by the effect control means. The device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), the effect display means (effect display device P80) that is included in the effect device and performs a predetermined effect display, and the effect device. , A gaming machine having an effect movable body (lower accessory P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and an effect light emitting unit provided on the effect movable body to execute a predetermined light emission effect, and is a main control. The means executes a winning / failing lottery relating to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied based on the progress of the game, and the effect control means is the result of the winning / failing lottery. An execution pattern can be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns including a specific effect pattern as the effect execution pattern according to the above, and the specific effect pattern is the first effect period (for example, normal reach) and the second effect after the first effect period. It is an effect pattern having an effect period (for example, SP reach), and in the first effect period, the first effect period light emission effect (back) that suggests the result of the winning / failing lottery by switching the light emission mode of the effect light emitting unit a plurality of times. It is possible to execute the button step-up effect), and when the light emission effect during the first effect period is executed, until a predetermined timing during the execution of the second effect period (for example, until the winning branch effect during SP reach, or a chance). A gaming machine characterized in that the effect light emitting unit is set to a light emitting mode related to the final light emitting mode of the first effect period light emitting effect) (until the occurrence of the up effect).

By adopting this feature configuration, the jackpot expectation level notified by the effect using the effect P560 executed in the preceding effect period (the back button step-up effect of the light emitting part) is continued in the subsequent effect period. By displaying the above, while continuously confirming the jackpot expectation level notified by the production using the production accessory P560 in the preceding production period, the content of the production to be executed in the subsequent production has a sense of expectation. It is possible to provide a new and highly interesting production that you can face.

P pachinko game machine, P1 outer frame, P2 front frame, P3 glass frame,
P4 back set unit, P5 game board, P40 main control board,
P41 effect control board, P42 image control board, P43 payout control board,
P44 power supply board, P47 power switch, P48 ram clear switch,
P49 setting key switch, P50 main control display device,
P51 1st special symbol display device, P52 2nd special symbol display device,
P80 effect display device, P81 effect operation means (P380 effect operation unit,
P381 production button, P382 lever, P383 cross key),
P82 production lamp (P350 frame lamp, P550 board lamp),
P83 speaker (P141 curtain plate speaker, P371 upper speaker),
P560 Directing accessory, P710 1st start winning device,
P720 (P808) 2nd start winning device, P730 general winning device,
P740 Normal electric accessory, P750 (P809) Grand prize opening device P755 Special electric accessory, P770 (P907) Ordinary electric accessory

Claims (1)

A game board in which a left game area where a game ball can flow down and a right game area where a game ball can flow down are formed.
The first start winning opening provided in the left game area,
The second start winning opening provided in the right game area,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information when the ball enters the first start winning opening, and
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information when the ball enters the second start winning opening, and
A large winning opening that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball,
Equipped with a main control unit that controls the progress of the game
The main control unit
The first winning / failing determination means for executing the first winning / failing determination based on the first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first starting winning opening.
A second winning / failing determination means for executing a second winning / failing determination based on a second lottery value acquired when the ball enters the second starting winning opening.
A first hold control means that holds the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the first identification information corresponding to the first hit / fail determination.
A second hold control means that holds the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variation display of the second identification information corresponding to the second hit / fail determination.
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening, and
A specific game state control means that executes a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, and
It is equipped with a right-handed suggestion means that suggests that the game ball should be launched into the right game area by turning on a predetermined lamp.
Right-handed suggestion means
It is configured to turn on a predetermined lamp during a special game or in a specific game state.
A pachinko machine configured to be able to turn on a predetermined lamp when a hold exists in the second hold control means even in a situation where neither the special game is being executed nor the specific game state is set. Gaming machine.

Images